This is a modern-English version of Outlines of Educational Doctrine, originally written by Herbart, Johann Friedrich.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
Transcriber’s Notes
Transcription Notes
This e-text contains a translation of Herbart’s Umriss pädagogischer Vorlesungen, the main text of which is divided into numbered paragraphs. De Garmo’s annotations are represented here as indented text in the same font size as the main text. Herbart’s own annotations are also indented and have the run-in heading “Note” and are in smaller font.
This e-text includes a translation of Herbart’s Umriss pädagogischer Vorlesungen, which is divided into numbered paragraphs. De Garmo’s annotations are shown as indented text in the same font size as the main text. Herbart’s own annotations are also indented and have the heading “Note” in a smaller font.
OUTLINES OF EDUCATIONAL
DOCTRINE
EDUCATIONAL OUTLINES
DOCTRINE

OUTLINES OF EDUCATIONAL
DOCTRINE
BY
BY
TRANSLATED BY
TRANSLATED BY
ALEXIS F. LANGE, Ph.D.
ALEXIS F. LANGE, Ph.D.
Associate Professor of English and Scandinavian Philology, and
Dean of the Faculty of the College of Letters,
University of California
Associate Professor of English and Scandinavian Studies, and
Dean of the College of Letters,
University of California
ANNOTATED BY
ANNOTATED BY
CHARLES DE GARMO, Ph.D.
CHARLES DE GARMO, Ph.D.
Professor of the Science and Art of Education,
Cornell University
Professor of Education Science and Art,
Cornell University
New York
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
LONDON: MACMILLAN & CO., Ltd.
1904
NYC
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
LONDON: MACMILLAN & CO., Ltd.
1904
All rights reserved
All rights reserved.
Copyright, 1901,
By THE MACMILLAN COMPANY.
Copyright, 1901, By THE MACMILLAN COMPANY.
Set up and electrotyped. Published February, 1901. Reprinted June, 1904.
Set up and electrotyped. Published February 1901. Reprinted June 1904.
Norwood Press
J. S. Cushing & Co.—Berwick & Smith Co.
Norwood, Mass., U.S.A.
Norwood Press
J. S. Cushing & Co.—Berwick & Smith Co.
Norwood, MA, USA
PREFACE
The reasons for translating and annotating Herbart’s “Outlines” are, first, to present to the English-speaking public Herbart’s latest, and also his most complete, work on education; and, second, to note to some extent at least the advances made in educational thought since Herbart laid down his pen.
The reasons for translating and annotating Herbart’s “Outlines” are, first, to present to the English-speaking audience Herbart’s latest and most comprehensive work on education; and, second, to acknowledge, at least to some extent, the progress made in educational thought since Herbart finished writing.
Herbart’s educational writings are distinguished by two marked characteristics: 1, their helpfulness in actual teaching; and 2, their systematic completeness. The thoughtful reader can see the bearing of each part upon all the others; the purposes of education are so completely correlated with the means, that, whether the topic under discussion be apperception or interest or methods of teaching or school government or moral training or the presentation of a particular study, the reader is never at a loss to see the relation of this part to the whole.
Herbart's educational writings stand out for two key features: 1, their practicality in real teaching situations; and 2, their organized thoroughness. A reflective reader can understand how each section connects to the others; the goals of education are so closely linked with the methods that, whether the topic is about apperception, interest, teaching methods, school management, moral education, or how to present a specific subject, the reader can always see how this part relates to the overall picture.
The eminent practicability of Herbart’s thought depends upon his psychological point of view, which is always that of concrete experience. The moment one tries to apply rational psychology to actual teaching, one begins to rise into the clouds, to become vague[vi] or, at least, general. The reason for this is that rational psychology deals with unchangeable presuppositions of mind. We may conform our work to these standards, but we cannot modify them, any more than we can a law of nature. But when we have to deal with an apperceiving content, we feel at home, for over this we have some control. We can build up moral maxims, we can establish permanent interests, we can reveal the unfolding of whole developments of thought and effort, we can fix the time order of studies and parts of studies; in short, we can apply our pedagogical insight with some degree of success to actual school problems. Though empirical psychology has in the last fifty years had as rapid a development as any other department of science, it has never departed essentially from the direction fixed by Herbart. New methods have indeed been applied, but the leading motive has remained empirical; it has had small tendency to drift toward rational psychology. This fact makes Herbart’s educational thought, so far as psychological bearing is concerned, seem as fresh and modern as when it was first recorded.
The practical value of Herbart’s ideas relies on his psychological perspective, which is always based on concrete experience. As soon as you try to apply rational psychology to real teaching, you start to lose clarity and become vague[vi] or, at the very least, too general. The reason for this is that rational psychology deals with unchanging assumptions about the mind. We can align our work with these standards, but we can't change them, just like we can’t change a law of nature. However, when dealing with content that we can perceive, we feel more in control because we can manage it. We can create moral principles, establish lasting interests, uncover the development of thoughts and efforts, and organize the timing of studies and parts of studies; in short, we can use our teaching insights effectively to address real school issues. Although empirical psychology has developed rapidly over the past fifty years, it has never strayed significantly from the path established by Herbart. New methods have indeed been implemented, but the main focus has remained empirical, with little tendency to shift towards rational psychology. This fact makes Herbart’s educational ideas, in terms of their psychological relevance, feel as fresh and modern as when they were first introduced.
In one important respect, however, Herbart’s system needs modernizing. It is in relating education to conditions of society as it now exists. German society has never been that of English-speaking countries; much less does German society of the early part of the nineteenth century correspond to Anglo-Saxon society at[vii] the beginning of the twentieth. Indeed, even had there been correspondence before, there would be divergence now. It is one of the main purposes of the annotation, therefore, to point out the social implications of various parts of the “Outlines.”
In one important way, however, Herbart’s system needs updating. It's about connecting education to the current state of society. German society has never been like that of English-speaking countries; even less so does German society from the early nineteenth century match Anglo-Saxon society at[vii] the start of the twentieth century. In fact, even if there had been a similarity before, there's a clear difference now. One of the main goals of the annotations, therefore, is to highlight the social implications of various parts of the “Outlines.”
The annotation has made no attempt to improve Herbart’s prophetic vision concerning many important matters, or to elucidate self-evident propositions, or to supplement observations already complete, true, and apt.
The annotation has not tried to enhance Herbart’s insightful predictions about many important issues, nor to clarify obvious statements, nor to add to observations that are already complete, accurate, and relevant.
Especial attention is called to the exactness and illuminating character of Herbart’s diagnosis of mental weaknesses and disorders in children, together with his suggestions as to proper treatment. Students of child-study, moreover, will find in this work not only encouragement in their work, but also assistance in determining what is worth studying in the child. The reader is constantly reminded of the fact that, when written by a master, no book is newer than an old one.
Special attention is drawn to the accuracy and insightful nature of Herbart's analysis of mental weaknesses and disorders in children, along with his recommendations for proper treatment. Students of child development will find in this work not only motivation for their studies but also help in figuring out what is important to focus on when studying a child. The reader is consistently reminded that when crafted by a master, no book is more current than an old one.
CONTENTS
PAGE
PAGE
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1
PART I
PART I
THE DOUBLE BASIS OF PEDAGOGICS
THE TWO FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
PART II
PART 2
OUTLINES OF GENERAL PEDAGOGICS
General Pedagogy Outlines
SECTION I. GOVERNMENT OF CHILDREN
SECTION I. CHILDREN'S GOVERNANCE
SECTION II. INSTRUCTION
SECTION II. GUIDELINES
- The Relation of Instruction to Government and Training 39
- The Aim of Instruction 44
- The Conditions of Many-sidedness 51
- The Conditions Determining Interest 60
- The Main Kinds of Interest 76
- The Material of Instruction from Different Points of View 93
- The Process of Instruction 105
- Remarks on the Plan of Instruction as a Whole 134
SECTION III. TRAINING
SECTION III. TRAINING
- The Relation of Training to Government and to Instruction 140
- The Aim of Training 143
- Differentiation of Character 146
- Differentiation of Morality 151
- Helps in Training 154
- General Method of Training 160
SECTION IV. SYNOPSIS OF GENERAL PEDAGOGICS FROM THE POINT OF VIEW OF AGE
SECTION IV. OVERVIEW OF GENERAL PEDAGOGICS FROM THE AGE PERSPECTIVE
- The First Three Years 198
- The Ages from Four to Eight 201
- Boyhood 209
- Youth 216
PART III
PART III
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS OF PEDAGOGICS
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS OF PEDAGOGY
SECTION I. REMARKS ON THE TEACHINGS OF PARTICULAR BRANCHES OF STUDY
SECTION I. COMMENTS ON THE TEACHINGS OF SPECIFIC FIELDS OF STUDY
- Religion 219
- History 223
- Mathematics and Nature Study 241
- Geography 263
- The Mother-tongue 269
- Greek and Latin 275
- Further Specification of Didactics 289
SECTION II. THE FAULTS OF PUPILS AND THEIR TREATMENT
SECTION II. STUDENT MISTAKES AND HOW TO HANDLE THEM
- General Differentiation 292
- The Sources of Moral Weakness 301
- The Effects of Training 308
- Special Faults 312
SECTION III. REMARKS ON THE ORGANIZATION OF EDUCATION
SECTION III. COMMENTS ON THE STRUCTURE OF EDUCATION
- Home Education 317
- Concerning Schools 321
1. The plasticity, or educability, of the pupil is the fundamental postulate of pedagogics.
1. The adaptability, or ability to learn, of the student is the core principle of education.
The concept plasticity, or capacity for being moulded, extends far beyond the confines of pedagogics. It takes in even the primary components of matter. It has been traced as far as the elementary substances entering into the chemical changes of organic bodies. Signs of plasticity of will are found in the souls of the higher animals. Only man, however, exhibits plasticity of will in the direction of moral conduct.
The idea of plasticity, or the ability to be shaped, goes way beyond just teaching. It even includes the basic building blocks of matter. It's been observed all the way down to the essential substances involved in the chemical changes of living things. Evidence of will's plasticity can be seen in the minds of higher animals. However, only humans show this will's plasticity when it comes to moral behavior.
Had not the youthful mind the capacity to receive culture, education would be impossible. This educability of the young has rarely if ever been questioned in actual practice. Much philosophical strife, however, has raged about the various conceptions of WILL, and the consequent possibility of teaching virtue, or of training the moral character. The extremes have been fatalism, or the determination of conduct by means of forces lying entirely outside the power of the individual; and absolute caprice of will, or the determination of conduct[2] entirely by the individual himself without regard to outside influences. The doctrine of fatalism makes moral education mechanical; that of volitional caprice makes it futile. Educational theory must therefore assume a middle ground, in which the self-activity of the individual and the moulding influence of education are both recognized.
If the young mind didn’t have the ability to absorb culture, education wouldn’t be possible. This ability to learn in youth is rarely, if ever, questioned in practice. However, there has been much philosophical debate about the different ideas of WILL, and whether it’s possible to teach virtue or shape moral character. The extremes have been fatalism, which suggests that behavior is determined entirely by forces beyond an individual’s control, and absolute caprice of will, which argues that behavior is entirely determined by the individual without considering outside influences. The fatalistic view makes moral education mechanical, while the capricious view renders it pointless. Therefore, educational theory must find a middle ground that acknowledges both the individual’s self-activity and the influential role of education.
2. Pedagogics as a science is based on ethics and psychology. The former points out the goal of education; the latter the way, the means, and the obstacles.
2. Teaching as a science is grounded in ethics and psychology. The former highlights the purpose of education; the latter focuses on the methods, resources, and challenges.
This relationship involves the dependence of pedagogics on experience, inasmuch as ethics includes application to experience, while psychology has its starting-point, not in metaphysics alone, but in experience correctly interpreted by metaphysics. But an exclusively empirical knowledge of man will not suffice for pedagogics. It is the less adequate in any age the greater the instability of morals, customs, and opinions; for, as the new gains on the old, generalizations from former observations cease to hold true.
This relationship shows how much education relies on experience, as ethics requires applying it to real-life situations, while psychology begins not just with metaphysics, but also with experience understood through metaphysics. However, purely empirical knowledge of humans isn't enough for education. Its inadequacy increases in times when morals, customs, and opinions are unstable because as new ideas replace old ones, the lessons learned from past observations become less valid.
In order to accept the statement that ethics points out the goal of education, we must conceive of ethics in a broad way. At some periods in the history of the world, the development of purely individual, or subjective, character would have been thought a worthy and adequate conception of the final purpose of education. Other-worldliness was the ruling ideal. At present, however, we regard that man as most fit for the world to come who best performs all his functions in the world that now is. Ethics must therefore be conceived to embrace an estimation of the value of a man’s conduct in every department of[3] life. Not only must it estimate the worth of pious feeling, but it must embrace a consideration of every action in its relation to the actor’s social, economic, and political environment. A man having a praiseworthy character must be a good citizen of state, nation, and community; he must be public-spirited, law-abiding, given to honest dealing. Every child should be trained to be a useful member of civilization as it now exists. Piety alone is insufficient; it must be accompanied by honesty, industry, patriotism, public spirit. Non-social, or purely individualistic, conceptions of character as the goal of education must give way to those social ideals through which alone the highest welfare of both individual and community are to be conserved. Without such conceptions an industrial state, such as now exists, becomes a human jungle in which men enter upon a fiercer struggle than do the beasts of the real jungle. Social coöperation is essential when we wish to transform a struggle of mutual destruction into one of mutual helpfulness.
To accept the idea that ethics defines the purpose of education, we need to look at ethics in a broad sense. At certain times in history, developing individual or subjective character was seen as a worthy and adequate understanding of the ultimate goal of education. The focus was on other-worldliness. However, today we see that the person best suited for the future is the one who effectively fulfills all their roles in the present world. Therefore, we must view ethics as encompassing an evaluation of a person's actions in every aspect of life. It should not only assess the value of religious feelings but also consider each action in relation to the individual's social, economic, and political environment. A person with a commendable character must also be a good citizen of the state, nation, and community; they should be public-spirited, law-abiding, and honest. Every child should be educated to be a valuable member of contemporary civilization. Piety alone is not enough; it must be paired with honesty, hard work, patriotism, and public spirit. Individualistic ideas about character as the ultimate goal of education must be replaced with social ideals that promote the highest welfare for both individuals and the community. Without these ideas, an industrial society like the one we have now transforms into a human jungle, where people engage in a fiercer struggle than the animals do in the actual jungle. Social cooperation is essential if we want to change a conflict of mutual destruction into one of mutual support.
3. Philosophical systems, involving either fatalism or its opposite, pure caprice of will, are logically shut out from pedagogics, because the notion of plasticity, implying as it does a transition from the indeterminate to the determinate, cannot by such systems be brought in without inconsistency.
3. Philosophical systems that either focus on fate or are purely based on random willpower are logically excluded from education, because the idea of flexibility, which suggests a shift from the vague to the specific, can't be incorporated by these systems without creating contradictions.
Common sense overcomes the logical difficulties of even the worst systems. Herbart’s remark has, therefore, no practical significance. The philosophy of Spinoza might easily be described by an opponent as “fatalistic,” since it leaves no room for special providences in the physical universe; yet Professor Paulsen, who holds substantially to Spinoza’s view, is one of[4] the most eminent promoters of the theory of education in the university of Berlin. Herbart thought Kant’s doctrine of transcendental will one of absolute volitional caprice, yet the followers of Kant have been among the most energetic promoters of mental and moral training. Herbart thinks he sees in this remark a chance to put his philosophical opponents out of court, to the benefit of his own system. If one philosopher develops a system of “fatalism” and another one of “absolute free will,” the one may be charged with making education impossible and the other with making it futile. In either case, since we know that education is neither impossible nor futile, the presumption is that both systems are defective. This paragraph and others like it are mere indirect methods of defending Herbart’s system of philosophy: they have no real significance for the theory of education itself.
Common sense manages to navigate the logical challenges of even the worst systems. Herbart’s comment, therefore, has no real practical meaning. An opponent might easily label Spinoza’s philosophy as “fatalistic,” since it doesn’t allow for any special interventions in the physical world; yet Professor Paulsen, who largely agrees with Spinoza, is one of[4] the leading advocates for education theory at the University of Berlin. Herbart believed Kant’s idea of a transcendental will was merely a form of absolute whim, yet Kant’s followers have been some of the most active supporters of mental and moral education. Herbart thinks he can use this point to discredit his philosophical rivals for the benefit of his own system. If one philosopher creates a “fatalistic” system and another a system of “absolute free will,” the first may be accused of making education impossible and the second of making it pointless. In either case, since we know education is neither impossible nor pointless, it suggests that both systems have shortcomings. This paragraph and others like it are simply indirect ways of defending Herbart’s philosophy; they don’t hold any real importance for the theory of education itself.
4. On the other hand, the assumption of unlimited plasticity is equally inadmissible; it is for psychology to guard against this error. The educability of the child is, to begin with, limited by his individuality. Then, too, the possibility of determining and moulding him at will through education is lessened by time and circumstances. Lastly, the established character of the adult develops by an inner process which in time passes beyond the reach of the educator.
4. On the other hand, the idea that people can change endlessly is equally unacceptable; it's up to psychology to protect against this mistake. A child's ability to learn is, first of all, limited by their individuality. Moreover, the chance of being able to shape and control them through education is reduced by time and circumstances. Finally, an adult's established character evolves through an internal process that eventually goes beyond the educator's influence.
5. Education seems thus to find a barrier, first, in the order of nature, and later in the pupil’s own will. The difficulty is indeed a real one, if the limitations of education are overlooked: hence an apparent confirmation of fatalism as well as of the doctrine of absolute free will.
5. Education appears to hit a wall, initially due to the laws of nature, and later because of the student’s own choices. The challenge is genuinely significant if we ignore the limits of education: thus, it seems to support both the idea of fatalism and the belief in total free will.
Modern scientific evolutionary study of anthropology and history tends to confirm the hasty thinker in the idea that the circumstances of the environment completely determine the character and destiny of men, since their debt to the moulding influences of society and physical surroundings becomes more and more apparent; yet however powerful the environment may prove to be in fixing the direction of mental growth in the race, it cannot rightly be conceived as creating the growing forces. All the sunshine and warmth in the world will not cause a pebble to sprout; so no external influences whatever can develop mind where there is none to develop. The exigencies of Herbart’s metaphysics drove him into a crusade against Kant’s doctrine of innate freedom, or transcendental will; all the freedom that Herbart would admit was that psychological freedom which is acquired through instruction and training. The quarrel belongs to eighteenth-century metaphysics, not to modern psychology, nor to education; for however potentially free an infant may be, nobody thinks of making it responsible, except so far as growing experience gives it insight and volitional strength.
Modern scientific studies in anthropology and history tend to support the hasty thinker’s belief that the environment completely shapes a person’s character and fate, as their reliance on societal and physical influences becomes increasingly clear. However powerful the environment may be in directing mental development in humanity, it cannot truly be seen as the creator of those developing forces. No amount of sunlight and warmth will make a pebble grow; similarly, no external influences can cultivate a mind where none exists. Herbart’s metaphysics pushed him to challenge Kant’s idea of innate freedom or transcendental will; the only kind of freedom Herbart accepted was the psychological freedom gained through education and training. This debate belongs to eighteenth-century metaphysics, not to modern psychology or education; because no matter how potentially free a baby might be, no one considers holding it responsible until growing experiences provide it with insight and willpower.
6. The power of education must be neither over- nor under-estimated. The educator should, indeed, try to see how much may be done; but he must always expect that the outcome will warn him to confine his attempts within reasonable bounds. In order not to neglect anything essential, he needs to keep in view the practical bearings of the whole theory of ideas; in order to understand and interpret correctly the data furnished by observation of the child, the teacher must make constant use of psychology.
6. The impact of education shouldn’t be over- or under-rated. Educators should aim to see how much can be achieved; however, they need to remember that the results will guide them to keep their efforts within sensible limits. To ensure that nothing important is overlooked, they must consider the practical aspects of the entire theory of ideas. To correctly understand and interpret the information gathered from observing the child, teachers must consistently apply psychology.
7. In scientific study concepts are separated which in practice must always be kept united. The work of education is continuous. With an eye to every consideration at once, the educator must always endeavor to connect what is to come with what has gone before. Hence a mode of treatment which, following the several periods of school life, simply enumerates the things to be done in sequence, is inadequate in a work on pedagogics. In an appendix this method will serve to facilitate a bird’s-eye view; the discussion of general principles, arranged according to fundamental ideas, must needs precede. But our very first task will necessarily consist in dealing, at least briefly, with the ethical and the psychological basis of pedagogics.
7. In scientific study, concepts are separated that should always remain connected in practice. The work of education is ongoing. Considering everything at once, educators must constantly strive to link new material with what has previously been learned. Therefore, an approach that simply lists the tasks to be done in order, following the various stages of school life, is insufficient for a work on pedagogy. This method may be useful in an appendix for a quick overview; however, the discussion of general principles, organized around fundamental ideas, must come first. Our initial task will also involve addressing, at least briefly, the ethical and psychological foundations of pedagogy.
8. The term virtue expresses the whole purpose of education. Virtue is the idea of inner freedom which has developed into an abiding actuality in an individual. Whence, as inner freedom is a relation between insight and volition, a double task is at once set before the teacher. It becomes his business to make actual each of these factors separately, in order that later a permanent relationship may result.
8. The term virtue represents the main goal of education. Virtue is the concept of inner freedom that has become a lasting reality within a person. Therefore, since inner freedom involves a connection between understanding and will, the teacher faces a dual challenge. It is their job to develop each of these aspects separately so that eventually a lasting relationship can be established.
Insight is conceived as the perception of what is right or wrong. This perception is founded on the spontaneous, or intuitive, feeling that arises in the mind when certain elementary will-relations are presented to the intelligence. The unperverted mind has a natural antipathy to strife, malevolence, injustice, selfishness; it has a corresponding approval of harmony, good-will, justice, benevolence. These feelings arise, naturally, only when the appropriate ideas are present. Insight, therefore, is a state of feeling or disposition arising from knowledge, or ideas.
Insight is understood as the ability to recognize what is right and what is wrong. This recognition is based on the spontaneous or intuitive feelings that come up in the mind when certain basic relationships of will are presented to our understanding. An untainted mind naturally dislikes conflict, malice, injustice, and selfishness; it similarly approves of harmony, goodwill, justice, and kindness. These feelings naturally arise only when the relevant ideas are present. Therefore, insight is a state of feeling or attitude that comes from knowledge or ideas.
When volition has come into permanent accord with educated[8] insight, virtue has been attained. Conscience approves every virtuous act; it disapproves every deviation from virtue. Inner freedom, therefore, is marked by approving conscience; lack of it, by accusing conscience. The development of virtuous character is not so easy, however, as might appear from these simple statements, for virtue has a shifting, not to say a developing character. Elementary as the fundamental ethical ideas may be when presented in the home or in the kindergarten, they are not elementary when met with in modern civilization. At times virtue has been of a military character, as in Sparta and Rome; at other times it has been ecclesiastical, as in the Middle Ages. At the present time, in addition to all that it has ever been from a purely Christian character, it is civil, social, industrial. Virtue in a modern city has a content quite different from that in a pioneer mining camp. Furthermore, virtue is uneven in its development. The race has, for instance, been trained long and hard to respect unprotected property, so that we may fairly say such respect has become instinctive; yet when unprotected property comes into new relations to the individual, as in the case of borrowed books, we may find only a rudimentary conscience. What scholar is not a sufferer from this form of unripe virtue?
When willpower has aligned permanently with educated[8] insight, we achieve virtue. Conscience approves every virtuous action and disapproves every deviation from it. Inner freedom is defined by a approving conscience; its absence is marked by an accusing conscience. However, developing virtuous character is not as simple as it might seem from these straightforward statements, since virtue is fluid and evolves. While fundamental ethical concepts might seem basic in the home or preschool, they aren't when faced with modern society. At times, virtue has taken on a military form, like in Sparta and Rome; at other times, it has been religious, as during the Middle Ages. Currently, in addition to its enduring Christian elements, it encompasses civil, social, and industrial aspects. Virtue in a modern city looks very different than it does in a pioneer mining camp. Moreover, virtue develops unevenly. Humanity has been trained deeply to respect unprotected property, so we can reasonably say that such respect is instinctive; yet when unprotected property enters new relationships with individuals, like with borrowed books, we often find only a basic sense of conscience. What scholar hasn't struggled with this underdeveloped sense of virtue?
9. But even here at the outset we need to bear in mind the identity of morality with the effort put forth to realize the permanent actuality of the harmony between insight and volition. To induce the pupil to make this effort is a difficult achievement; at all events, it becomes possible only when the twofold training mentioned above is well under way. It is easy enough, by a study of the example of others, to cultivate theoretical[9] acumen; the moral application to the pupil himself, however, can be made, with hope of success, only in so far as his inclinations and habits have taken a direction in keeping with his insight. If such is not the case, there is danger lest the pupil, after all, knowingly subordinate his correct theoretical judgment to mere prudence. It is thus that evil in the strict sense originates.
9. But even at the beginning, we need to keep in mind that morality is tied to the effort to achieve a lasting harmony between understanding and willpower. Getting the student to make this effort is a challenging task; it becomes possible only when the dual training mentioned earlier is well underway. It's fairly easy to develop theoretical insight by studying others' examples; however, applying this morally to the student can only succeed if their inclinations and habits align with their understanding. If this isn't the case, there's a risk that the student might, knowingly or not, prioritize practical considerations over their accurate theoretical judgment. This is how true evil comes into being.
It is helpful to give the pupil abundant opportunity to pass judgment upon the moral quality of actions not his own. The best opportunities are at first the most impersonal ones, for where the child himself is immediately concerned, the quality of his judgment may be impaired by intense personal feelings, such as fear of blame or punishment. Literature furnishes the earliest and most copious examples; later, history may be helpful, though there is great danger of taking partial or mistaken views as to the moral quality of historical deeds. A selection of literature is an artistic whole. All the relations can be easily perceived, but any given historical event is likely to be a small section of a whole too vast for the youthful mind to comprehend. It is for this reason that caution is needed when passing judgment upon historical facts.
It’s beneficial to give students plenty of chances to evaluate the moral quality of actions that aren't their own. The best opportunities at first are the most impersonal ones, because when the child is personally involved, their judgment can be influenced by strong emotions like fear of blame or punishment. Literature provides the earliest and most abundant examples; later on, history can also be useful, although there's a significant risk of adopting biased or incorrect views about the moral quality of historical events. A collection of literature forms a cohesive whole. All the connections can be easily recognized, but any single historical event is likely to be just a small part of a much larger context that's too complex for a young mind to fully grasp. This is why caution is necessary when evaluating historical facts.
To encourage the child to pass judgment in these impersonal cases is to sharpen his natural perceptions of right and wrong, and to influence his disposition favorably. One who has been led to condemn cruelty to animals in this way is likely to be more thoughtful himself, and less disposed wantonly to inflict pain. But every resource of authority and persuasion, as well as appeal to sensibility and conscience, must be employed to make virtuous action habitual, and to prevent the generation of evil.
To get the child to judge these detached situations helps sharpen their natural sense of right and wrong, positively shaping their character. A child who learns to condemn cruelty to animals this way is likely to be more considerate and less likely to inflict pain for no reason. However, all forms of authority and persuasion, along with appeals to feelings and conscience, must be used to make virtuous behavior a habit and to stop the development of evil.
10. Of the remaining practical or ethical concepts, the idea of perfection points to health of body and mind; it implies a high regard for both, and their systematic cultivation.
10. Among the remaining practical or ethical ideas, the concept of perfection refers to the well-being of both body and mind; it suggests a strong appreciation for both, along with their intentional development.
Perfection here means completeness of efficiency, rather than acquisition of holiness. An efficient will is strong, vigorous, decided; it is self-consistent in the pursuit of leading purposes, not vacillating or incoherent. Still, the idea of moral perfection is not a remote one, for, in order to be thoroughly efficient, a will must be in substantial accord with the ethical order of a rational society. All its deviations from established law and custom will be for their improvement, not for the destruction of what is good in them.
Perfection in this context means completeness of efficiency, rather than the attainment of holiness. An efficient will is strong, energetic, and resolute; it is consistent in pursuing its main goals, without wavering or being inconsistent. However, the concept of moral perfection isn't distant, because, to be fully efficient, a will must align closely with the ethical standards of a rational society. Any deviations from established laws and customs will be aimed at improving them, not destroying the good aspects of those norms.
11. The idea of good-will counsels the educator to ward off temptation to ill-will as long as such temptation might prove dangerous. It is essential, on the other hand, to imbue the pupil with a feeling of respect for good-will.
11. The concept of good-will encourages the educator to resist the temptation of negativity as long as that temptation could be harmful. On the flip side, it's important to instill in the student a sense of respect for good-will.
Good-will is one of the three concrete virtues lying at the basis of social order. It is both passive, as in laissez faire attitudes of mind, and active as in thoroughgoing civic, business, and social coöperation. School training must seek to impress the mind with respect for the active rather than the passive type of good-will. So, too, must it ward off the dangers both of passive and active ill-will, as manifested, in covetousness, malice, malevolence, envy, treachery, stinginess, cruelty, hard-heartedness. How these ends may be attained, will be considered later.
Goodwill is one of the three key virtues that form the foundation of social order. It can be both passive, like a laissez faire mindset, and active, as seen in true civic, business, and community cooperation. Education should focus on instilling respect for the active form of goodwill rather than the passive one. Additionally, it should prevent the risks associated with both passive and active ill will, which can show up as greed, spite, cruelty, envy, betrayal, stinginess, and a lack of compassion. How we can achieve these goals will be discussed later.
No idea appeals more strongly to the unperverted youthful mind than that of justice or fair play; even the gentlest natures become indignant at manifestations of injustice. The basis of the idea is, in the thought of our author, our natural displeasure in contention over that which, in the nature of the case, only one person can have. Primarily, it concerns property rights, but secondarily it may extend to other relations in which two or more wills are at issue. Justice in the acquisition, possession, and disposition of wealth is the theme of the greater part of every judicial system. The idea of justice is the second of the three concrete moral virtues necessary for civilized society.
No idea resonates more with the innocent young mind than the concept of justice or fair play; even the kindest people feel outraged by acts of injustice. According to our author, this stems from our natural annoyance at conflicts over something that, by its very nature, can only belong to one person. At its core, it deals with property rights, but it can also apply to other situations where multiple people's desires are at stake. Justice regarding the acquisition, ownership, and distribution of wealth is the focus of most legal systems. The idea of justice is the second of three essential moral virtues needed for a civilized society.
13. The idea of equity is especially involved in cases where the pupil has merited punishment as requital for the intentional infliction of pain. Here the degree of punishment must be carefully ascertained and acknowledged as just.
13. The concept of fairness is especially relevant in situations where the student deserves punishment for deliberately causing harm. In these cases, the level of punishment must be carefully determined and recognized as fair.
The third concrete moral idea is that of equity, or requital. It arises when existing will-relations are altered either for good or bad. The natural demand is that the requital shall be adequate to the deed. Lack of requital for good deeds we call ingratitude, one of the most hateful of human failings. In savagery and barbarism private vengeance is the normal method of requiting injuries. Remnants of this system still[12] exist in the duel, and in the fierce vendettas of some sparsely settled regions. Civilization demands that requital for evil deeds shall be remanded to the executors of established law. Only in this way is society saved from destructive broils. In this respect, as in so many others, the school is the miniature of the institutional world. The teacher is, to a considerable extent, lawgiver, judge, and executive. Not a small part of his moral influence upon his pupils depends upon the justice of his requitals for violated law. Good-will, justice or rights, and requital are the three fundamental concrete moral ideas upon which sound character, both individual and national, is based. The remaining two are that of inner freedom and that of efficiency. Though formal in character, i.e., devoid of positive content, they are equally important with the more concrete conceptions.
The third key moral concept is equity, or requital. It comes into play when existing relationships change, whether for better or worse. The natural expectation is that the requital should match the action. When good deeds go unrewarded, we call it ingratitude, which is one of the most detestable human flaws. In primitive and savage cultures, personal revenge is the usual way to repay wrongs. Traces of this practice still[12] exist in dueling and the intense feuds in some sparsely populated areas. Civilization demands that punishment for wrongdoing is handled by the legal authorities. This is the only way to protect society from destructive conflicts. In this regard, like many others, the school mirrors the broader institutional world. The teacher serves, to a large extent, as the lawgiver, judge, and enforcer. A significant part of their moral influence on students depends on how fairly they respond to breaches of rules. Goodwill, justice or rights, and requital are the three fundamental moral concepts that underpin sound character, both individually and nationally. The other two concepts are inner freedom and efficiency. While they may be more abstract and lack direct content, they are equally important as the more concrete ideas.
14. Where a number of pupils are assembled there arises, naturally, on a small scale, a system of laws and rewards. This system, and the demands which in the world at large spring from the same ideas, must be brought into accord.
14. When a group of students gathers, a minor system of rules and rewards naturally forms. This system, along with the expectations that arise in the larger world from similar ideas, needs to be aligned.
15. The concept of an administrative system has great significance for pedagogics, since every pupil, whatever his rank or social status, must be trained for coöperation in the social whole to fit him for usefulness. This requirement may assume very many different forms.
15. The idea of an administrative system is really important for education, because every student, no matter their background or social standing, needs to be prepared for working together in society to be useful. This need can take on many different shapes.
16. Of the system of civilization only the aspect of general culture, not that of special training, must be emphasized at this point.
16. At this point, we should focus only on the general culture aspect of civilization, not on specialized training.
17. For the business of education, the idea of perfection, while it does not rise into excessive prominence, stands out above all others on account of its uninterrupted application. The teacher discovers in the as yet undeveloped human being a force which requires his incessant attention to intensify, to direct, and to concentrate.
17. In the field of education, the concept of perfection may not be the most prominent, but it stands out because of its constant relevance. The teacher sees in the still-developing student a potential that demands their ongoing attention to nurture, guide, and focus.
18. The constant presence of the idea of perfection easily introduces a false feature into moral education in the strict sense. The pupil may get an erroneous impression as to the relative importance of the lessons, practice, and performance demanded of him, and so be betrayed into the belief that he is essentially perfect when these demands are satisfied.
18. The constant focus on the idea of perfection can easily create a misleading element in moral education in a strict sense. The student might get a wrong impression about how important the lessons, practice, and performance expected of them are, leading them to mistakenly believe they are fundamentally perfect when they meet these expectations.
19. For this reason alone, if others were wanting, it is necessary to combine moral education proper, which in everyday life lays stress continually on correct self-determination, with religious training. The notion that something really worthy has been achieved needs to be tempered by humility. Conversely, religious education has need of the moral also to forestall cant and hypocrisy, which are only too apt to appear where morality has not already secured a firm foothold through earnest self-questioning and self-criticism with a view to improvement. Finally, inasmuch as moral training must be put off until after insight and right habits have been acquired, religious education, too, should not be begun too early; nor should it be needlessly delayed.
19. For this reason alone, even if others are lacking, it's important to merge proper moral education, which emphasizes the importance of making the right choices in everyday life, with religious training. The idea that something truly significant has been accomplished should be balanced with humility. On the other hand, religious education needs moral teachings too, to prevent empty gestures and hypocrisy, which often arise where a solid moral foundation hasn't been established through genuine self-reflection and self-improvement. Lastly, since moral training should come after gaining insight and developing good habits, religious education shouldn't start too soon; however, it also shouldn't be unnecessarily postponed.
It is well known what obstacles confront the American teacher who desires to give a religious basis to moral character. For a full discussion of the subject viewed from numerous standpoints, the reader is referred to “Principles of Religious Education,” Longmans, Green & Co., New York, 1900. This book is a series of lectures by prominent school men and others.
It’s widely recognized what challenges American teachers face when they want to provide a religious foundation for moral character. For a comprehensive discussion of the topic from various perspectives, readers can check out “Principles of Religious Education,” Longmans, Green & Co., New York, 1900. This book is a collection of lectures by notable educators and others.
CHAPTER II
The Psychological Foundation
20. It is an error, indeed, to look upon the human soul as an aggregate of all sorts of faculties; but this error only becomes worse when, as is usually done, the statement is added that faculties are after all at bottom one and the same active principle. The traditional terms should rather be employed to distinguish mental phenomena that present themselves to experience as successively predominant. In this way we get the leading features of soul-life, which reminds us sufficiently of psychology for our immediate purpose.
20. It's a mistake to view the human soul as just a collection of different abilities; but this mistake gets worse when, as is often said, people claim that these abilities are ultimately just one active principle. Instead, we should stick to traditional terms to differentiate the mental phenomena that appear to us as dominant over time. By doing this, we get the main aspects of the soul's life, which is relevant enough to psychology for our current needs.
21. The stage of predominant sense-activity is followed by that of memory in the sense of exact reproduction of series of percepts previously formed. Traces of higher activities are as yet absent. The only thing to be noted is that the series, unless rendered long by frequent repetition, are generally short; necessarily so, since while forming they are exposed to continual disturbances caused by great sensitiveness to new impressions.
21. The stage of main sensory experience is followed by memory, which involves accurately recalling sequences of previous perceptions. There are no signs of more complex activities yet. It’s important to note that these sequences, unless extended through frequent repetition, are usually short; this is necessary because, while they are forming, they are constantly disrupted by a strong sensitivity to new impressions.
22. Even very young children betray at play and in speech that form of self-activity ascribed to imagination.
22. Even very young children show in their play and speech a type of self-driven activity that's connected to imagination.
The most insignificant toys, provided they are movable, occasion changes and combinations of percepts, attended even with strong emotion, that astonish the mature observer, and perhaps excite anxiety lest some of these motley fancies should become fixed ideas. No evil after effects are to be feared, however, so long as the emotional excitement does not threaten health, and passes over quickly. A strong play impulse is, on the contrary, a promising sign, especially when it manifests itself energetically, though late, in weak children.
The most trivial toys, as long as they're movable, can lead to changes and mixes of perceptions that amaze adults and might even cause concern that some of these wild ideas could become permanent thoughts. Fortunately, there's no need to worry about negative side effects, as long as the emotional excitement doesn't endanger health and fades quickly. A strong urge to play is actually a good sign, especially when it shows up with enthusiasm, even if late, in weak children.
23. Soon there follows a time when the observation of external objects prompts the child to ask innumerable questions. Here that activity which is called power of judgment begins to stir in conjunction with reasoning. The child now strives to subsume what is new under conceptions already in his mind, and to affix their symbols, the familiar words. He is still far, withal, from being able to follow an abstract train of thought, to employ periodic sentences, and to conduct himself rationally throughout. The slightest occasions will prove him a child still.
23. Before long, there comes a time when the child’s observations of the world lead to countless questions. This is when what we call the power of judgment starts to awaken alongside reasoning. The child now attempts to fit new experiences into existing ideas and to use familiar words as symbols. However, he is still far from being able to think abstractly, use complex sentences, or act completely rationally. Even the smallest situations will show that he is still very much a child.
25. On the other hand, the ethical judgment as a rule shows itself at first very seldom and transiently—a foreshadowing of the difficulty of securing for it later, in spite of obstinacy and selfishness, the function of control, on which control depend both morality and the higher sense of art.
25. On the other hand, ethical judgment usually appears infrequently and fleetingly at first—a hint at the challenge of later establishing it as a control mechanism, despite stubbornness and self-interest, which is essential for both morality and a deeper appreciation of art.
26. The boy asks fewer questions, but tries all the more to handle and shape things. He is gaining knowledge by himself and acquiring dexterity. Gradually his respect for his elders increases; he fears their censure and stands in awe of their superiority. At the same time he attaches himself more closely to other boys of the same age. From now on it becomes more difficult to observe him. The teacher who has no previous knowledge of boys who have reached this age, may long deceive himself in regard to them and will seldom obtain complete frankness.
26. The boy asks fewer questions, but he’s trying even harder to figure things out and make things happen. He’s learning on his own and getting better at handling tasks. Over time, he starts to respect his elders more; he worries about their judgment and is impressed by their authority. At the same time, he gets closer to other boys his age. From now on, it gets harder to keep track of him. A teacher who isn’t familiar with boys at this stage may misjudge them for a long time and will rarely get complete honesty.
This reserve is indicative of more or less self-determination, which is commonly attributed to pure reason.
This reserve shows a degree of self-determination, which is usually linked to pure reason.
27. The names for the mental faculties acquire renewed importance with the beginning of systematic instruction. Their import, however, shows a marked difference. Now memory is relied on for the acquisition, without additions or omissions, of prescribed series, the order being fixed or not, as the case may be; usually there is a slight connection with older[18] ideas. Imagination is called for to lay hold of the objects of distant lands and ages. The understanding is expected to derive general notions from a limited number of particulars, to name and to connect them. The development of the ethical judgment teachers rarely wait for; obedience to commands is demanded. Obedience of this kind depends chiefly on the ease with which antecedent ideas are revived and connected in response to, but not beyond, a given stimulus. In extreme cases the fear of punishment effectively takes the place of all other motives. But often not even the usual memory-work can be successfully exacted through fear, much less obedience without oversight.
27. The names for mental abilities become increasingly important with the start of structured teaching. However, their meaning shows a clear difference. Now, memory is relied upon to acquire specific series exactly, whether the order is fixed or not; usually, there’s a small link to previous[18] ideas. Imagination is needed to grasp the objects from far-off places and times. Understanding is expected to extract general ideas from a limited number of specifics, to label them, and to connect them. Teachers rarely wait for the development of ethical judgment; following directions is required. This kind of obedience mainly relies on how easily prior ideas can be recalled and linked in response to, but not beyond, a given trigger. In extreme cases, the fear of punishment effectively replaces all other motivations. But often, even the usual memory tasks can’t be successfully accomplished through fear, let alone obedience without supervision.
28. Many pupils reveal a curious contrast. In their own sphere they display a good memory, a lively imagination, keen understanding; by the teacher they are credited with little of all these. They rule perhaps over their playmates because of their superior intelligence, or possess at least the respect of the latter, while in their classes they show only incapacity. Such experiences suggest the difficulty of making instruction take proper hold of the inner growth of the pupil. It is evident, at the same time, that what is customarily ascribed to the action of the various mental faculties takes place in certain groups of ideas.
28. Many students show an interesting contrast. In their own environment, they demonstrate a good memory, a vivid imagination, and strong understanding; however, their teachers often don’t recognize these qualities in them. They may lead their peers due to their higher intelligence or at least earn their respect, yet in class, they often appear incompetent. These experiences highlight the challenges of making lessons resonate with the personal development of the student. At the same time, it’s clear that what is typically attributed to the activity of various mental faculties occurs within specific sets of ideas.
29. The grown man has one group of ideas for his church, another for his work at home, a third for[19] society, and so on. These groups, though partially interacting and mutually determinant, are far from being connected at every point. This is true as early as boyhood. The boy has one set of ideas for his school, another for the family circle, still another for the playground, etc. This fact explains better than intentional reserve the observation that a boy is one being at home or at school and quite another among strangers.
29. The adult man has one set of ideas for his church, another for his home, and another for[19] society, among other areas. These sets, while they interact and influence each other, aren't connected at every point. This has been true since childhood. A boy has one way of thinking for school, another for family, and yet another for the playground, and so on. This explains better than any deliberate reserve why a boy behaves one way at home or school and quite differently around strangers.
30. Each body of ideas is made up of complications of ideas, which, if the union is perfect, come and go in consciousness as undivided wholes, and of series, together with their interlacings, whose members unfold successively, one by one, provided they are not checked. The closer the union of parts within these complications and series, the more absolute the laws according to which ideas act in consciousness, the stronger is the resistance against everything opposing their movement; hence the difficulty of acting upon them through instruction. They admit, however, of additions and recombinations, and so may in the course of time undergo essential changes; up to a certain point they even change of themselves if repeatedly called into consciousness by dissimilar occasions, e.g., by the frequent delivery of the same lecture before different audiences.
30. Each set of ideas is made up of complex thoughts, which, when perfectly united, flow in and out of our awareness as seamless wholes, along with sequences and their interconnections, whose elements unfold one after another, as long as they aren't interrupted. The closer the connection between parts within these complexities and sequences, the more strict the rules governing how ideas function in our minds, and the greater the resistance to anything that challenges their flow; this is why it's tough to influence them through teaching. However, they can be added to and rearranged, and over time, they can undergo significant changes; to a certain extent, they can even change on their own when they are repeatedly brought to mind by different situations, e.g., by frequently delivering the same lecture to various audiences.
The general notions of things are complexes or complications of their attributes. Other examples of[20] complexes important to instruction are furnished by logical concepts and words. But since words of several languages may be perfectly complicated or bound together with the same concept, without being just as intimately connected with one another, it should be noted that when the object or concept comes up at different times, it will be joined now with this and next with another language. Yet the repeated perception of the object is not quite the same perception as before, although earlier ideas mostly coalesce so fully with later homogeneous ideas that the difference makes itself felt but little.
The general ideas about things are combinations or complexities of their characteristics. Other examples of[20]complexes that are important for learning include logical concepts and terms. However, since words from different languages can be very complex or intertwined with the same concept, without being closely connected to each other, it's important to understand that when an object or idea is presented at different times, it may be linked to one language now and another language later. Still, recognizing the object repeatedly isn't exactly the same perception as before, even though earlier ideas often blend so seamlessly with later similar ideas that the differences are barely noticeable.
31. The inner structure of groups of ideas becomes discernible in a measure when thoughts are bodied forth in speech. Its most general aspect is disclosed in the construction of a period. Conjunctions particularly are important in that they, without denoting a content of their own, serve as hints to the listener. They point out to him the connection, the antitheses, the positiveness, or the uncertainty of the speaker’s utterances; for the meanings of conjunctions can be traced back to the series-form, to negation and certitude. It should be noted that want and refusal are related to negation; expectation, together with hope and fear, to uncertainty, so that the consideration of thought masses must also include emotional states. Children possess the structure of thought just as they experience the emotional states, long before they know[21] how to embody the same in words with the help of conjunctions. Certain conjunctions, such as, to be sure, although, on the contrary, either—or, neither—nor, etc., are not adopted by children until late.
31. The inner structure of groups of ideas becomes clearer when thoughts are expressed in speech. Its most general aspect is revealed in the construction of a sentence. Conjunctions are especially important because they don’t have their own meaning, but instead act as cues for the listener. They indicate the connection, contrasts, affirmations, or uncertainties in what the speaker says; the meanings of conjunctions can be traced back to the forms of series, to negation and certainty. It's important to note that desire and refusal are linked to negation; expectation, along with hope and fear, relates to uncertainty, so analyzing clusters of thoughts must also consider emotional states. Children have the structure of thought just as they experience emotional states, long before they learn how to express them in words using conjunctions. Certain conjunctions, like of course, although, on the other hand, either—or, neither—nor, etc., aren’t used by children until later. [21]
32. Of equal importance with the inner organization of the pupil’s ideas are, for the teacher, the degree of ease or difficulty with which a given mass of ideas is called into consciousness, and its relatively long or brief persistence in consciousness. Here we are face to face with the conditions of efficient instruction and training. The most necessary statements relative to this subject will be made under the head of interest and character-building.
32. Just as important as how a student organizes their thoughts is, for the teacher, how easily or hard it is to bring those thoughts to mind, and how long they stay there. This is crucial for effective teaching and learning. The key points on this topic will be discussed under interest and character development.
33. The capacity for education, therefore, is determined not by the relationship in which various originally distinct mental faculties stand to one another, but by the relations of ideas already acquired to one another, and to the physical organism. Every pupil must be studied with reference to both.
33. The ability to learn isn’t defined by how different mental skills relate to each other, but by how the ideas we’ve already learned connect with one another and with our body. Each student needs to be understood in relation to both of these aspects.
34. Now, in order to gain an adequate knowledge of each pupil’s capacity for education, observation is necessary—observation both of his thought masses and of his physical nature. The study of the latter includes that of temperament, especially with reference to emotional susceptibility. With some, fear is the first natural impulse, with others, anger; some laugh and cry easily, others do not. In some cases a very slight stimulus suffices to excite the vascular system. We need to note furthermore:—
34. To truly understand each student's ability to learn, we need to observe—both their thoughts and their physical characteristics. This includes examining their temperament, especially in terms of emotional sensitivity. For some, fear is the first instinct, while for others it’s anger; some people easily laugh and cry, while others don’t. In certain situations, even a small trigger can energize the nervous system. It's also important to note:—
- (1) The games of pupils. Do they in a thoroughly childlike manner still play with any object that comes to hand? Do they intentionally change their games to suit a varying preference? Can distinct objects of persistent desire be discovered?
- (2) Their mental capacity and processes as shown in their studies. Is the pupil able to grasp long or only short series? Does he make many or few slips in the recitation? Do his lessons find a spontaneous echo in his play?
- (3) Their depth and consistency. Are their utterances superficial, or do they come from the depths of the soul? A comparative study of words and actions will gradually answer this question.
Such observations will take account also of the rhythm of the pupil’s mental life as well as of the character[23] of his store of thoughts. The insight thus obtained determines the matter and method of instruction.
Such observations will also consider the rhythm of the student's mental life as well as the character[23] of their collection of thoughts. The insight gained from this will guide the content and approach of instruction.
35. Instruction in the sense of mere information-giving contains no guarantee whatever that it will materially counteract faults and influence existing groups of ideas that are independent of the imparted information. But it is these ideas that education must reach; for the kind and extent of assistance that instruction may render to conduct depend upon the hold it has upon them.
35. Teaching that just provides information doesn’t guarantee that it will really fix faults or change existing ideas that aren’t affected by the information given. But it’s these ideas that education needs to address; the effectiveness of teaching in shaping behavior depends on how well it connects with those ideas.
Facts, at least, must serve as material for methodical treatment, otherwise they do not enlarge even the scope of mental activity. They rise in value when they become instinct with life and acquire mobility so as to enrich the imagination. But their ethical effect always remains questionable so long as they do not help to correct or modify the ethical judgment, or desire and action, or both.
Facts, at the very least, need to be used as a basis for organized study; otherwise, they don’t really broaden our thinking. They gain importance when they come alive and become dynamic enough to stimulate our imagination. However, their moral impact is always in doubt unless they contribute to changing or refining our ethical judgments, desires, or actions, or all three.
This point calls for a few additional distinctions. Generally speaking, rudeness decreases in proportion to the expansion of the mental horizon by instruction. The mere diffusion of desires over the enlarged thought area causes them to lose something of their one-sided energy. Moreover, if instruction presents ethical subjects[24] of some kind in a comprehensible way, the pupil’s disposition undergoes a refining process so that it at least approximates a correct estimate of the will, that is, the creation of ethical ideas.
This point requires a few more distinctions. Overall, rudeness tends to decrease as our understanding grows through education. When desires spread out across a broader range of thoughts, they lose some of their intense focus. Additionally, if education presents ethical topics[24] in an understandable manner, the student's attitude gets refined, moving closer to a proper understanding of will, which is basically the development of ethical ideas.
Such favorable results are, however, apt to be outweighed by the harm done when mere knowledge becomes the chief aim of ambition.
Such positive outcomes can, however, be overshadowed by the damage caused when simply gaining knowledge becomes the main goal of ambition.
36. In order that instruction may act on the pupil’s ideas and disposition, every avenue of approach should be thrown open. The mere fact that we can never know with certainty, beforehand, what will influence the pupil most, warns us against one-sidedness of instruction.
36. To ensure that teaching impacts the student's thoughts and attitudes, every possible way of engaging them should be explored. The simple reality that we can never be completely sure in advance what will have the greatest influence on the student cautions us against one-sidedness of instruction.
Ideas spring from two main sources,—experience and social intercourse. Knowledge of nature—incomplete and crude—is derived from the former; the later furnishes the sentiments entertained toward our fellow-men, which, far from being praiseworthy, are on the contrary often very reprehensible. To improve these is the more urgent task; but neither ought we to neglect the knowledge of nature. If we do, we may expect error, fantastical notions, and eccentricities of every description.
Ideas come from two main sources: experience and social interactions. Our understanding of nature—although limited and rough—comes from the first; the second shapes our feelings towards others, which, rather than being admirable, are often quite the opposite. Improving these feelings is a more pressing task, but we should not overlook our understanding of nature. If we do, we can expect mistakes, bizarre ideas, and all kinds of eccentricities.
37. Hence, we have two main branches of instruction,—the historical and the scientific. The former embraces not only history proper, but language study as well; the latter includes, besides natural science, mathematics.
37. So, we have two main areas of education—history and science. The first includes not just history itself but also language studies; the second covers, in addition to natural sciences, mathematics.
“Historical” must be interpreted to include all human sciences, such as history, literature, languages, æsthetics, and political, economic, and social science. “Scientific” may include applied as well as pure science, and then we add all forms of industrial training to the curriculum. Other divisions of the subject-matter of instruction are often helpful. Thus one may speak of the human sciences, the natural sciences, and the economic sciences. The economic sciences include those activities where man and nature interact. Dr. Wm. T. Harris speaks of five coördinate groups of subjects, corresponding to what he calls the “five windows of the soul.”
“Historical” should be understood to include all human sciences, like history, literature, languages, aesthetics, and political, economic, and social sciences. “Scientific” can encompass both applied and pure science, and we also add all forms of industrial training to the curriculum. Different categories of the subject matter in instruction can be useful. For instance, one can refer to the human sciences, natural sciences, and economic sciences. The economic sciences involve activities where people and nature interact. Dr. Wm. T. Harris talks about five coordinated groups of subjects, which he refers to as the “five windows of the soul.”
38. Other reasons aside, the need alone of counteracting selfishness renders it necessary for every school that undertakes the education of the whole man to place human conditions and relations in the foreground of instruction. This humanistic aim should underlie the studies of the historical subjects, and only with reference to this aim may they be allowed to preponderate.
38. Other reasons aside, the mere necessity of counteracting selfishness makes it essential for every school that aims to educate the whole person to focus on human conditions and relationships in its teaching. This humanistic goal should underpin the study of historical subjects, and they should only be emphasized in relation to this goal.
An interesting attempt to realize the aim here demanded is found in Professor John Dewey’s “School and Society,”[1] which is in effect a description of what he is working out in his practice or experimental school in connection with his department in the University of Chicago.
An interesting effort to achieve the goal outlined here is found in Professor John Dewey’s “School and Society,”[1] which effectively describes what he is implementing in his practice or experimental school tied to his department at the University of Chicago.
“If the aim of historical instruction is to enable the child to appreciate the values of social life, to see in imagination the forces which favor and let men’s effective coöperations with one another, to understand the sorts of character that help on and that hold back, the essential thing in its presentation is to make it moving, dynamic. History must be presented not as[26] an accumulation of results or effects, a mere statement of what has happened, but as a forceful, acting thing. The motives, that is, the motors, must stand out. To study history is not to amass information, but to use information in constructing a vivid picture of how and why men did thus and so: achieved their successes and came to their failures.”[2]
“If the goal of teaching history is to help the child appreciate the values of social life, to imagine the forces that promote and enable people to work together effectively, to understand the types of character that support or hinder progress, the key aspect of its presentation is to make it engaging and dynamic. History should not be presented as an accumulation of results or effects, simply listing what has happened, but rather as a powerful, active force. The motivations—essentially the driving factors—must be highlighted. Studying history isn't about gathering information; it’s about using that information to create a vivid picture of how and why people acted in certain ways: how they achieved their successes and faced their failures.”[2]
39. Mathematical studies, from elementary arithmetic to higher mathematics, are to be linked to the pupil’s knowledge of nature, and so to his experience, in order to gain admission into his sphere of thought. Instruction in mathematics, however thorough, fails pedagogically when the ideas generated form an isolated group. They are usually soon forgotten, or, if retained, contribute but little toward personal worth.
39. Mathematics, from basic arithmetic to advanced math, should connect to the student’s understanding of the natural world and their own experiences to engage their way of thinking. Teaching math, no matter how comprehensive, misses the mark if the concepts become a separate set of ideas. They are often quickly forgotten or, if remembered, add little value to personal growth.
It may be added that the leading practical motive in the teaching of arithmetic has been economic, the cost of things forming the chief reliance for problems. Only those parts of nature study that involve important quantitative relations are fitted for correlation with mathematics. Biology, for instance, which is qualitative, since it deals with life, is a poor support for mathematics; but physics is a good one.
It can be noted that the main practical reason for teaching arithmetic has been economic, with the cost of items serving as the primary basis for problems. Only those aspects of nature study that involve significant quantitative relationships are suitable for connection with mathematics. For example, biology, which is qualitative because it focuses on life, offers little support for mathematics; on the other hand, physics does.
40. In general, it will always remain a matter of uncertainty whether and how instruction will be received[27] and mentally elaborated. To diminish this uncertainty, if for no other reasons, there is need of constant endeavor to put the pupil in a frame of mind suitable for instruction. This task falls within the province of training.
41. But even apart from reference to instruction, training must seek to ward off violent desires and to prevent the injurious outbursts of emotion. We may grant that after the days of school life are over, individual traits will always break forth again in this respect; but experiences, too, follow, and in connection with these the after-effect of education comes to light in proportion as education has been more or less successful. It shows itself in the nature and the amount of self-knowledge through which the adult strives to restrain his native faults. Seeming exceptions are in most cases accounted for by impressions produced in very early youth and long concealed.
41. But even apart from the need for instruction, training should aim to control intense desires and prevent harmful emotional outbursts. It's true that once school is over, individual traits will resurface in this area; however, experiences continue to shape us, and the impact of education becomes clear depending on how effective it has been. This is evident in the degree of self-awareness an adult has as they try to manage their natural shortcomings. What seem like exceptions are often explained by experiences from early childhood that have been hidden away for a long time.
As soon as a person attains freedom of action, he usually endeavors to achieve the life which in his earlier years seemed most desirable. Hence training and instruction have each to be directed against the springing up of illusive longings and toward a true picture of the blessings and burdens of various social classes and professions.
As soon as a person gains the freedom to act, they often strive to create the life that seemed most appealing in their younger years. Therefore, education and guidance should focus on curbing unrealistic desires and providing an accurate understanding of the advantages and challenges of different social classes and professions.
What modifications of individuality training may accomplish, is brought about less by restrictions, which cannot be permanent, than by inducing an early development[28] of the higher impulses whereby they attain predominance.
What changes in individuality training can achieve comes more from encouraging an early development[28] of the higher impulses rather than from restrictions, which can't last forever.
42. The larger portion of the restrictions necessary during the period of education falls under another head, that of government. The question of completeness of education aside, children no less than adults need to experience the constraint imposed on every one by human society: they, too, must be kept within bounds. This function the state delegates to the family, to guardians, and to the schools. Now the purpose of government refers to present order; that of training to the future character of the adult. The underlying points of view are accordingly so different that a distinction must necessarily be made in a system of pedagogics between training and government.
42. Most of the restrictions needed during the education process fall under a different category: that of governance. Setting aside the question of a complete education, children, like adults, need to experience the limitations that society places on everyone: they also need boundaries. The state relies on families, guardians, and schools to fulfill this role. The purpose of government is to maintain order in the present, while the goal of education is to shape the future character of the adult. Because these perspectives are so different, it's essential to distinguish between training and governance in any educational system.
43. In matters of government, too, much depends on how keenly its disciplinary measures are felt. Only good training can insure the right kind of sensibility. A gentle rebuke may prove more effective than blows. The first thing to do, of course, when unruly children create disorder, is to govern, to restore order; but government and training should, if possible, go together. The distinction between these two concepts serves to aid the reflection of the teacher, who ought to know what he is about, rather than to suggest a perceptible separation in practice.
43. In matters of governance, a lot relies on how well disciplinary actions are perceived. Only proper training can ensure the right kind of sensitivity. A gentle reprimand might actually be more effective than physical punishment. The first step, of course, when misbehaving children cause chaos, is to take control and restore order; however, governance and training should ideally happen together. The difference between these two ideas helps the teacher reflect on their approach, rather than implying a clear divide in practice.
44. In the following pages, general pedagogics, which is followed necessarily by observations of a[29] more special nature, will be discussed under the three main heads,—government, instruction, training. What needs to be said concerning government as the primary condition of education will be disposed of first. Next comes the theory of instruction and didactics. The last place is reserved for training; for an enduring effect could not be expected from it, if it were severed from instruction. For this reason the teacher must always keep the latter in view when he fixes his attention on methods of training, which in actual practice always work hand in hand with instruction. The other customary form of treatment, that according to age, while not adapted to the exposition of principles, finds its proper place in the chapter leading over to the discussion of special topics.
44. In the following pages, we will discuss general pedagogy, which will naturally lead to more specific observations, organized under three main categories: governance, instruction, and training. First, we will address governance as the essential foundation of education. Next, we will explore the theory of instruction and didactics. Lastly, we will cover training; lasting results cannot be expected if it is disconnected from instruction. For this reason, teachers must always consider instruction when focusing on training methods, which in practice always work alongside instruction. The other common approach, which is based on age, while not suitable for explaining principles, has its rightful place in the chapter that transitions to the discussion of specific topics.
45. We assume at the outset the existence of all the care and nurture requisite for physical growth and well-being; a bringing up that shall be as free from pampering as from dangerous hardening. There must be no actual want to lead a child astray, nor undue indulgence to create unnecessary demands. How much hardening it is safe to risk will depend in each case on the child’s constitution.
45. We start with the assumption that all the care and support necessary for physical growth and well-being is present; a upbringing that is free from both excessive pampering and harmful harshness. There shouldn't be any real lack that could misguide a child, nor should there be inappropriate indulgence that creates unnecessary expectations. The amount of toughness that is safe to enforce will vary for each child based on their individual constitution.
46. The foundation of government consists in keeping children employed. No account is taken as yet of the prospective gain to mental culture; the time is to be fully occupied, at all events, even if the immediate purpose be merely the avoidance of disorder. This purpose, however, involves the requirement of ample[31] provision, according to the ages of pupils, for the need of physical activity, that the cause of natural restlessness may be removed. This need is more urgent with some than with others; there are children that seem ungovernable because compelled to sit still.
46. The foundation of government is ensuring that children are kept busy. There's no consideration yet for the potential benefits to their mental development; the goal is to fill their time completely, even if the main aim is just to prevent chaos. However, this goal requires sufficient[31] provision for physical activity according to the age of the students, to address their natural restlessness. This need varies among children; some appear unmanageable simply because they have to sit still.
47. Other things being equal, self-chosen occupations deserve the preference; but it rarely happens that children know how to keep themselves busy sufficiently and continuously. Specific tasks, not to be abandoned until completed, assure order much better than random playing, which is apt to end in ennui. It is desirable that adults possessing the requisite patience assist children, if not always, at least frequently, in their games; that they explain pictures, tell stories, have them retold, etc. With advancing maturity, a steadily increasing proportion of the occupations assumes the character of instruction or of exercises growing out of it; this work should be properly balanced by recreations.
47. Other things being equal, people should prefer jobs they choose for themselves; however, children often struggle to keep themselves engaged for long. Specific tasks that must be finished help create order much better than random play, which can quickly lead to boredom. It's helpful for adults with the right amount of patience to support children in their activities. They should explain pictures, tell stories, and encourage retelling, among other things. As children grow, more of their activities should be educational or related to learning; this should be balanced with time for fun.
48. Next in order comes supervision, and with it numerous commands and prohibitions. Under this head several things must be considered.
48. Next up is supervision, which comes with a lot of rules and restrictions. Several things need to be taken into account here.
In the first place this: Whether under certain circumstances one might withdraw a command or permit what has once been forbidden. It is ill-advised to give an order more sweeping than the execution is meant to be; and it weakens government to yield to the entreaties, the tears, or, worse still, the impetuous insistence of children.
In the first place this: Whether in certain situations one might take back a command or allow what has once been prohibited. It’s unwise to issue an order that is broader than what is intended to be enforced; and it undermines authority to give in to the pleas, tears, or, even worse, the forceful demands of children.
Also this question: Whether it is possible to make sure of obedience. Where children are not kept busy and are left without oversight, the issue becomes doubtful.
Also this question: Is it possible to ensure obedience? When children aren’t engaged and are left unsupervised, the situation becomes uncertain.
The difficulty grows at a rapid rate with an increase in numbers. This is true especially of larger educational institutions, but, on account of the coming and going of pupils, applies in a measure also to common day schools.
The difficulty increases quickly as the number of students rises. This is especially true for larger educational institutions, but due to the constant influx and departure of students, it also applies to regular day schools to some extent.
49. The usual solution is greater strictness of supervision. But this involves the risk of utter failure to receive voluntary obedience, and of inciting a match game in shrewdness.
49. The typical solution is to increase supervision. However, this carries the risk of completely failing to gain voluntary compliance and could spark a competitive game of cleverness.
As to voluntary obedience, much depends on the ratio of restraint to the freedom that still remains. Ordinarily, youth submits readily enough to many restrictions, provided such restrictions bear upon specific fixed points, and leave elbow room for independent action.
As for voluntary obedience, a lot depends on the balance between restraint and the freedom that remains. Generally, young people are willing to accept various restrictions as long as those limits focus on certain specific areas and allow space for independent action.
In the work of supervision the teacher will find it hard to rely on himself entirely, particularly if he has charge of classes only at stated times. Others must assist him; he himself will have to resort occasionally to surprises. Supervision is always an evil when coupled with unnecessary distrust. It is essential, therefore, to make those who do not merit distrust understand that the measures adopted are not directed against them.
In supervising, a teacher will struggle to rely solely on himself, especially if he only supervises classes at specific times. Others need to help him; he will occasionally need to introduce surprises. Supervision is always problematic when combined with unwarranted distrust. Therefore, it's important to help those who don't deserve mistrust understand that the measures taken are not aimed at them.
CHAPTER II
Practical Elements
50. Since supervision is not to be vigorous to the point of ever felt pressure, child government, to be effective, requires both gentle and severe measures. In general, this effectiveness results from the natural superiority of the adult, a fact of which teachers sometimes need to be reminded. Whatever the plan of supervision, there must be coupled with it an adequate mode of disciplinary procedure. A record should be kept in schools, not for the law-abiding pupils, but for those guilty of repeated acts of disobedience. These remarks do not thus far include any reference to marks and records pertaining to education proper; they are confined to what is popularly, but loosely, called discipline, that is, the training of pupils to conform to the system of order that obtains in the school.
50. Since supervision shouldn't be so intense that students feel pressured, effective guidance for children requires a mix of gentle and strict measures. Generally, this effectiveness comes from the natural authority of adults, something that teachers sometimes need to remember. Whatever the approach to supervision, it must include a proper method of disciplinary procedures. Schools should maintain records, not for well-behaved students, but for those who repeatedly break the rules. These comments do not yet address academic marks and records; they focus on what is commonly, though loosely, referred to as discipline, which is the process of training students to adhere to the system of order that exists in the school.
Home training seldom requires such bookkeeping; but even here it may at times be useful. Of course, the individual child knows in any case that some one is keeping an eye on his actions, but the fact becomes more deeply impressed upon his memory if the reproofs incurred by him are recorded.
Home training rarely needs such detailed record-keeping; however, it can be helpful at times. Naturally, each child knows that someone is watching their behavior, but it sticks in their memory even more if their mistakes are noted down.
51. It would be in vain to attempt to banish entirely the corporal punishments usually administered after fruitless reprimands; but use should be made of them so sparingly that they be feared rather than actually inflicted.
51. It would be pointless to completely eliminate the physical punishments typically given after ineffective reprimands; however, they should be used so rarely that they are feared more than they are actually carried out.
Recollection of the rod does not hurt a boy. Nor is there any harm in his present conviction that a flogging is henceforth as much beyond the range of possibility as his meriting such treatment. But it would, no doubt, be injurious to actually violate his self-respect by a blow, however little he might mind the physical pain. And pernicious in the highest degree, although, nevertheless, not quite obsolete yet, is the practice of continuing to beat children already hardened to blows. Brutish insensibility is the consequence, and the hope is almost vain that even a long period of now unavoidable indulgence will restore a normal state of feeling.
Recollecting getting hit doesn’t hurt a boy. And he believes that a beating is now as unlikely as him deserving that kind of treatment. However, it would definitely damage his self-respect to actually hit him, no matter how little he might care about the physical pain. Also, it's really harmful—though not completely gone yet—to keep hitting kids who’ve already become desensitized to it. This leads to a harsh numbness, and it’s almost pointless to hope that even a long time of unavoidable pampering will bring back a normal sense of feelings.
There is less objection to making use, for a few hours, of hunger as a corrective. Here only an act of deprivation takes place, not one involving a direct insult.
There is less resistance to using hunger as a corrective tool for a few hours. Here, only a form of deprivation occurs, not something that directly insults.
Curtailment of freedom is the most commonly employed form of punishment; justly so, provided it be properly adjusted to the offence. Moreover, it admits of the most varied gradations from standing in a corner to confinement in a dark room, perhaps even with hands tied together behind the back. Only, for[35] several serious reasons, this punishment must not be of long duration. A whole hour is more than enough unless there is careful supervision. Besides, the place must be chosen judiciously.
Limiting freedom is the most common type of punishment, and rightly so, as long as it's properly tailored to the offense. It can range widely, from standing in a corner to being shut away in a dark room, possibly even with hands tied behind the back. However, for [35] several important reasons, this type of punishment shouldn't last long. A full hour is more than enough unless there's careful supervision. Plus, the location must be chosen wisely.
Solitary confinement, especially in a dark room, is seldom if ever resorted to in American public schools. For remarks upon the social basis of modern school punishments, see 55.
Solitary confinement, particularly in a dark room, is rarely, if ever, used in American public schools. For comments on the social foundation of modern school punishments, see 55.
52. Corrections of such severity, as removal from home or expulsion from an institution, are to be administered only in extreme cases; for what is to become of the expelled pupil? A burden to another school? And in case the transfer implies the same freedom, the old disorderly conduct will usually be resumed. Such pupils must, therefore, be placed under very strict supervision and given new occupations. We must trust to the new environment to obliterate gradually the old vitiated circle of thought.
52. Severe corrections, like being taken away from home or expelled from a school, should only happen in extreme situations. What happens to the expelled student? Do they just become a problem for another school? If the new school offers the same freedoms, they’ll likely fall back into their old bad habits. These students need to be closely monitored and given new activities. We have to rely on the new environment to slowly erase their previous negative way of thinking.
53. It is a well-known fact that authority and love are surer means of securing order than harsh measures are. But authority cannot be created by every one at will. It implies obvious superiority in mind, in knowledge, in physique, in external circumstances. Love can, indeed, be gained in the course of time by a complaisant manner—the love of well-disposed pupils; but just where government becomes most necessary, complaisance has to cease. Love must not be purchased at the expense of weak indulgence; it is of value only when united with the necessary severity.
53. It's a well-known fact that authority and love are more effective for maintaining order than harsh methods. However, not everyone can create authority at will. It requires clear superiority in intelligence, knowledge, physical ability, and circumstances. Love can certainly be earned over time through a friendly demeanor—the affection of well-intentioned students; but where governance is most needed, friendliness must stop. Love should not come at the cost of weak leniency; it’s only valuable when combined with the necessary firmness.
54. In early childhood and with healthy children, government is, on the whole, easy. It continues to be easy after they have once formed habits of obedience. But it should not be interrupted. Even if children have been left to themselves or in charge of strangers only a few days, the change is noticeable. It requires an effort to tighten the reins again—something not to be done too suddenly.
54. In early childhood, and with healthy kids, governing them is generally straightforward. It remains easy once they have established habits of obedience. However, this should not be disrupted. Even if children have been left unsupervised or with strangers for just a few days, the difference is clear. It takes effort to regain control—something that shouldn't be done too abruptly.
Where boys have been allowed to run wild, the attempt to bring them back to orderly conduct reveals the differences of individuality. Some are easily made to return to appropriate work by kindness combined with a moderate measure of forbearance, others have sense enough to fear threats and to avoid penalties; but we may unfortunately also expect to find a few whose sole thought is to escape from supervision, however unpleasant for them the consequences may be.
Where boys have been allowed to run free, trying to get them back to good behavior shows their individual differences. Some respond well to kindness along with a bit of patience, while others are smart enough to be scared of threats and avoid punishments. However, we may sadly also find a few whose only goal is to escape supervision, no matter how unpleasant the consequences might be for them.
Where home ties are wanting, this spirit may develop even during boyhood with ominous rapidity; during adolescence the difficulty of checking it may grow to be insuperable.
When home connections are lacking, this spirit can emerge quickly, even in childhood; during the teenage years, it may become nearly impossible to control.
55. As a rule, it is reasonable to assume that youth will try to break through restraints as soon as these are felt. A sufficient amount of satisfying activity, together with uniform firmness of the lines of restraint, will, indeed, soon put an end to persistent attempts of this kind; yet they will be repeated from time to time. As boys grow older there is a change of pursuits; now the[37] restraining boundaries must gradually be enlarged. The question now is whether education has progressed sufficiently far to make government less indispensable. Moreover, the choice of work comes to be determined by the prospects opening before the young man, according to his rank and means, together with his native capabilities and acquired knowledge. To encourage such pursuits as being appropriate for him, and, on the other hand, to reduce mere hobbies and diversions to harmless proportions, still remains the function of government. In any case government should not be wholly surrendered too early, least of all when the environment is such as to justify apprehension of temptation.
55. Generally, it's reasonable to think that young people will push against restrictions as soon as they feel them. A good amount of engaging activities, paired with consistent enforcement of those rules, can quickly curb these persistent attempts; however, they will pop up occasionally. As boys get older, their interests change; now the[37] boundaries of restriction need to be gradually expanded. The current issue is whether education has advanced enough to make governance less necessary. Additionally, the choice of activities is influenced by the opportunities available to the young man based on his social status and financial resources, as well as his natural talents and learned skills. It's still the role of governance to encourage pursuits that are suitable for him while also limiting mere hobbies and distractions to harmless levels. In any case, governance shouldn't be completely relinquished too soon, especially in environments that might raise concerns about temptation.
Though American teachers are perhaps not accustomed to emphasize the distinction between government for order and training for character, the difference, nevertheless, exists, often in an exaggerated form. Just as fever is looked upon as the measure of functional disturbance in the body, so disorder in the schoolroom is looked upon as the measure of the teacher’s failure. As fever is the universal symptom of disease, so disorder is the index of failure. The diagnosis may err in either case as to what the seat of the difficulty really is, but that something is wrong is plain to all. The fact that the public usually gauge a teacher’s efficiency by the order he keeps has led in the past to an exaggerated emphasis upon school discipline. The means for securing good order have greatly changed since Herbart’s time. A growing sense of social solidarity in the community, together with the all but universal employment of women as teachers in the elementary grades, has transferred[38] the basis of discipline from the teacher to the community. It is social pressure in and out of the school that is the main reliance for regularity, punctuality, and order. Herbart wonders what will become of the bad boy if he is expelled. The modern answer is, he will be sent to the reform school or to the truant school. The teacher still stands as of old at the point of contact between the institution and the individual; nor can he entirely escape the heat generated at times by such contact, but, after all, it is society that now supplies the pressure formerly exerted by will and birch. The teacher is now more of a mediator between the pupil and the organized community, than an avenger of broken law.
Though American teachers might not usually emphasize the difference between maintaining order and fostering character, that difference definitely exists, often in a pronounced way. Just as fever is seen as a sign of trouble in the body, disorder in the classroom is viewed as a sign of the teacher's failure. As fever is the common marker of illness, disorder is a sign of inadequacy. The diagnosis may be mistaken in both situations regarding where the real issue lies, but it is obvious that something is wrong. The fact that the public often judges a teacher's effectiveness based on how orderly their classroom is has historically led to overly focusing on school discipline. The methods for ensuring good order have shifted significantly since Herbart's time. An increasing sense of community solidarity, along with the widespread employment of women as teachers in elementary schools, has shifted the basis of discipline from the teacher to the community. It is social pressure, both inside and outside of school, that now primarily ensures regularity, punctuality, and order. Herbart questioned what would happen to the troubled student if expelled. The modern answer is that they'll go to a reform school or a truant school. The teacher still serves as the main link between the institution and the individual and cannot completely avoid the challenges arising from this connection. However, it is society that now provides the pressure that used to come from authority and punishment. The teacher now acts more as a mediator between the student and the organized community than as an enforcer of rules.
SECTION II
Instruction
CHAPTER I
The Connection Between Education, Governance, and Training
56. Instruction furnishes a part of those occupations which lie at the basis of government; how large a part depends on circumstances.
56. Instruction provides a portion of the roles that are essential to government; the extent of that portion varies depending on the situation.
Children must be kept employed at all events, because idleness leads to misbehavior and lawlessness. Now if the employment consists of useful labor, say in the workshop or on the farm, so much the better. Better still, if the work teaches the child something that will contribute to his further education. But not all employment is instruction; and in cases where the mere government of children is a difficult matter, lessons are not always the most adequate employment. Many a growing boy will be taught orderly conduct much sooner when placed with a mechanic or merchant or farmer than in school. The scope of government is wider than that of instruction.
Children need to be kept busy at all times because inactivity leads to misbehavior and trouble. If the work involves valuable tasks, like in a workshop or on a farm, that's even better. It's best if the job also teaches the child skills that will help them in their education later on. However, not all work is educational, and sometimes just managing children can be tricky, making lessons less effective as a way to keep them occupied. A young boy often learns to behave better when he's spending time with a mechanic, merchant, or farmer than he would in a classroom. The role of guidance is broader than that of teaching.
Teachers of manual training everywhere testify to the quieting effect of directed physical labor upon stormy spirits. Even a truant school or a school for incorrigibles becomes an attractive place to the inmates when adequate provision is made for the exercise of the motor powers. Most children can be controlled through mental occupation, but there are some to whom motor activity is indispensable. That a judicious apportionment of sensory and motor activity would favorably affect the development of all children is not to be questioned.
Teachers of manual training everywhere confirm the calming effect of focused physical labor on restless minds. Even a school for troublemakers becomes a more appealing place for the students when there are enough opportunities for physical activity. Most kids can be managed through mental engagement, but some need physical activity to thrive. It’s clear that a balanced mix of sensory and motor activities would positively influence the development of all children.
57. Instruction and training have this in common, that each makes for education and hence for the future, while government provides for the present. A distinction should, however, be made here. Instruction is far from being always educative or pedagogical. Where acquisition of wealth and external success or strong personal preference supply the motives for study, no heed is paid to the question: What will be the gain or loss to character? One actuated by such motives sets out, such as he is, to learn one thing or another, no matter whether for good or bad or for indifferent ends; to him the best teacher is he who imparts tuto, cito, jucunde, the proficiency desired. Instruction of this kind is excluded from our discussion; we are concerned here only with instruction that educates in the moral sense of the term.
57. Teaching and training share a common goal: they both contribute to education and shape the future, while government focuses on the present. However, it's important to make a distinction here. Not all instruction is truly educational or helpful. When the drive to study comes from the desire for wealth, external success, or personal preference, the question of how it will affect one's character is often ignored. Someone motivated by these factors sets out to learn whatever they can, regardless of whether the outcome is positive, negative, or neutral; to them, the best teacher is the one who helps them learn quickly and easily. This type of instruction isn’t what we’re discussing here; we are focusing only on instruction that genuinely fosters moral education.
58. Man’s worth does not, it is true, lie in his knowing, but in his willing. But there is no such thing as an independent faculty of will. Volition has its roots in thought; not, indeed, in the details one[41] knows, but certainly in the combinations and total effect of the acquired ideas. The same reason, therefore, which in psychology accounts for considering the formation of ideas first, and then desire and volition, necessitates a corresponding order in pedagogics: first the theory of instruction, then that of training.
58. A person's value doesn't come from what they know, but from what they're willing to do. However, there isn't an independent ability to will. Our choices are rooted in our thoughts; not just in the details we know, but in the combinations and overall impact of our ideas. The same reasoning that leads psychology to prioritize the formation of ideas before desire and will also requires a similar order in education: first, the theory of teaching, then the theory of training.
59. In educative teaching, the mental activity incited by it is all important. This activity instruction is to increase, not to lessen; to ennoble, not to debase.
59. In educational teaching, the mental engagement it stimulates is crucial. This process should enhance, not diminish; uplift, not degrade.
60. If all mental activity were of only one kind, the subject-matter of instruction would be of no consequence. But we need not go beyond experience to see that the opposite is true, that there is a great diversity of intellectual endowment. Yet while instruction must thus be differentiated, it should not be made so special as to cultivate only the more prominent gifts; otherwise the pupil’s less vigorous mental functions would be wholly neglected and perhaps suppressed. Instruction must rather be manifold, and its manifoldness being the same for many pupils in so far as it may help to correct inequalities in mental tendencies.
60. If all mental activity were the same, the content of education wouldn’t matter. But experience shows us the opposite is true: there’s a wide range of intellectual abilities. While education needs to be tailored to this diversity, it shouldn’t be so specialized that it only benefits the most obvious talents; otherwise, students with less prominent skills would be completely overlooked and possibly stifled. Education should be varied, and this variety should be consistent among many students in order to help balance out differences in their mental strengths.
Not only is subject-matter to be varied on account of mental diversity, but also for social reasons as well. For an enlargement of this theme, see the annotation to paragraph 65.
Not only should the subject matter be varied because of different mentalities, but also for social reasons. For more on this topic, see the note in paragraph 65.
CHAPTER II
The Purpose of Teaching
62. The ultimate purpose of instruction is contained in the notion, virtue. But in order to realize the final aim, another and nearer one must be set up. We may term it, many-sidedness of interest. The word interest stands in general for that kind of mental activity which it is the business of instruction to incite. Mere information does not suffice; for this we think of as a supply or store of facts, which a person might possess or lack, and still remain the same being. But he who lays hold of his information and reaches out for more, takes an interest in it. Since, however, this mental activity, is varied (60), we need to add the further determination supplied by the term many-sidedness.
62. The ultimate goal of teaching is linked to the idea of virtue. However, to achieve this ultimate aim, we need to establish another, more immediate goal. We can call it, diversity of interests. The term interest generally refers to the kind of mental engagement that education aims to stimulate. Simply providing information isn't enough; we think of it as a collection of facts that a person might have or lack, and they would still remain the same person. But someone who actively engages with their knowledge and seeks out more shows a genuine interest in it. Since this mental engagement is varied (60), we should also include the further specification provided by the term diversity.
It has been pointed out[3] what the content of the word virtue must be, if this word is to be an adequate expression for the ultimate purpose of instruction. Virtue must embrace not only what is purely individual, or subjective, such as piety and humaneness of disposition, but it must likewise include what is objective, or social, in conduct. This fact lends a new significance to the doctrine of interest, for though a normal child is not[45] naturally interested in introspective analysis of his feelings, he is spontaneously interested in what is objective and within the range of his experience. The enterprises of his mates, the regulations of his school or home, the erection of houses, the introduction of new machinery, the social doings of the neighborhood, the havoc created by the elements, the prominent features of the changing year—all these claim his closest attention. The common school studies deal with these very things. Literature (reading) and history reveal to him the conduct of men; the one considering it ideally, the other historically. Mathematics teaches the mastery of material when considered quantitatively, whether in trade or manufacture or construction. Nature studies bring the child into intimate touch with the significant in his natural environment. Geography shows him the most obvious features of the industrial activity about him. It shows him the chief conditions of production in crops and manufactures; it also gives him hints of the great business of commerce. In all these studies, the natural inclinations of the mind are directly appealed to. Not a little of the importance of the doctrine of interest in instruction depends upon these facts; for both the insight and the disposition that instruction is capable of imparting to the pupil relates specifically to the objective side of his character, the one most in need of development and most susceptible of it.
It has been pointed out[3] what the meaning of the word virtue must be if this word is to properly represent the ultimate goal of education. Virtue must include not only what is purely individual or subjective, like piety and kindness of character, but it must also encompass what is objective or social in behavior. This fact gives new importance to the theme of interest, because although a typical child is not[45] naturally interested in analyzing his feelings, he is naturally drawn to what is objective and within his experience. The activities of his friends, the rules of his school or home, the building of houses, the introduction of new machines, the social events in the neighborhood, the destruction caused by storms, the notable changes throughout the year—all these capture his attention. The common school subjects address these very topics. Literature (reading) and history show him how people behave; one looks at it ideally, the other looks at it historically. Mathematics teaches him how to handle materials when viewed in quantities, whether in business, manufacturing, or construction. Nature studies connect the child closely with the important aspects of his natural surroundings. Geography reveals the most obvious features of the industrial activities around him. It shows him the key factors of production in agriculture and manufacturing; it also provides insights into the larger world of commerce. In all these subjects, the natural tendencies of the mind are directly engaged. The importance of the theme of interest in education greatly relies on these facts; for the understanding and attitudes that education can instill in the student specifically relate to the objective side of his character, which is the most in need of growth and the most capable of it.
63. We may speak also of indirect as distinguished from direct interest. But a predominance of indirect interest tends to one-sidedness, if not to selfishness. The interest of the selfish man in anything extends only so far as he can see advantages or disadvantages to himself. In this respect the one-sided man approximates[46] the selfish man, although the fact may escape his own observation; since he relates everything to the narrow sphere for which he lives and thinks. Here lies his intellectual power, and whatever does not interest him as means to his limited ends, becomes an impediment.
63. We can also talk about indirect interest as opposed to direct interest. However, when indirect interest is dominant, it can lead to a narrow viewpoint, if not outright selfishness. A selfish person's interest in anything is limited to what benefits or harms them personally. In this way, someone with a one-sided perspective is similar to a selfish person, even if they're not aware of it; they relate everything to the limited world they inhabit and think about. This is where their intellectual strength lies, and anything that doesn't serve their narrow goals becomes an obstacle. [46]
It is important for the teacher to see the full scope of the doctrine of interest in its relation to effort. In Herbart’s psychology it assumes a most important place, since the primacy of mental life is, in this system, ascribed to ideas. In other systems, notably those of Kant, Schopenhauer, Von Hartmann, Paulsen, primacy is ascribed to the will, first in unconscious or subconscious striving, later in conscious volition. This fundamental difference in standpoint will account for the emphasis laid now upon interest, now upon effort. Herbart conceives that conscious feelings, desires, motives, and the like have their source in ideas, and that volition in turn arises from the various emotional states aroused by the ideas. Interest with him thus becomes a permanent or ever renewed, ever changing, ever growing desire for the accomplishment of certain ends. It is, consequently, a direct, necessary stimulus to the will. Systems, however, that regard the will as the primary factor in mental life, conceiving of ideas only as a means for revealing more clearly the ends of volition, together with the best methods of reaching them, are naturally prone to place the emphasis upon effort, leaving to interest but a secondary or quite incidental function. Dr. John Dewey has attempted to reconcile these two views.[4] Interest and effort are complementary, not opposing ideas. To emphasize one at the[47] expense of the other, is to assume that the ends for which we act lie quite outside of our personality, so that these ends would, on the one hand, have to be made interesting, or, on the other, struggled for without regard to interest. This assumption is an error. The ends for which we strive must be conceived as internal, our efforts being regarded as attempts at self-realization in definite directions. The purpose of our action is therefore an end desired. In this we have an interest surely. As an educational doctrine, however, interest concerns chiefly the means of reaching these ends. If interest in the means is wanting, the child works with a divided attention. He gives only so much to the means as he must; the remainder is devoted to his own affairs,—the past or coming ball-game, the picnic, the walk in the woods, the private enterprises of home or school. But if a lively interest is felt in the means to the end, then the whole self is actively employed for the time being in the accomplishment of the purpose of the hour. The attention is no longer divided, it is concentrated upon the matter in hand. This in the school is work. When the attention is divided we have drudgery. This signifies that the interest felt in the end, say a dollar, is not felt in the means of attaining it, say a day’s labor. However inevitable drudgery may be in life, it should have no place in the schoolroom. The teacher must so present the studies that the pupil can perceive at least a fraction of their bearing upon life. This awakens an interest in them as ends. He must, then, by conformity to the psychological order of learning, by enthusiasm and ingenuity, so teach the subjects that the natural interest in the end will be constantly enhanced through a lively interest in the daily lesson as the means of reaching it. The result is unified attention, zeal in the pursuit of knowledge, hospitality for ethical ideals.
It’s essential for the teacher to understand the full scope of the concept of interest in relation to effort. In Herbart’s psychology, this idea holds a crucial position since it attributes the primacy of mental life to ideas. In other theories, especially those of Kant, Schopenhauer, Von Hartmann, and Paulsen, primacy is given to the will, first as unconscious or subconscious striving, and later as conscious choice. This key difference in perspective explains why sometimes interest is emphasized, while at other times effort takes precedence. Herbart believes that conscious feelings, desires, motives, and similar attributes originate from ideas, and that will arises from the various emotional states provoked by these ideas. For him, interest becomes a constant, renewed, ever-changing, and growing desire to achieve certain goals. Thus, it acts as a direct necessity for stimulating the will. However, systems that consider the will as the primary factor in mental life tend to view ideas merely as tools for clarifying the goals of will and the best strategies to achieve them, naturally focusing more on effort and relegating interest to a secondary or incidental role. Dr. John Dewey has tried to bridge these two perspectives. [4] Interest and effort are complementary, not contradictory ideas. Emphasizing one at the cost of the other implies that the goals we pursue are entirely external to our personality, making it seem that these goals must, on one hand, be made interesting, or on the other, achieved with no regard for interest. This assumption is misguided. The goals we strive for should be viewed as internal, with our efforts seen as attempts at self-realization in specific directions. Therefore, the purpose of our actions is a desired end. In this, we definitely have an interest. However, as an educational principle, interest mainly relates to the means of achieving these goals. If interest in the means is lacking, the child engages with a divided attention. They invest only the necessary amount of focus into the task at hand, while the rest of their attention wanders to their personal interests—the last or upcoming game, the picnic, a walk in the woods, or various activities at home or school. But if there’s a strong interest in the means to an end, the whole self becomes fully engaged in achieving the immediate goal. Their attention is not divided; it’s concentrated on the task at hand. This is what constitutes work in a school setting. When attention is split, we face drudgery. This suggests that the interest felt in the end, like earning a dollar, is not the same as the interest in the means to achieve it, like a day’s labor. While drudgery may be unavoidable in life, it should not exist in the classroom. The teacher must present lessons in a way that allows students to see at least a glimpse of how they relate to real life. This sparks an interest in them as goals in themselves. Then, by adhering to the psychological order of learning and using enthusiasm and creativity, the teacher should present the subjects so that the natural interest in the goal is consistently enhanced through a lively interest in the daily lesson as the way to reach it. The outcome is unified attention, enthusiasm for learning, and receptiveness to ethical ideals.
64. As regards the bearings of interest on virtue, we need to remember that many-sidedness of interest alone, even of direct interest such as instruction is to engender, is yet far from being identical with virtue itself; also that, conversely, the weaker the original mental activity, the less likelihood that virtue will be realized at all, not to speak of the variety of manifestation possible in action. Imbeciles cannot be virtuous. Virtue involves an awakening of mind.
64. When it comes to how interest relates to virtue, we need to keep in mind that just having diverse interests, even those related to learning, doesn’t automatically mean a person is virtuous. Additionally, the weaker a person's original mental capacity, the less likely it is that they will develop virtue at all, let alone express it in different ways through actions. People with significant mental disabilities cannot be virtuous. Virtue requires a spark of intellect.
The conception, that by awakening many-sided direct interest in the studies we can powerfully affect character, is perhaps peculiar to the thought of Herbart. Yet when we consider that the knowledge taught in the school goes to the root of every vital human relation, that, in other words, the studies may be made instruments for progressively revealing to the child his place and function in the world, it follows as a necessary consequence, that to interest the pupil thoroughly in these branches of learning, is to work at the foundation of his character, so far, at least, as insight into duty and disposition to do it are concerned. Even if interest in ethical things is not of itself virtue, it is an important means for securing virtue. This idea adds to the teacher’s resources for the development of character. It also opens up to him a new realm for research. All literature, history, science, mathematics, geography, language, may be examined from this new standpoint, both with respect to selection and to methods of presentation. Select the portions that pertain intimately to life; teach them so that their important bearing upon it may be seen.
The belief that by sparking diverse and direct interest in our studies, we can significantly influence character, is likely unique to Herbart's ideas. However, when we reflect on the fact that the knowledge acquired in school touches the core of every important human relationship, it becomes clear that subjects can be used to gradually help a child understand their role and purpose in the world. Consequently, engaging the student deeply in these areas of study lays the groundwork for their character, particularly regarding understanding their responsibilities and the motivation to fulfill them. Even if interest in ethical matters alone isn't virtue, it's a crucial step toward achieving it. This concept expands a teacher's tools for character development and offers a new area for exploration. All forms of literature, history, science, math, geography, and language can be viewed from this fresh perspective, both in terms of what to include and how to present it. Choose the parts that closely relate to life; teach them in a way that highlights their significance.
65. Scattering no less than one-sidedness forms an antithesis to many-sidedness. Many-sidedness is to be the basis of virtue; but the latter is an attribute of personality, hence it is evident that the unity of self-consciousness must not be impaired. The business of instruction is to form the person on many sides, and accordingly to avoid a distracting or dissipating effect. And instruction has successfully avoided this in the case of one who with ease surveys his well-arranged knowledge in all of its unifying relations and holds it together as his very own.
65. Scattering leads to a lack of focus, which goes against being well-rounded. Being well-rounded should be the foundation of virtue, but since virtue is tied to a person's character, it's clear that one's self-awareness must remain intact. The goal of education is to develop individuals in a comprehensive way, thereby preventing any distracting or dispersing influence. Education has successfully achieved this for those who can easily understand and integrate their well-organized knowledge in all of its unifying relations and keep it cohesive as their own.
This section points to the correlation of studies, a subject to be considered hereafter in detail. It also throws light upon the modern system of elective courses or elective studies in secondary and higher education. The teachable subjects have now become so numerous that election is imperative unless what is to be taught is determined arbitrarily without regard to the needs or inclinations of students. Furthermore, election is made imperative by the fact that the higher education is now open to all minds of all social classes, and that differentiated industry calls for many kinds of education. But the need for mental symmetry, no less imperative now than in the past, is reinforced by the need for social symmetry. Education must put the student into sympathetic touch with the whole of life, not a mere segment of it. Since many-sidedness cannot[50] be interpreted to mean knowledge of all subjects, this being impossible, it must be interpreted to mean knowledge of all departments of learning. Election may be permitted to emphasize departments of study, but not to ignore them entirely. There are four or more languages worth teaching, many departments of history, numerous sciences, and various branches of mathematics, not to speak of the economic, political, and social sciences. Enough of each department being given to insure intelligent sympathy with the aspect of civilization it presents, the student may be allowed to place the emphasis upon such groups of studies as best conserve his tastes, his ability, and his destination in life.
This section highlights the connection between studies, a topic that will be explored in more detail later. It also sheds light on the modern system of elective courses in secondary and higher education. The number of teachable subjects has grown so extensive that choosing what to study has become essential unless the subjects are decided arbitrarily without considering the needs or interests of students. Additionally, the importance of choice is underscored by the fact that higher education is now accessible to people from all social classes, and different industries require various forms of education. However, the need for intellectual balance, just as crucial now as in the past, is bolstered by the need for social balance. Education should connect students with the entirety of life, not just a small part of it. Since being well-rounded cannot mean having knowledge of every single subject—since that’s not feasible—it should mean understanding all fields of knowledge. Students should have the option to focus on specific areas of study but not completely disregard others. There are several languages worth learning, many areas of history, numerous sciences, and various branches of mathematics, along with economic, political, and social sciences. If students receive enough education in each field to foster meaningful engagement with the aspects of civilization it represents, they can then prioritize the groups of subjects that align with their interests, abilities, and life goals.
CHAPTER III
The Conditions of Diversity
66. It becomes obvious at once that a many-sided culture cannot be brought about quickly. The requisite store of ideas is acquired only by successive efforts; but unification, a view of the whole, and assimilation are to be attained besides (65), whence an alternation, in time, of absorption and reflection. The apprehension of the manifold is of necessity a gradual process, and the same is true of the unification of knowledge.
66. It is clear right away that creating a diverse culture cannot happen overnight. The necessary collection of ideas is gained only through ongoing effort; however, unity, a comprehensive view, and assimilation must also be achieved (65), leading to a back-and-forth between absorption and reflection over time. Understanding the many aspects of culture is inevitably a slow process, and the same goes for bringing knowledge together.
In absorption the mind surrenders itself to the acquisition or contemplation of facts. Thus a child will stand in open-eyed wonder at beholding a novel spectacle, the scientist becomes absorbed in watching the outcome of a new experiment, the philosopher loses consciousness to all about him in the unfolding of some new train of thought. Not only may absorption concern momentary experiences, but it may in a broad way be said to cover considerable periods of life, as, for instance, when a student becomes absorbed in the mastery of foreign languages having no immediate relation to his daily life. Reflection is the assimilation of the knowledge gained by absorption. The mind, recovering from its absorption in what is external, relates its new-found experience to the sum of its former experiences.[52] New items of knowledge in this way find their appropriate places in the organic structure of the mind. They are apperceived. The many-sided thus comes to unity.
In absorption, the mind gives itself up to learning or contemplating facts. For example, a child stares in wonder at a new sight, a scientist becomes focused on the results of a new experiment, and a philosopher loses track of everything around him while developing a new idea. Absorption can relate to brief moments, but it can also apply to extended periods of life, like when a student immerses themselves in mastering foreign languages that have no direct connection to their daily experiences. Reflection is when we process the knowledge acquired through absorption. The mind, after moving away from its external focus, connects this new experience to its existing knowledge. [52] In this way, new knowledge finds its proper place within the mind’s structure. It is understood. The diverse aspects come together to form a whole.
Rosenkranz calls absorption and reflection, self-estrangement and its removal. “All culture,” he says, “whatever may be its special purport, must pass through these two stages,—of estrangement, and its removal.” Again, he says, “The mind is (1) immediate (or potential); but (2) it must estrange itself from itself, as it were, so that it may place itself over against itself as a special object of attention; (3) this estrangement is finally removed through a further acquaintance with the object ... it feels itself at home in that on which it looks, and returns again enriched to the form of immediateness (to unity with itself). That which at first appeared to be another than itself is now seen to be itself.”[5] This is an abstract statement of the fact that (1) in learning the mind becomes absorbed for a time in external objects, ignoring temporarily their inner meaning and relation to self, and (2) this period of absorption is succeeded by one of reflection, in which the mind perceives the significance of what has been observed, noting the laws and principles underlying the phenomena and thus assimilating them to what it conceives to be rational.
Rosenkranz refers to absorption and reflection as self-estrangement and its removal. “All culture,” he states, “regardless of its specific focus, must go through these two stages—estrangement and its removal.” He also explains, “The mind is (1) immediate (or potential); but (2) it must distance itself from itself, so to speak, in order to view itself as a distinct object of focus; (3) this estrangement is ultimately resolved through further familiarity with the object ... it feels comfortable with what it observes and returns, enriched, to the state of immediacy (unity with itself). What initially seemed different from itself is now recognized as itself.”[5] This is an abstract depiction of the fact that (1) in learning, the mind temporarily becomes absorbed in external objects, ignoring their inner meaning and their relation to the self, and (2) this period of absorption is followed by a phase of reflection, in which the mind understands the significance of what has been observed, identifying the laws and principles behind the phenomena and thus integrating them into what it considers rational.
Owing to the fact that absorption and reflection may refer to very short and also to comparatively long periods, they may be studied with respect to their bearing in conducting recitations, and to their importance in fixing courses of study. The former aspect of the two processes will in this connection chiefly occupy our attention.
Due to the fact that absorption and reflection can refer to very short as well as comparatively long periods, they can be examined in terms of their relevance in conducting lessons and their significance in shaping study programs. The first aspect of these two processes will mainly be our focus in this context.
67. Some teachers lay great stress on the explication, step by step, of the smaller and smallest components[53] of the subject, and insist on a similar reproduction on the part of the pupils. Others prefer to teach by conversation, and allow themselves and their pupils great freedom of expression. Others, again, call especially for the leading thoughts, but demand that these be given with accuracy and precision, and in the prescribed order. Others, finally, are not satisfied until their pupils are self-actively exercising their minds in systematic thinking.
67. Some teachers place a lot of emphasis on breaking down the smaller and smallest components[53] of the subject step by step, and expect their students to replicate this process. Others prefer to teach through conversation, offering both themselves and their students plenty of freedom to express their thoughts. Some teachers specifically focus on key ideas, but require that these be articulated accurately and in the correct order. Finally, some teachers are not content until their students are actively engaging their minds in systematic thinking.
Various methods of teaching may thus arise; it is not necessary, however, that one should be habitually employed to the exclusion of the rest. We may ask rather whether each does not contribute its share to a many-sided culture. In order that a multitude of facts may be apprehended, explications or analyses are needed to prevent confusion; but since a synthesis is equally essential, the latter process may be started by conversation, continued by lifting into prominence the cardinal thoughts, and completed by the methodical independent thinking of the pupil: clearness, association, system, method.
Various teaching methods can emerge; however, it’s not necessary to rely on just one while ignoring the others. Instead, we should consider whether each method contributes to a well-rounded education. To understand a wide range of facts, explanations or analyses are important to avoid confusion; but since synthesis is also essential, this process can begin with conversation, continue by highlighting the key ideas, and conclude with the student’s organized independent thinking: clarity, connection, structure, approach.
In teaching we need to have (1) clearness in the presentation of specific facts, or the elements of what is to be mastered; (2) association of these facts with one another, and with other related facts formerly acquired, in order that assimilation, or apperception, may be adequately complete; (3) when sufficient facts have been clearly presented and sufficiently assimilated, they must be systematically ordered,[54] so that our knowledge will be more perfectly unified than it could be did we stop short of thorough classification, as in the study of botany, or of the perception of rules and principles, as in mathematics and grammar; (4) finally the facts, rules, principles, and classifications thus far assumed must be secured for all time by their efficient methodical application in exercises that call forth the vigorous self-activity of the pupil. These four stages of teaching may be considered fundamental, though varying greatly according to the nature of the subject and the ability of the pupil. It is good exercise for a pupil to take long, rapid steps when able to do so; it is hopeless confusion to undertake them when they are too great or too rapid for his capacity. These four stages in methods of teaching conceived to be essential, form the nucleus of an interesting development in the Herbartian school, under the title of “The Formal [i.e. Essential] Steps of Instruction.” The leading ideas will be further described in a subsequent paragraph (70).
In teaching, we need to have (1) clarity in presenting specific facts or the elements that need to be mastered; (2) connections between these facts and with other related facts learned before, so that understanding or assimilation can be fully achieved; (3) once enough facts have been clearly presented and adequately understood, they must be systematically organized,[54] so that our knowledge is more cohesively unified than if we stopped short of thorough classification, like in the study of botany, or in the understanding of rules and principles, as in mathematics and grammar; (4) finally, the facts, rules, principles, and classifications we've assumed must be secured for the long term through effective methodical application in exercises that stimulate the active participation of the student. These four stages of teaching can be seen as fundamental, although they can vary greatly depending on the subject and the student's ability. It's beneficial for a student to make long, quick progress when they are capable; it's a recipe for confusion to attempt this if the steps are too large or too fast for their capacity. These four essential stages in teaching methods form the core of an interesting development in the Herbartian school, under the title of “The Formal [i.e. Essential] Steps of Instruction.” Key concepts will be explained further in a following paragraph (70).
68. On closer inspection we find that instead of being mutually exclusive, these various modes of instruction are requisite, one by one, in the order given above, for every group, small or large, of subjects to be taught.
68. When we take a closer look, we realize that rather than being mutually exclusive, these different teaching methods are necessary, in the order listed above, for every group, whether small or large, of subjects that need to be taught.
For, first, the beginner is able to advance but slowly. For him the shortest steps are the safest steps. He must stop at each point as long as is necessary to make him apprehend distinctly each individual fact. To this he must give his whole thought. During the initial stage, the teacher’s art consists, therefore, preëminently in knowing how to resolve his subject into[55] very small parts. In this way he will avoid taking sudden leaps without being aware that he is doing so.
For starters, a beginner can only progress slowly. The shortest steps are the safest ones for him. He needs to pause at each point as long as it takes for him to clearly understand each individual fact. He must focus all his attention on this. During the early stages, the teacher's skill primarily lies in knowing how to break the subject down into[55] very small parts. This way, he can avoid making sudden jumps without realizing it.
Secondly, association cannot be effected solely by a systematic mode of treatment, least of all at first. In the system each part has its own fixed place. At this place it is connected directly with the nearest other parts, but also separated from other more remote parts by a definite distance, and connected with these only by way of determinate intervening members, or links. Besides, the nature of this connection is not the same everywhere. Furthermore, a system is not to be learned merely. It is to be used, applied, and often needs to be supplemented by additions inserted in appropriate places. To be able to do this requires skill in diverting one’s thoughts from any given starting-point to every other point, forward, backward, sideways. Hence two things are requisite; preparation for the system, and application of the system. Preparation is involved in association; exercise in systematic thinking must follow.
Secondly, you can't establish connections just by using a structured method, especially not at the beginning. In a system, each part has its own specific place. At that place, it's directly connected to the nearest parts, but it's also separated from more distant parts by a certain distance, connecting to them only through specific intervening elements or links. Plus, the way these connections work isn't the same everywhere. Additionally, a system isn't just something to be learned; it needs to be utilized and often requires enhancements inserted in the right spots. Being able to do this means you need the skill to shift your thoughts from one starting point to every other point—whether forward, backward, or sideways. Therefore, two things are necessary: preparation for the system and its practical use. Preparation is part of making associations, while actual practice in systematic thinking must follow.
69. During the first stage, when the clear apprehension of the individual object or fact is the main thing, the shortest and most familiar words and sentences are the most appropriate. The teacher will often find it advisable also to have some, if not all, of the pupils repeat them accurately after him. As is well known, even speaking in concert has been tried in many schools not entirely without success, and for young[56] beginners this method may indeed at times answer very well.
69. During the first stage, when the main focus is on clearly understanding an individual object or fact, the simplest and most familiar words and sentences are the best choice. The teacher might also find it helpful to have some, if not all, of the students repeat them accurately after him. As many know, even speaking together has been attempted in various schools with some success, and for young [56] beginners, this method can sometimes work really well.
For association, the best mode of procedure is informal conversation, because it gives the pupil an opportunity to test and to change the accidental union of his thoughts, to multiply the links of connection, and to assimilate, after his own fashion, what he has learned. It enables him, besides, to do at least a part of all this in any way that happens to be the easiest and most convenient. He will thus escape the inflexibility of thought that results from a purely systematic learning.
For association, the best way to go about it is through informal conversation, as it allows the student to test and adjust the random connections between their thoughts, to create more links, and to absorb what they’ve learned in their own way. It also lets them do at least some of this in whatever way is easiest and most convenient for them. This way, they can avoid the rigidity of thinking that comes from learning in a purely systematic manner.
System, on the other hand, calls for a more connected discourse, and the period of presentation must be separated more sharply from the period of repetition. By exhibiting and emphasizing the leading principles, system impresses upon the minds of pupils the value of organized knowledge; through its greater completeness it enriches their store of information. But pupils are incapable of appreciating either advantage when the systematic presentation is introduced too early.
System, on the other hand, requires a more cohesive discussion, and the time for presenting information must be clearly divided from the time for reviewing it. By showcasing and highlighting the main concepts, a system makes students aware of the importance of structured knowledge; its increased thoroughness adds to their pool of information. However, students can't recognize either benefit when the structured presentation is introduced too soon.
Skill in systematic thinking the pupil will obtain through the solution of assigned tasks, his own independent attempts, and their correction. For such work will show whether he has fully grasped the general principles, and whether he is able to recognize them in and apply them to particulars.
The student will gain skill in systematic thinking by solving assigned tasks, making his own independent attempts, and getting feedback on them. This kind of work will indicate whether he has fully understood the general principles and whether he can recognize and apply them to specific situations.
70. These remarks on the initial analysis and the subsequent gradual uniting of the matter taught, hold true, in general and in detail, of the most diverse objects and branches of instruction. Much remains to be added, however, to define with precision the application of these principles to a given subject and to the age of the pupil. It will suffice, for the present, if we remind ourselves that instruction provides a portion of the occupations necessary to government (56). Now, instruction produces fatigue in proportion to its duration; more or less, of course, according to individual differences. But the more fatiguing it is, the less it accomplishes as employment. This fact alone shows clearly the necessity of intermissions and change of work. If the pupil has become actually tired, that is, has not lost merely inclination to work, this feeling must be allowed, as far as is practicable, to pass away, at any rate to diminish, before the same subject is resumed in a somewhat modified form. In order to have time enough for this, the systematic presentation must in many cases be postponed until long after the first lessons in the elements have begun, and conversely, the rudiments of a subject frequently have to be at least touched upon long before connected instruction can be thought of. Many a principle needs to be approached from a great distance.
70. These comments on the initial analysis and the gradual merging of the material being taught are generally true for a wide range of subjects and fields of study. However, there's still a lot to be added to clearly define how these principles apply to specific topics and the age of the student. For now, it's enough to remind ourselves that instruction is one part of the tasks essential to governance (56). Instruction can cause fatigue based on how long it goes on; of course, this varies based on individual differences. But the more exhausting it is, the less effective it is as a productive activity. This alone highlights the need for breaks and changes in work. If the student actually feels tired, meaning they haven't just lost their desire to work, this feeling should be allowed to fade, as much as possible, before revisiting the same subject in a slightly different way. To allow for this, a systematic approach may often have to wait until well after the initial lessons on the basics have started, and on the flip side, the basics of a subject often need to be introduced well before any detailed instruction can be considered. Many concepts need to be approached from a distance.
Herbart found his basis for the four steps of method, viz. clearness, association, system, method, in the ideas of absorption[58] and reflection, the alternate pulsation of consciousness in absorbing and assimilating knowledge. Others, adopting this classification as essentially correct, have related these steps to customary psychological analysis. Thus Dörpfeld and Wiget point out that the mind goes through three well-marked processes when it performs the complete act of learning, namely, perception of new facts; thought, or the bringing of ideas into logical relations; and application, or the exercise of the motor activities of the mind in putting knowledge into use. Perception gives the percept, thought gives the conception (or rule, principle, generalization), and application gives power. In other words, the receptive and reflective capacities of the mind come to their full fruition when they result in adequate motor activities. With respect to perception a good method will first prepare the mind for facts and will then present them so that they may be apperceived. The first two steps are therefore preparation and presentation. The first step, as Ziller pointed out, is essentially analytic in character, since it analyzes the present store of consciousness in order to bring facts to the front that are closely related to those of the present lesson; the second step, i.e., presentation, is essentially synthetic, since its function is to add the matter of the new lesson to related knowledge already in possession. Both together constitute the initial stages of apperception.
Herbart established the foundation for the four steps of method: clarity, association, system, and method, based on the concepts of absorption[58] and reflection, the alternating flow of consciousness in taking in and processing knowledge. Others, seeing this classification as fundamentally accurate, have linked these steps to typical psychological analysis. For instance, Dörpfeld and Wiget highlight that the mind goes through three distinct processes during the complete learning process, which are perception of new information; thought, or organizing ideas into logical relationships; and application, or using the mind's motor functions to put knowledge into practice. Perception yields the percept, thought produces the conception (or rule, principle, generalization), and application results in power. In other words, the mind's receptive and reflective abilities reach their full potential when they lead to effective motor actions. Regarding perception, a good method will first prepare the mind for facts and then present them in a way that allows for apperception. Therefore, the first two steps are preparation and presentation. The first step, as Ziller noted, is inherently analytic, as it breaks down the current knowledge available in consciousness to highlight facts that are closely related to the present lesson; the second step, i.e., presentation, is largely synthetic, since its role is to integrate the new lesson with already existing related knowledge. Together, these two steps form the initial stages of apperception.
Thought consists of two processes that may also be termed steps, and that are more or less observable in all good teaching; they are (1) the association of newly apperceived facts with one another and with older and more firmly established ideas in order that rational connection may be established in what one knows, and especially in order that what is general and essential in given facts may be grasped by the mind; and (2) the condensation of knowledge into a system, such for[59] instance as we see in the classifications of botany and zoölogy, or in the interdependence of principles as in arithmetic. Thought, in brief, involves the association of ideas and the derivation of generalizations such as are appropriate to the matter in hand and to the thought power of the pupils.
Thought involves two processes, which can also be seen as steps that are fairly noticeable in effective teaching. These are: (1) the association of newly recognized facts with each other and with existing, well-established ideas, so that a rational connection can be formed in one's knowledge, particularly to help understand the general and essential aspects of those facts; and (2) the condensation of knowledge into a system, like the classifications we encounter in botany and zoology, or the interrelated principles found in arithmetic. In summary, thought encompasses the linking of ideas and the generation of generalizations that are relevant to the topic at hand and suited to the cognitive abilities of the students.
The third stage, that of application, is not subdivided. Most other followers of Herbart, both German and American, though varying in methods of approach, conform essentially to the results of this analysis, distinguishing five steps, as follows:—
The third stage, known as application, is not broken down into further parts. Most other proponents of Herbart, both in Germany and America, despite differing in their methods, generally align with the findings of this analysis, identifying five steps, as follows:—
| ||||
| ||||
5. Application. From knowing to doing: use of motor powers. |
The reader is referred to the following-named works for extended discussion of this topic: McMurray, “General Method”; DeGarmo, “Essentials of Method”; Lange, “Apperception,” pp. 200–245; Rein (Van Liew’s translation), “Outlines of Pedagogy”; Herbart (Felkins’ translation), “Science of Education”; McMurray, C. A. & F. M., “The Method of the Recitation.” A comparative view of the treatment of the Steps of Instruction by various authors is found in Van Liew’s translation of Rein’s “Outlines of Pedagogy,” p. 145.
The reader is directed to the following works for more discussion on this topic: McMurray, “General Method”; DeGarmo, “Essentials of Method”; Lange, “Apperception,” pp. 200–245; Rein (translated by Van Liew), “Outlines of Pedagogy”; Herbart (translated by Felkins), “Science of Education”; McMurray, C. A. & F. M., “The Method of the Recitation.” A comparative analysis of how various authors address the Steps of Instruction can be found in Van Liew’s translation of Rein’s “Outlines of Pedagogy,” p. 145.
CHAPTER IV
Factors Influencing Interest
71. Interest means self-activity. The demand for a many-sided interest is, therefore, a demand for many-sided self-activity. But not all self-activity, only the right degree of the right kind, is desirable; else lively children might very well be left to themselves. There would be no need of educating or even of governing them. It is the purpose of instruction to give the right direction to their thoughts and impulses, to incline these toward the morally good and true. Children are thus in a measure passive. But this passivity should by no means involve suppression of self-activity. It should, on the contrary, imply a stimulation of all that is best in the child.
71. Interest refers to self-activity. Therefore, the need for diverse interests is also a need for various forms of self-activity. However, not all self-activity is beneficial; only the right amount of the right kind is desirable; otherwise, energetic children could simply be left to their own devices. There would be no need for education or even for guidance. The aim of teaching is to provide the right direction for their thoughts and urges, steering them towards what is morally good and true. Thus, children are somewhat passive. However, this passivity shouldn't mean stifling self-activity. Instead, it should encourage the best aspects of the child.
At this point a psychological distinction becomes necessary, namely, that between designedly reproduced, or “given,” and spontaneous representations. In recitations of what has been learned we have an example of the former; the latter appear in the games and fancies of children. A method of study that issues in mere reproduction leaves children largely in a passive state, for it crowds out for the time being[61] the thoughts they would otherwise have had. In games, however, and in the free play of fancy, and accordingly also in that kind of instruction which finds an echo here, free activity predominates.
At this point, it's important to make a psychological distinction between intentionally reproduced or "given" representations and spontaneous ones. When children repeat what they've learned, that's an example of the former; the latter shows up in their games and imagination. A study method that only focuses on reproduction keeps kids mostly passive, as it temporarily pushes aside their own thoughts. In contrast, games, imaginative play, and the type of teaching we're discussing here emphasize active engagement.
This distinction is not intended to affirm the existence of two compartments in which the ideas, separated once for all, would, of necessity, have to remain. Ideas that must by effort be raised into consciousness because they do not rise spontaneously, may become spontaneous by gradual strengthening. But this development we cannot count on unless instruction, advancing step by step, bring it about.
This distinction doesn't mean that there are two separate categories where ideas, once divided, must always stay. Ideas that need effort to bring them into consciousness because they don’t naturally come up can become natural over time through gradual reinforcement. However, we can't rely on this development unless structured teaching, progressing incrementally, makes it happen.
Interest must be conceived as self-propulsive activity toward an end. It is a part of the teacher’s function to assist the pupil in making the appropriate ideas strong and spontaneous. Occasionally a mere suggestion will change the whole mental attitude toward an end and the means for reaching it. A student one day approached his instructor with this query: “How can I get through this study with the least expenditure of time and effort?” The desired answer was first given. The instructor then remarked that there was another way of viewing the matter, viz., that one might consider how to get the most rather than the least out of the study. He then briefly unfolded its nature and possibilities, whereupon the student became one of the most interested members of the class. He had come with only an indirect interest in the subject as an end; he regarded the study as a required task and the means of passing upon it as so much drudgery; but he so changed his attitude toward it, that the study became an end personally desired, and the daily effort a pleasurable exercise of his self-directed power[62] of thought. The interest that the instructor had aroused in the end was transferred to the means.
Interest needs to be seen as a self-driven activity aimed at achieving a goal. Part of a teacher's role is to help students make relevant ideas strong and instinctive. Sometimes, just a simple suggestion can completely change someone's mindset about a goal and the ways to reach it. One day, a student asked his teacher, "How can I get through this study with the least amount of time and effort?" The teacher first provided a straightforward answer. Then, he pointed out another perspective: rather than focusing on getting the least out of the study, one could think about how to get the most. He then briefly explained what that meant and its possibilities, leading the student to become one of the most engaged members of the class. Initially, he had only a casual interest in the subject; he saw the study as a chore and the way to complete it as a tedious task. However, he shifted his perspective to see the study as something he genuinely wanted, making the daily efforts a pleasurable exercise of his self-directed[62] thought. The interest the teacher sparked in the goal then transferred to the methods for achieving it.
72. It is the teacher’s business, while giving instruction, to observe whether the ideas of his pupils rise spontaneously or not. If they do, the pupils are said to be attentive; the lesson has won their interest. If not, attention is, indeed, not always wholly gone. It may, moreover, be enforced for a time before actual fatigue sets in. But doubt arises whether instruction can effect a future interest in the same subjects.
72. It’s the teacher’s job, while giving lessons, to see if the students' ideas come up naturally or not. If they do, it means the students are engaged and the lesson has captured their interest. If they don’t, attention isn't completely lost. It can still hold their focus for a while before actual fatigue kicks in. But there’s uncertainty about whether the instruction can spark future interest in those same topics.
Attention is a factor of such importance to education as to call for a more detailed treatment.
Attention is so crucial to education that it requires a more thorough discussion.
73. Attention may be broadly defined as an attitude of mind in which there is readiness to form new ideas. Such readiness is either voluntary or involuntary. If voluntary, it depends on a resolution; the teacher frequently secures this through admonitions or threats. Far more desirable and fruitful is involuntary attention. It is this attention that the art of teaching must seek to induce. Herein lies the kind of interest to be sought by the teacher.
73. Attention can be generally understood as a mindset that's open to forming new ideas. This openness can be either voluntary or involuntary. When it's voluntary, it relies on a decision; teachers often achieve this through encouragement or intimidation. However, involuntary attention is much more desirable and productive. This is the type of attention that teaching should aim to evoke. This is the kind of interest that teachers should strive for.
Forced and spontaneous are more truly expressive terms than voluntary and involuntary in this connection. It is not meant that interested activity is against the will, or even indifferent to it. On the contrary, it is a form of activity that calls every resource of the mind into full play. The will is never so promptly active as when it is doing the things in which it is most interested; it is, however, a spontaneous, not a forced activity.
Forced and spontaneous are more accurate terms than voluntary and involuntary in this context. It doesn’t mean that engaging in something you care about is against your will, or even separate from it. In fact, it’s a type of activity that fully engages all the resources of the mind. The will is never more actively engaged than when it’s involved in the things that interest it the most; however, it is a spontaneous, not a forced activity.
There is, as Dr. John Dewey points out,[6] a contradiction between Herbart’s Pedagogy and his Psychology, as follows: the Pedagogy regards interest as the lever of education, the means for securing spontaneous activity of mind; the Psychology regards interest as a feeling arising from the relation of ideas. Ideas must therefore be given, in right relations, to arouse interest, while interest is in turn conceived as the means of arousing them. This is reasoning in a circle. The difficulty arises from asserting the primacy of ideas in mental life, and then speaking of self-activity, which presupposes the primacy of motor, or impulsive activities. The reader will avoid all contradictions in educational theory by accepting the modern view of the primacy, not of ideas, but of what may broadly be termed will. The latter view is in accord with biological and historical science. Ideas are a later production of mind; they serve to define more clearly the ends for which we work, at the same time giving us insight into the best means of attaining them. For an interesting discussion of the primacy of the will, the reader is referred to Professor Paulsen’s “Introduction to Philosophy,” pp. 111–122.[7]
There is, as Dr. John Dewey points out,[6] a contradiction between Herbart’s Pedagogy and his Psychology. The Pedagogy sees interest as the driving force of education, a way to encourage spontaneous mental activity. In contrast, the Psychology views interest as a feeling that arises from the relationship of ideas. Therefore, ideas must be provided in the right context to spark interest, while interest is also seen as a way to stimulate ideas. This creates a circular reasoning problem. The issue comes from asserting that ideas are primary in mental life while also discussing self-activity, which assumes that motor or impulsive activities come first. To avoid contradictions in educational theory, readers should embrace the modern perspective that prioritizes not ideas, but what can broadly be called will. This view aligns with biological and historical science. Ideas are a later development of the mind; they help to clarify the goals we pursue and provide insight into the best ways to achieve them. For an engaging discussion on the primacy of will, readers can refer to Professor Paulsen’s “Introduction to Philosophy,” pp. 111–122.[7]
74. Involuntary [spontaneous] attention is subdivided into primitive and apperceiving. The latter especially is of the greatest importance in teaching, but it rests on the former, the conditions of which must constantly be taken into account.
74. Involuntary [spontaneous] attention is divided into primitive and apperceiving. The latter, in particular, is very important for teaching, but it relies on the former, and the conditions of which must always be considered.
Apperception, or assimilation, takes place through the reproduction of previously acquired ideas and their[64] union with the new element, the most energetic apperception, although not necessarily the best, being effected by the ideas rising spontaneously. This topic will be treated more fully below (77). Here it suffices to say that the apperceiving attention obviously presupposes the primitive attention; otherwise apperceiving ideas would never have been formed.
Apperception, or assimilation, happens when we reproduce previously learned ideas and combine them with new information. The most intense apperception, though not always the most effective, occurs when ideas come to mind spontaneously. This topic will be explored in more detail later (77). For now, it's enough to say that apperceiving attention clearly relies on basic attention; without it, apperceiving ideas would never have developed.
The psychological and educational importance of the idea of apperception, or the assimilation of knowledge, has been much emphasized in recent years. For a psychological interpretation of the theory, the reader is referred to Wundt’s “Human and Animal Psychology,”[8] pp. 235–251. The educational significance of the doctrine has been well brought out by Dr. Karl Lange, in his able monograph on “Apperception.”[9] The subject has been more popularly treated in Dr. McMurray’s “General Method,”[10] and in the writer’s “Essentials of Method”[11]; also in a number of other works.
The psychological and educational importance of the idea of apperception, or the assimilation of knowledge, has been highlighted a lot in recent years. For a psychological interpretation of the theory, refer to Wundt’s “Human and Animal Psychology,”[8] pp. 235–251. The educational significance of this concept has been effectively discussed by Dr. Karl Lange in his insightful monograph on “Apperception.”[9] The topic has been addressed more casually in Dr. McMurray’s “General Method,”[10] and in the author’s “Essentials of Method”[11]; as well as in various other works.
75. The primitive or original attention depends primarily on the strength of the sense-impression. Bright colors and loud speaking are more easily noticed than dark colors and low tones. It would be an error, however, to infer that the strongest sense-perceptions are at the same time the most adequate. These quickly blunt the receptivity, while weak sense-impressions may, in the course of time, engender ideation as energetic as[65] that produced by originally obtrusive perceptions. For this reason, a middle course must be chosen from the first. For children, however, the direct sense-perception, even of a picture, if the object itself is not to be had, is altogether preferable to mere description.
75. The basic or original attention mainly relies on the strength of sensory impressions. Bright colors and loud sounds are more easily noticed than dark colors and quiet tones. However, it would be a mistake to assume that the strongest sensory perceptions are also the most effective. These quickly dull our receptivity, while weaker sensory impressions may, over time, generate ideas as powerful as[65] those produced by initially striking perceptions. For this reason, a balanced approach must be taken from the beginning. For children, though, direct sensory perception, even from a picture when the actual object isn't available, is far better than just a description.
The presence in the minds of children of ideas—those supplied by instruction itself not excepted—contrary to the new representations to be mastered, acts as a hindrance or check. This very fact explains why clearness of apprehension is not gained where instruction piles up one thing upon another in too rapid succession. It is essential, therefore, in the case of beginners, so to single out each fact, to separate part from part, and to proceed step by step, that apprehension may be rendered easy for them.
The ideas in children's minds— including those given through instruction—can get in the way of learning new concepts. This is why understanding doesn't improve when instruction overloads them with information too quickly. It's important for beginners to focus on each fact, break things down into parts, and move forward gradually so that understanding becomes easier for them.
A second hindrance to attention is of a more temporary character, but may nevertheless work much mischief. It makes a vast difference whether the ideas aroused are in a state of equilibrium or not. Long sentences in speech and in books are less easily apprehended than short ones. They excite a movement of many albeit connected thoughts, which do not at once subside into their proper places. Now, just as in reading and writing pauses must be observed, which is done more easily in short than in long sentences, instruction in general must have its chosen stopping-places and resting-points at which the child may tarry as long as may be necessary. Otherwise the accumulation[66] of thoughts will become excessive, crowding in upon what follows, and this upon the next new element, until finally the pupils arrive at a state where they no longer hear anything.
A second barrier to focus is more temporary but can still cause a lot of problems. It really matters whether the ideas being discussed are settled or not. Long sentences in speech and writing are harder to understand than short ones. They trigger a flurry of related thoughts that don’t immediately fit into place. Just like when reading and writing, where it's easier to take pauses with short sentences, instruction must also have its designated stopping points where the child can pause for as long as needed. Otherwise, the accumulation[66] of thoughts will become overwhelming, piling up and interfering with what comes next, which will then affect the next new concept, until the students reach a point where they can't hear anything at all.
76. The four essentials then for primitive attention are: strength of sense-impression, economy of receptivity, avoidance of harmful antitheses to existing ideas, and delay until the aroused ideas have recovered their equilibrium. But in actual teaching it will be found difficult to do justice to all of these requirements simultaneously. Sameness of presentation should not be carried too far lest the child’s receptivity be taxed too heavily. Monotony produces weariness. But a sudden change of subject frequently discloses the fact that the new is too remote from what has preceded, and that the old thoughts refuse to give way. If the change is delayed too long the lesson drags. Too little variety causes ennui. The pupils begin to think of something else, and with that their attention is gone completely.
76. The four key factors for basic attention are: the strength of sensory impressions, the efficiency of receptivity, avoiding harmful contradictions to existing ideas, and waiting until the stimulated ideas have regained their balance. However, in actual teaching, it can be challenging to meet all these needs at once. Keeping things the same shouldn't go overboard, as it could overwhelm the child's receptivity. Monotony leads to boredom. But a sudden shift in topic often reveals that the new material is too far removed from what was just taught, causing resistance to letting go of old thoughts. If the transition is postponed for too long, the lesson feels sluggish. Too little variety leads to boredom. Students start thinking about something else, and with that, their attention is completely lost.
The teacher should by all means study literary masterpieces for the purpose of learning from great authors how they escaped these difficulties. That he may strike the right chord in the earlier stages of instruction, he should turn particularly to simple popular writers, Homer, for example, whose story-telling is, on the other hand, too general and naïve for older pupils who have lost the power to put themselves[67] back into a past period of culture. Yet it is safe to say in general, that classic writers seldom take sudden leaps and never stand still entirely. Their method of unfolding consists in a scarcely perceptible, at any rate an always easy, advance. They dwell, indeed, long on the same thought, but nevertheless achieve, little by little, most powerful contrasts. Poor writers, on the contrary, pile up the most glaring antitheses without other than the natural result—the antagonistic ideas expel each other and the mind is left empty. The same result threatens the teacher who aims at brilliancy of presentation.
The teacher should definitely study literary masterpieces to learn how great authors overcame challenges. To hit the right note in the early stages of teaching, he should look particularly at simple popular writers, like Homer, whose storytelling is, on the other hand, too broad and naïve for older students who have lost the ability to immerse themselves back into a past culture. However, it's generally true that classic writers rarely make sudden jumps and never remain completely stagnant. Their approach to unfolding a story involves a barely noticeable, yet consistently easy, progression. They may linger on the same idea for a long time, but they still create strong contrasts bit by bit. In contrast, poor writers throw together glaring oppositions without any deeper connection—the conflicting ideas cancel each other out, leaving the mind empty. The same risk faces a teacher who aims for flashy presentations.
77. The apperceiving, or assimilating, attention (74), though not the first in time, is yet observed very early. It shows itself when little children catch and repeat aloud single, familiar words of an otherwise unintelligible conversation between adults; when a little later they name, in their own way, the well-known objects that they come upon in their picture-books; when later still, while learning to read, they pick out from the book single names coinciding with their recollection; and so on in innumerable other instances. From within ideas are suddenly bursting forth to unite with whatever similar elements present themselves. Now this apperceiving activity must be exercised constantly in all instruction. For instruction is given in words only; the ideas constituting their meaning must be supplied by the hearer. But words are not meant to[68] be understood merely; they are intended to elicit interest. And this requires a higher grade and greater facility of apperception.
77. The process of understanding and connecting new information (74) may not happen first, but it's noticeable quite early on. It appears when small children hear and repeat single, familiar words from conversations they can't fully grasp; when they later describe familiar objects they see in their picture books in their own words; and as they learn to read, when they recognize specific words that match their memories, and in countless other situations. Ideas suddenly come forward from within to connect with similar elements that are present. This process of understanding must be practiced constantly in all teaching. Instruction is delivered using words; the listener must provide the ideas that give those words meaning. But words are not just meant to be understood; they're designed to spark interest. Achieving this requires a higher level and greater ability to connect ideas.
Universally popular poems do not produce their pleasing effect by teaching something new. They portray what is already known and utter what every one feels. Ideas already possessed are aroused, expanded, condensed, and consequently put in order and strengthened. On the other hand, when defects are apperceived, e.g., misprints, grammatical blunders, faulty drawings, false notes, etc., the successive unfolding of the series of ideas is interrupted so that their interlacing cannot take place properly. Here we see how instruction must proceed and what it must avoid in order to secure interest.
Universally loved poems don't create their enjoyable effect by presenting something new. Instead, they reflect what everyone already knows and expresses what everyone feels. Familiar ideas are triggered, expanded, condensed, and then organized and reinforced. Conversely, when flaws are noticed, like typos, grammatical errors, bad drawings, wrong notes, etc., the flow of ideas is disrupted, preventing them from connecting properly. This shows how teaching should progress and what it should avoid to maintain engagement.
78. Instruction is to supplement that which has been gained already by experience and by intercourse with others (36); these foundations must exist when instruction begins. If they are wanting, they must be firmly established first. Any deficiency here means a loss to instruction, because the pupils lack the thoughts which they need in order to interpret the words of the teacher.
78. Teaching should build on what has already been learned through experience and interaction with others (36); these basics must be in place before instruction can start. If they're missing, they need to be solidly in place first. Any shortfall here means a setback for teaching because the students lack the understanding they need to interpret the teacher's words.
In the same way, knowledge derived from earlier lessons must be extended and deepened by subsequent instruction. This presupposes such an organization of[70] the whole work of instruction that that which comes later shall always find present the earlier knowledge with which it is to be united.
In the same way, knowledge gained from previous lessons needs to be expanded and deepened through later instruction. This requires an organization of the entire teaching process so that what comes later will always build on the earlier knowledge it is meant to connect with.
79. Ordinarily, because their eyes are fixed solely on the facts to be learned, teachers concern themselves little with the ideas already possessed by the pupils. Consequently they make an effort in behalf of the necessary attention only when it is failing and progress is checked. Now they have recourse to voluntary attention (73), and to obtain this rely on inducements, or, more often, on reprimands and penalties. Indirect interest is thus substituted for direct interest, with the result that the resolution of the pupil to be attentive fails to effect energetic apprehension and realizes but little coherence. It wavers constantly, and often enough gives way to disgust.
79. Usually, because teachers focus only on the facts that need to be learned, they don’t pay much attention to the ideas that students already have. As a result, they only try to gain the necessary attention when it’s lacking and progress stalls. At that point, they rely on voluntary attention (73), using incentives or, more commonly, reprimands and penalties. This means that indirect interest takes the place of direct interest, leading to a lack of strong engagement from the student and minimal coherence. Their resolve to stay attentive constantly wavers and often turns into frustration.
In the most favorable case, if instruction is thorough, i.e., scientific, a foundation of elementary knowledge is gradually laid sufficiently solid for later years to build on; in other words, out of the elementary knowledge an apperceiving mass is created in the mind of the pupil which will aid him in his future studies. There may be several of such masses; but each constitutes by itself its own kind of one-sided learning, and it is after all doubtful whether even here direct interest is implied. For there is small hope that this interest will be aroused in the youth[71] when the years of boyhood have been devoted merely to the mastering of preliminary knowledge. The prospects of future station and calling are opening before him and the examinations are at hand.
In the best-case scenario, if the teaching is thorough, meaning scientific, a solid foundation of basic knowledge is gradually established that can be built upon in later years; in other words, this basic knowledge creates a framework in the student’s mind that will help with future studies. There may be several such frameworks, but each represents its own form of limited learning, and it’s uncertain if even here a genuine interest is sparked. There’s little hope that this interest will develop in the young person when their childhood has been focused solely on mastering basic knowledge. The possibilities for future career and position are becoming clear to him and exams are approaching.
80. The fact should not be overlooked, however, that even the best method cannot secure an adequate degree of apperceiving attention (75–78) from every pupil; recourse must accordingly be had to the voluntary attention, i.e., the pupil’s resolution. But for the necessary measures the teacher must depend, not merely on rewards and punishments, but chiefly on habit and custom. Instruction unites at this point with government and training. In all cases where the pupil begins his work not entirely without compulsion, it is particularly important that he should soon become aware of his own progress. The several steps must be distinctly and suitably pointed out to him; they must at the same time be easy of execution and succeed each other slowly. The instruction should be given with accuracy, even strictness, seriousness, and patience.
80. It's important to recognize that even the best method can't guarantee that every student will engage their full attention. Therefore, we need to rely on voluntary attention, meaning the student's own commitment. For this to happen, teachers shouldn't just use rewards and punishments, but should focus mainly on building habits and routines. Teaching goes hand in hand with management and training at this stage. When a student starts their work with some level of compulsion, it's especially crucial for them to quickly see their own progress. Each step should be clearly and appropriately highlighted; they should also be easy to follow and occur gradually. Instruction should be delivered with precision, even firmness, seriousness, and patience.
81. The voluntary attention is most frequently demanded for memorizing, for which, apart from all else, the presence of interest is not always a perfectly favorable condition. This is true even of spontaneous interest, for the ideas that rise spontaneously have a movement of their own, which by deviating from the given sequence may lead to surreptitious substitutions.[72] Like observation, intentional memorizing presupposes a certain amount of self-control. At this point a question arises as to the proper place of learning by heart.
81. Voluntary attention is most often required for memorization, where, aside from everything else, having interest isn’t always the best condition. This applies even to spontaneous interest, as the ideas that come up on their own have their own momentum, which can stray from the intended order and result in unexpected substitutions.[72] Similar to observation, purposeful memorization requires a degree of self-control. At this stage, the question about the importance of memorizing things by heart comes up.
Committing to memory is very necessary; use is made of it in every department of knowledge. But memorizing should never be the first thing except when it is done without effort. For if the memorizing of new matter, which the pupil cannot as yet have associated incorrectly, costs him an effort, it is plain that the single presentations encounter some opposition or other by which they are repelled too quickly for their mutual association to take place. The teacher must in this case talk the subject over first, set the pupil to work upon it, make him more familiar with it, and must sometimes even wait for a more opportune moment. Where clearness in single perceptions and their association (67 et seq.) are still deficient, these must be attended to first of all. After the ideas have been strengthened in this way, memorizing will be accomplished more easily.
Committing information to memory is really important; it's used in every field of knowledge. However, memorization should never be the first step unless it happens effortlessly. If a student struggles to memorize new material that they haven't yet associated correctly, it’s clear that those individual presentations face some kind of resistance, preventing them from connecting. In this case, the teacher should first discuss the topic, engage the student with the material, help them become more familiar with it, and sometimes even wait for a better moment. When clarity in individual perceptions and their connection (67 et seq.) is still lacking, those aspects need to be prioritized. Once the ideas have been reinforced in this manner, memorization will be much easier.
The assigned series should not be too long. Three foreign words are often more than enough. Many pupils have to be shown how to memorize. Left to themselves they will begin over and over again, then halt, and try in vain to go on. A fundamental rule is that the starting-point be shifted. If, for example, the name Methuselah is to be learned, the teacher[73] would, perhaps, say successively: lah,—selah,—thuselah,—Methuselah.
The assigned series shouldn't be too long. Three foreign words are usually enough. Many students need guidance on how to memorize. If left on their own, they’ll keep starting over, then stop, and struggle to continue. A key rule is to change the starting point. For instance, if the name Methuselah needs to be learned, the teacher[73] might say in order: lah,—selah,—thuselah,—Methuselah.
Some have to be warned against trying to get through quickly. We have to do here with a physical mechanism which requires time and whose operation the pupil himself as little as the teacher should endeavor to over-accelerate. Slow at first, then faster.
Some need to be cautioned against trying to rush through. We’re dealing with a physical process that takes time, and both the student and the teacher should avoid trying to speed it up too much. Start slow, then pick up the pace.
It is not always advisable to put a stop to all bodily movements. Many memorize by way of speaking aloud, others through copying, some through drawing. Reciting in concert also may prove feasible at times.
It’s not always a good idea to stop all physical movement. Many people learn by speaking out loud, others by writing things down, and some by drawing. Reciting together can also work well at times.
Incorrect associations are very much to be feared; they are tenacious. A great deal, to be sure, may be accomplished through severity; but when interest in the subject-matter is wholly lacking, the pupil begins by memorizing incorrectly, then ceases to memorize at all, and simply wastes time.
Incorrect associations are definitely something to worry about; they stick around. Sure, a lot can be achieved through strictness; but when there's no interest in the topic, the student starts off by memorizing the wrong things, then stops memorizing altogether, and just ends up wasting time.
The absolute failure of some pupils in memory work may perhaps be partly owing to unknown physical peculiarities. Very often, however, the cause of the evil lies in the state of false tension into which such pupils put themselves while attempting with reluctance what they regard as an almost impossible task. A teacher’s injudicious attitude during the first period, his remarks, for instance, about learning by heart as a thing of toil and trouble, may lead to this state of mind, for which perhaps awkward first steps in learning to[74] read have prepared the way. It is foolish to look for means of lightening still more the exercises of children that retain and recite with facility; but, on the other hand, great caution is necessary because there are also others who may be rendered unfit for memorizing by the first attempt of the teacher to make them recite, or even only to repeat after him, a certain series of words. In attempting, by such early tests, to find out whether children retain and reproduce easily, it is essential that the teacher put them in good humor, that he select his matter with this end in view, and that he go on only so long as they feel they can do what is asked of them. The results of his observations must determine the further mode of procedure.
The complete failure of some students in memorization might partially be due to unknown physical differences. However, more often, the problem comes from the false pressure these students put on themselves while trying to do what they see as nearly impossible. A teacher's unthoughtful approach during the first lesson—like saying that memorizing is a hard and bothersome task—can contribute to this mindset, which may be influenced by awkward early experiences in learning to[74] read. It's silly to look for ways to make things easier for kids who can memorize and recite easily; but at the same time, we need to be very careful, as others may become unable to memorize after the teacher’s first attempt to make them recite or even just repeat certain words. When trying to determine if children can retain and reproduce information easily through these early tests, it’s crucial for the teacher to keep the kids in a good mood, choose appropriate material for this purpose, and continue only as long as the kids feel capable of doing what’s being asked. The outcomes of these observations should guide the next steps.
82. However carefully the process of memorizing may have been performed, the question remains: How long will the memorized matter be retained? On this point teachers deceive themselves time and again, in spite of universally common experiences.
82. No matter how carefully the memorization process was carried out, the question still stands: How long will the memorized information be retained? In this regard, teachers repeatedly fool themselves, despite the widely shared experiences.
Now, in the first place, not everything that is learned by heart needs to be retained. Many an exercise serves its purpose when it prepares the way for the next, and renders further development possible. In this way a short poem is sometimes learned as a temporary means for an exercise in declamation; or chapters from Latin authors are committed to memory in order to speed the writing and speaking of Latin. In many cases it is sufficient for later years if the[75] pupil knows how to look for literary helps, and how to make use of them.
Now, first of all, not everything learned by heart needs to be remembered. Many exercises serve their purpose when they prepare for what comes next and make further progress possible. For instance, a short poem might be memorized temporarily to practice speaking; or chapters from Latin authors might be memorized to help with writing and speaking in Latin. In many cases, it’s enough for students in later years to know how to seek out literary resources and how to use them.
But if, secondly, that which has been memorized is to remain impressed on the memory for a long time, forever if possible, it is only a questionable expedient to reassign the same thing as often as it is forgotten. The feeling of weary disgust may more than offset the possible gain. There is only one efficient method—practice; practice consisting in the constant application of that which is to be retained to that which actually interests the pupils, in other words, that which continually engages the ideas rising spontaneously.
But if, secondly, what’s been memorized is supposed to stay in memory for a long time, ideally forever, it’s only a questionable solution to keep going over the same thing every time it's forgotten. The sense of tired frustration might outweigh any potential benefit. There’s only one effective method—practice; practice that involves constantly connecting what needs to be remembered with what actually interests the students, in other words, what continuously engages their naturally occurring thoughts.
Here we find the principle that governs the choice of material for successful memorizing. And as to the amount—so much as is needed for the immediate future; for excessive quantity promotes an early forgetting. Besides, in instruction, as in experience, there is a great deal that may not be accurately remembered, but nevertheless renders abundant service by stimulating the mind and qualifying it for further work.
Here we see the principle that guides the selection of materials for effective memorization. As for the quantity—just enough is needed for the near future; having too much leads to forgetting quickly. Furthermore, in teaching, like in life experiences, there is plenty that might not be remembered accurately, but still provides valuable benefits by stimulating the mind and preparing it for additional work.
CHAPTER V
Types of Interest
83. Instruction is to be linked to the knowledge that experience provides, and to the ethical sentiments that arise from social intercourse (36). Empirical interest relates directly to experience; sympathetic interest to human association. Discursive reflection on the objects of experience involves the development of speculative interest, reflection on the wider relations of society that of social interest. With these we group, on the one hand æsthetic, on the other religious interest, both of which have their origin not so much in discursive thought as in a non-progressing contemplation of things and of human destiny.
83. Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. should be connected to the knowledge gained from experience and the ethical feelings that emerge from social interactions (36). Empirical interest is directly linked to experience, while sympathetic interest is tied to human relationships. Reflecting on the objects of experience leads to the growth of speculative interest, and considering the broader dynamics of society fosters social interest. Alongside these, we have aesthetic and religious interests, both of which originate not so much from analytical thinking but rather from a reflective contemplation of things and human existence.
The classification of interests into two groups, namely, (a) those which arise from knowledge, and (b) those which arise from association with others, and the subdivision of each of these into three groups, making six in all, is one not of necessity, but of convenience. The knowledge interests are, (a) empirical, (b) speculative, (c) æsthetic; the interests arising from association are, (a) sympathetic, (b) social, (c) religious. This classification is adopted without criticism by most Herbartian writers. That the classification is made simply for convenience may be seen from such considerations as the following:—
The classification of interests into two groups, namely, (a) those that come from knowledge, and (b) those that come from interacting with others, and further dividing each of these into three subgroups, resulting in a total of six, is not essential but rather for convenience. The knowledge interests are, (a) empirical, (b) speculative, (c) aesthetic; the interests arising from association are, (a) sympathetic, (b) social, (c) religious. Most Herbartian writers accept this classification without critique. The fact that the classification is made merely for convenience can be seen from considerations such as the following:—
- 1. Strictly speaking, all interests arise from experience, the social no less than the speculative; hence experience is not a basis for classification at all.
- 2. Æsthetic interests, resting upon contemplation, need not be put into a group with those that rest upon the perception of cause and effect, or other relations perceived by discursive reflection.
- 3. The same is true for those empirical interests that are supposed to rest upon immediate sense apprehension, such as the interest in color, shape, sound, taste, odor.
- 4. If perception, reasoning, and sensibility are made bases for the classification of interests, why should not the active volitional powers of the mind become a basis likewise? Some claim that pleasure and pain rest primarily upon the motor side of our activity, rather than upon the sensory. Our interest in doing is antecedent to our interest in knowing or feeling. This fact is fully recognized by all Herbartians in the theory of methods, though it finds no recognition in their classification of interests.
It must be granted, however, that Herbart’s classification is convenient, even if not especially scientific.
It should be acknowledged, though, that Herbart’s classification is useful, even if it's not particularly scientific.
The empirical interest is the mental eagerness aroused by direct appeal to the senses, as by novel shapes, colors, sounds, odors, and the like. Its first stage is wonder, admiration, fear, awe. The child that drops his picture-book to chase a butterfly abandons one empirical interest for a stronger one. This form of interest is usually transient; unless it develops into a new kind of interest, it is soon abandoned for some other attraction. A primary teacher may catch but cannot hold the attention of a child by sensuous devices leading to nothing beyond themselves.
The empirical interest is the mental excitement triggered by direct sensory experiences, like new shapes, colors, sounds, smells, and so on. Its first stage includes feelings of wonder, admiration, fear, and awe. A child who drops their picture book to chase a butterfly is swapping one interest for a more compelling one. This type of interest is usually short-lived; unless it evolves into a different kind of interest, it quickly gets replaced by something else that draws attention. A primary teacher might grab a child's attention with sensory activities, but they won't keep it if those activities don’t lead to something more meaningful.
The speculative interest is more permanent than the empirical.[78] It rests primarily on the perception of the relations of cause and effect; it seeks to know the reasons of things. On this account it is a higher form of apperception, or mental assimilation. The most fundamental idea in the speculative interest is that of purpose. We want to know the purpose of things, the function they are to perform, the end they are expected to reach. Thus a child has a key to the understanding of even so complicated a machine as a self-binder, or a printing press, provided he sees clearly the purpose of each. Until this is perceived the facts are an unintelligible jumble of particulars. A crude form of the speculative interest is seen very early in the child, when he demands a reason for everything. It always remains the mainspring of intellectual life; when it ceases to be a motive power to thinking, thought is dead.
The speculative interest is more enduring than the empirical.[78] It mainly relies on understanding the relationships between cause and effect; it strives to uncover the reasons behind things. For this reason, it represents a higher level of awareness or mental processing. The core concept in the speculative interest is that of purpose. We want to understand the purpose of things, the role they play, the goals they’re meant to achieve. For instance, a child can grasp the workings of complex machines like a self-binder or a printing press, as long as they clearly see each machine's purpose. Without this understanding, the details remain a confusing assortment of facts. A simple form of speculative interest is evident early in children when they ask for reasons behind everything. It always stays at the center of intellectual engagement; when it stops driving our thoughts, thinking itself becomes lifeless.
The æsthetic interest rests upon the enjoyment of contemplation, when an ideal, sometimes distinct, sometimes vague, can be perceived through a sense medium. In the Greek statue of Apollo Belvidere, a divinity is represented in marble. In the painting, Breaking Home Ties, the feelings of a lad and his mother upon parting are portrayed upon canvas. In music the ideal is usually vague, in poetry it is clear and distinct. The æsthetic value of the latter is enhanced by good oral recitation, both because appeal is made to an additional sense, and because the ears of men were attuned to beautiful poetry long before the eye learned to apprehend it.
The aesthetic interest comes from the pleasure of contemplation, where an ideal, sometimes clear and sometimes vague, can be sensed through a sensory medium. In the Greek statue of Apollo Belvidere, a god is shown in marble. In the painting Breaking Home Ties, the emotions of a young man and his mother during their farewell are captured on canvas. In music, the ideal is often vague, while in poetry, it is more defined and clear. The aesthetic value of poetry is enhanced by good spoken recitation, as it engages an additional sense and because people's ears were attuned to beautiful poetry long before their eyes learned to appreciate it.
All of these interests, the empirical, the speculative, and the æsthetic, may be classed as individual, since they rest upon purely subjective grounds. They might belong to any Robinson Crusoe who became isolated from his fellows. But the remaining groups, the sympathetic, the social, and the religious, rest upon the idea of intercourse with others. They are, therefore, of supreme importance for civilized life. Without[79] the sympathetic coöperation of men civilization would become impossible. Mephistopheles in “Faust” defines himself as “the Spirit that ever denies.”[12] Consequently any man who becomes so absorbed in his individual concerns as to deny all social duties and renounce all social benefits becomes thereby a kind of civic devil. The cynics of old repudiated all social obligations, thus making themselves bitter civic devils, while the Cyrenaics, choosing self-indulgence, but denying likewise social duties, transformed themselves into sensualistic civic devils.
All of these interests—empirical, speculative, and aesthetic—can be considered individual, as they are based purely on subjective grounds. They could belong to any Robinson Crusoe who found himself cut off from others. However, the other groups, including the sympathetic, social, and religious, are grounded in the idea of interaction with others. They are, therefore, essential for civilized life. Without[79] the sympathetic cooperation of people, civilization would be impossible. Mephistopheles in “Faust” describes himself as “the Spirit that ever denies.”[12] Thus, any person who becomes so consumed by their individual concerns that they deny all social responsibilities and reject all social benefits becomes a sort of civic devil. The cynics of old rejected all social obligations, making themselves bitter civic devils, while the Cyrenaics, who opted for self-indulgence but similarly denied social duties, turned themselves into hedonistic civic devils.
It is an imperative duty of the teacher, therefore, to arouse the social and civic interests of the children, since upon these as active forces the welfare and possibly the stability of society rest.
It is essential for teachers to ignite children's social and civic interests, as these active forces are crucial for the welfare and possibly the stability of society.
The school is the place, the studies and daily intercourse the means, whereby this class of interests may be aroused. Pupils brought up in isolation by private tutors are likely to become non-social in their disposition. Idiosyncrasies are fostered, there being little or no development of ideals of social coöperation. The kindergarten, however, when rightly conducted, is nearly always able to foster the social instincts so powerfully that even the lack of later education is not able to obliterate them. When this training is reinforced by the well-governed school, a solid foundation for civic character is likely to be laid. The studies most important for the fostering of social and civic interests are literature, history, civil government, and geography, though others have a more or less intimate relation to them.
The school is the place, and the studies and daily interactions are the means, to spark these interests. Students raised in isolation by private tutors are likely to become non-social in their nature. Their unique traits are encouraged, and there's little to no development of ideals for social cooperation. However, when properly run, kindergarten can usually nurture social instincts so strongly that even a lack of later education can't erase them. When this training is backed by a well-managed school, a solid foundation for civic character is likely to be established. The subjects most crucial for promoting social and civic interests are literature, history, civil government, and geography, although others have varying degrees of connection to them.
84. We cannot expect to see all of these interests unfold equally in every individual; but among a number[80] of pupils we may confidently look for them all. The demand for many-sidedness will accordingly be satisfied the better, the nearer the single individual likewise approaches a state of mental culture in which all these kinds of interest are active with equal energy.
84. We can't expect to see all these interests develop equally in every person; however, among a group[80] of students, we can confidently expect to find them all. The need for diversity will be better met the closer each individual gets to a level of mental development where all these types of interests are equally engaged.
85. As has already been suggested (37), these six kinds of interest arise from two sources to which historical and nature studies respectively correspond. With this the facts observed in classical high schools (Gymnasia) coincide: pupils usually lean toward one side or the other. It would be a serious blunder, however, to affirm, on this account, an antithesis between the historical and the natural science interest; or, worse still, to speak of a philological and a mathematical interest instead—as is, indeed, not infrequently done. Such confusion in ideas should not continue; it would lead to utterly erroneous views of the whole management of instruction. The easiest means to counteract the evil is a consideration of the multitude of one-sided tendencies that occur even within the six kinds of interest; we shall be able, at all events, to bring out still more clearly the manifold phases of interest that must be taken into account. For the possible cases of one-sidedness are differentiated far more minutely than could be shown by the discrimination of only six kinds of interest.
85. As previously mentioned (37), these six types of interest come from two main sources that correspond to historical and natural studies, respectively. This aligns with the observations made in classical high schools (Gymnasia), where students typically gravitate toward one area or the other. However, it would be a major mistake to claim there is an opposition between historical and natural science interests, or even worse, to refer to philological and mathematical interests instead—as is often done. This mix-up should not persist, as it would lead to completely misguided ideas about how to manage teaching. The easiest way to combat this problem is to consider the various one-sided tendencies that can arise even within the six types of interest; in any case, we can highlight the diverse aspects of interest that need to be taken into account. The potential instances of one-sidedness are much more nuanced than can be captured by simply distinguishing six types of interest.
“Is the ideal education classical or scientific?” This question, which is still debated, really means, shall we cultivate[81] chiefly the social or the knowledge interests. The historical, or culture, studies belong preëminently on the one side, the natural sciences most largely on the other. Herbert Spencer in 1860 made a special plea for science studies in his monograph, “Education,” claiming that such studies are of chief worth both for knowledge and training. At that time classical, or culture, studies had possession of almost every institution for higher education, so that Spencer’s special plea was justified. At present, however, science, which has developed its own methods of instruction, holds an equal place with social studies in the colleges and universities. When we are asked which half of human interests we will choose, the knowledge or the social, our reply can only be: We will abandon neither, but choose both. Both are essential to human happiness; both are necessary for social and material advance.
“Is the ideal education classical or scientific?” This question, which is still discussed today, really asks whether we should primarily focus on the social or the knowledge aspects. Historical or cultural studies belong mainly on one side, while the natural sciences occupy the other. Herbert Spencer made a strong case for science studies in his 1860 monograph, “Education,” arguing that these studies are crucial for both knowledge and training. Back then, classical or cultural studies dominated nearly every institution of higher education, which made Spencer’s argument valid. However, today, science, which has developed its own teaching methods, holds an equal status alongside social studies in colleges and universities. When we are asked which aspect of human interests we should prioritize, knowledge or social, our answer can only be: We will not abandon either, but embrace both. Both are vital for human happiness; both are necessary for social and material progress.
86. Empirical interest becomes one-sided in its way when it seizes upon one kind of objects of experience to the neglect of the rest. When, for instance, a person wants to be a botanist exclusively, a mineralogist, a zoölogist; or when he likes languages only, perhaps only the ancient or only the modern, or of all these only one; or when as a traveller he wishes to see, like many so-called tourists, only the countries that everybody talks about, in order to have seen them too; or when, as a collector of curiosities, he confines himself to one or the other fancy; or when, in the capacity of historian, he cares only about the information bearing on one country, or one period, etc.
86. Empirical interest becomes one-sided when it focuses on just one type of experience while ignoring others. For example, when someone decides to be only a botanist, or just a mineralogist or zoologist; when they show interest in languages only, perhaps just ancient ones or only modern ones, or even just one of those; or when, as a traveler, they only want to visit the countries that are popular, like many so-called tourists, just to say they've been there; or when, as a collector of curiosities, they limit themselves to one specific interest; or when, as a historian, they only care about information related to one country or one specific time period, etc.
Speculative interest becomes one-sided by confining[82] itself to logic or to mathematics, mathematics perhaps only as treated by the old geometricians; or to metaphysics restricted possibly to one system; or to physics narrowed down perhaps to one hypothesis; or to pragmatic history.
Speculative interest becomes one-sided when it limits[82] itself to logic, or just focuses on mathematics—maybe only as it was approached by the ancient geometricians; or to metaphysics that might be confined to a single system; or to physics that might be narrowed down to just one hypothesis; or to practical history.
Æsthetic interest in one case is concentrated exclusively on painting and sculpture; in another on poetry, perhaps only on lyric or dramatic poetry; in still another on music, or perhaps only on a certain species of music, etc.
Aesthetic interest in one case is focused solely on painting and sculpture; in another, it's on poetry, maybe just on lyric or dramatic poetry; in yet another, it’s on music, or perhaps only on a specific type of music, etc.
Sympathetic interest is one-sided when a man is willing to live only with his social peers, or only with fellow-countrymen, or only with members of his own family; while a fellow-feeling for all others is wanting.
Sympathetic interest is one-sided when a man is only willing to socialize with his peers, only with people from his country, or only with his family; while a shared understanding for everyone else is missing.
Social interest grows one-sided if one gives himself up wholly to one political party, and measures weal or woe only by party success or failure.
Social interest becomes one-sided if a person completely commits to one political party and evaluates good or bad solely based on that party's success or failure.
Religious interest becomes one-sided according to differences of creed and sect, to one of which allegiance is given, while those who hold a different view are regarded as unworthy of esteem.
Religious interest becomes biased based on differences in beliefs and denominations, to which one shows loyalty, while those who have a different perspective are seen as less deserving of respect.
Much of this one-sidedness is brought about in later life by one’s vocation. But a man’s vocation must not isolate him. Yet this would happen if such narrowness should make headway in youth.
Much of this bias comes from one's career later in life. But a person's job shouldn't cut them off from others. However, this would happen if that kind of narrow thinking took root in their youth.
87. A still more detailed analysis of the varieties of one-sidedness would be possible; it is not needed, however, for ascertaining the position of the above-mentioned[83] high school studies among the subjects of instruction calculated to stimulate interest. Languages, to begin with, form a part of the curriculum; but why among so many languages is the preference given to Latin and Greek? Obviously because of the literature and history opened through them. Literature with its poets and orators falls under æsthetic interest; history awakens sympathy with distinguished men and the weal and woe of society, indirectly contributing in either case even to religious interest. No better focus for so many different stimuli can be found. Even speculative interest is not slighted if inquiries into the grammatical structure of these languages are added. Moreover, the study of history does not stop with the ancients; the knowledge of literature also is widened that the various interests may be developed still more completely. History, if taught pragmatically, assists speculative interest from another direction. In this respect, however, mathematics has precedence; only, in order to effect a sure entrance and abiding results, it must unite with the natural sciences, which appeal at once to the empirical and the speculative interest.
87. A more detailed analysis of the different types of one-sidedness is possible; however, it’s unnecessary for determining the position of the above-mentioned[83] high school studies among the subjects designed to spark interest. To start with, languages are part of the curriculum, but why are Latin and Greek preferred among so many options? Clearly, it's because of the literature and history that they unlock. Literature, with its poets and orators, appeals to aesthetic interest; history ignites a connection with notable figures and the ups and downs of society, indirectly nurturing religious interest as well. There’s no better source for such diverse stimuli. Even speculative interest is addressed if we consider inquiries into the grammatical structure of these languages. Additionally, the study of history doesn't end with the ancients; it broadens knowledge of literature so that various interests can be further developed. When taught practically, history also supports speculative interest from a different angle. In this regard, however, mathematics takes precedence; to ensure a solid foundation and lasting outcomes, it must integrate with the natural sciences, which engage both empirical and speculative interest right away.
If now these studies coöperate properly, a great deal will be done, in conjunction with religious instruction, toward turning the youthful mind in the directions that answer to a many-sided interest. But if, on the contrary, the languages and mathematics were allowed to fall apart, if the connecting links were removed,[84] and every pupil were permitted to choose one or the other branch of study, according to his preferences, mere bald one-sidedness of the kind sufficiently characterized above would be the outcome.
If these studies work together effectively, a lot can be accomplished alongside religious education to guide young minds toward a broad range of interests. However, if the languages and mathematics were to become disconnected, if the links were removed,[84] and every student were allowed to choose either subject based on their preferences, it would result in a narrow and one-dimensional approach as described above.
88. It is admitted now that not only classical but also public high schools in general should provide for this same many-sided culture, that is, should take account of the same main classes of interests. The only difference lies in the fact that for the pupils of the classical high schools the practice of a vocation is not so near at hand; whereas, in the public high schools, there is a certain preponderance of modern literature and history, together with inability to equip completely with the helps to a manifold mental activity those who purpose to go on. Much the same is true of all the lower schools whose aim is to educate. It is different with trade schools and polytechnic institutes; in short, with those schools which presuppose a completed education—completed to the extent permitted by circumstances.
88. It's now acknowledged that both classical and public high schools should offer a well-rounded education, considering the same key areas of interest. The main difference is that students in classical high schools aren’t as close to entering a career; meanwhile, public high schools tend to focus more on modern literature and history, which limits their ability to provide comprehensive resources for diverse mental engagement for those looking to continue their education. The same applies to all lower schools aimed at educating students. Trade schools and polytechnic institutes are different; they assume that students have already completed their education to the extent their situations allow.
If, then, the programme of a public high school is of the right sort, it will show as well as the curriculum of a classical preparatory school does, that an attempt is being made to guard against such one-sidedness as would be the outcome if one of the six main classes of interest were slighted.
If the program of a public high school is done right, it will demonstrate, just like the curriculum of a classical preparatory school, that there’s an effort being made to prevent any imbalances that would result from neglecting one of the six main areas of interest.
89. But no instruction is able to prevent the special varieties of one-sidedness that may develop within the limits of each main group. When observation, reflection, the sense of beauty, sympathy, public spirit, and religious aspiration have once been awakened, although perhaps only within a small range of objects, the farther extension over a greater number and variety of objects must be left largely to the individual and to opportunity. To pupils of talent, above all of genius, instruction may give the necessary outlook by enabling them to see what talent and genius achieve elsewhere; but their own distinguishing traits they must themselves answer for and retain.
89. But no teaching can completely avoid the unique forms of bias that can arise within each main group. Once observation, reflection, appreciation of beauty, empathy, civic responsibility, and spiritual ambition have been stirred up—albeit perhaps only within a limited scope of objects—the broader exploration across a wider range of objects largely depends on the individual and the opportunities they encounter. For talented students, especially those with genius, instruction can provide the necessary perspective by showing them what talent and genius have accomplished in other contexts; however, they are responsible for their own unique traits and must maintain them.
Moreover, the above-mentioned forms of one-sidedness are not all equally detrimental, because they do not assert themselves with the same degree of exclusiveness. Each may, indeed, lead to self-conceit; but this tendency does not attach to all in the same measure.
Moreover, the forms of one-sidedness mentioned above aren't all equally harmful because they don't assert themselves with the same level of exclusivity. Each can, in fact, lead to self-importance; however, this tendency doesn't apply to all of them to the same extent.
Holding to the idea of many-sided interest, what justification is there for elective studies? To this, the reply must be made that in elementary and in a part of secondary education the principle of indiscriminate election must be rejected. The only rational election in secondary education, as already explained (65), is election among the various members of a group of similar studies. In this way the destination and ability of the pupil may be regarded, without sacrificing the needed many-sidedness. The case is different in higher education, however, for election and many-sidedness are here quite reconcilable. Higher[86] education is the comparative study of a few branches. Thus, for example, on the social side, the whole civilization of Greece is focussed now in her political history, now in her art, now in her language, now in her education, now in her philosophy. The student who studies any one of these subjects thoroughly gets a comparative view of the whole of Greek life. It is not necessary for him to study them all. The same is true of each important country or epoch. Every culture study is an eminence from which the whole is seen.
Holding onto the idea of diverse interests, what justification is there for elective studies? The answer must be that in elementary and some secondary education, the principle of unrestricted choice must be rejected. The only reasonable choice in secondary education, as already explained (65), is selecting among different members of a group of similar subjects. This way, the student's aspirations and abilities can be considered without sacrificing the necessary diversity. The situation is different in higher education, though, because choice and diversity can be aligned here. Higher[86] education involves the comparative study of a few subjects. For instance, regarding the social aspect, the entire civilization of Greece is reflected in its political history, art, language, education, and philosophy. A student studying any one of these subjects in depth gains a comparative understanding of all of Greek life. It’s not necessary for them to study every single one. The same applies to every significant country or era. Each culture study provides a vantage point from which the whole can be observed.
Likewise in science, to study a typical form of life exhaustively by the comparative method gives one an insight into all related life, as well as many glimpses into physical and chemical science. In a large sense, therefore, we study all nature, whether we elect biology, physics, or chemistry, provided we use the comparative method of higher education. In the college or university, therefore, a large amount of election is justifiable. That would be a one-sided course which neglected entirely all social or all science studies.
Similarly, in science, thoroughly studying a typical life form using the comparative method provides insight into all related life as well as many aspects of physical and chemical science. In a broad sense, we study all of nature, whether we choose biology, physics, or chemistry, as long as we apply the comparative method in higher education. Therefore, in college or university, a significant choice of subjects is justified. A curriculum that completely overlooks either social studies or scientific studies would be one-sided.
90. Under favorable circumstances of time and opportunity, such as obtain in classical and other high schools, effort, as we know, is not restricted to the initial stimulation. Hence the question arises: In what sequence shall the aroused interests be further developed? Of instruction-material there is no lack; we must select and arrange, guided in the main by what was said on the conditions of many-sidedness and of interest. Thus to recapitulate: there must be progress from the simple to the more complex, and solicitous endeavor to make spontaneous interest possible. But in applying these principles we must not[87] shut our eyes to the particular requirements and the difficulties in our way.
90. Under favorable circumstances of time and opportunity, like those found in classical and other high schools, effort, as we know, is not limited to the initial motivation. This raises the question: In what order should we develop the interests that have been sparked? We have plenty of instructional material; we just need to choose and organize it, primarily guided by the principles of variety and engagement. To summarize: there must be a progression from the simple to the complex, along with a dedicated effort to foster genuine interest. However, in putting these principles into practice, we must not[87] ignore the specific requirements and challenges we face.
91. The empirical material of languages, history, geography, etc., calls for specific complications and series of ideas, together with the network of their interrelations. As to language, even words are complex wholes, made up of stems plus whatever elements enter into inflection and derivation, and further resolvable into single speech sounds. History has its time-series, geography its network of spatial relations. The psychological laws of reproduction determine the processes of memorizing and of retaining.
91. The actual material of languages, history, geography, etc., requires specific complexities and sequences of ideas, along with the connections between them. Regarding language, even words are intricate units, composed of roots and any components that contribute to inflection and derivation, and can be broken down into individual speech sounds. History has its timelines, geography has its web of spatial connections. The psychological principles of reproduction govern how we memorize and retain information.
The mother-tongue serves as a medium through which foreign languages become intelligible, but at the same time offers resistance to the foreign sounds and constructions. Furthermore, it takes a young boy a long time to get familiar with the thought that far away in time and in space there have been and are human beings who spoke and speak languages other than his own, and about whom he need concern himself at all. Teachers, moreover, very commonly proceed on the fallacious and very mischievous assumption that, because their mode of expression is clear, it will, of course, be understood by the pupil. The resources of child-language increase but slowly. Such impediments as these must be removed. Geography extends the knowledge of spatial distances, but the inhabitant of a flat country lacks the sense-images of[88] mountain ranges; one who grows up in a valley is without the sense-perception of a plain; the majority of pupils lack the concrete idea of an ocean. That the earth is a sphere revolving about its own axis and about the sun, for a long time sounds to children more like a fairy-tale than like a statement of fact; and even educated young men sometimes hesitate to accept the theory of the planetary system because they are unable to comprehend how it is possible to know such things. Difficulties of this kind must be met and not massed together unnecessarily.—For history, old ruins might serve as starting-points if only the material they furnish do not prove altogether too scanty and is not too recent, when the object is to take pupils at an early age into the times and places of Jewish, Greek, and Roman antiquity. Here the only satisfactory helps are stories that excite a very lively interest; these establish points of support for the realization in thought of a time long vanished. There is still lacking, however, a correct estimate of chronological distances down to our own time. This is attained only very gradually through the insertion of intermediate data.
The mother tongue acts as a bridge that helps make foreign languages understandable, but it also pushes back against foreign sounds and structures. Additionally, it takes a young boy a long time to accept that there have been and still are people far away in time and space who speak different languages, and he doesn't have to worry about them at all. Teachers often wrongly assume that because their way of speaking is clear, students will automatically understand. Kids' language skills grow slowly. We need to address these challenges. Geography helps expand awareness of distances, but someone from a flat area may not visualize mountain ranges; a kid raised in a valley may not grasp the idea of a plain; and most students don’t have a concrete understanding of an ocean. The fact that the earth is a sphere rotating on its axis and orbiting the sun often sounds to children more like a fairy tale than a fact; even educated young adults sometimes struggle to accept the theory of the planetary system because they can't grasp how we know such things. We need to face these kinds of difficulties and not pile them together unnecessarily. In history, old ruins could be starting points, as long as the information they provide isn't too scarce or too recent, especially when we're trying to introduce students at an early age to the history of Jewish, Greek, and Roman antiquities. The only truly effective aids are stories that spark a strong interest, giving kids a mental foothold to understand a long-lost time. However, there’s still a lack of a proper understanding of chronological distances even up to our current time. This understanding is only gradually achieved by adding intermediate data.
92. Material for the exercise of reflection, and so for the excitation of speculative interest, is supplied by whatever in nature, in human affairs, in the structure of languages, and in religion, permits us to discover, or even merely to surmise, a connection[89] according to general laws. But everywhere—the most common school studies, such as elementary arithmetic and grammar not excepted—the pupil encounters concepts, judgments, and inferences. But he clings to the particular, to the familiar, to the sensuous. The abstract is foreign to his mind; even the geometrical figures traced for the eye are to him particular things whose general significance he finds it hard to grasp. The general is to displace individual peculiarities in his thoughts; but in his habitual thought-series the well-known concrete crowds to the front. Of the general there remains in his mind almost nothing beyond the words used to designate it. Called upon to draw an inference, he loses one premise while pondering the next; the teacher is obliged to go back to the beginning again and again, to give examples, and from them lead up to generalizations; to separate and to connect concepts, and by degrees to bring the propositions closer to one another. When the middle terms and extremes have been successfully fused in the premises, they are still only loosely connected at first. The same propositions are repeatedly forgotten, and yet must not be reviewed too many times for fear of killing instead of quickening interest.
92. Material for thinking and sparking curiosity comes from everything in nature, human experiences, the structure of languages, and religion that allows us to find or even just imagine a connection[89] based on general principles. However, everywhere— including the most basic school subjects like elementary math and grammar—students encounter concepts, judgments, and inferences. Yet they focus on the specific, the familiar, and the tangible. Abstract ideas feel foreign to them; even the geometric shapes drawn for their eyes are just particular items whose broader meanings are difficult for them to understand. The general should replace individual peculiarities in their thoughts, but in their usual way of thinking, the well-known concrete details take precedence. There’s almost nothing left in their minds about the general apart from the words used to refer to it. When asked to draw a conclusion, they forget one premise while considering the next; teachers often have to start over, provide examples, and gradually lead them to generalizations by separating and connecting concepts, inching the propositions closer together. Even when the middle terms and extremes are successfully brought together in the premises, the connections between them remain weak at first. The same propositions are often forgotten, yet they shouldn't be reviewed too many times for fear of killing rather than inspiring interest.
Since forgetting cannot be prevented, it is wise to abandon for a time a large portion of that into which pupils have gained an insight, but later on to go back to the essentials by other paths. The first preliminary[90] exercises serve their purpose if the particulars are made to reveal the general before generalizations become the material for technical propositions, and before propositions are combined into inference-series. The processes of association (69) must not be omitted between the first pointing out of common features and the systematic teaching of their rational connections.
Since forgetting is unavoidable, it's smart to take a break from a lot of what students have learned for a while, but later, they should return to the basics through different methods. The initial exercises work well if the details help illustrate the overall concepts before those concepts turn into technical statements, and before those statements are linked together in logical sequences. The processes of association must not be left out between initially identifying common traits and the organized teaching of their logical connections.
93. Æsthetic contemplation may, indeed, receive its impulse from many interests other than the æsthetic, as also from aroused emotions. Art itself, however, is possible only in a state of mind sufficiently tranquil to permit an accurate and coherent apprehension of the simultaneously beautiful, and to experience the mental activity corresponding to the successively beautiful. Æsthetic objects adapted to the pupil’s power of appreciation must be provided; but the teacher should refrain from forcing contemplation. He may, of course, repress unseemly manifestations, above all the damaging of objects possessing æsthetic value and entitled to respectful treatment. Frequently imitative attempts—although very crude at first—in drawing, singing, reading aloud, and, at a later period, in translating, are indications of æsthetic attention. Such efforts may be encouraged, but should not be praised. The genuine warmth of emotion, which in æsthetic culture kindles of itself, is easily vitiated by intensifying artifices. Excess of quantity is injurious. Works of art appealing to a higher state of culture must not be[91] brought down to a lower plane. Art judgments and criticisms should not be obtruded.
93. Aesthetic contemplation can definitely come from many interests beyond just the aesthetic, as well as from stirred emotions. However, true art can only exist in a state of mind that's calm enough to allow for a clear and coherent understanding of the simultaneously beautiful, and to feel the mental engagement that corresponds to the successively beautiful. Aesthetic objects that match the learner's ability to appreciate should be available; however, the teacher should avoid forcing contemplation. They can, of course, prevent inappropriate behaviors, especially when it comes to damaging objects that have aesthetic value and deserve respect. Often, early imitative attempts—while quite rough at first—in drawing, singing, reading aloud, and later translating, are signs of aesthetic attention. These efforts can be encouraged but shouldn’t be overly praised. The genuine warmth of emotion that naturally arises in aesthetic culture can easily be spoiled by excessive manipulation. Too much of it is harmful. Works of art that appeal to a higher level of culture shouldn't be lowered to a simpler level. Art judgments and critiques should not be pushed onto others. [91]
94. The sympathetic interests depend still more on social intercourse and family life than the foregoing classes of interests do on experience in the world of sense. If the social environment changes frequently, children cannot become deeply attached anywhere. The mere change of teachers and of schools is fraught with harm. Pupils make comparisons in their own way; authority that is not permanent has little weight with them, whereas the impulse to throw off restraint gains in strength. Instruction is powerless to obviate such evils, especially since instruction itself must often change its form, thereby giving the impression of a real difference in teachers. This fact makes it all the more necessary that the instruction in history impart to pupils the glow of sympathy due to historical characters and events. For this reason—a reason of momentous significance to the whole process of education—history should not be made to present to pupils the appearance of a chronological skeleton. This rule should be observed with special care during the earlier lessons in history, since on these depends largely what sort of impression the whole subject will produce at a future time.
94. The emotional connections rely even more on social interactions and family life than the previous types of connections rely on experiences in the sensory world. If the social environment changes often, kids can't form strong attachments anywhere. Just the change of teachers and schools can be harmful. Students draw their own comparisons; temporary authority doesn't hold much weight for them, and their desire to break free from restrictions only grows stronger. Teaching can't fix these issues, especially since the way teaching is delivered often has to change, which creates the impression of real differences among teachers. This reality makes it even more crucial for history lessons to spark a sense of empathy for historical figures and events. For this reason—an important aspect of the entire education process—history should not be presented to students as just a chronological series of events. This guideline should be especially followed during the initial history lessons, as they heavily influence the overall impression that the subject will leave in the future.
Of religious instruction, needless to say, we demand that it shall bring home to pupils the dependent condition of man, and we confidently expect that it will[92] not leave their hearts cold. But historical instruction must coöperate with religious instruction, otherwise the truths of religion stand isolated, and there is ground for fearing that they will fail to enter as potent factors into the teaching and learning of the remaining subjects.
Of course, we expect religious education to emphasize the dependent nature of humanity, and we trust that it will[92] touch the hearts of students. However, history education needs to work alongside religious education; otherwise, the truths of faith become isolated, and we risk that they won't strongly influence the teaching and learning of other subjects.
CHAPTER VI
The Instructional Material
from Various Perspectives
95. Differences in point of view give rise to conflicting opinions concerning not only the treatment, but also the choice of subject-matter for instruction. If, now, first one opinion then another wins predominance over the rest, the harmony of the purposes underlying both learning and teaching is wanting. Not only that, but the pupils suffer also directly through the lack of consistency where work is begun on one plan and continued on another.
95. Differences in perspective lead to conflicting opinions about both the approach and the selection of topics for teaching. When one opinion takes precedence over another, it disrupts the harmony essential for both learning and teaching. Moreover, students are directly affected by the inconsistency that arises when a project starts with one plan and then switches to another.
96. The teacher in charge of a given branch of study only too often lays out his work without taking account of pedagogical considerations. His specialty, he thinks, suffices to suggest a plan; the successive steps in its organized content will, of course, be the proper sequence for instruction to follow. In teaching a language, he insists that pupils must master declensions and conjunctions in order that he may read an author with them later. He expects them to understand ordinary prose before he passes on to elucidate the finished style of a poet, etc. In mathematics,[94] he demands that pupils bring to the subject perfect facility in common arithmetic; at a more advanced stage they must be able to handle logarithms with ease before formulæ requiring their use are reached, etc. In history, the first thing for him to do is to erect a solid chronological framework to hold the historical facts to be inserted afterward. For ancient history, he presupposes a knowledge of ancient geography, etc. This same view which derives the principle determining the sequence of studies from the instruction-material itself, as though it had been unconditionally and finally settled that such and such things must be taught, asserts itself on a larger scale in requirements for admission to higher grades or schools. Children are to be able to read, write, and cipher well before being allowed to enter the grammar school; promotions to higher grades are to take place only when the goal set for the grade immediately preceding has been reached. The good pupil, accordingly, is one who fits into and willingly submits to these arrangements. The natural consequence of all this is, that little heed is paid to the condition of attention, namely, the gradual progress of interest.
96. The teacher responsible for a particular subject often plans their lessons without considering teaching methods. They think their expertise is enough to devise a curriculum; the ordered sequence of content will naturally guide instruction. When teaching a language, for example, they insist that students must master declensions and conjunctions first so they can read an author later. They expect students to grasp regular prose before moving on to analyze a poet's refined style, etc. In mathematics,[94] students are required to have a solid grasp of basic arithmetic before tackling logarithms, which must be mastered before they encounter formulas that utilize them, and so on. In history, the initial step is to create a strong chronological framework to support the historical facts that will be added later. For ancient history, there's an assumption that students already know ancient geography, etc. This same mindset, which derives the order of studies from the subject matter itself, as if it were absolutely certain that certain topics must be taught, extends more broadly in the requirements for advancing to higher grades or schools. Students need to be proficient in reading, writing, and arithmetic before they're allowed to enter grammar school; promotions to higher grades occur only when the goals of the preceding grade have been met. Therefore, the ideal student is one who fits in and willingly adheres to these guidelines. The natural result of this is that little attention is given to the need for engagement, specifically the gradual increase of interest.
97. But still another consequence ensues, occasioning a different point of view. Pupils are commiserated on the ground that they are overburdened. All sorts of doubts spring up as to the wisdom of teaching the branches causing the trouble. Their future utility is[95] called in question. A host of instances is adduced of adults neglecting and forgetting—forgetting without appreciable loss—that which it cost them so much toil to learn. Of course, examples showing the opposite to be true may also be cited, but that does not settle the question. It cannot be denied that there are many, even among the educated, who aspire to nothing higher than freedom from care by means of a lucrative calling, or a life of social enjoyment, and who, accordingly, estimate the value of their knowledge by this standard. Such a state of things is not mended by a kind of instruction that awakens little interest, and that in after years constitutes the dark side of reminiscences connected with early youth.
97. But another outcome follows, leading to a different perspective. Students are sympathized with because they are overwhelmed. Various doubts arise about the wisdom of teaching the subjects that cause this stress. Their future usefulness is[95] questioned. Many examples are given of adults who neglect and forget—forgetting without significant loss—what took them so much effort to learn. Of course, examples can also be provided showing the opposite is true, but that doesn't resolve the issue. It can’t be denied that there are many, even among the educated, who aim for nothing more than a carefree life through a well-paying job or a socially enjoyable lifestyle, and who, therefore, measure the worth of their education by that standard. This situation isn’t improved by a type of teaching that generates little interest, which later becomes the unpleasant aspect of memories associated with their early years.
98. What is urged in reply is, generally speaking, true: youth must be kept busy; we cannot let children grow up wild. And their occupation has to be serious and severe, for government (45–55) must not be weak. But now, more than ever, doubt fastens on the choice of studies. Might not more useful things be offered for employment?
98. What’s being suggested in response is generally accurate: we need to keep young people engaged; we can’t allow children to grow up unchecked. Their activities should be meaningful and demanding, because government (45–55) must remain strong. However, more than ever, we’re questioning the selection of subjects. Couldn’t we provide more practical options for them?
If, by way of rejoinder, the ancient languages are commended as being preëminently suited to give pupils diversity of work, this fact is accounted for by the faulty methods pursued in teaching the other subjects. With the proper method the same many-sided activity would be called forth. For the modern languages especially, the claim is made that they, too, are language[96] studies involving reading, writing, translating, and training in the forms of thought. To this argument the unfortunate answer should not be returned, that the classical high schools must retain their Latin and Greek because they are educating future officials to whom the ancient languages are just as useful, nay, indispensable, as the modern languages to other classes. For, if the classical studies have once been degraded to the level of the useful and necessary, the door is thrown open to those who go a step farther still and demand to know of what use Hebrew is to the country parson, and Greek to the practising jurist or physician.
If, as a counterpoint, people praise ancient languages for being particularly good at giving students a variety of tasks, it's actually due to the poor teaching methods used for other subjects. With the right approach, we could encourage the same kind of diverse engagement in those areas too. For modern languages especially, it's claimed that they also involve reading, writing, translating, and developing ways of thinking. In response to this argument, we shouldn't say that classical high schools need to keep teaching Latin and Greek because they’re essential for training future officials, just as modern languages are vital for other professions. Once classical studies are reduced to just being useful or necessary, it opens the door for others to ask what value Hebrew has for the local pastor or what Greek offers to practicing lawyers or doctors.
99. Controversies like these have often been conducted as if the humaniora or humanistic studies were radically opposed to the realia and could not admit them to partnership. In reality, the latter are at least as much a legitimate part of a complete education as the former. The whole matter has been made worse by the practice of some of the older generation of teachers who, in order to make the prescribed studies more palatable, descended to all kinds of amusement and play, instead of laying stress on abiding and growing interest. A view that regards the end as a necessary evil to be rendered endurable by means of sweetmeats, implies an utter confusion of ideas; and if pupils are not given serious tasks to perform, they will not find out what they are able to do.
99. Controversies like these have often been treated as if the humaniora or humanistic studies were completely at odds with the realia and couldn't work together. In reality, the latter are just as much a valid part of a well-rounded education as the former. The whole situation has been worsened by some older teachers who, to make the required studies more enjoyable, resorted to all kinds of distractions and games, instead of focusing on building a genuine and lasting interest. A perspective that sees the end as a necessary evil to be made bearable with treats shows a total misunderstanding of the situation; and if students aren't given serious tasks to tackle, they won't discover what they're capable of doing.
We must, however, note in this connection that there are legitimate occasions even for the sweetening of study, just as in medicine there is a place for palliatives, notwithstanding the firm conviction of the physician that remedies promising a radical cure deserve the preference. Harmful and reprehensible as habitual playing with a subject is when it usurps the place of serious and thorough instruction, in cases where a task is not difficult, but seems so to the pupil, it often becomes necessary to start him by a dexterous, cheerful, almost playlike presentation of that which he is to imitate. Superfluous prolixity and clumsiness, through the ennui alone that they produce, cause failure in the easiest things. All this applies especially to the teaching of younger children and to the first lessons in a new subject, e.g., learning to read Greek, the beginning of algebra, etc.
We should note that there are valid reasons for making study more enjoyable, just like in medicine, where there are times for using palliatives, even though doctors firmly believe that treatments offering a complete cure should be prioritized. While it's harmful and wrong to always treat a subject lightly instead of providing serious, in-depth instruction, when a task isn't really hard but seems difficult to the student, it can be helpful to start with a fun, engaging, almost playful way of presenting what they need to learn. Unnecessary complexity and awkwardness can lead to failure even with the simplest tasks due to the boredom they create. This is particularly true for teaching young children and for the initial lessons in a new subject, e.g., learning to read Greek, the start of algebra, etc.
100. If, among the conflicting opinions referred to, there is any vital point of controversy, it lies in the a priori assumption that certain subjects must be taught (96). Such an assumption educative instruction cannot allow to be severed from the end aimed at: the intellectual self-activity of the pupil. This, and not mere knowledge, any more than utility, determines the point of view with regard to the instruction-material. Experience and social intercourse are the primary sources of the pupil’s ideas. It is with reference to these two factors that we estimate strength[98] or weakness in the ideas, and decide what instruction may accomplish with comparative ease or difficulty, at an earlier or at a later period. Good child literature turns to these sources even while children are only just learning to read, and gradually enlarges their range of thoughts. Not until this has been done can the question of instruction in one or the other department of knowledge claim consideration.
100. If there is a key point of disagreement among the conflicting opinions mentioned, it lies in the a priori assumption that certain subjects must be taught (96). This assumption cannot separate educational instruction from its goal: the intellectual self-activity of the student. This, rather than just knowledge or practicality, shapes our perspective on the teaching material. Experience and social interaction are the primary sources of a student's ideas. We assess the strength or weakness of these ideas based on these two factors and determine what teaching can achieve with relative ease or difficulty, at an earlier or later stage. Good children's literature connects with these sources even when kids are just beginning to read, gradually expanding their range of thoughts. Only after this has been achieved can the question of teaching in a specific area of knowledge be addressed.
The term educative instruction frequently occurs. It means, primarily, instruction that has, in the broad sense, an ethical bearing, or an influence upon character. It is based on the idea that, not school discipline alone, but also school instruction in the common branches should be of service to the child in moral and especially in social growth. The studies help to reveal to him his place and function in the world, they form his disposition toward men and things, they give him insight into ethical relations. Instruction that contains this element of moral training is therefore called educative instruction (Erziehender Unterricht).
The term educative instruction comes up often. It primarily refers to teaching that has an ethical aspect or influences character in a broad sense. It's based on the idea that not just school discipline, but also instruction in common subjects should help the child in their moral and social development. These studies help the child understand their place and role in the world, shape their attitude toward people and things, and provide insight into ethical relationships. Instruction that includes this element of moral development is therefore called educative instruction (Erziehender Unterricht).
101. The realia—natural history, geography, history—possess this one unquestionable advantage, viz., easy association with experience and intercourse. Partially, at least, the pupil’s spontaneous ideas (71) may go out toward them. Properly used, collections of plants, picture-books, maps, will contribute their share. In history, the fondness of youth for stories is utilized. The fact that these stories are partly taken from old books written in foreign languages, and that these languages were once actually spoken, has often to[99] be mentioned in passing, before the study of these languages themselves is taken up, nay, even after they have been begun.
101. The realia—natural history, geography, history—have one clear advantage: they can easily connect with our experiences and interactions. At least partially, students' natural thoughts may reach out to them. When used correctly, collections of plants, picture books, and maps can all play a role. In history, we tap into young people's love for stories. It’s often pointed out that these stories are partly sourced from old books written in foreign languages, languages that were once actually spoken, and this is frequently mentioned before diving into studying these languages, and even after beginning that study.
It is useless to undertake a demonstration of the utility of the realia. The young do not act for the sake of the more remote ends. Pupils work when they feel they can do something; and this consciousness of power to do must be created.
It’s pointless to try to prove the usefulness of the realia. Young people don’t act for far-off goals. Students engage when they believe they can accomplish something, and this sense of ability to achieve needs to be fostered.
The remark that it is useless to undertake to demonstrate to the young the ultimate utility of natural science studies leads naturally to a distinction between interest in the studies as ultimate ends and as immediate ends. It is suggested in this paragraph that pupils are interested in showing their capacity to accomplish results. It is very evident that one of the teacher’s chief anxieties must be to awaken an interest in the studies as ends, not perhaps in their final utility in life, but as fields in which useful work can be done even in the immediate present. The chief category by which to measure the pupil’s interest in the various activities of the schoolroom is the quality of work that he can be taught to accomplish. One need not go far to learn that children like those studies best in which they can do the best work. This is true in several respects. They are interested in the artistic perfection of what they can accomplish, as in drawing, painting, writing, the arrangement of arithmetical problems, so that the page presents a neat appearance, and so that all the processes are plainly revealed to the eye. They are interested in reading when they can call the words with facility, with neatness, without stumbling, mispronouncing or miscalling—when the tones of the voice are agreeable. The quality of the work, however,[100] which appeals perhaps most powerfully to the children, is that of intellectual comprehension. In the reading class it is a constant delight to discover the finer shades of meaning, to express them with the voice, to detect in others any deviation from the true thought. Reading in English is particularly susceptible to this kind of treatment. For the English language being largely devoid of inflections does not show through the form of the words the finer distinctions of thought, but the mind must perceive these from a text largely devoid of grammatical inflections. It is quite possible, therefore, to read in such a manner as to miss all but the most salient points of the matter presented. There is in reading an intensive and an extensive magnitude. Our older method of teaching reading was to devote the time to a few extracts from literary masterpieces, which were exhausted by minute study. The more recent tendency in elementary education is to neglect this side of reading and to devote the time to the cursory reading, not of extracts, but of whole masterpieces of literature. The danger of such a proceeding is that the finer qualities of reading will be neglected for the sake of quantitative mastery of a large amount of reading matter. A middle course between the two would doubtless bring better results. It would, on the one hand, secure an interest that attaches to masterpieces as wholes, and, on the other, the literary appreciation that comes from minute analysis both in thought and expression of the finer distinctions of thought. In mathematical studies, the æsthetic interest of form, or the active interest of actual performance of problems, is not the sole or even the chief interest that should be appealed to. But the pupil should feel that he is making a progressive mastery of the principles of number. It is a pleasure to apply a rule, to solve a problem neatly; but it is a still greater pleasure to comprehend[101] thoroughly the meaning of the rule, to grasp and to feel its universality, so that although it is not worth while, as Herbart suggests, to urge the ultimate function of mathematics in the life of the world, it is quite worth while to set up those immediate ends of interest such as appear in the activity of solving problems, in the æsthetic appearance of the work upon paper or board or slate, and in the comprehension of mathematical principles. These ends are near at hand; they can be made to appeal to the pupil through the quality of the work that the teacher demands of him. The same is true in the natural sciences. Even though the ultimate function of biology is an idea too remote or too complex for the child to grasp with enthusiasm, the immediate mastery of a principle in physics, or the discovery of a law of plant life, or of a fact in chemistry, may be an end in which the pupil’s most intense interest can be excited.
The idea that it's pointless to try to show young people the ultimate value of studying natural sciences highlights the difference between seeing these studies as final goals versus immediate ones. This paragraph suggests that students are motivated by the desire to prove they can achieve results. It's clear that one of a teacher's main concerns should be to spark interest in the studies as goals in themselves, not just for their long-term usefulness in life, but as areas where useful work can be done right now. The best way to assess a student’s interest in various classroom activities is by evaluating the quality of work they can learn to produce. It's easy to see that children tend to enjoy the subjects where they can excel. This is true in several ways. They care about the artistic quality of their work, like in drawing, painting, or writing, making sure everything looks nice and all steps are clear. They show interest in reading when they can pronounce words easily and neatly, without stumbling or mispronouncing, and when their tone of voice sounds pleasant. However, what likely captures children's interest the most is understanding intellectually. During reading class, it's a joy to uncover subtle meanings, express them vocally, and notice when others stray from the intended message. English reading is particularly suited to this approach. Since English has few inflections, it doesn't convey subtle differences in meaning through word forms, so readers must grasp these mainly through the text. Consequently, it's possible to read in a way that captures only the most obvious ideas. There are both intensive and extensive dimensions to reading. Previously, reading instruction focused on a few excerpts from great literary works, which were thoroughly analyzed. Recently, elementary education has shifted to prioritize skimming through entire literary masterpieces instead. The risk of this approach is that the finer aspects of reading might be overlooked in favor of simply covering a lot of material quickly. Striking a balance between these methods would likely yield better outcomes. It would cultivate an interest in complete masterpieces while also fostering literary appreciation through detailed analysis of subtle meanings. In math studies, the aesthetic appeal of form or the engaging nature of problem-solving isn’t the only interest to tap into. Students should also feel they're progressively mastering numerical principles. It's enjoyable to apply a mathematical rule or to neatly solve a problem, but an even greater joy comes from fully understanding the rule's meaning and grasping its universality. Thus, although Herbart suggests it may not be necessary to emphasize the ultimate purpose of mathematics in the world, it's definitely worthwhile to highlight immediate interests found in problem-solving activities, the aesthetic quality of work on paper or chalkboards, and the understanding of mathematical concepts. These goals are achievable and can be made relevant to students through the standards the teacher sets for their work. The same applies to natural sciences. Even if the ultimate purpose of biology feels too distant or complicated for children to get excited about, mastering a principle in physics, discovering a plant life law, or learning a chemistry fact can create strong interest and engagement.
102. Geometry has other advantages of association, advantages we have begun only recently to turn to account in earnest. Figures made of wood or pasteboard, drawings, pegs, bars, flexible wires, strings, the use of the ruler, of compasses, of the square, counted coins arranged in long or short, in parallel or diverging series,—all these may be offered to the eye ad libitum and connected with other concrete objects. They may be made the basis of systematic employment and exercises, and this will be done more and more when the fact is once grasped that concrete ideas possessing the proper degree of strength constitute the surest foundation of a branch of instruction whose success depends[102] on the manner in which the pupil forms in his mind the ideas of spatial relations. This is not grasped, of course, by those who regard space once for all as a form of sense-perception common to all minds alike. A careful study of the data of experience will convince the practical educator that the opposite is true; for in this respect individual differences are very marked. Pupils rarely hit upon geometrical constructions unaided; the aptitude for drawing, that is, for imitating the objects seen, is met with more often.
102. Geometry has other benefits of association, benefits we have only recently started to fully utilize. Shapes made from wood or cardboard, drawings, pegs, bars, flexible wires, strings, using a ruler, compass, square, and arranged coins in various patterns—these can all be presented visually ad libitum and linked with other tangible items. They can form the basis for systematic practice and activities, and this will happen increasingly when we realize that concrete ideas with the proper degree of strength provide the solid foundation for a subject whose success relies[102] on how the student mentally forms concepts of spatial relationships. This perspective is not understood by those who view space as simply a shared form of perception among all minds. A careful examination of experiential data will show the practical educator that the opposite is true, as individual differences in this regard are quite pronounced. Students rarely arrive at geometrical constructions on their own; it's more common to find an ability to draw, which means to replicate observed objects.
It is easy by abstraction to form arithmetical concepts out of the apprehension of geometrical relations. To do so should not be regarded as superfluous, not even when the pupil has already fully entered upon his work in arithmetic.
It’s easy to develop mathematical concepts from understanding geometric relationships. This shouldn’t be seen as unnecessary, even if the student is already fully engaged in their arithmetic studies.
103. To Germans the two ancient classical languages do not offer the advantages of easy transition. On the other hand, the study of Latin, even if only moderately advanced, prepares the soil for the most indispensable modern foreign languages. Herein lies an argument against beginning with French, as was often done formerly. The linking of Latin to French will, moreover, hardly win the approval of students of languages, since, not to mention other reasons, Gallicisms are a source of no little danger to Latinity.
103. For Germans, the two ancient classical languages don’t provide an easy transition. However, studying Latin, even at a moderate level, lays a foundation for essential modern foreign languages. This is an argument against starting with French, as was often done in the past. Additionally, connecting Latin to French is unlikely to be popular among language learners, because, among other reasons, Gallicisms can pose a significant risk to the integrity of Latin.
The ancient languages require long-continued labor. This fact alone renders it advisable to begin them early. The strangeness of Latin for Germans should not lead[103] to the conclusion that the study of Latin should be commenced late, but rather that during the earlier years of boyhood it should be carried on slowly. The sounds of foreign languages must be heard early, in order that the strangeness may wear off. Single Latin words will be easily mastered even by a child. These may soon be followed by short sentences consisting of two or three words. No matter if they are forgotten again for a time. That which is said to be forgotten is not on that account lost. The real difficulty lies in the multitude of strange elements that accumulate in relatively long sentences; it lies also in the many ways of connecting subordinate clauses, in the qualifying insertions, in the order of words, and in the structure of the period. Furthermore, we must not overlook the fact that children are very slow to acquire the use of dependent clauses, even in German; their speech for a long time consists merely of a stringing together of the simplest sentences. The attempt to advance them more rapidly in the syntactical forms of Latin than is possible in their mother-tongue is a waste of time; and, besides, their inclination to study is put to a very severe test.
The ancient languages require a lot of time and effort. This alone makes it wise to start learning them early. The fact that Latin sounds strange to Germans shouldn't lead to the idea that we should wait until later to study it; instead, it should be taught slowly during the early years of childhood. Kids need to hear the sounds of foreign languages early on so the unfamiliarity begins to fade. Individual Latin words can easily be learned by a child. Soon, they can move on to simple sentences that are just two or three words long. It doesn't matter if they forget them for a while. What seems forgotten isn't actually lost. The real challenge comes with the many strange components that appear in longer sentences; it also involves the various ways of connecting subordinate clauses, the additional phrases, the word order, and the overall sentence structure. Additionally, we need to remember that children are typically slow to use dependent clauses, even in their own language; for a long time, their speech consists of just stringing together the simplest sentences. Trying to push them to learn the structures of Latin faster than they can in their native language is a waste of time, and it also puts a significant strain on their willingness to learn.
Perhaps the most serious defect of secondary education in the United States is its brevity. Languages are not begun until the pupil is well on to fifteen years old. A reform most urgently needed in this country is the extension of high school influence to the two grades of the grammar school lying immediately[104] below the high school. This would enable pupils to begin foreign languages at about the age of twelve, or two years later than they are now begun in Germany.
Perhaps the biggest issue with secondary education in the United States is that it's too short. Students typically don't start learning languages until they are around fifteen years old. A crucial reform needed in this country is to extend the high school curriculum to the two grades of elementary school right below high school. This would allow students to start learning foreign languages at about age twelve, which is two years later than they do in Germany.
104. The foregoing remarks show plainly enough that in educative instruction some subjects will be found a comparatively easy and sure means of awakening intellectual activity, while others involve a more strenuous effort, which, under certain circumstances, may end in failure. The concrete studies are nearest to the pupil; mathematics requires some apparatus to render it tangible and vivid; to get pupils started properly in modern languages can be but a slow process. But this difference is, after all, not fundamental enough, nor does it affect the whole course of instruction sufficiently, to constitute a serious pedagogical objection to the study of foreign languages, so long as there is time to teach them. Their fruits mature later.
104. The previous statements clearly indicate that in educational instruction, some subjects are a relatively easy and reliable way to stimulate intellectual activity, while others require more effort, which, under certain conditions, might lead to failure. Concrete studies are closest to the student; mathematics needs some tools to make it clear and engaging; getting students to the right point in modern languages can only be a gradual process. However, this difference isn't significant enough, nor does it impact the entire teaching process enough, to make studying foreign languages a serious educational concern, as long as there is enough time to teach them. Their benefits take longer to develop.
CHAPTER VII
Teaching Process
105. Whether or not instruction will begin well and go on properly depends on a combination of three factors,—the teacher, the pupil, and the subject taught. Failure of the subject-matter to excite the pupil’s interest is followed by evil consequences moving in a circle. The pupil seeks to avoid the task set for him; he remains silent or returns wrong answers; the teacher insists on getting a correct answer; the lesson is at a standstill; the pupil’s dislike grows more intense. To conquer dislike and indolence, the teacher now refuses altogether the assistance he could give; as best he may, he compels the pupil to collect his thoughts, to work by himself, to prepare his lesson, to memorize, even to apply in written exercises what he knows but imperfectly, etc. The presentation proper has come to an end; at all events it has ceased to be consecutive. Now the right kind of an example is wanting, which the teacher should set—one of reading, thinking, writing, that implies complete absorption in the subject. And yet it is this example concretely illustrating how to take hold of the subject, how to present it, and how to associate it with related subjects, which effects the best[106] results in good instruction. The teacher must set such an example, the pupil must imitate it as well as he can; the teacher must render him active assistance.
105. Whether or not teaching starts off well and continues effectively relies on a mix of three factors—the teacher, the student, and the material being taught. When the subject doesn’t engage the student’s interest, it leads to a cycle of negative outcomes. The student tries to avoid the assigned task; he stays quiet or gives incorrect answers; the teacher insists on getting the right answer; the lesson comes to a halt; and the student’s dislike only intensifies. To overcome this dislike and laziness, the teacher now withdraws any help he might provide; to the best of his ability, he pushes the student to think for himself, to prepare his lesson, to memorize, and even to apply what he knows in written exercises, even if it’s not fully understood. The main presentation has ended; in any case, it has stopped being sequential. Now the necessary example is missing, which the teacher should provide—an example of reading, thinking, and writing that shows full engagement with the subject. Yet, it is this example that concretely demonstrates how to approach the subject, how to present it, and how to connect it with related topics, which brings about the best[106] results in effective teaching. The teacher must set such an example, and the student must try to imitate it as well as he can; the teacher must provide him with active support.
106. Instruction is either synthetic or analytic. In general, the term synthetic may be applied wherever the teacher himself determines directly the sequence and grouping of the parts of the lesson; the term analytic, wherever the pupil’s own thoughts are expressed first, and these thoughts, such as they chance to be, are then, with the teacher’s help, analyzed, corrected, and supplemented. But there are many things under this head that need to be defined and discriminated more sharply. There are analyses of experience, of facts learned in school, and of opinions. There is one kind of synthesis which imitates experience; there is another kind which consists in constructing designedly a whole whose component parts have been presented one by one previously.
106. Instruction can be either synthetic or analytic. Generally, the term synthetic refers to when the teacher directly decides the order and grouping of the lesson parts; the term analytic applies when the student’s thoughts are expressed first, and then, with the teacher’s help, those thoughts are analyzed, corrected, and supplemented. However, there are many aspects in this area that need clearer definitions and distinctions. There are analyses of experiences, facts learned in school, and opinions. One type of synthesis mimics experience, while another type involves intentionally creating a whole from parts that have previously been presented one at a time.
Here, again, many differences arise, owing to diversities inherent in the subject-matter.
Here, again, many differences come up because of the various aspects inherent in the subject matter.
107. Since instruction builds on the pupil’s experience, we shall deal first with that form of synthesis which imitates, or copies experience. We may name it purely presentative instruction. The term synthetic, on the other hand, will henceforth be reserved for that form of instruction which reveals clearly the process of building up a whole out of parts presented singly beforehand.
107. Since teaching relies on the student's experience, we'll start with the type of synthesis that mimics or replicates that experience. We'll call it purely presentative instruction. The term synthetic, on the other hand, will now refer to the type of instruction that clearly shows how to build a whole from individual parts that were presented earlier.
The purely presentative method of instruction, although practicable only to a limited extent, is nevertheless so effectual as to entitle it to separate treatment, so effectual that the teacher—and this is the main thing—will do well to train himself carefully in its use. Skill in this direction is the surest means of securing interest.
The purely presentative method of instruction, while only usable to a limited degree, is still so effective that it deserves to be treated separately. It's so effective that the teacher—and this is the most important part—should train themselves carefully in how to use it. Skill in this area is the best way to capture interest.
It is customary to demand that the pupil acquire facility in narration and description, but we ought not to forget that here above all the teacher must lead the way by setting a good example. To be sure, there is an abundance of printed narrative and description, but reading does not produce the effect that hearing does. Viva vox docet. As a rule, we cannot take for granted that a boy has even the skill and patience required for reading; and if perfect facility has been attained, the reading is done too rapidly. There is too much hurry to get to the end, or too much delay over the wrong passages, so that the connection is lost. At the most, we may let the pupils that read exceptionally well read aloud to the class. By far the surer means to the end in view is the oral presentation by the teacher. But in order that such presentation may produce its effect undisturbed, it needs to be perfectly free and untrammelled.
It’s common to expect students to get good at storytelling and description, but we shouldn’t forget that teachers need to lead by example. Sure, there’s plenty of written narrative and description out there, but reading doesn’t have the same impact as listening. Viva vox docet. Generally, we can’t assume that a student has the skills or patience for reading; even if they've become skilled, they often read too quickly. There’s too much rush to finish or too much focus on parts that don’t matter, causing the overall flow to get lost. At best, we can have students who read exceptionally well read aloud to the class. However, the most effective way to achieve our goal is through the teacher’s oral presentation. But for this to be impactful, it needs to be completely free and unrestricted.
108. The first requisite for free oral presentation is a cultivated style of speaking. Many teachers need to be warned against the use of set phrases, against[108] mere expletives, faulty enunciation, pauses filled in with inarticulate sounds, against fragments of sentences, clumsy parentheses, etc.
In the second place, adaptation of the vocabulary employed, both to the subject-matter and to the intelligence of the pupils, and adjustment of phraseology to the pupil’s stage of culture are essential.
In the second place, adapting the vocabulary used to match the subject matter and the students' understanding, as well as adjusting the phrasing to the students' level of knowledge, is essential.
Lastly, careful memorizing. At first this should be done almost verbatim. At all events, the teacher must prepare his lesson as though he had his pupils before him and were talking to them. Later on he must memorize at least the facts and turning-points of the subject to be presented, in order that he may not be compelled to consult books or look at notes. A few remarks on some particular points will be made farther on.
Lastly, memorize carefully. At first, this should be done almost word-for-word. In any case, the teacher must prepare the lesson as if he were in front of his students and speaking to them. Later on, he should have at least the facts and key points of the subject memorized so that he doesn’t have to consult books or look at notes. A few comments on some specific points will be made later.
109. The effect of the teacher’s narrative and description should be to make the pupil realize events and objects as vividly as if they were actually present to his eye and ear. The pupil must, therefore, have actually heard and seen much previously. This recalls to our minds the necessity, pointed out before, of first enlarging the young pupil’s range of experience, when found too limited, through excursions and the exhibition of objects. Again, this form of instruction is adapted only to things that might be heard or seen. We must therefore avail ourselves of all the help pictures can give.
109. The teacher's storytelling and descriptions should help the student perceive events and objects as clearly as if they were right in front of them. The student needs to have actually heard and seen quite a bit beforehand. This reminds us of the importance of broadening a young student's experiences, when they're too narrow, through field trips and showing them objects. Additionally, this approach to teaching only works for things that can be heard or seen. Therefore, we should make the most of the assistance that pictures can provide.
If the presentation has been a success, the reproduction by the pupils will show that they recall, not merely the main facts, but largely even the teacher’s language. They have retained more exactly than they have been asked to do. Besides, the teacher who narrates and describes well gains a strong hold on the affections of his pupils; he will find them more obedient in matters pertaining to discipline.
If the presentation has been successful, the students will show that they remember not just the main facts, but also a lot of the teacher’s language. They’ve retained more than what was expected of them. Additionally, the teacher who tells stories and explains things well earns the affection of their students; they will find them more compliant in terms of discipline.
The foregoing paragraphs on presentative instruction may seem strange to the American teacher. We must remember, however, that they were written before the modern era of text-books, when, in point of fact, the teacher was practically the sole reliance for the facts that the children were to learn. It is the custom, even to the present, in the lower schools of Germany, to rely very largely upon the teacher for the information which the children are to acquire. In American schools, this method is not followed, for so enormous has been the development of text-book industry, that in every field of education the richest material is offered to the schools in the form of text-books. There is, however, still a legitimate field for purely presentative instruction in the earlier grades of the elementary school, especially in literature and in the beginnings of history. The most primitive method of instruction, as we see clearly in the earlier periods of Grecian education, was the narrative. The children of those days received their instruction in history, mythology, literature, geography, by listening to the tales of heroes and heroic deeds narrated by their parents, by wandering minstrels and rhapsodists. To this day, the teacher who can narrate biographical or literary matter in an attractive manner is sure to awaken intense interest in the[110] children under her control. Perhaps one facility which the modern teacher needs to acquire more than any other is the capacity of happy, vivacious, interesting narrative cast, at the same time, into simple yet excellent literary form. Such a teacher is an undoubted treasure in the primary school. There is occasion, moreover, in nearly all school study for the presentation of supplementary material in almost every school study. This is true especially in literature and history. It is also true in geography and in mathematics, as where, for instance, the teacher narrates the methods of the ancient Egyptians in the development of geometrical ideas, or those of the Greeks. If one is teaching a foreign language, one may always find happy opportunities for introducing bits of history, biography, or other illuminating material. In the sciences nothing is more interesting to children, more stimulative of renewed effort, than narratives concerning our great scientists, their desire for education, their struggle to attain knowledge, their misfortunes, and their triumphs. Every aspect of instruction may be supplemented and illumined by instruction given in the purely presentative form of narration.
The previous paragraphs about presentative instruction might seem odd to the American teacher. However, we need to remember that they were written before the modern era of textbooks, when the teacher was basically the main source of information for what the children were supposed to learn. Even today, in the lower schools of Germany, there’s a heavy reliance on the teacher for the knowledge that children are meant to acquire. In American schools, this method isn’t followed because the textbook industry has grown so much that schools now have access to an abundance of material in textbook form for every subject. Nonetheless, there’s still a valid space for purely presentative instruction in the early grades of elementary school, especially in literature and the beginnings of history. The most basic method of teaching, as seen in the earlier days of Greek education, was storytelling. Children back then learned about history, mythology, literature, and geography by listening to stories of heroes and great deeds told by their parents, wandering minstrels, and rhapsodists. Even today, a teacher who can tell biographical or literary stories in an engaging way will definitely spark strong interest in the children in their care. Perhaps the one skill that modern teachers need to develop more than any other is the ability to tell lively and engaging narratives that are also presented in a simple yet high-quality literary style. Such a teacher is a true asset in primary school. Additionally, there’s often a chance to present supplementary material in almost every subject studied in school. This is especially true in literature and history, but it also applies in geography and math, such as when a teacher discusses how the ancient Egyptians developed geometrical concepts or how the Greeks approached it. If someone is teaching a foreign language, there are always great opportunities to weave in bits of history, biography, or other enlightening material. In the sciences, nothing fascinates children more or motivates them to try harder than stories about great scientists, their quest for knowledge, their struggles to learn, their challenges, and their successes. Every aspect of teaching can be enhanced and illuminated by instruction delivered in the purely presentative form of storytelling.
110. While skilful presentation produces results akin to an extension of the pupil’s range of actual experience, analysis helps to make experience more instructive. For, left to itself, experience is not a teacher whose instruction is systematic. It does not obey the law of actual progress from the simple to the complex. Things and events crowd in upon the mind in masses; the result is often chaotic apprehension. Inasmuch, then, as experience presents[111] aggregates before it gives the component particulars, it becomes the task of instruction to reverse this order and to adjust the facts of experience to the sequence demanded in teaching. Experience, it is true, associates its content; but if this earlier association is to have the share in the work of the school that it should have, that which has been experienced and that which has been learned must be made to harmonize. With this end in view we need to supplement experience. The facts it has furnished have to be made clearer and more definite than they are, and must be given an appropriate embodiment in language.
110. While effective presentation yields results similar to expanding the student's actual experiences, analysis makes those experiences more valuable. Experience alone isn't a structured teacher; it doesn’t follow a clear path from simple concepts to more complex ones. Thoughts and events can overwhelm the mind, leading to a chaotic understanding. Therefore, since experience presents[111] information in bulk before breaking it down into details, teaching must work to reverse this process and organize the facts of experience in a way that aligns with how we teach. While experience does connect its content, for it to truly contribute to education, experienced information and learned knowledge must align. To achieve this, we need to enhance our experiences. The information we’ve gathered must be clarified, made more precise, and expressed appropriately in language.
111. Let us consider first the earliest stage of analytic instruction. In order to understand the significance of this method of teaching, we must examine the nature of a child’s experience. Children are indeed in the habit of familiarizing themselves with their surroundings; but the strongest impressions predominate. Objects in motion have greater attraction for them than objects at rest. They tear up and destroy without troubling themselves much about the real connection between the parts of a whole. In spite of their many why’s and what for’s, they make use of every tool or utensil without regard for its purpose; they are satisfied if it serves the impulse of the moment. Their eyes are keen, but they rarely observe; the real character of things does not deter them from making a plaything of everything, as their fancy may direct, and[112] from making one thing stand for every other thing. They receive total impressions of similar objects, but do not derive concepts; the abstract does not enter their minds of itself.
111. Let's first look at the earliest stage of analysis in teaching. To grasp the importance of this teaching method, we need to consider how a child experiences the world. Kids naturally explore their surroundings, but strong impressions take precedence. Moving objects attract them more than stationary ones. They tear apart and destroy things without thinking much about how the parts relate to the whole. Despite all their questions of "why" and "what for," they use every tool or item without considering its purpose; they are only interested if it satisfies their immediate impulse. Their vision is sharp, but they rarely pay close attention; the true nature of things doesn’t stop them from turning anything into a toy, based on their imagination, and[112] from substituting one thing for another. They take in complete impressions of similar objects but fail to develop concepts; abstract ideas don't naturally occur to them.
These and similar observations, however, apply by no means equally to every child. On the contrary, children differ greatly from one another; and, with the child’s individuality, his one-sidedness already begins.
These and similar observations, however, do not apply equally to every child. On the contrary, children vary significantly from one another; and with each child's uniqueness, their one-sidedness begins to emerge.
112. It follows at once that the first thing to be done, in a school where many children are to be taught together, is to make the children more alike in their knowledge. To this end the store of experiences which they bring with them must be worked over. But the homogeneity of pupils, desirable as it is, is not the sole aim. We must take care also that the whole of instruction acts upon the particular stock of ideas of each pupil taken individually. We must seek those points of contact and departure to which attention has repeatedly been called above, and hence cannot leave the pupil’s mass of ideas in its original crude state. Thoughtful teachers have long since testified to the necessity of this requirement, which mere scholars in their zeal for learning fail again and again to appreciate.
112. It's clear that the first step in a school with many students is to make their knowledge more similar. To achieve this, we need to build on the experiences they already have. However, making the students more alike is not the only goal. We also need to ensure that all instruction is relevant to each student’s unique set of ideas. We should identify the connections and starting points previously mentioned, and therefore cannot leave a student’s ideas in their original basic form. Thoughtful teachers have long recognized the importance of this approach, which eager scholars often overlook in their quest for knowledge.
Niemeyer, in his widely read work, opens his treatment of the particular laws of instruction with a chapter entitled: “The First Steps in awakening Attention and Reflection through Instruction, or Exercises in Thinking.”[113] These exercises are no other than the elementary processes of analytic instruction. He says: “When the age, the health, and the strength of children have made instruction proper seem expedient, the first lesson should be one of the kind described in the chapter heading. Such exercises might be profitably continued in some form or other until the ninth or tenth year, and probably even later. The fact that it is not easy to describe them in a word very likely explains why we fail to find them in most programmes of private and public schools. That at last some attention is being given even in the common schools to this matter is one of the venerable Canon Rochow’s imperishable services to education.”
Niemeyer, in his popular work, starts his discussion on the specific rules of teaching with a chapter titled: “The First Steps in Awakening Attention and Reflection through Instruction, or Exercises in Thinking.”[113] These exercises are simply the basic methods of analytical teaching. He states: “When children reach an age, health level, and strength that make teaching appropriate, the first lesson should be the kind described in the chapter title. Such exercises could beneficially continue in some form until the ninth or tenth year, and likely even longer. The fact that it’s difficult to describe them in a single word probably explains why we often don’t see them in most private and public school curriculums. The growing attention to this issue in even common schools is one of the lasting contributions of the esteemed Canon Rochow to education.”
Pestalozzi, in his book for mothers, strikes out in the same direction. It will not serve the purpose, to be sure, to confine oneself, as he does, to a single object; still, the kind of exercises is indicated very definitely by him; indeed, more definitely, in some ways, than by Niemeyer.
Pestalozzi, in his book for mothers, heads in the same direction. It won't be effective, of course, to limit oneself, as he does, to just one objective; however, the types of exercises he suggests are outlined very clearly by him; in fact, in some respects, more clearly than by Niemeyer.
113. The notions of pupils about surrounding objects, that is, notions in which the strongest impressions predominate (111), must be made to approach uniformity first. This is accomplished by uniform reproduction.
113. The ideas that students have about the objects around them, which are primarily shaped by their most powerful impressions, need to be brought to a common understanding first. This is achieved through consistent reproduction.
On this point Niemeyer says, “The teacher should begin by talking with his pupils about those objects which are, at the time, affecting their senses directly. Pointing to these objects, he asks the pupils to name[114] them. He then passes on to things that are not present, but that the children have seen or felt before. At the same time he exercises their powers of imagination and expression by making them enumerate what they are able to recall. Suitable material: everything in the schoolroom; the human body; everything pertaining to food, dress, comfort; things found in the fields, in the garden, in the yard; animals and plants so far as they are known by the children.”
On this point, Niemeyer says, “The teacher should start by discussing with their students the objects that are currently affecting their senses directly. By pointing to these objects, they ask the students to name[114] them. Then they move on to things that aren’t present but that the children have seen or touched before. At the same time, the teacher encourages their imagination and expression by having them list what they can remember. Appropriate materials include everything in the classroom; the human body; everything related to food, clothing, and comfort; things found in fields, gardens, and yards; and animals and plants as far as the children are familiar with them.”
114. The next step consists in pointing out the main facts of a given whole, the relative position of these parts, their connection, and their movability, if they can be moved without damage. To this are properly linked the simplest facts concerning the uses of things. At the same time children are taught how they must not use things, and how, instead of ruining them, they ought to look after them and use them with care. The abundance and number of things, their size, form, and weight, should likewise be referred to as early as this stage, and should furnish occasion for comparisons.
114. The next step involves highlighting the main facts of a specific whole, the relative position of these parts, their connections, and whether they can be moved without damage. This is understandably linked to the basic facts about the uses of objects. At the same time, children are taught how they should not use things and how, instead of damaging them, they should take care of them and use them carefully. The variety and quantity of objects, as well as their size, shape, and weight, should also be discussed at this stage, providing opportunities for comparisons.
But something more is needed to give distinctness to the ideas of pupils, and to prepare the way for future abstract thinking. Beginning first with the objects, we derive from them the predicates by searching out the attributes; this done, we must in turn make the predicates our starting-point, and classify the objects under the heads thus obtained. This distinction[115] has been made before by Pestalozzi; it is one of fundamental importance in the preparation for generalization. While engaged in such work pupils will of themselves learn to compare, to discriminate, and, in some instances, to observe more accurately: erroneous notions due to an active imagination will be corrected by the appeal to experience as the source of knowledge.
But more is needed to clarify students' ideas and prepare them for future abstract thinking. We start with objects, derive predicates by identifying their attributes, and then use these predicates as starting points to classify the objects accordingly. This distinction [115] has been previously made by Pestalozzi; it is crucial for preparing for generalization. While working on this, students will naturally learn to compare, differentiate, and, in some cases, observe more accurately: misconceptions from a vivid imagination will be corrected through experience as the basis of knowledge.
115. Of what remains to be done, the most important task consists in securing a comprehensive view of a somewhat extended time-series, of which objects, together with their natural or artificial origins, are members. An elementary knowledge will thus be gained, especially of the simplest facts about manufacturing processes, and about intercourse among human beings, which facts will serve subsequently as the groundwork for instruction in natural history and geography. But for history also the way must be prepared by referring, although only in the most general way, to times when the utensils and tools of the present had not yet been invented, when the arts of to-day were as yet unknown, and when people were still without those materials that are now imported from foreign countries.
115. Of what remains to be done, the most important task is to secure a comprehensive view of a somewhat extended time-series, of which objects and their natural or artificial origins are members. This will provide a basic understanding, especially of the simplest facts about manufacturing processes and human interactions, which will later serve as the foundation for learning about natural history and geography. However, for history as well, we must lay the groundwork by referencing, albeit in a very general way, the times when the tools and utensils we have today had not yet been invented, when today's arts were still unknown, and when people lacked the materials that are now imported from other countries.
116. It does not follow, because no definite periods are set apart for the instruction described, that it is not being given at all. We may find it incorporated, to a large extent, with something else, particularly[116] with the interpretation of elementary reading matter, which forms part of the first work in the mother-tongue. Nevertheless, a subject that is taught only incidentally is always liable to suffer, if not from indifference, at least from inadequate treatment.
116. Just because there are no specific times dedicated to the instruction mentioned, it doesn’t mean it’s not being given at all. We might see it integrated, to a great extent, with other content, especially[116] with the interpretation of basic reading material, which is part of the initial work in the native language. Still, a topic taught only as a side note is always at risk of suffering, if not from neglect, then at least from insufficient coverage.
On the other hand, we cannot fail to recognize that the appointment of separate periods for analytic instruction may prove difficult, owing to the fact that the rate of progress depends so largely on the stock of ideas pupils bring with them, and on their readiness to utter what they think and feel. Besides, while Niemeyer expressly says, “Children taught in this manner know nothing of tedium,” he also hastens to add, “but it is easy to spoil them by too rapid changes of subject.” The same, or similar bad consequences, may result from other school exercises where the teacher himself supplies a profusion of instruction-material, and so relieves his pupils of the trouble of gathering such material from their own recollections. On the whole, therefore, it will be well enough to set apart but few hours, or weeks, for the first attempts; and these can be made a part of the lessons in the mother-tongue.
On the other hand, we have to acknowledge that scheduling separate times for analytical instruction might be challenging, since the pace of progress depends a lot on the ideas students come in with and how willing they are to express their thoughts and feelings. Additionally, while Niemeyer specifically states, “Children taught in this way know nothing of boredom,” he also quickly adds, “but it’s easy to ruin them with too many rapid topic changes.” The same, or similarly negative outcomes, can happen with other school activities where the teacher provides an abundance of instructional material, thereby relieving students of the need to gather such material from their own memories. Overall, it would be better to set aside only a few hours or weeks for the initial attempts; these can be integrated into lessons in the native language.
In private instruction the difficulty spoken of is not encountered. Besides, the ample opportunities afforded for observing the pupil’s store of ideas make it easy to devise a suitable plan for the earliest analytic teaching.
In private instruction, the difficulty mentioned doesn’t come up. Additionally, the many opportunities to observe the student’s knowledge make it easy to create an appropriate plan for early analytical teaching.
In the foregoing paragraphs on analytical instruction, the question naturally arises, “Is such instruction to be regarded as an end in itself, or as a means for preparing the mind for more perfect assimilation of the subject-matter to be presented from day to day in the various studies?” Since the time these paragraphs were written, not only Germany herself, but also America has gone through a varied experience with respect to what we call object teaching. It was at one time conceived that a specific hour should be set apart each day for instructing the children in the observation of objects. In other words, object lessons were a distinct part of the programme. It was supposed that in this way the children could be made conscious of the significance of their environment, and that it was highly desirable that such an end should be brought about. In Germany the same effort was undertaken under the name of Anschauungsunterricht, but since the multiplication of text-books, and the increased pressure upon the schools brought about through the introduction of new subjects of study, it has been found inadvisable to devote a specific period of the day to isolated analytic instruction upon objects. Such instruction, however, has by no means passed from the field of usefulness, even in our very best schools. The necessity of appealing powerfully to previous experience, in and out of the schoolroom, as a basis for understanding a matter presented in the daily lessons, is everywhere recognized. From being an end of school work, therefore, analytic instruction has passed to the realm of a useful means for arousing the mental activity of the children concerning the regular lessons of the schoolroom. It is, in modern terms, an apperceptive basis for all instruction.
In the previous paragraphs about analytical instruction, the question naturally comes up: “Should we see this instruction as an end in itself, or as a way to prepare the mind for better understanding of the material that comes up daily in different subjects?” Since those paragraphs were written, both Germany and America have had diverse experiences with what we call object teaching. At one point, it was thought that a specific time each day should be dedicated to teaching children how to observe objects. In other words, object lessons were a clear part of the schedule. The idea was that this would make children aware of the importance of their surroundings, which was believed to be a very desirable outcome. In Germany, a similar effort was made under the term Anschauungsunterricht, but with the rise of textbooks and the increased demands on schools due to new subjects being introduced, it has become impractical to allocate a set time each day for isolated analytical instruction on objects. However, this type of instruction has not lost its usefulness, even in our top schools. There's a widespread recognition of the need to strongly connect with prior experience, both inside and outside the classroom, as a foundation for understanding the material covered in daily lessons. Hence, rather than being an end goal of school work, analytical instruction has shifted to being a valuable tool for sparking the children's mental engagement with the standard lessons in the classroom. It is, in modern terms, a basis for all instruction.
117. At a later time analytic instruction reappears in other forms, those of review and the correction of[118] written exercises. The teacher has presented a body of facts; he has furnished the helps necessary for the solution of certain problems. What he has given, the pupils are expected to produce again in their review exercises and essays. Where necessary, their work is analyzed and corrected.
117. At a later time, analytical instruction comes back in different forms, like review and the correction of[118] written exercises. The teacher has provided a set of facts and the tools needed to solve specific problems. The students are expected to reproduce what they’ve learned in their review exercises and essays. If needed, their work is analyzed and corrected.
In conducting reviews a pedagogical blunder is apt to be made—a blunder that brings on the evils specified in a former paragraph (105); review is confounded with examination. The two are radically different. If the teacher could be sure of both perfect attention and full comprehension, he himself would go over the ground covered by his first talk once more for the purpose of assisting the memory; the pupils would not be called upon to take part. In this case, we should have neither analytic instruction nor anything resembling an examination. As a matter of fact, however, pupils are usually asked to reproduce what and as much as they remember. This is easily taken to mean that they should have retained everything, which, strictly speaking, is not expected even in an examination. The purpose of an examination is to ascertain the actual state of knowledge, whatever it may prove to be; reviews are conducted for the purpose of increasing and deepening knowledge. If an examination is followed by praise or censure, well and good; a review has nothing to do with either.
In conducting reviews, a common mistake can occur—a mistake that leads to the problems mentioned in a previous paragraph (105); review is confused with examination. The two are fundamentally different. If the teacher could guarantee complete attention and full understanding, he would simply go over the material covered in his initial talk again to help with memory; the students wouldn’t be asked to participate. In that case, we wouldn’t have any analytic instruction or anything resembling an examination. However, in reality, students are usually expected to recall what they remember, and it is often assumed that they should have retained everything, which isn’t even expected in an actual exam. The purpose of an exam is to determine the true state of knowledge, whatever that may be; reviews are meant to enhance and deepen knowledge. If an exam is followed by praise or criticism, that’s fine; a review has nothing to do with either.
Since reviewing and drilling, which resembles the[119] former, claim the larger portion of the time devoted to school work, it will be worth while to examine the subject somewhat more closely.
Since review and practice, similar to the[119] former, take up most of the time dedicated to schoolwork, it’s worth taking a closer look at the topic.
118. Repetition of several ideas intensifies those ideas. It does more than that. If they are of opposed nature, the reciprocal arrest that ensues resists their fusion less during the reproduction than it did in the original act of apprehension. The fusion increases in completeness, and, besides, becomes more uniform, i.e., the weaker ideas hold their own better alongside of the stronger. Again, if a series of successive ideas is repeated, the first members of the series of themselves tend to reproduce those that follow before the latter are repeated—a tendency gathering energy in proportion to the frequency of repetition. This fact underlies the increase in rapidity which comes with growing skill. Extraneous thoughts, however, very easily interrupt the psychical process of reproduction.
118. Repetition of several ideas makes those ideas stronger. It does more than that. If they are contrasting ideas, the pushback that happens helps them blend together more during the repetition than it did in the initial understanding. The blending becomes more complete and, additionally, more consistent; that is, the weaker ideas hold their ground better alongside the stronger ones. Moreover, if a series of ideas is repeated, the earlier members of the series tend to trigger the following ones even before they are repeated, and this tendency grows stronger with more repetition. This fact explains the increased speed that comes with improved skill. However, unrelated thoughts can easily disrupt the process of recalling ideas.
Let us assume that the teacher’s presentation has been an adequate one and has lasted no longer than the capacity of the pupils permitted, only a few minutes, perhaps. He himself might now repeat; but asks his pupils to do so, lest their thoughts begin to wander from the subject in hand. He comes to their aid and repeats only when their own attempts have failed. But very often they have retained some things and forgotten others. In this case it becomes his business to reinforce the ideas striving to rise into consciousness,[120] but without disturbing their movement. In other words, he should prompt neither more nor less, should lend aid neither sooner nor later, than will serve to make the pupil’s train of thought coincide as nearly as possible with that of the presentation properly given. Unless this is done, the reproduction fails to effect the required association and facility. The same ground is gone over again and again in vain; fatigue sets in, and the wrong association takes place—a matter for grave apprehension. If the pupils are in an unresponsive mood, the teacher must go slow, for the time being; if interest is lacking, he cannot incite the proper movement of ideas. If the teacher is not conducting the repetition with skill, the fragmentary answers of the pupils indicate well enough after a time that the desired current of thought has not been generated.
Let’s say the teacher did a good job with the presentation and kept it to a length that the students could handle—just a few minutes, maybe. He might go over things himself, but he asks his students to do it so their minds don’t start drifting from the topic. He steps in to help only when their attempts have fallen short. Often, they remember some things and forget others. In this case, it’s his responsibility to reinforce the ideas trying to come to mind,[120] but without interrupting their thought process. In other words, he should prompt them just the right amount, helping neither too soon nor too late, to align the students' thoughts as closely as possible with the original presentation. If he doesn’t do this, the reproduction doesn’t create the needed connections and flow. They end up going over the same material repeatedly without progress; fatigue sets in, and incorrect associations happen—this is a serious concern. If the students are not responsive, the teacher should take it slow for now; if they’re not interested, he can’t spark the right flow of ideas. If the teacher isn’t skillfully leading the repetition, the incomplete answers from the students will eventually show that the intended flow of thought hasn’t been established.
119. We have taken it for granted that the presentation was an adequate one—one that might serve as a model (105). Where this adjustment of means and ends extends, as it may, even to the language, the latter should be closely followed in the repetition, but without pedantic insistence on unimportant details. But very frequently the essential feature of the presentation is found in the sequence of thought. In that case expression will vary, and the teacher is satisfied at first if, in repeating, the pupils furnish evidence that they understand; he allows them to use their own words, though less appropriate. He[121] must, still, however, look carefully after the given sequence, which the repetition is to reproduce with the greatest possible coherence.
119. We have assumed that the presentation was sufficient—one that could be used as a model (105). Where this adjustment of means and ends extends, even to the language, it should be closely followed in the repetition, but without overly stressing unimportant details. However, the most important aspect of the presentation often lies in the order of thought. In that case, expression will vary, and initially, the teacher is satisfied if, in their repetition, the students show that they understand; he allows them to use their own words, even if they're not the best choice. He[121] must still pay close attention to the given sequence that the repetition should replicate with as much coherence as possible.
120. The case is different when later on larger sections of a course of successful instruction are to be repeated. During all the earlier stage particular facts were moved far apart (68) for the sake of clearness; by means of conversation, or of incidental mention in other recitations, or through experience itself (110), provision was made also for association of various kinds. Now it becomes the business of repetition in the first place to gather together into a smaller compass what has been expanded; next it subserves the purpose of systematic arrangement, and lastly, is often of use for making the instruction more complete and for adding the difficult to the comparatively easy. Here the mode of presentation itself changes to meet the requirements of a more advanced grade of work. But repetition immediately after the presentation, or, perhaps, during the next hour, will, as a rule, remain necessary even at this higher stage.
120. The situation is different when larger parts of a successful course need to be reviewed later on. Throughout the earlier stage, specific facts were kept separate for clarity; through discussions, casual mentions in other lessons, or through actual experiences, provisions were made for different types of connections. Now, the aim of review is twofold: first, to condense what has been expanded and, second, to provide a systematic arrangement, while also helping to complete the instruction and incorporating challenging topics with the easier ones. Here, the way of presenting the material changes to fit the needs of a more advanced level of work. However, reviewing immediately after the lesson, or perhaps within the next hour, will generally still be necessary even at this higher level.
121. Here, where compression and insertions are to modify the material of instruction, we need to inquire into the forms of connection peculiar to the objects, together with those essential for use, and to determine accordingly the series and web of ideas to be formed in the mind of the pupil. For such organization of ideas, repetition is, at all events, far better[122] adapted than presentation, which can traverse only one of several series at a time, and which passes into repetition the moment an effort is made to bring the other series forward also. In natural history, for example, various classifications occur, in history the ethnographic divisions are crossed by the synchronistic, while the history of culture demands yet another basis of association; in geography each noted city is to be a landmark, enabling the pupil to take his bearings in every direction, but cities on rivers suggest river basins and mountain ranges; in mathematics each theorem is to be kept ready for separate application, but it has also its special place in the chain of demonstrations; grammatical rules, too, should be available when called for, but it is very necessary at the same time that the pupil become perfectly at home in his grammar and know where to look for information.
121. Here, where compression and additions are meant to change the teaching materials, we need to explore the specific ways objects connect, along with those vital for use, and determine the series and network of ideas that should develop in the student's mind. For organizing ideas in this way, repetition is definitely much more effective than presentation, which can only address one of several series at a time, and turns into repetition the moment there’s an attempt to bring forward another series as well. In natural history, for instance, various classifications exist; in history, the ethnographic categories overlap with synchronistic ones, while the study of culture requires yet another basis for association; in geography, each city noted serves as a point of reference, allowing the student to orient themselves in all directions, but cities located on rivers also suggest river systems and mountain ranges; in mathematics, each theorem should be ready for individual application, but it also has its specific place in the sequence of proofs; grammatical rules should be accessible when needed, but it's equally important for the student to be thoroughly familiar with their grammar and know where to find information.
The teacher who, by skilful repetition, does justice to these multiform associations, is not always the one who shows most skill in systematic presentation, and who knows best how to make prominent the main thoughts, and to link to them those that are subordinate.
The teacher who effectively highlights these diverse associations through careful repetition isn't always the one who excels in organized presentation or who best emphasizes the main ideas and connects them to the supporting details.
122. The impulse to repeat must, as a rule, come from points with which pupils are familiar. It is further requisite that the teacher, in conducting the repetition, adapt himself to their train of thought; he must not adhere strictly to an inflexible plan. The[123] necessary corrections require delay here and there; the corrected statements often constitute new points from which to take bearings. At times the pupils themselves should feel free to indicate which topics it seems most necessary to repeat. By so doing they assume a certain responsibility as to the rest, and are made to realize all the more their obligation to make up deficiencies.
122. The urge to revisit topics usually comes from areas the students are familiar with. Additionally, the teacher should adapt to their way of thinking while guiding the review; they shouldn’t stick rigidly to a fixed plan. The[123] necessary corrections may require some pauses; the revised points often serve as new reference points. Occasionally, the students should feel empowered to suggest which subjects they think are most important to go over again. In doing this, they take on a level of responsibility for their learning and become more aware of their need to address any gaps in their understanding.
123. The correction of written work likewise falls under the head of analytic instruction, but the toil exceeds the profit if written work is demanded too early. While writing the pupil consolidates his ideas. Now if he does so incorrectly, the effect is mischievous, his mistakes cling to him. Moreover, the teacher has to be on his guard lest, while orally correcting and reading over the composition, he overestimate the pupil’s attention. When many slips occur, when a whole forest of mistakes is found to have sprung up, the pupil becomes indifferent to them all; they make humble, but they also dishearten. Such tasks should, therefore, be very brief, if the pupil is weak; nay, it is preferable to have none at all, as long as progress is being made more surely by a different kind of exercises.
123. Correcting written work also falls under analytic instruction, but the effort can outweigh the benefits if writing is asked for too soon. While writing, the student solidifies their ideas. If they do this incorrectly, the impact can be harmful, and their mistakes stick with them. Additionally, the teacher must be cautious not to overestimate the student's attention while orally correcting and reading through the composition. When many errors arise and a whole pile of mistakes is discovered, the student becomes indifferent to them; they feel humbled but also discouraged. Therefore, such tasks should be very brief if the student is struggling; in fact, it’s better to avoid them altogether as long as progress is being made more effectively through other types of exercises.
The teacher who assigns home work with a view to saving labor in school miscalculates utterly; his work will soon have become all the harder.
The teacher who assigns homework to reduce work at school is completely mistaken; their job will soon become even more difficult.
To many it seems that the exercises they assign[124] should be very easy, rather than short; and to make them easy, outlines, turns of expression, everything, is indicated as definitely as possible. This is a delusion. If composition has any purpose, it consists in making the pupil try to see what he can do without the teacher. Now if the pupil actually gets started on the exercise, the teacher ought not to step in his way with all sorts of prescriptions. If the pupil fails to make headway, the attempt was premature. We must either wait or else shorten the task, no matter if it should shrink to no more than three lines. Three lines of the pupil’s own work are better than three pages written by direction. It may take years before the self-deception due to leading-string methods is superseded by a true estimate of the pupil’s actual power.
To many, it seems that the exercises they assign[124] should be very easy, rather than just short; and to make them easy, outlines, phrases, everything, is laid out as clearly as possible. This is a misconception. If composition has any goal, it’s to make the student try to see what they can accomplish without the teacher's help. If the student actually begins the exercise, the teacher shouldn't interfere with all kinds of rules. If the student struggles to make progress, the attempt was too soon. We must either wait or shorten the task, even if it ends up being just three lines. Three lines of the student's own work are better than three pages written by following instructions. It may take years before the self-deception caused by hand-holding methods is replaced by a true understanding of the student’s actual abilities.
124. The case is quite different if, before writing, the pupil has been assisted orally in developing his thoughts. This kind of analysis is of special importance in later boyhood; but the teacher should see to it that the pupil gives free expression to his own opinion. If he does, a theme has been furnished for discussion during which the teacher will avoid harsh dissent in proportion to his eagerness to accomplish something with his pupil. To rebuke presuming boldness or impudence is a different matter, of course.
124. The situation changes significantly if, before writing, the student has received verbal help in organizing their ideas. This type of analysis is particularly important in later childhood; however, the teacher must ensure that the student feels free to express their own opinions. When they do, it creates a topic for discussion, during which the teacher should minimize harsh criticism based on their desire to help the student succeed. Of course, addressing overconfidence or rudeness is a separate issue.
Self-chosen themes are preferable by far to those that are assigned, only they cannot be expected of the[125] majority of pupils. But when they do turn up, the character of the choice alone, but still more the execution, will throw light on the opinions current among the pupils, and on the impressions which not only the school, but experience and society as well, have been constantly at work to produce. The writer’s individuality reveals itself even more distinctly. Every teacher must be prepared to come upon these individual traits, however much he might prefer to have his pupils reflect himself. It would be futile if he attempted to correct their essays by interpolating his own view; he would not by that means make the latter their own. The mode of treatment can be corrected; but other opportunities will have to serve for the rectification of opinions—provided this can ever be undertaken successfully.
Self-chosen topics are definitely better than assigned ones, but we can't expect most students to do that. However, when they do choose their own, the nature of their choice, and especially the way they execute it, will shed light on the views that are common among the students and the influences that school, life experiences, and society have consistently worked to create. The writer’s personality stands out even more clearly. Every teacher needs to be ready to encounter these individual traits, even if they would rather have their students reflect their own perspective. It would be pointless for them to try to correct students' essays by inserting their own opinions; they wouldn’t make those opinions their own that way. The way things are approached can be improved, but other methods will be needed to correct opinions—if that can even be done effectively.
125. With regard to synthetic instruction, we assume at the outset that it will be supported during the whole course of training by the merely presentative and the analytic methods of teaching, wherever these are in place. Otherwise the ultimate result will always remain problematical, particularly the union of learning and life.
125. When it comes to synthetic instruction, we start with the assumption that it will be consistently backed by presentation and analytical teaching methods throughout the training process, wherever applicable. Otherwise, the final outcome will always be uncertain, especially when it comes to integrating learning with real life.
Synthetic instruction brings in much that is new and strange; and we must take advantage of the universal charm of novelty. It must coöperate with acquired habits of application, and with the interest peculiar to each subject taught. The affairs, not of[126] Italy alone, but also those of Greece and the Orient, have become a matter of everyday discussion. There has been a general diffusion of knowledge about the facts and laws of nature. Hence even younger children cannot help but pick up many things now that will tend to forestall the indifference or aversion with which school studies were regarded not longer than fifty years ago. They seemed to be something foreign to life. At present, it cannot prove difficult to turn curiosity in the direction of distant lands, and of past ages even, especially where collections of rare articles and antiquities are accessible. This stimulation would not persist long, however, in the face of the labor of learning, if there did not exist at the same time a widespread conviction of the necessity of study, a conviction reinforced by the legal requirements of schools, particularly of the gymnasia. Accordingly, families exert a good influence with respect to the industry of children; and with the right sort of government and training in school, willingness to learn is easily secured. Less easy is it to incite a genuinely scientific desire to know, one that will endure beyond examinations. This brings us back to many-sidedness of interest (83–94). If interest were not already the end of instruction, we should have to look upon it as the only means whereby the results of teaching can be given permanence.
Synthetic instruction introduces a lot that is new and unusual; we need to leverage the universal appeal of novelty. It must work in tandem with established habits of application and the specific interests related to each subject. The matters concerning not just Italy, but also Greece and the East, have become everyday topics of conversation. There’s been a widespread sharing of knowledge about the facts and laws of nature. As a result, even younger children are bound to absorb many things that help prevent the indifference or dislike that school subjects faced not long ago, about fifty years ago. Back then, those subjects seemed detached from real life. Nowadays, it’s not difficult to spark curiosity about distant lands and past eras, especially since collections of rare items and antiques are available. However, this excitement wouldn't last long against the hard work of learning if there wasn't a strong belief in the importance of study, a belief bolstered by legal school requirements, particularly in gymnasiums. Consequently, families have a positive influence on children's diligence; with the right kind of support and training in school, a willingness to learn is easily fostered. It’s harder, though, to inspire a genuine scientific curiosity that lasts beyond exams. This brings us back to the need for a broader interest. If interest weren't already the goal of instruction, we should consider it the only way to ensure the results of teaching endure.
Interest depends partly, it is true, on native capacity,[127] which the school cannot create; but it depends also on the subject-matter of instruction.
Interest relies partly, it's true, on natural ability,[127] which the school can't produce; but it also depends on what is being taught.
126. Synthetic instruction must offer subjects capable of arousing lasting and spontaneously radiating interest. That which affords only temporary pleasure or light entertainment is of too little consequence to determine the plan of operation. Nor can the choice of such studies be recommended as stand isolated, as do not lead to continued effort; for, other reasons aside, we are unable to decide beforehand to which of the main classes of interest (83–94) the individual pupil will especially incline. The first place belongs rather to those studies which appeal to the mind in a variety of ways and are capable of stimulating each pupil according to his individuality. For such subjects ample time must be allowed; they must be made the object of prolonged, diligent effort. We may then hope that they will take hold in some way, and we shall be in a position to know what kind of interest they have inspired in one pupil or another. Where, on the contrary, the end of the thread of work is soon reached, it remains questionable whether any effort at all will be produced, let alone a lasting impression.
126. Synthetic instruction should provide subjects that can generate lasting and naturally engaging interest. Anything that only offers short-term enjoyment or casual entertainment is too insignificant to guide the plan of action. We can’t recommend choosing such studies in isolation, as they do not lead to sustained effort; besides other reasons, we can’t predict which of the main types of interest (83–94) the individual student will be particularly drawn to. Priority should be given to those subjects that engage the mind in multiple ways and can motivate each student according to their unique traits. Ample time must be dedicated to these subjects, and they should be the focus of extended, focused effort. We can then hope that they will resonate somehow, allowing us to understand what kind of interest they have sparked in each student. In contrast, if the end of the task is reached too quickly, it remains uncertain whether any effort will be made at all, let alone leave a lasting impression.
127. The subject-matter having been chosen, the treatment must be adjusted to it in such a way as to bring it within reach of the pupils. For the exercises growing out of such treatment, the well-known rule holds in general: the easy before the difficult, or, more[128] specifically, that which prepares the way before that which cannot be firmly grasped without preliminary knowledge. To insist, however, on perfect mastery in this respect, is often equivalent to scaring away interest. Absolute proficiency in preliminary knowledge is a late achievement, nor is it attained without fatigue. The teacher has to be satisfied if the mastery acquired is such that what is lacking can, without serious delay, be added by him in practice. To make the road so level as to do away entirely with the necessity for occasional leaps (96), means to provide for the convenience of the teacher rather than for that of the pupils. The young love to climb and jump; they do not take kindly to an absolutely level path. But they are afraid in the dark. There must be light enough for them to see by; in other words, the subject must lie spread out before their eyes with such distinctness that each step is seen to be a step forward, which brings them perceptibly nearer to a distant goal.
127. Once the topic is chosen, the teaching approach needs to be adjusted so that it’s accessible to the students. For the exercises that come from this approach, the well-known rule generally applies: start with the easy before moving on to the difficult, or, more specifically, begin with what lays the groundwork before tackling anything that can't be fully understood without prior knowledge. However, insisting on complete mastery in this regard can often discourage interest. Achieving complete proficiency in foundational knowledge takes time and effort. The teacher should be satisfied if the level of understanding reached is such that any gaps can be filled in during practice without too much delay. Creating a perfectly smooth path that eliminates the need for occasional challenges means catering more to the teacher's convenience than to the students'. Young learners enjoy climbing and jumping; they don't appreciate a completely flat path. However, they do need enough light to see; in other words, the subject should be presented clearly so that every step is recognized as progress, bringing them closer to their ultimate goal.
128. With regard to the sequence of studies we need to distinguish first of all between preparatory knowledge and ability to do. As is well known, the latter, even when it has been fully attained, can be secured against loss only by long-continued practice. Hence the practice of the pupil’s skill must go on constantly from the time when he first learns to apply what he knows. But merely preliminary knowledge,[129] which produced fatigue before it was mastered, may be allowed to drop out of the memory. Enough remains to make it easier to resume the subject at a later time (92, 103). Accordingly, not the preliminary knowledge just referred to, but the pupil’s facility in doing, supplies the principle determining sequence. In the case of all essential elementary information—knowledge of rudiments of grammar, arithmetic, and geometry—it will be found expedient to begin with the simplest elements long before any practical application is made. In such first lessons individual facts only are presented. These are made clear to the pupils (68, 69); here and there they are associated. Fatigue is avoided if possible. Even if the earliest attempts at memorizing should prove successful, it will be safer, instead of relying on this fact, to postpone the whole matter for a time. At a later period the same subject is resumed from the beginning without any demand on the teacher’s part that some things should have been retained. This time, however, it will be possible to introduce a somewhat larger quantity of the instruction-material, and it will not be too early to make pupils perceive the connection between individual facts. If pupils experience difficulty in comprehending, we should be careful not to advance too rapidly; the greater the difficulty, the greater the need for caution. When the time comes for practical application, an earnest, diligent effort[130] must be insisted on, but only for tasks of moderate length, and without exacting too much by harsh means. Not every pupil can do everything. Sometimes a pupil will at a later period acquire the power he does not possess now, if only his chances for success have not been spoiled by earlier blindness on the part of his teacher.
128. When it comes to the order of studies, we need to first differentiate between foundational knowledge and the ability to apply it. As we know, the latter can only be maintained through continuous practice, even when it's fully developed. This means that a student’s skills must be practiced consistently from the moment they start to apply what they’ve learned. However, basic knowledge, which can be draining before fully understood, may fade from memory. What's left will still help make it easier to return to the topic later ([129]). Therefore, it’s not the foundational knowledge mentioned earlier, but rather the student’s proficiency in application that dictates the sequence of learning. For all essential basic information—like the basics of grammar, arithmetic, and geometry—it’s best to start with the simplest concepts well before any real-world application occurs. In these initial lessons, only individual facts are presented. These must be made clear to the students ([130]); occasionally, they are linked together. We try to avoid fatigue as much as possible. Even if the first attempts at memorizing seem successful, it’s wise to temporarily set aside the entire matter. Later on, the same topic can be revisited from the start without expecting that some information should have been retained. This time, it will be possible to introduce a larger volume of instructional material, and it won't be too soon to help students see the connections between individual facts. If students struggle to understand, we should be careful not to move too quickly; the greater the difficulty, the more caution is needed. When it's time for practical application, we must emphasize the importance of earnest, diligent effort, but only for moderately sized tasks, avoiding harsh demands. Not every student can do everything. Sometimes a student will later acquire abilities they currently lack, as long as their chances for success haven’t been sabotaged by their teacher's earlier oversight.
129. Again, corresponding to each stage of instruction, there is a certain capacity for apperceiving attention (77) which deserves careful consideration. For we ought to avail ourselves of the comparatively easy in order to facilitate indirectly what would otherwise prove difficult and time-consuming.
We need to distinguish between insertion and continuation, and to connect this distinction with the division of ideas into spontaneous and induced (71). It is easier to fill in between familiar points than it is to continue, because the continued series is in close contact with the well known only at the starting-point. Easiest of all is insertion between free-rising ideas, between those ideas that occur to the pupil spontaneously, when he has been led into a certain field of consciousness. Hardest of all, and least certain of success, is the continuation of lessons that can be revived in consciousness only by a laborious effort of memory. Intermediate in difficulty are the insertion of new elements between induced or reproduced ideas, and continuation on the basis of free-rising, or[131] spontaneous, ideas. That there may be many gradations besides is of course self-evident.
We need to differentiate between insertion and continuation, and link this distinction to the division of ideas into spontaneous and induced (71). It’s easier to fill in gaps between familiar points than to continue, because the continued series only relates closely to what we know at the starting point. The easiest is to insert between freely generated ideas, those that pop into the learner’s mind spontaneously when they've been introduced to a certain area of thought. The hardest, and least likely to succeed, is continuing lessons that can only be recalled with a lot of mental effort. In between, there are the insertion of new elements among induced or recalled ideas, and continuation based on freely generated or spontaneous ideas. Of course, it’s clear that there can be many variations in difficulty.
The teacher who knows his pupils well will be able to make frequent use of these distinctions. Only a very general outline of their application can be given here.
The teacher who knows their students well will be able to use these distinctions often. Only a very basic overview of their application can be provided here.
The realia and mathematics can be connected more easily than other studies with the pupil’s experience (101, 102). If the teacher has properly availed himself of this advantage, he may count on ideas that rise spontaneously, and his task will then consist in first establishing a few suitable cardinal points so that insertions may be made farther on.
The real-life experiences and math can be connected more easily than other subjects with the student’s experience (101, 102). If the teacher has taken advantage of this opportunity, they can expect ideas to emerge naturally, and their job will then be to first establish a few key points so that additional concepts can be introduced later on.
Languages present more serious difficulties. It is true that progress in the vernacular is made through apperception by the pupil’s earlier attainments in his mother-tongue, and through the insertion of the new into the old. But in foreign languages, which associate themselves with the mother-tongue only gradually, apperception and insertion cannot take place until after some knowledge of the language has been acquired. And this knowledge must grow considerably before we can reasonably look for spontaneous ideas. If now the reproduced ideas become encumbered with additional new ones, worst of all through mere continuation, we need not wonder if the result is useless chaos.
Languages present more significant challenges. It's true that progress in the native language comes from students' previous knowledge of their mother tongue and from connecting the new with the old. But with foreign languages, which relate to the mother tongue only gradually, understanding and connection can’t happen until after some familiarity with the language has been developed. And this familiarity needs to increase significantly before we can expect spontaneous ideas. If the ideas being recalled become mixed up with more new ones, especially through mere continuation, it’s no surprise that the outcome is just a confusing mess.
This explains, no doubt, why the attempts to teach[132] the ancient languages ex usu, after the manner in which the language of a foreign country is easily learned by residence in that country, had to end in failure. One who learns French in France has persons and actions before his eyes; he easily infers that which concerns him. Such apperception takes place undoubtedly by means of spontaneous ideas with which the foreign language becomes associated. Before long the language itself becomes an apperceiving factor and participates in the process of learning. For the ancient languages, on the contrary, a grammatical working basis is needed first, especially a knowledge of inflectional endings, pronouns, and particles. The blunder should not be made, to be sure, of beginning with a marshalling of the hosts of grammar, as though grammar itself needed no base of operations. Long practice of what is most necessary must precede. But the worst plan would be to start in with cursory reading; in other words, to continue without making sure of anything.
This explains, without a doubt, why attempts to teach[132] ancient languagesex usu, like how someone can easily learn a foreign language by living in the country, ultimately ended in failure. A person learning French in France has people and actions all around them; they can easily figure out what’s important to them. This understanding definitely happens through spontaneous ideas that connect with the new language. Soon enough, the language itself helps in the learning process. However, with ancient languages, a solid grammatical foundation is necessary first, particularly an understanding of inflectional endings, pronouns, and particles. It would be a mistake to start with a focus on grammar alone, as if grammar itself doesn’t need a practical base. A lot of practice on the essentials must come first. But the worst approach would be to dive in with superficial reading, meaning to just keep going without confirming anything.
Even cursory reading, however, produces good results under one condition; namely, the existence of a lively interest in the contents.
Even a quick read can yield good results, but only if there's a genuine interest in the material.
130. When the thoughts of the reader hasten on in advance of the words and get hold of the general sense correctly, the required apperception is performed by means of spontaneous ideas together with the insertion of whatever was not inferred. But this presupposes[133] a very favorable relation of the book to the reader. Hence texts used in the teaching of a language must be chosen with very great care, and their contents explained.
130. When readers' thoughts race ahead of the words and grasp the overall meaning accurately, the necessary understanding happens through spontaneous ideas and the inclusion of anything that wasn't directly stated. However, this presupposes[133] a very positive relationship between the book and the reader. Therefore, texts used for teaching a language need to be selected very carefully, and their content should be explained.
Such work should not be slighted in favor of grammar; on the other hand, as much grammar must be given as is necessary. Some of the essentials will have to precede the reading; complementary facts will be presented in connection with the reading; other portions of the grammatical apparatus will be introduced at suitable halting-places. Written exercises belong elsewhere and stand in a different relation to grammar.
Such work shouldn’t be overlooked for the sake of grammar; however, we should only cover as much grammar as necessary. Some basics need to be taught before the reading; additional facts will be introduced alongside the reading; other parts of grammar will be brought in at appropriate pauses. Written exercises fit better in a different context and relate differently to grammar.
The interest in an author depends very largely on historical preparation; here we cannot fail to discover connection between philology and the so-called real studies.
The interest in an author largely depends on their historical background; here we can clearly see a connection between philology and what are called the real studies.
CHAPTER VIII
Comments on the Overall Instruction Plan
131. Where many diverse means are to coöperate for the attainment of one end, where many obstacles have to be overcome, where persons of higher, equal, and lower rank enter as factors requiring consideration, it is always a difficult matter to keep the end itself, the one fixed goal, steadily in view. In instruction the difficulty is increased by the fact that no one single teacher can impart the whole, and that consequently a number of teachers are obliged to depend on one another. But for this very reason, however much circumstances may vary the courses of study, the common end, namely, many-sided, well-balanced, well-connected interest, in the achievement of which the true development of mental powers consists, needs to be lifted into prominence as the one thing toward which all details of procedure should point.
131. Where's it at? many different methods are working together to achieve a common goal, where numerous challenges must be tackled, and where individuals of varying ranks—higher, equal, and lower—must be considered, it’s always tough to keep that ultimate objective in clear focus. In education, this challenge is heightened by the fact that no single teacher can cover everything, which means a group of teachers must rely on each other. However, for that very reason, no matter how the study programs may change, the shared objective—gaining a diverse, well-rounded, and interconnected understanding, which is essential for the true growth of mental capabilities—must be emphasized as the single focus that all instructional efforts should aim toward.
132. No more time, we need to realize at the outset, should be demanded for instruction than is consistent with the proviso that the pupils retain their natural buoyancy of spirits. This must be insisted on, and not merely for the sake of health and physical vigor;[135] a more direct argument for our present purpose lies in the fact that all art and labor employed to keep the attention awake will be thwarted by the disinclination to study caused by sitting too long, and even by excessive mental application alone. Forced attention does not suffice for instruction, even though it may be had through disciplinary measures.
132. We shouldn’t require more time for instruction than what allows students to keep their natural energy and enthusiasm. This is essential, not only for health and physical well-being;[135] a more pressing reason for what we're discussing is that any effort to maintain attention will be undermined by the reluctance to study that comes from sitting for too long or even from working the mind too hard. Forced attention isn’t enough for effective learning, even if it’s achieved through strict discipline.
It is urgently necessary that every school have not only spacious schoolrooms, but also a playground; it is further necessary that each recitation be followed by an intermission, that after the first two periods permission be granted for exercise in the open air, and that the same permission be given after the third period if there is a fourth to follow.
It is essential that every school has not only roomy classrooms but also a playground; it’s also important that every class is followed by a break, that after the first two sessions students are allowed to exercise outside, and that the same allowance applies after the third session if there is a fourth one to follow.
Still more urgent is the demand that pupils shall not be deprived of their hours of needed recreation by an excessive amount of school work to be done at home. The teacher who loads pupils down with home tasks in order to dispense as much as possible with perhaps uncertain home supervision, substitutes a certain and general evil for a possible and partial one.
Still more urgent is the demand that students should not be deprived of their necessary downtime by an excessive amount of homework. A teacher who piles on assignments to avoid relying on possibly inconsistent supervision at home replaces a definite and widespread problem with a potential and lesser one.
The neglect of such precautions has given rise in recent times to very bitter complaints, which will continue to be heard in future for similar reasons. Violent gymnastic exercise is not the means to put a stop to them. They threaten to lead to another extreme—such restrictions upon instruction as will make an inner unity of work impossible.
The lack of these precautions has led to strong complaints lately, and this will keep happening for similar reasons in the future. Intense physical exercise isn’t the solution to stop them. It risks going to the other extreme—putting restrictions on teaching that will make it impossible to achieve unity in our efforts.
The subjects of fatigue and school hygiene have now grown to unexpected dimensions. Many periodicals are devoted to them, while the volume of literature bearing upon them has passed the stage where one person can be expected to command it all. In his “Bibliography of School Hygiene,” published in the “Proceedings of the National Educational Association for 1898,” Professor William H. Burnham enumerates four hundred and thirty-six standard works, articles, and journals dedicated to this cause. Many of these books, like those of Eulenberg and Bach, or Burgerstein and Netolitzky, comprise hundreds of pages, being based on extended experiment and research.
The topics of fatigue and school hygiene have now expanded to surprising levels. Many magazines focus on them, and the amount of related literature has become too vast for any one person to grasp completely. In his “Bibliography of School Hygiene,” published in the “Proceedings of the National Educational Association for 1898,” Professor William H. Burnham lists four hundred and thirty-six key works, articles, and journals dedicated to this topic. Many of these books, like those by Eulenberg and Bach, or Burgerstein and Netolitzky, consist of hundreds of pages and are based on extensive experiments and research.
133. The time properly belonging to instruction must not be scattered. The deep-rooted practice of assigning two hours per week to one study and two hours to another, each lesson separated from the next by an interval of two or three days, is absurd, because incompatible with continuity of presentation. Of course, if the teacher can stand this arrangement, the pupils will have to endure it.
133. The time allocated for learning should be focused. The long-standing habit of dedicating two hours a week to one subject and another two hours to a different subject, with a gap of two or three days between lessons, is ridiculous because it disrupts the flow of learning. Naturally, if the teacher can manage this setup, the students will have to deal with it too.
The subjects of instruction must be taken up in order that each may have its share of continuous time. To give a whole term to each is not always practicable; frequently shorter periods will have to suffice.
The subjects of instruction should be addressed in such a way that each one gets its fair share of consistent time. It’s not always feasible to dedicate an entire term to each; often, shorter periods will have to do.
Again, one subject must not be split into several, according to the names of its branches. If, for example, we should set apart separate hours for Greek and Roman antiquities and again for mythology in addition to the time designated for the reading of[137] ancient authors, separate hours for the systematic survey of the branches of knowledge besides those reserved for German in the highest class of the gymnasium, separate hours for analytic geometry alongside of algebra, we should tear asunder where we ought to join together, and should dissipate the time at our disposal.
Once again, one topic should not be divided into multiple subjects based on the names of its branches. For instance, if we were to dedicate separate hours for Greek and Roman history, and additional time for mythology on top of the scheduled time for reading [137] ancient texts, along with distinct hours for systematically exploring different areas of knowledge besides those allocated for German in the highest level of gymnasium, and separate hours for analytic geometry in addition to algebra, we would be splitting apart what should be kept together, ultimately wasting the time we have.
Saving time depends on methods better than these,—on proficiency in presenting a subject and skill in conducting recitations.
Saving time relies on better methods than these—on being skilled at presenting a topic and good at leading discussions.
Despite the protest here entered, German schools still adhere to the plan of presenting many subjects simultaneously, few hours per week being devoted to each. American schools are fairly free from the reproach, it being an exception to find standard subjects taught less than four or five times per week.
Despite the objections raised here, German schools still follow the approach of teaching multiple subjects at once, with only a few hours per week dedicated to each. American schools are generally not criticized for this; it's unusual to find core subjects taught less than four or five times a week.
134. As boys grow older, they may derive a great deal of profit from reading and doing many things by themselves. Following their own choice, they develop in accordance with their individual traits. We question, however, the wisdom of calling for reports on such outside pursuits. Pupils of ordinary capacity should not be made ambitious to imitate what they are not fitted for; extensive reading must not impair feeling and thinking. Breadth of learning is not identical with depth, and cannot make up for lack of depth. Instead of reading, some engage in the study of a fine art. Others are compelled at an early age to give lessons in order to support themselves. These learn while teaching.
134. As boys get older, they can gain a lot from reading and doing things on their own. By following their own interests, they grow according to their personal traits. However, we question the wisdom of requiring reports on these outside activities. Average students shouldn't feel pressured to copy things they're not suited for; too much reading shouldn’t compromise their ability to feel and think. Having a broad range of knowledge isn’t the same as having deep understanding and doesn’t compensate for a lack of it. Instead of reading, some focus on mastering an art. Others are forced to give lessons at a young age to support themselves. They learn while teaching.
The essentials of a coherent scheme of studies must not be dependent on outside reading; they must be embraced in the plan of instruction itself.
The core elements of a clear study plan shouldn't rely on outside reading; they should be included in the teaching approach itself.
135. From beginning to end the course of study must be arranged so as to provide for each of the main classes of interest. The empirical interest, to be sure, is called forth everywhere more easily than any of the other kinds. But religious instruction always fosters sympathetic interest; in this it must have the assistance of history and language study. Æsthetic culture at first depends on the work in the mother-tongue; it is desirable to have, in addition, instruction in singing, which at the same time promotes the health of the pupil. Later on, the ancient classics contribute their share of influence. Training in thinking is afforded by analytic, grammatical, and mathematical instruction; toward the end, also, by the study of history, which then becomes a search for causes and effects. Coöperation of this sort is to be sought everywhere; the authors to be studied must be selected with this end in view, and interpreted accordingly.
135. From start to finish, the course of study should be organized to address each of the main areas of interest. The empirical interest is naturally easier to engage than the others. However, religious education always encourages empathetic interest; it needs support from history and language studies. Aesthetic development initially relies on work in the mother tongue; it is also beneficial to include singing instruction, which simultaneously supports the student's health. As time goes on, the ancient classics add their influence. Training in critical thinking comes from analytic, grammatical, and mathematical education; towards the end, it also arises from studying history, which then becomes an exploration of causes and effects. This kind of collaboration should be pursued in all areas; selected authors should be chosen with this goal in mind and interpreted accordingly.
If there is a defect in Herbart’s scheme of interests as a guide to the selection of the studies of the curriculum, it lies in the fact that the interests named are too exclusively applied to the pupil’s individual life, and not enough to his life as a member of the social whole. There is an important sense in which even natural science, which may be expected to cultivate the speculative interests, is social; for science becomes[139] truly significant only when it contributes to the service of men. The fact that we now live in an industrial age, that life is preserved from disease in so large a measure, that the well-being of every community is advancing so rapidly, that universal education is now a fact rather than a dream, is due to the application of science to human welfare. Consequently, we are not restricted to a few humanitarian topics, like history and literature, for the development of our social interests. We find that every study has its sociological as well as its personal bearings. On the other hand, since all studies are both subjective and objective in the interests they arouse, it would be possible to awaken all the six classes of interest enumerated by teaching but a fraction of what we now consider needful in a good curriculum. It would seem, therefore, that the six classes of interest, at best, indicate what the quality of our teaching should be, not with sufficient accuracy what subjects should be taught. The latter is determined quite as much by social as by psychological needs.
If there's a flaw in Herbart’s interest-based approach to selecting curriculum studies, it’s that the interests mentioned focus too much on the individual student and not enough on their role within the larger society. Even natural science, which is expected to nurture speculative interests, has a social aspect; science becomes truly meaningful only when it serves humanity. The fact that we live in an industrial age, that we’ve made significant strides in preventing disease, that the well-being of communities is improving rapidly, and that universal education is a reality rather than a dream, is all thanks to the application of science for human benefit. Therefore, we aren't limited to just a few humanitarian subjects like history and literature to foster our social interests. We can see that every subject has both sociological and personal implications. On the flip side, since all subjects can provoke both subjective and objective interests, it's possible to stimulate all six classes of interest by teaching just a portion of what we now view as essential for a solid curriculum. Thus, the six classes of interest mainly suggest the quality of our teaching but don’t precisely indicate which subjects should be taught. The choice of subjects is influenced as much by social needs as by psychological ones.
SECTION III
Training
CHAPTER I
The Connection Between Training, Government, and Education
136. Training looks toward the pupil’s future. It is founded on hope, and shows itself, to begin with, in patience. It tempers government, the object of which might perhaps be realized more speedily by greater rigor. It moderates even instruction in case the latter puts too great a strain upon the pupil. But it also combines with government as well as instruction, and lightens their work.
136. Training focuses on the student's future. It's built on hope and starts with patience. It balances governance, which could probably achieve its goals faster with stricter measures. It even softens instruction if it's too demanding for the student. However, it also works alongside governance and instruction to make their tasks easier.
Training consists primarily in a certain personal attitude, identical if possible with a kind way of treating pupils. This implies readiness on the part of the teacher to listen to the wishes and utterances of the pupil, who, in the midst of strangers, looks to his teacher (and to the family in charge of his education) for sympathy and support. But training becomes active where the pupil needs help, especially[141] help against his own weaknesses and faults, which might frustrate the hopes centred in him.
Training is mainly about having the right personal attitude, ideally combined with a kind way of treating students. This means the teacher should be ready to listen to the student’s wishes and thoughts, as the student, surrounded by strangers, looks to the teacher (and the family responsible for their education) for understanding and support. However, training becomes truly effective when the student needs assistance, especially[141] help with their own weaknesses and flaws that could hinder the hopes placed in them.
137. Training insists on becoming conduct; it encourages cheerfulness of disposition. In either case it remains within limits compatible with the occupations connected with government and instruction. The pupil is never to lose sight of the subject on which he is engaged; it would be bad if a desire to show off, or to amuse himself, should take possession of him and cause him to forget his work.
137. Training aims to become a way of life; it promotes a positive attitude. In both situations, it stays within boundaries suitable for jobs related to governance and teaching. The student should always keep the focus on the topic at hand; it would be detrimental if a need to show off or entertain himself took over and made him neglect his responsibilities.
The wise teacher will be glad to make himself personally agreeable to his pupil as long as the conduct of the latter does not call for the opposite treatment. Supervision grows less irksome in consequence. Gentle words forestall, if anything can, all severer measures.
The wise teacher will be happy to be friendly with his student as long as the student's behavior doesn't require a different approach. Monitoring becomes less bothersome as a result. Kind words prevent, if anything can, any harsher actions.
138. The teacher does not look upon the progress resulting from his teaching with feelings of indifference. His sympathy, even solicitude it may be, coöperates powerfully with the greater or lesser degree of interest awakened in the learner. Training, however, can never be made a substitute where there is no interest or, worse still, where indifference has become positive dislike.
138. The teacher doesn't regard the progress from his teaching with indifference. His empathy, even concern, works strongly with the level of interest sparked in the student. However, training can never replace the absence of interest or, even worse, when indifference has turned into a strong dislike.
139. In instruction the presence of interest cannot be simply assumed; just as little can good intentions on the pupil’s part always be presupposed in training. One thing, however, must be taken for granted: the[142] pupil must not have come to feel that the discipline is weak and the instruction poor. Any defect in either direction must therefore be traced to its source and remedied. When pupils feel free to do as they please, when they think they have good cause to blame the teacher for their failure to make progress, his manner will be of no avail; and futile attempts only make matters worse.
139. In teaching, we can't just assume that students are interested; we also can't always count on them having good intentions during training. However, one thing must be accepted: the [142] student shouldn’t feel that the discipline is weak and the instruction is lacking. Any issues in either aspect need to be identified and addressed. When students feel free to act as they wish, believing they have valid reasons to blame the teacher for not making progress, the teacher's approach won’t help; and ineffective attempts only make things worse.
140. In some cases training becomes blended with government to such an extent that it can scarcely be distinguished from the latter. As an example, we may mention the large educational institutions conducted on a military basis, where the individual pupil is carried along by the general system, rather than made the object of special care. In other cases, training and government remain farther apart than is necessary; an instance of this is when a strict father keeps himself at a distance, and leaves the business of training, within the prescribed rigid limits, to the tutor of his children. At all events, a distinction must be made between the two concepts, training and government, in order that the teacher may know what he is doing, and may notice what is perhaps lacking; we are justified in adding, in order that he may save himself useless effort. For training is not uniformly effectual, regardless of circumstances; the teacher needs to be watchful in this matter in order that the opportune moment for doing what can be done may not escape him.
140. Sometimes, training becomes so intertwined with government that it's hard to tell them apart. For instance, large educational institutions run on a military model often push students along with the overall system, rather than giving them individualized attention. In other situations, training and government stay more separated than they need to be; for example, when a strict father keeps his distance and leaves training, within set boundaries, to the children's tutor. Regardless, it’s important to differentiate between training and government so the teacher understands their role and can identify any gaps; this also helps them avoid unnecessary efforts. Training isn’t always effective no matter the situation; teachers need to stay alert to ensure they seize the right moments to act.
CHAPTER II
The Purpose of Training
141. While the aim of instruction was rendered sufficiently determinate, as we saw above (17, 64, 65), by the injunction, be perfect, the aim of training, which supplements educative instruction, comprehends virtue as a whole. Now virtue is an ideal, the approximation toward which is denoted by the term morality. Again, since, generally speaking, a child passes on from mere capacity for culture to culture itself, from the indeterminate to fixedness of knowledge, the approximation to virtue consists likewise in development toward stability. Where conduct in moral affairs vacillates, there is a deficiency; where something morally hateful becomes confirmed, there is a defect. Excluding both, we define the aim of training properly as moral strength of character.
141. While the goal of teaching was made clear, as we saw above (17, 64, 65), through the command to be perfect, the goal of training, which complements educational instruction, encompasses virtue as a whole. Virtue is an ideal, and the effort to achieve it is described by the term morality. Additionally, since a child typically moves from just having the potential for culture to actually experiencing it, from uncertainty to established knowledge, the pursuit of virtue also involves developing towards stability. When behavior in moral matters is inconsistent, that signals a shortcoming; when something morally wrong becomes ingrained, that indicates a flaw. By excluding both issues, we can accurately define the goal of training as developing moral strength of character.
“Training” means such will-training as conduces to the formation of good character; “government” means such training as conduces to good order. The first is for a permanent, the second for an immediate, purpose. In government we can appeal both to a positive and a negative means. The positive means is interest in a study and the affairs of the schoolroom;[144] the negative means is inhibition of disturbing impulses. As Professor James, in his “Talks on Psychology,”[13] points out, this inhibition may be of two sorts,—that of forcible suppression, and that of substitution. A teacher who uses negative means of inhibiting mischief or inattention, employs command or punishment. This method, though sometimes seemingly unavoidable, often results in mental strain, if not permanent alienation between teacher and pupil. The method of substitution attempts to secure inhibition of the undesirable state of mind by giving rise to a set of favorable ideas strong enough to displace it. “If, without saying anything about the street disturbances,” which may be distracting the attention of your pupils, “you open a counter attraction by starting some very interesting talk or demonstration yourself, they will altogether forget the distracting incident, and, without any effort, follow you along.” Training, however, has a more difficult task. It must succeed in implanting what may be called regulative principles in the mind. It must furthermore succeed in establishing habits of conduct that will enable the pupil to become self-governing. That is, we must establish in him habits of feeling and action that will enable him to substitute the higher for the lower good, or, at least, instantly to inhibit the temptation to evil. This is a task not for a day or a year, but for the whole school period.
“Training” refers to the kind of willpower development that leads to good character; “government” pertains to the kind of training that promotes order. The first is aimed at long-term growth, while the second serves an immediate purpose. In governance, we can use both positive and negative approaches. The positive approach is fostering interest in the subject and the school environment; the negative approach is suppressing disruptive impulses. As Professor James points out in his “Talks on Psychology,” this suppression can be of two types—forceful suppression and substitution. A teacher who employs negative means to curb mischief or inattention resorts to commands or punishment. Though this approach might seem necessary at times, it often creates mental strain and can lead to a lasting disconnect between teacher and student. The substitution method seeks to replace the undesirable mindset by promoting positive ideas strong enough to take its place. “If, without mentioning the street disturbances” that could distract your students, “you introduce an engaging discussion or demonstration yourself, they will completely forget the interruption and, effortlessly, follow your lead.” However, training presents a more challenging task. It aims to instill what can be termed regulative principles in students' minds. It must also successfully establish behavior patterns that enable students to become self-governing. In other words, we need to instill habits of thought and behavior that help them choose higher over lower goods, or at least immediately resist temptations to misbehavior. This is a task that requires more than just a day or a year; it spans the entire school period.
142. In succeeding chapters character and moral conduct will each have to be differentiated more minutely. For our present purpose we need only to remind ourselves that the determinateness of the will, which is called character, depends not only on willing,[145] but also on not willing. The latter is either a deficient or a denying willing, which repels or rejects. Stern methods of governing, which bar access to everything that might lead astray, are likely to produce a deficient will rather than the permanence of formed strength; with the end of school days, the dreaded opportunities arrive after all, and the pupil may quickly undergo a change beyond recognition. The task of training must therefore be thought of as embracing both affirmative willing and rejecting.
142. In the following chapters, we'll need to break down character and moral conduct in more detail. For now, we just have to remember that the clarity of will, which we call character, relies not only on our choices,[145] but also on what we choose not to pursue. This lack of desire can be seen as either a weak or a negating will, which pushes away or turns down options. Strict governing methods, which limit access to everything that could lead someone astray, tend to create a weak will instead of fostering lasting strength. Once school is over, those feared opportunities will eventually appear, and the student might change dramatically. Therefore, training should focus on both positive choices and the ability to reject.
CHAPTER III
Character Differentiation
143. Our will activities result from ideas. Different masses of ideas give rise to different will action; hence the difficulty experienced in harmonizing and unifying the manifold acts of will.
143. Our actions will stem from ideas. Different sets of ideas lead to different actions; this is why it's challenging to align and unify the various acts of will.
The various groups of ideas do not simply succeed one another in consciousness; the relation of one to the other may also be that of apperception. Apperceiving attention is not confined to sense-perception (77); it embraces inner perception as well. The process of apperception, however, consists rarely or never in mere perceiving. It involves more: one mass of ideas exerts a determining influence on the other. Now, since each may be the source of will action, it happens that often one act of will accepts or rejects another. Again, conscious of himself preëminently as a being that wills, man gives commands to himself and decides concerning himself; he seeks to acquire self-control. In such efforts he makes himself more and more the object of his own observation. That part of his will activity which his self-observation reveals to be already in existence, we call the[147] objective part of character. To the new will action, on the other hand, which first springs into existence in and with self-examination, we give the name subjective part of character.
The different sets of ideas don’t just follow each other in our thoughts; they can also relate to each other through apperception. Apperceiving attention isn’t limited to sensing; it also includes inner perception. However, apperception rarely involves just perceiving. It entails more: one group of ideas can influence another. Since each can lead to a decision to act, it's common for one decision to accept or reject another. Also, because a person is mainly aware of themselves as a being that makes choices, they give themselves commands and make decisions about their own actions; they strive for self-control. In these efforts, they become increasingly the focus of their own observation. The part of their will that their self-observation reveals as already existing is called the[147] objective part of character. In contrast, the new decisions that emerge during self-examination are referred to as the subjective part of character.
The subjective side of character can attain its full development only during the years of maturity. Its beginnings, however, reach back into boyhood, and its normal growth during adolescence is noticeably rapid, due allowance being made for variations of kind and degree in different individuals.
The subjective side of character can fully develop only during adulthood. Its beginnings, however, trace back to childhood, and its normal growth during the teenage years is noticeably fast, taking into account the different kinds and degrees of variation among individuals.
The assumption of the unconditional primacy of ideas can no longer be seriously entertained. Just as there is an unfolding of ideas in sensation, perception, apperception, and rational insight, so there is an unfolding of our volitional life in impulse, conscious will action, and the control of conduct in accordance with the regulative principles of moral obligation. Knowledge and will doubtless spring from a common root, but they are not primarily so related that volition waits on knowledge. Impulse is antecedent to idea, while in the last analysis and in the highest realm of mind, the actual is subordinate to the ideal, the ought is more powerful than the is. In other words, there is, as Dr. Harris maintains, a sense in which the will is self-determining, even though the extent to which this self-active control obtains is uncertain. As Natorp says,[14] “It is folly to call upon the weak to be strong, to concentrate consciousness upon the categorical imperative, so that the inflexible demands of the ought shall be complied with.” Yet even in the weak there is a bar of consciousness or perhaps conscience[148] before which judgment must be pronounced as to the worthiness or unworthiness of a given line of conduct. It is the function of moral education—and this includes all education—to make the weak strong, to strengthen the good impulses, to clarify the insight, to accustom the mind to dwell on the right set of ideas, to cultivate desirable feelings and interests. In this process of moral development, the world of ideas has perhaps all the validity claimed for it by Herbart. What is here called the “subjective” side of character pertains to that regulation of conduct which arises from its examination before the bar of consciousness as to its agreement or disagreement with the regulative principles of moral obligation. It is that advanced stage of development in character in which the mind is consciously self-directive. Naturally it is later than the “objective” side, where action is more spontaneous, more governed by impulses, more subject to hypnotic suggestion; in short, more subordinated to “ideo-motor” activity and less governed by reflection.
The idea that ideas are always the most important thing can no longer be taken seriously. Just as ideas emerge through sensation, perception, apperception, and rational insight, our will also develops through impulse, conscious will, action, and controlling behavior based on moral principles. Knowledge and will certainly have a common origin, but they aren’t primarily connected in a way that makes will dependent on knowledge. Impulse comes before ideas, while in the end, and at the highest level of thought, the actual is secondary to the ideal, and what we ought to do is stronger than what actually is. In other words, as Dr. Harris argues, there is a sense in which the will can determine itself, even though we can't be sure how much control this self-active determination really has. As Natorp states, “It is foolish to ask the weak to be strong, to focus their thoughts on the categorical imperative, so that the rigid demands of what ought to be can be followed.” Yet even the weak have a sense of consciousness or perhaps conscience that requires judgment about the worthiness or unworthiness of certain actions. The role of moral education—and all education—is to empower the weak, strengthen good impulses, clarify insight, help the mind focus on the right ideas, and nurture positive feelings and interests. In this journey of moral growth, the world of ideas holds all the significance that Herbart claimed. The “subjective” aspects of character relate to how behavior is regulated by examining it against the standards of consciousness and alignments with moral principles. This represents a more advanced stage of character development where the mind consciously guides itself. Naturally, this comes after the “objective” side, where actions are more spontaneous, driven by impulses, more easily influenced by suggestions, and ultimately more reliant on “ideo-motor” activity and less on reflection.
144. In view of the very manifold volitional elements which the objective foundations of character may obviously contain, it will facilitate a survey if we distinguish (1) that which the pupil does or does not endure willingly, (2) that which he does or does not long to have, (3) that which he does or does not like to do. Now one, now the other class predominates, the strongest controlling and restricting the rest. But this restriction is not always an easy matter. Accordingly the objective phase of character attains at first to inner harmony only with difficulty.
144. Considering the various willful aspects that the foundation of character can contain, it will be helpful to differentiate between (1) what the student is willing or unwilling to endure, (2) what he desires or does not desire, and (3) what he enjoys or does not enjoy doing. At times, one category takes precedence over the others, with the strongest influencing and limiting the rest. However, managing this influence isn't always straightforward. Thus, achieving inner harmony in the objective aspect of character can be quite challenging at first.
145. In consequence of frequent repetitions of similar acts of will, general concepts are gradually formed in the subjective side of character, concepts comprehending both the similar will actions already present under similar circumstances, and the requirements man sets up for himself with a view to determining his willing one way or another.
145. As a result of repeatedly doing similar things, people gradually develop general ideas in their character. These ideas include both the similar actions they take in comparable situations and the standards they set for themselves to guide their decisions in one direction or another.
These requirements fall largely within the province of prudence; they pertain to forethought and cautious reserve, or, may be, to action, in order that an end may be gained by the choice of suitable means. The boy wants to be wiser than the child; the youth wiser than either. In this way man seeks to rise above himself.
These requirements mainly relate to being careful; they involve thinking ahead and being cautious, or perhaps taking action, so that a goal can be achieved by selecting the right methods. The boy wants to be smarter than the child; the young adult wants to be smarter than both. In this way, people strive to improve themselves.
146. Moral conduct is not always furthered by man’s effort to surpass himself, so that the teacher’s task becomes a twofold one,—a watching and directing not only of the objective but also of the subjective side of character. Temperament, native bent, habit, desire, and passion fall under the former; to the latter belong the frankness or cunning displayed by the pupil, and his habitual method of practical reasoning.
146. Moral behavior isn’t always improved by a person’s desire to better themselves, which makes the teacher's job twofold—monitoring and guiding both the external and internal aspects of a student’s character. Things like temperament, natural inclination, habits, desires, and passions are part of the external side; the student's honesty or deceitfulness and their usual approach to problem-solving fall under the internal side.
147. As a rule, we may consider it auspicious for character building if the pupil, instead of being swayed by moods and whims, is constant in his willing. Such uniformity as requires no effort we may designate by the expression memory of will.
147. Generally, it’s beneficial for character development if the student, instead of being influenced by feelings and fancies, remains steady in their determination. We can refer to this kind of consistency, which requires no effort, as the memory of will.
When a pupil possesses this natural advantage, the objective part of his character easily arrives at harmony with itself. He sees that among his many preferences relative to enduring, having, doing, one imposes restrictions upon the other; that it is often necessary to submit and endure in order to have and do that which is desired; that pursuits of which he is fond do not always yield what he longs to have, and so on. When these truths have become sufficiently clear to him, he soon comes to a point where he decides which things he cares about a great deal, and which less. He chooses, and choice largely determines character, primarily character in its objective aspects.
When a student has this natural advantage, the objective part of their character easily comes into alignment. They realize that among their many preferences regarding enduring, having, and doing, one limits the others; that it's often necessary to submit and endure in order to have and do what they want; that the things they enjoy don't always provide the outcomes they desire, and so on. Once these truths become clear to them, they quickly reach a point where they decide which things matter to them most and which matter less. They make choices, and those choices largely shape their character, especially in its objective aspects.
In the course of the development of the subjective part of character, there are formed in succession resolves, maxims, and principles, a process involving subsumptions, conclusions, and motives. It will cost many a struggle before these motives can assert themselves.
In the development of the personal aspect of character, resolutions, maxims, and principles are formed in order. This process includes classifications, deductions, and motivations. It will take a lot of effort before these motivations can make their mark.
The strength of a character depends on the agreement between its two parts, the objective and the subjective. Where there is want of accord, the character is weak. But both must be morally good; where that is not the case, strength ceases to be desirable.
The strength of a character relies on the harmony between its two parts, the objective and the subjective. When there's a lack of agreement, the character is weak. However, both parts must be morally good; if they aren't, then strength loses its value.
CHAPTER IV
Morality Differentiation
148. Pupils at once active and kindly are not rare, and so far as the ideas of perfection and good-will are concerned, give rise to no anxiety, at least not at first. With a firm government, moreover, they are easily induced to make the golden rule their own, and they soon become disposed to yield in contention, or rather, become more careful about picking a quarrel. Accordingly, with reference also to equity and justice, they cause little anxiety. In time they gain mental balance, the basis of genuine self-control, and are now on the road to inner freedom. In short, they are in possession of that which, in the light of fundamental ethical ideas, constitutes morality.
148. Students who are both active and kind are not uncommon, and regarding the ideas of perfection and goodwill, they don't cause much concern, at least not initially. With strong guidance, they easily adopt the golden rule as their own, and they soon become more inclined to avoid conflict, or at the very least, they are more cautious about starting arguments. As a result, in terms of fairness and justice, they create little worry. Over time, they develop mental stability, the foundation of true self-control, and they're now on the path to personal freedom. In short, they embody what, based on core ethical principles, defines morality.
But these constituents of moral conduct are not found together in every one, nor do they always remain together. Side by side with the praiseworthy traits mentioned, others of an opposite nature frequently manifest themselves; it becomes evident that the latter are not excluded, and thus the former do not determine the character.
But these components of moral behavior aren’t always found together in everyone, nor do they always stick around. Alongside the admirable traits mentioned, other, opposing traits often show up; it becomes clear that those are not excluded, and so the positive traits don’t define the character.
These resolutions, to be worth anything morally, must rest on that theoretical judgment whereby the pupil through examples comes to distinguish between better and worse in willing. As long as his judging lacks clearness, energy, and completeness, his resolutions are without a foundation in his mind and heart. They are hardly more than memorized words.
These resolutions, to have any moral value, must be based on that theoretical understanding where the student learns through examples to tell the difference between good and bad in decision-making. As long as their judgment is unclear, weak, and incomplete, their resolutions lack a solid basis in their mind and heart. They’re little more than just memorized phrases.
When, on the other hand, the theoretical judgment has become interwoven with the totality of interest growing out of experience, social intercourse, and instruction, it creates a warm affection for the good wherever found, an affection which influences not only all of the pupil’s efforts of will, but also the manner in which he assimilates what instruction and life henceforth offer.
When, conversely, the theoretical judgment is intertwined with the full range of interests stemming from experience, social interaction, and education, it fosters a genuine appreciation for the good wherever it is found, a sentiment that not only impacts all of the student’s willful efforts but also shapes how they absorb what education and life present moving forward.
150. Finally, in order to fortify moral decisions, we must avail ourselves of the assistance derived from the logical cultivation of maxims, from the systematic unification of the same, and from their constant application in life.
150. Ultimately, to strengthen our moral choices, we need to make use of the support that comes from carefully developing guiding principles, consistently unifying them, and regularly applying them in our lives.
Here the organic connection between character growth and the formation of habits of reflection becomes apparent; training is, therefore, obviously unable to accomplish its work except in conjunction with instruction.
Here, the link between personal growth and the development of reflective habits is clear; training clearly can't do its job without being paired with teaching.
As soon as a pupil gets a clear notion that a presented ideal of conduct promotes the true realization of his own being, he is in a position to acquire an interest in reaching that ideal. An end, hitherto remote, comes nearer, so that it begins to exercise influence upon the conduct that leads to it. Convention, appeal, or even compulsion from without, are now reinforced by the good resolutions arising from the pupil’s own subjective states. Here we see the interaction of intellectual and emotional capacities. The intellect perceives relations, thus bringing into consciousness a new ideal; this distant end is mediated inasmuch as desire or feeling impels the pupil to enter upon a course of conduct whose stages lead to the ideal goal.[15]
As soon as a student realizes that a certain ideal of behavior helps him truly understand himself, he becomes interested in achieving that ideal. A goal that once seemed far away starts to feel closer, influencing the actions that lead to it. Social norms, persuasion, or even outside pressure are now supported by the student's own good intentions. This shows the interaction between thinking and feeling. The mind recognizes connections, bringing a new ideal into awareness; this distant goal is approached as desire or emotion motivates the student to follow a path of actions that leads toward the ideal outcome.[15]
CHAPTER V
Training Assistance
151. The function of training does not consist, it is true, in always restraining and meddling; still less in ingrafting the practices of others to take the place of the pupil’s self-activity. Nevertheless, refusal and permission are so much a part of training that the pupil becomes far more dependent through training than mere government could make him. In government a few rules may be enforced very strictly, while in other respects the boy is left to himself; in training a similar relaxation of vigilance is scarcely ever permissible. Only the strongest grounds for confidence in a pupil would justify such a course.
151. The purpose of training isn't just about controlling and interfering; it's definitely not about forcing someone else's practices onto the pupil instead of allowing them to be active in their own learning. However, the concepts of refusal and permission are so integral to training that a pupil often becomes much more dependent as a result of training than they would be under simple governance. In a governing environment, a few rules can be enforced very strictly while the boy has freedom in other areas; in a training context, it's almost never acceptable to relax supervision. Only a strong trust in a pupil would justify taking such a laid-back approach.
The watchful teacher, even without aiming to do so, always shows some degree of approbation or dissatisfaction. In many cases this is all that is necessary; at times, with sensitive pupils, even this is too much. Unaccustomed censure hurts them more than was intended, while no evidence, however slight, of approval, escapes their notice. The teacher should be considerate in his treatment of such sensibility.
The attentive teacher, even without intending to, always displays some level of approval or disapproval. Often, that's all that's needed; sometimes, for sensitive students, even that can be too much. Unused to criticism, they feel hurt more than was meant, while any sign of approval, no matter how small, doesn't go unnoticed. The teacher should be mindful when dealing with such sensitivity.
152. With regard to restraint of freedom, keenness[155] of sensibility is more common. In this connection another point also calls for consideration. Freedom is of the utmost direct importance to formation of character, provided it issues in well-weighed and successful action. For from success springs the confidence of will whereby desire ripens into decision. Where rational action may be looked for, freedom of action must be granted; where the opposite is true, the early appearance of a vivid consciousness of self-activity is fraught with danger.
152. When it comes to restricting freedom, eagerness[155] of feeling is more common. In this regard, another point needs to be considered. Freedom is crucial for developing character, as long as it leads to thoughtful and successful actions. Success leads to the confidence of will, where desire matures into a decision. Where rational action is expected, freedom of action must be permitted; when that's not the case, an early awareness of self-activity can be dangerous.
Frequent censure and curtailment of freedom generally blunt sensibility, rather more, however, sensibility to words than to restrictions. Accordingly, where repetition of censure is necessary, the language may and should vary. On the other hand, the teacher’s practice with respect to permission and prohibition must, where possible, be felt to be permanent, even if it were only to confine the granting of the same permission to stated times, in accordance with an adopted habit. Lack of uniformity, except for obvious reasons, impresses pupils as arbitrariness and caprice; fixed limits are endured more easily.
Frequent criticism and restrictions on freedom usually dull sensitivity, but more so to words than to actual limitations. Therefore, when repeated criticism is needed, the language should and must change. On the other hand, a teacher's approach to granting or denying permissions should, whenever possible, be perceived as permanent, even if it’s just to limit the granting of the same permission to specific times as part of a routine. Inconsistency, unless for clear reasons, comes across to students as randomness and unpredictability; having clear boundaries is tolerated more easily.
153. The sensibilities are irritated least by mere directions, by daily reminding, by calls at the appointed hour, without words of reproach. There are numerous details of daily life which must be placed under the rule of order, but it would be unwise to make more of them than they deserve. Sharp reprimands ought[156] not to be wasted on petty acts of negligence; they are needed for important things. Rules must be obeyed; but a light punishment, one that does not wound the feelings, is more suitable here than harsh words could be.
153. People are least bothered by just being given directions, by daily reminders, or by visits at the scheduled time, without any scolding. There are many aspects of daily life that need to be organized, but it wouldn't be wise to overemphasize them. Harsh reprimands ought[156] not to be wasted on minor slip-ups; they should be reserved for more significant matters. Rules need to be followed, but a gentle correction that doesn't hurt feelings is more appropriate here than harsh words.
154. Closely related to the foregoing is the cultivation of habits that imply endurance, or the bearing of deprivation without murmur, or even an inuring to positive hardships. In efforts tending in this direction it is not sufficient merely to refrain from hurting the pupil’s feelings; youthful good humor and love of fun must be allowed free expression besides.
154. A key part of this is developing habits that involve endurance, or handling deprivation without complaint, and even getting used to real challenges. In working toward this goal, it’s not enough to just avoid hurting the student's feelings; their youthful sense of humor and love for fun should also be encouraged to express themselves freely.
155. Mischievous consequences follow if children become accustomed to frequent, unnecessary gratification of desires, or to a round of artificial pleasures which include neither work nor exercise. To mention only one such consequence, the attendant blunting of the sensibilities renders ineffectual numerous minor aids of training which may be employed to good advantage with unspoiled children. It takes little to give children a great variety of pleasures when great moderation is a matter of daily practice, and for this very reason we need to husband, as it were, our resources for giving enjoyment, in order that much may be accomplished with little. Harmless games, particularly, should not be spoiled for children by making them feel that they must cultivate the staid behavior of adults. Their own ambition fills them only too[157] early with the desire to appear no longer as children.
155. Troublesome outcomes arise when kids get used to getting what they want too often or are constantly surrounded by fake pleasures that involve no work or exercise. One consequence of this is that it dulls their senses, making it less effective to use various minor training tools that work well with unspoiled kids. It takes little effort to provide kids with a wide range of pleasures when moderation is a regular practice, which is why we need to wisely manage our resources for enjoyment, allowing us to achieve a lot with just a little. Innocent games, in particular, shouldn’t be ruined for kids by pushing them to adopt the serious behavior of adults. Their own ambition often leads them too[157] early to want to stop being seen as children.
156. The good teacher’s watchfulness will extend even to petty details, which may indeed prove momentous enough in his little world. These are not so important, however, as the mutual relations of the coöperating factors:—
156. A good teacher’s attentiveness will even cover small details, which can actually be quite significant in their small world. However, these are not as important as the interactions between the collaborating factors:—
- (1) Relation between Action and Rest. The powers of the child must be given something to do, but exercise is to further their growth and hence must not be carried to the point of exhaustion. Now and then a boy must convince himself by experience that great things may be achieved by strenuous effort, but severe tests of this kind must never be permitted to become the rule.
- (2) Relation between that which puts down and that which lifts up. The means of training that humble and those that encourage should balance as nearly as possible. That which rises of its own accord requires no raising up; but when along the whole course of training criticism perceptibly exceeds encouragement, it loses its effectiveness and often embitters pupils more than it benefits them.
- (3) Relation between Restraint and Freedom. The child’s surroundings and companionship should afford protection against temptation, but his environment must be sufficiently ample and rich to prevent much longing for that which is outside.
157. The outcome is uncertain in the case of those aids to training whose effect on the sensibilities of the pupils cannot be foreseen. Some of them are, nevertheless, well worth trying, final judgment being suspended until after the result has been observed. Under this head belong especially the strictly pedagogical punishments and rewards which are patterned after the natural consequences of doing or not doing. The boy who comes late loses the anticipated enjoyment; if he destroys his things, he must do without them; over-indulgence is followed by bitter medicine; tattling by removal from the circle in which matters requiring discretion are discussed, etc. Such punishments do not subserve moral improvement, but they warn and teach a lesson. To what extent they will do so we are often unable to tell beforehand; a profitable reminiscence may be retained at all events.
157. The outcome is unpredictable when it comes to training aids whose impact on students' feelings can't be anticipated. Some of them are definitely worth a shot, with a final decision being postponed until we see the results. This particularly applies to disciplinary actions and rewards that are based on the natural consequences of actions. For example, a boy who arrives late misses out on the fun; if he breaks his belongings, he has to go without them; too much indulgence leads to unpleasant consequences; and gossiping results in being excluded from discussions that require discretion, etc. These consequences may not promote moral growth, but they do serve as warnings and provide lessons. How effective they will be is often hard to predict in advance; however, they may lead to valuable reflections regardless.
The discipline of consequences has been much emphasized by Herbert Spencer in his “Education.” Its limited usefulness in moral training is pointed out in the foregoing section. Acting like a mechanical law, it tends to have the same effect upon the feelings that a physical law has. How could one’s moral sensibilities be impressed by the law of gravitation? Nature makes us prudent, but scarcely good.
The idea of consequences has been heavily stressed by Herbert Spencer in his work “Education.” Its limited effectiveness in moral training is highlighted in the previous section. Acting like a mechanical law, it tends to impact our feelings in a similar way to how a physical law does. How could someone’s moral understanding be influenced by the law of gravitation? Nature makes us cautious, but hardly good.
158. Sometimes the question is how to set pupils on the right track again. They have grown listless, for instance, or pursue their tasks with reluctance. Here we may profitably resort to a sudden interruption[159] by a change of employment. It happens occasionally that pupils, physically strong, are guilty of very bad behavior that persists in spite of admonitions and punishments, or reappears in another form, but which is, after all, at bottom, only the result of a state of ill humor that can easily be corrected. An unexpected, trifling present, an unusual act of attention, will very likely break down the pupil’s reserve, and when the cause of the trouble has once been ascertained, it will be possible to discover a remedy.
158. Sometimes the question is how to get students back on the right track. They may have become disengaged, for example, or are working on their assignments with reluctance. In these cases, a sudden change in activity can be quite effective[159]. It sometimes happens that students, who are physically capable, exhibit very poor behavior that continues despite warnings and consequences, or reemerges in different forms. However, this behavior is ultimately just a result of feeling down, which can easily be fixed. A surprise, small gift or an unexpected gesture of kindness is likely to break the students' defenses, and once the reason for the issue is identified, a solution can be found.
159. In the case of those that are weak physically, furtherance of health combined with persevering patience is the first and chief duty. But kindness should not degenerate into weak indulgence; on the other hand, close supervision must take the place of every form of harsh treatment.
159. For those who are physically weak, promoting health along with steadfast patience is the top priority. However, kindness shouldn't turn into excessive leniency; instead, attentive oversight should replace any kind of harsh treatment.
CHAPTER VI
Training Methodology
160. The distinctions relative to character and morality (143–150) furnish the thread of reflection on this subject. Concisely stated, the function of training is to support, to determine, and to regulate; to keep the pupil, on the whole, in a tranquil and serene frame of mind; to arouse him occasionally by approval and reproof; to remind at the proper moment, and to correct faults. A more definite significance will be imparted to this brief summary by a comparative study and application of the ideas analyzed in the preceding chapters.
160. The differences in character and morality (143–150) provide the basis for thinking about this topic. In short, the purpose of training is to support, guide, and regulate; to keep the student generally in a calm and peaceful state of mind; to motivate them occasionally with praise and criticism; to remind them at the right time, and to correct mistakes. A clearer understanding will come from a comparative study and application of the ideas discussed in the previous chapters.
While we may accept the statement that the function of training is to support, to determine, and to regulate, we must not forget to ask: To what end shall it do these things? The answer is, that though the means of moral training are always psychological, the ends are always social. Support must hold the pupil up to social standards, the directive power of the teacher must be exercised for social ends, while all regulation of the pupil’s activities must point to the same result. There is scarcely a virtue to be named that does not find its ultimate meaning in its application to conduct as affecting others. This is true even in primitive society. In modern urban society[161] it is not only true, but vastly important. The discussion in Chapter VI is psychological throughout. It must be the purpose of the annotation to point out the social implications.
While we might agree that training's purpose is to support, determine, and regulate, we shouldn’t forget to ask: What is the ultimate goal of these actions? The answer is that, although the methods of moral training are always psychological, the goals are always social. Support should lift the student to meet social standards, the teacher’s guiding influence should be used for social objectives, and all regulation of the student’s behavior should aim for the same outcome. Virtually every virtue can be linked to its impact on the behavior of others. This holds true even in primitive societies. In modern urban society[161], it is not just true but exceptionally important. The discussion in Chapter VI is entirely psychological. The purpose of the annotations must be to highlight the social implications.
161. First, what is meant by the supporting activity of training becomes clearer if we recall the remarks made concerning memory of the will (147) as opposed to the thoughtlessness usually ascribed to youth. The thoughtless boy does not remember past acts of will. He stands in need of being supported by training. This, further analysis shows, is done in two ways: by holding him back from the wrong course, and by holding him up to the right course.
161. First, the idea of training as a supportive activity becomes clearer when we think about the connection between memory of the will (147) and the carelessness often associated with youth. The careless boy doesn't remember his past decisions. He needs support through training. Further analysis reveals that this support is provided in two ways: by preventing him from making bad choices and by encouraging him to make good ones.
Training presupposes an efficient government and the obedience consequent to it. By implication, the pupil would not dare to disobey a command if given. But commands ought to be employed sparingly, and only when inevitable. Imposed too frequently, they would preclude self-development; if given to adolescents for any but obvious and urgent reasons, obedience would not long continue. In short, government acts at intervals. But the pupil cannot be permitted to live in a state of lawless liberty in the meantime. He must remain sensible, be it ever so little, of certain limits which he is not allowed to overstep. This result is the aim of the supporting function of training.
Training requires an effective government and the obedience that comes from it. This means that a student wouldn’t dare to disobey a command if it’s given. However, commands should be used sparingly and only when absolutely necessary. If they are given too often, they can hinder personal growth; if directed at teenagers for anything less than clear and urgent reasons, obedience won’t last long. Essentially, government intervenes at specific times. But the student can’t be allowed to exist in total freedom in the meantime. They must always be aware, even just a little, of certain boundaries that they are not allowed to cross. Achieving this awareness is the main goal of the training process.
But the pupil, even though he be generally obedient, does not obey every one, nor under all circumstances, nor always fully, promptly, and without[162] opposition; and when he once fails to comply with gentle words, he will be still less ready to yield to a severe manner toward himself. Of course, the teacher must know on what support he may depend; the father needs to have made up his mind how far he would be willing to go with coercive measures if necessary; the private tutor, to what extent he may count on the backing of parents; the teacher in a public institution, how far his course of action would be upheld by his superiors. But all this involves an appeal from training to government, a step to be avoided as much as possible. Most of the unpleasant cases of intractability, where recourse to government becomes unavoidable, are the gradual result of continued weak indulgence. Of such cases no account is taken here, and justly so, since, apart from all else, even defiant obstinacy, provided restraint has not been cast off utterly, soon breaks down and gives way to remorse when it is met by serious and deliberate firmness.
But the student, even though they are generally obedient, doesn’t obey everyone, nor in all situations, nor always fully, promptly, and without[162] resistance; and when they first fail to respond to gentle words, they will be even less likely to comply with a harsh attitude towards them. Of course, the teacher must know what support they can rely on; the parent needs to decide how far they are willing to go with strict measures if necessary; the private tutor must figure out to what extent they can count on the parents’ backing; the teacher in a public institution needs to understand how far their actions will be supported by their superiors. But all this involves appealing to authority rather than training, which is a step to be avoided as much as possible. Most unpleasant situations of stubbornness, where resorting to authority becomes unavoidable, are the gradual result of ongoing weak indulgence. These situations are not addressed here, and rightly so, since, aside from everything else, even defiant stubbornness, as long as restraint hasn’t been completely abandoned, will soon break down and give way to remorse when confronted with serious and deliberate firmness.
The most obvious ways that the school has of securing a good “memory of will” are those by which it enforces the well-known school virtues,—regularity, punctuality, silence, and industry. It is to the acquisition of these habits that the government, or discipline, of the school is chiefly directed. Dr. Wm. T. Harris has pointed out in detail the significance of this acquisition in the development of character.[16] It is interesting[163] to note how the teacher’s personal authority is reinforced by social pressure both within and without the school. The Superintendent of a city of thirteen thousand inhabitants reports that but 1462 cases of tardiness occurred during a whole school year. The pupils of each room are given a brief holiday, from time to time, provided nobody in that room is tardy during the stated period. This brings an immense social pressure within the school to bear in securing prompt attendance. Happening to visit the Superintendent’s office in a city of some sixty thousand people, the writer observed the following scene: A young girl of perhaps fourteen years of age, accompanied by her father, who was a foreigner, unable to speak English fluently, entered the office. The girl began at once to make excuses for her brother who was a somewhat confirmed truant, and to beg that he might be excused and reinstated. To objections stated by the Superintendent, the father with much emotion replied, “Oh, Mr. Superintendent, won’t you give my boy another trial?” The boy had been ‘tried again’ so many times that father and daughter were referred to the judge, an officer having jurisdiction over such cases. The penalty for persistent truancy was attendance at a state reformatory school. This is a case in which the authority of the teacher in securing regularity of attendance was reinforced by the community outside the school. The constant pressure of school and community tend to establish habits of will memory that serve as an excellent foundation for later moral training.
The most obvious ways the school secures a good "memory of will" are through the enforcement of well-known virtues: regularity, punctuality, silence, and hard work. The school’s governance and discipline mainly focus on helping students develop these habits. Dr. Wm. T. Harris has detailed the importance of this development in shaping character.[16] It’s interesting[163] to see how the teacher’s personal authority is backed by social pressure both inside and outside the school. The Superintendent of a city with thirteen thousand residents reports only 1,462 cases of tardiness over the entire school year. Each class is given a brief holiday now and then, as long as no one in the class is late during the specified time. This creates significant social pressure within the school to ensure timely attendance. During a visit to the Superintendent's office in a city of about sixty thousand people, the writer witnessed an interesting scene: a young girl, around fourteen years old, entered with her father, who was a foreigner and struggled with English. The girl immediately started making excuses for her brother, who was a frequent truant, pleading for him to be excused and allowed back in school. When the Superintendent raised objections, the father, visibly upset, said, "Oh, Mr. Superintendent, can't you give my boy another chance?" The boy had already been given so many chances that the father and daughter were directed to the judge, who had the authority to handle such matters. The consequence for repeated truancy was enrollment in a state reformatory school. This situation illustrates how the teacher's authority in promoting regular attendance was supported by the wider community. The ongoing pressure from both school and community helps establish habits of willpower that provide a strong foundation for later moral education.
162. Before training can have within itself the power to make up deficiencies in obedience, there must be awakened in the pupil a vivid feeling that the approval of his teacher is a valuable possession, which he would be loath to lose. This the teacher[164] will bring about in proportion to the effective and welcome share he has in the life of his pupil. He must give before he can receive. Furthermore, if in his opinion the pupil needs to be turned in a different direction, he should not underestimate the difficulty of the task before him; he must proceed slowly.
162. Before training can effectively address gaps in obedience, the student must develop a strong awareness that their teacher's approval is something valuable that they wouldn't want to lose. The teacher[164] will foster this understanding based on the meaningful and positive role they play in the student's life. They must give before they can expect to receive. Additionally, if the teacher believes the student needs to be guided in a different direction, they should not underestimate how challenging this process can be; it should be approached gradually.
The initial steps in character training are admirably described by Niemeyer in the following words: “The teacher’s first duty is to study the positively good elements in the native character of the being to be educated. To preserve these, to strengthen them, to transform them into virtue, and to fortify them against every danger, should be his incessant endeavor. They should constitute the keynote, as it were, of his whole method of education. He should look for the good even in the spoilt and vicious pupil, and should try to bring it to light, no matter how many weeds may have sprung up alongside of it. For all subsequent moral education must start from this point.”
The first steps in character training are clearly described by Niemeyer in these words: “The teacher’s primary responsibility is to identify the positive qualities in the natural character of the student being educated. Preserving these qualities, strengthening them, turning them into virtues, and protecting them from any threats should be his continuous goal. They should serve as the foundation, so to speak, of his entire educational approach. He should seek out the good even in the troubled and difficult student, and strive to highlight it, regardless of how many negatives have emerged alongside it. Because all future moral education must begin from this point.”
Although this passage belongs in strictness to the discussion on moral education, it is plainly entitled to a place here also. An appeal to the pupil’s better nature promotes ready compliance on his part, especially when it is accompanied by those little courtesies that go with cultivated social intercourse. It is most effective with those who possess at the same time[165] the strongest memory of will, which it will not be difficult for the supporting activity of training to strengthen still further.
Although this passage technically belongs to the discussion on moral education, it definitely deserves a spot here as well. Appealing to the student's better nature encourages them to cooperate, especially when it's accompanied by the small courtesies of polite social interaction. This approach works best with those who also have a strong will, which training activities can further strengthen.
163. On the other hand, the task of training grows arduous in proportion as the pupil fails to bear in mind his acts of will. But even here there is a difference between capricious unruliness and downright flightiness and levity.
163. On the other hand, training becomes harder as the student forgets to pay attention to their choices. However, there is still a distinction between being whimsically disobedient and being completely careless and frivolous.
Cases may arise where the impetuosity of the pupil challenges the teacher to a kind of combat. Rather than accept such a challenge, he will usually find it sufficient at first to reprove calmly, to look on quietly, to wait until fatigue sets in. The embarrassing situations into which such a pupil gets himself will furnish occasions for making him feel ashamed, and now it remains to be seen whether or not he can be made to adopt a more equable behavior. Here and there training may in this way even make good the lack of government; scarcely, however, for large numbers, after unruliness has once begotten vicious habits.
Cases may come up where the student’s impulsiveness pushes the teacher into a sort of showdown. Instead of rising to the challenge, he usually finds it enough to calmly correct the behavior, observe quietly, and wait for tiredness to set in. The awkward situations the student creates for himself will give opportunities for him to feel embarrassed, and now we’ll see if he can be encouraged to adopt a more balanced behavior. Sometimes, this kind of guidance can compensate for a lack of discipline; however, it's unlikely to work for larger groups once disorder has led to bad habits.
Combats of any kind between teacher and pupil are to be deplored. A good teacher is always strong enough in his mental superiority, his authority, and his influence as an executive to avoid it. Such a contest shows that the pupil has become self-conscious in a bad sense. He sets his personality over against that of the teacher. If the teacher is so weak as to meet him on his own ground, the pupil has a good chance for a bad victory—bad for himself, the teacher, and the school.[166] It should be a constant aim of the teacher to supplant introspection, whether pertaining to feelings or to wilfulness, with motor activity. The pupil should always be doing something that will promote not only his own best good, but that of the school also. Authority should rarely so assert itself as to incite or to permit a personal contest with the pupil. It should be a strong but almost unseen presupposition of all school affairs. Here as elsewhere idleness is the mother of mischief. Lively action is sure to banish morbid introspection.
Conflicts of any kind between teachers and students are to be regretted. A good teacher is always confident enough in their mental abilities, authority, and influence to avoid such situations. These conflicts indicate that the student has become self-conscious in a negative way, opposing their personality to that of the teacher. If the teacher is weak enough to engage on that level, the student has a greater chance of achieving a negative victory—harmful for themselves, the teacher, and the school.[166] A teacher should consistently aim to replace introspection, whether related to feelings or stubbornness, with active engagement. The student should always be involved in something that advances not only their own well-being but also that of the school. Authority should rarely act in a way that provokes or allows for a personal confrontation with the student. It should be a strong but mostly unnoticeable foundation for all school matters. Here, as elsewhere, idleness leads to trouble. Active engagement will certainly drive away harmful introspection.
164. Thoughtlessness in the narrower sense, which manifests itself in forgetfulness, in negligence, in want of steadiness, and in so-called youthful escapades, is a defect in native capacity, and does not admit of a radical cure, imperceptible as it may become with age, by reason of repeated warnings and diminishing susceptibility to external impressions. All the more imperative is it in such cases to support by training, in order that the evil consequences of this character weakness may be prevented, or at least reduced to a minimum. For as soon as a thoughtlessly impulsive boy comes to take pleasure in his conduct, he will set himself against order and industry, and will strive to discover the means which promise to secure for him a life without restrictions. This danger must be forestalled by training. At the beginning, and before an evil will has had time to develop, training must take the place of will. It must bring home to the pupil that of which he had lost sight. To his fluctuating[167] and roving impulses it must lend its own external firmness and uniformity, which cannot be created at once, if at all, within the pupil.
164. Thoughtlessness, in a more specific sense, which shows up as forgetfulness, carelessness, instability, and typical youthful mischief, is a flaw in natural ability that can’t be completely fixed, although it may diminish with age due to repeated reminders and a lower sensitivity to external influences. Therefore, it’s even more crucial in these situations to provide training to prevent the negative consequences of this character flaw, or at least minimize them. As soon as a thoughtlessly impulsive boy enjoys his behavior, he will oppose order and hard work, seeking ways to live freely without limits. This risk must be countered with training. At the start, before any bad intentions can take root, training needs to replace willpower. It must help the student regain focus on what he has overlooked. To his fluctuating[167] and wandering impulses, it must provide an external stability and consistency that he may not be able to develop on his own.
Here is the proper place for the injunction, not to argue with children. “I cannot be too emphatic and outspoken in my warning against too much arguing,” says Caroline Rudolphi; and Schwarz, who quotes this passage, adds, “Once is too often.” Niemeyer, after speaking of the excesses of abnormal liveliness and characterizing thoughtlessness, which, he says, “causes inattention, a disregard for consequences, and hasty actions,” continues thus: “All these are not faults of the heart; still they are faults that need to be amended, and about the only sure educational method for amending them is to cultivate right habits. Positive punishments wisely chosen may indeed be employed as auxiliary means, but only when there are evidences of a lack of good intention, or when these faults have become ominously prominent.” He further advises teachers to insist on this, that pupils rectify on the spot what can be rectified, since vague recollections prove barren of good results.
Here is the right place for the advice not to argue with children. “I cannot stress enough how important it is to avoid too much arguing,” says Caroline Rudolphi; and Schwarz, who quotes this line, adds, “Once is too often.” Niemeyer, after discussing the problems of excessive liveliness and describing thoughtlessness, which he notes “leads to inattention, a disregard for consequences, and rash actions,” continues: “All these are not faults of the heart; however, they are faults that need to be fixed, and the only sure educational method for fixing them is to develop good habits. Smartly chosen positive punishments may also be used as additional means, but only when there are signs of bad intention, or when these faults have become alarmingly obvious.” He further advises teachers to make sure that students correct what can be corrected immediately, as vague memories often lead to poor outcomes.
This does not, of course, dispose of the whole matter, but we are still discussing training as a supporting agency, and from this point of view it is true that argument should not be substituted for the cultivation of habits.
This doesn’t completely resolve the issue, but we are still talking about training as a supportive factor, and from this perspective, it’s true that reasoning shouldn’t replace the development of habits.
165. To restrain the lively but thoughtless boy is[168] more difficult than to keep him properly active, for the latter is comparatively easy, in some cases at least, if instruction excites his interest. The reverse holds true for the sluggish boy because an attack has to be made on his indolence. Here the stimulation to physical exertion through association with wide-awake playmates is the first thing to be secured; and where hard lessons cannot as yet be managed successfully, lighter occupations will have to suffice. Where sluggishness is traceable to bodily feebleness, improvement may be hoped for from sanitary measures and increasing years.
165. It's harder to control an energetic but careless boy than[168] to keep him engaged, since the latter can be relatively easy in some cases, especially if the teaching sparks his curiosity. The opposite is true for a slow boy, as we need to tackle his laziness. The first step is to encourage physical activity by connecting him with active peers; and when challenging tasks are too much, we’ll need to settle for lighter activities. If sluggishness comes from physical weakness, we can expect improvements with better health practices and as he grows older.
The following rule is to be observed everywhere: No exercise must exceed the pupil’s strength, but that which has once been begun must be completed. At the least, pupils must not be allowed to drop their work as they choose; they must look upon it as a whole, however small.
The following rule should be followed everywhere: No exercise should exceed the student’s capacity, but once started, it must be finished. At the very least, students shouldn’t be allowed to quit their work whenever they want; they should see it as a complete task, no matter how small.
166. That the supporting procedure of training rests on the teacher’s own bearing—on the uniformity of his demeanor—need hardly be said; but this evenness must also stand out clearly before the eyes of the pupils. The teacher ought to guard particularly against causing the complaint that no one knows how to please him, that nothing one may do is done to his satisfaction. When matters have come to this pass, the first thing pupils do is to watch his moods as they might the weather, and to interchange observations.[169] His ugly mood is dreaded; his pleasant mood is taken advantage of for importunate requests. The pupils try to move the firm centre which is to support them, and the faintest signs of success awaken and foster extravagant hopes. Gradually the after-effects of earlier government die out, and a renewal of severe measures draws with it a train of new evils.
166. It's important to say that the supporting process of training depends on the teacher’s own behavior—on the consistency of their demeanor—and this consistency must be evident to the students. The teacher should be especially careful not to create the impression that no one knows how to please them, or that nothing done meets their expectations. When things reach this point, the first thing students do is watch the teacher's moods like they would check the weather, sharing their observations. [169] His bad mood is feared; his good mood is exploited for relentless requests. The students attempt to influence the steady support they rely on, and even the slightest signs of success spark and nurture unrealistic hopes. Gradually, the lingering effects of previous discipline fade away, and a return to strict measures brings along a host of new problems.
Goldsmith in his “Deserted Village” has well portrayed the “moody” teacher:—
Goldsmith in his “Deserted Village” has accurately depicted the “moody” teacher:—
167. Second. Training is to exert a determining influence; it is to induce the pupil to choose (147). Under this head falls the discrimination spoken of above between varieties of volitional impulse—the will to bear, to have, and to do; hence also experiential knowledge of the natural consequences of doing or of failure to do (157), for unless these are taken into consideration, the manifold of will cannot be reduced to harmony. Now the first point to be noticed in connection with this aspect of training is that the teacher does not choose for the pupil. The pupil himself must choose, for it is his own character[170] that is to be determined. He must himself experience a part, although only the smallest part, of that which is desirable or harmful. That the flame burns that a pin pricks, that a fall or knock hurts, this lesson even the little child must learn; and similar experiences must be gained later, provided they do not carry the pupil to the verge of serious danger. Everything essential has been accomplished if, in consequence of actual experiences confirming the teacher’s words of warning, the pupil believes other warnings without waiting for confirmation.
167. Second. Training is meant to have a significant impact; it should lead the student to choose (147). This includes the distinction mentioned earlier between different types of willpower— the desire to endure, possess, and act; thus, it also involves understanding the real outcomes of actions or inaction (157). If these aspects aren't considered, the variety of wills cannot be aligned. The first thing to note regarding this side of training is that the teacher doesn’t make choices for the student. The student must make their own choices, as it’s their character[170] that needs forming. They must personally experience at least a small part of what is good or bad. A child needs to learn that a flame burns, a pin pricks, and a fall or bump hurts; and they must have similar experiences later on, as long as these do not put them in serious danger. Everything crucial is achieved when, as a result of real experiences that confirm the teacher’s warnings, the student trusts other warnings without needing proof.
Not second in importance to the act of choosing is the content of the choice. If conduct must have a social outcome, all the activities of the school will focus at this point. In order to have rational choice there must be first of all social intelligence. This it is the function of instruction to develop. According to a well-known doctrine of Herbart, it is the chief duty of instruction to make a progressive revelation to the pupil of the ethical world, in order that his puny will may gradually be reinforced by race experience. The instruments for this revelation are the studies on the one hand, and the conduct of the school according to social principles on the other. In the second place, that the ethical choice may truly express the pupil’s inward state, rather than his outward constraint, it must grow out of his insight as suffused by his social responsiveness to ethical ideas. In other words, his disposition should confirm his intellectual perception of the right line of conduct. This raises the whole matter of interest as related to will.[17] Here[171] again natural, spontaneous, almost unconscious attitude is vastly superior to morbid introspection, no matter how ‘good’ the pupil’s disposition may prove to be. A boy should not have to ‘reflect’ as to whether he will rob a bird’s nest or not.
Not less important than the act of making a choice is what that choice involves. If behavior is meant to have a social impact, all school activities will center on this aspect. To have a rational choice, there must first be social intelligence. It's the role of education to develop this. According to a well-known theory by Herbart, the main responsibility of teaching is to progressively reveal the ethical world to students, so their limited will can gradually be strengthened by collective experience. The tools for this revelation are the subjects studied and how the school operates based on social principles. Furthermore, for a moral choice to truly reflect the student’s inner state rather than external pressures, it must arise from their understanding, influenced by their social responsiveness to ethical concepts. In other words, their attitude should align with their intellectual understanding of the correct behavior. This brings up the entire issue of interest as it relates to will.[17] Here[171] again, a natural, spontaneous, almost unconscious attitude is far superior to unhealthy self-reflection, no matter how ‘good’ the student’s disposition might be. A boy shouldn’t have to ‘think’ about whether to steal from a bird’s nest or not.
168. Pleasure and pain arise so largely out of social relations that the pupil must grow up amidst a social environment in order to become somewhat acquainted with his natural place among men. This requirement gives rise accordingly to solicitous precautions against a bad example and rudeness. On the other hand, a boy’s companions should not be chosen with such anxious care as if the intention were to spare him the feeling of pressure which in all human society is generated by the efforts and counter-efforts of men. Too great complaisance on the part of playmates causes delusions as to the actual conditions of life.
168. Pleasure and pain come largely from social interactions, so a child needs to grow up in a social environment to understand his natural place among others. This need leads to careful measures to protect against bad influences and rudeness. However, a boy’s friends shouldn’t be chosen with excessive caution, as if the goal is to shield him from the pressures that naturally arise from the dynamics of human society. Being too accommodating among playmates can create false perceptions about the realities of life.
Again, society and seclusion must alternate. The social current is not to carry everything else along with it, and to become more powerful than education. Even the boy, and much more the youth, must learn to be alone, and to fill up his time profitably.
Again, society and solitude must take turns. The social wave shouldn't sweep everything else away and become stronger than education. Even boys, especially young men, need to learn how to be alone and make good use of their time.
Unbroken association of the child with his mates tends to bring him too exclusively under the influence of imitation and of acting impulsively upon those forms of unreasoning suggestion which sway the crowd, the gang, and the mob. To quote Professor Baldwin:[18] “The characteristics of the social suggestions upon which the crowd act show them to be strictly suggestions.[172] They are not truths, nor arguments, nor insights, nor inventions.... The suggestible mind has very well known marks. Balzac hit off one of them in ‘Eugénie Grandet’ in the question, ‘Can it be that collectively man has no memory?’ We might go through the list of mental functions asking the same question of them one by one. Has man collectively no thought, no sense of values, no deliberation, no self-control, no responsibility, no conscience, no will, no motive, no purpose? And the answer to each question would be the same, No, he has none. The suggestible consciousness is the consciousness that has no past, no future, no height, no depth, no development, no reference to anything; it is only in and out. It takes in and it acts out—that is all there is to it.” It is here that we find the source of the youthful escapade so common to street, school, and college, as well as of the adult deeds of diabolism that have so often shocked the moral sense of the American people. The child needs frequent opportunities to be alone, when he can “come to himself” as a responsible person. Even where the association with his mates is perfectly innocent, there is a growing responsiveness to mere suggestion. This tendency is corrected by attention to individual tasks and responsibilities.
The constant interaction of a child with their peers often makes them overly influenced by imitation and impulsive reactions to the mindless suggestions that drive crowds, gangs, and mobs. To quote Professor Baldwin:[18] “The characteristics of the social suggestions that drive the crowd reveal they are strictly suggestions.[172] They aren't truths, arguments, insights, or inventions.... The suggestible mind has very clear markers. Balzac captured one of them in ‘Eugénie Grandet’ with the question, ‘Can it be that collectively man has no memory?’ We could go through all the mental functions asking the same question one by one. Does humanity collectively have no thought, no sense of values, no deliberation, no self-control, no responsibility, no conscience, no will, no motive, no purpose? And the answer to each would be the same: No, they have none. The suggestible consciousness is one that lacks a past, a future, height, depth, development, and any reference to anything; it simply exists in the moment. It absorbs information and acts on it—that's all it does.” This is where we see the origin of the youthful antics so common in the streets, schools, and colleges, as well as the questionable actions of adults that have frequently disturbed the moral sensibility of the American public. The child needs regular opportunities to be alone, allowing them to “come to themselves” as a responsible individual. Even in completely innocent interactions with peers, there is an increasing tendency to respond to mere suggestion. This tendency can be countered by focusing on individual tasks and responsibilities.
169. By living alternately with his equals in age and with adults, the pupil grows familiar with diverse standards of honor. To unite these, and to subordinate one to the other in a proper manner, will prove an easy or a difficult part of training, according to the smaller or greater gap between the value set on brute force on the one hand, and the demand for good-breeding, as well as regard for talent and knowledge,[173] on the other. The main thing is not to foster ambition artificially, though care must be taken at the same time to refrain from crushing out a natural and true self-esteem. Usually, however, those interested in the progress of a pupil stand in need themselves of guarding against the self-deception due to extravagant hopes. By giving themselves up to these, they involuntarily turn flatterers, and push the boy, and the young man still more, beyond the position he is able to maintain. Bitter experiences follow.
169. By alternating time spent with peers and adults, the student becomes familiar with various standards of honor. Integrating these standards and properly prioritizing one over another can be easy or challenging, depending on the gap between the value placed on physical strength and the expectations for good behavior, as well as respect for talent and knowledge,[173] on the other hand. The key is not to artificially encourage ambition, while also ensuring not to stifle genuine self-esteem. However, those invested in a student's growth often need to guard against self-deception stemming from unrealistic expectations. By indulging in these hopes, they unintentionally become flatterers and push the boy or young man further than he can handle. This often leads to painful experiences.
The tendency to an abnormal overestimation of the value of physical excellence is seen in the attitude of the modern college toward athletics. Doubtless the public as a whole still underestimates the importance of fine physical development. Our modern life with its nerve-racking occupation will shatter the efficiency of large portions of the race, unless the physical organism is so developed as to withstand the strain. This, if true of men, is still more true of women, who are now undertaking many new lines of exhausting labor, not the easiest of which is teaching. But the college student is prone to adore muscle. The successful athlete is, for a brief period, praised, petted, and advertised far more than is the ablest student or professor in the institution. Scarcely do the noblest achievements of science or philanthropy receive so much notice as a successful full-back on a foot-ball team. The athlete goes up indeed like a rocket, startling the ear and dazzling the eye for a moment—then oblivion, or deserved obscurity. The teacher must endeavor to displace this false estimate of values by one more true if less exciting.
The tendency to overly value physical excellence is evident in how modern colleges view athletics. It’s clear that the public still underestimates the importance of good physical health. Our fast-paced lives can drastically impact the well-being of many people unless they develop their physical abilities to handle the pressure. This is especially true for women, who are now taking on many demanding jobs, with teaching being one of the toughest. However, college students often idolize muscular athletes. For a short time, successful athletes receive more praise, attention, and advertising than the brightest students or professors at the school. Hardly do the greatest achievements in science or humanitarian work get as much recognition as a successful football player. Athletes rise rapidly like a shooting star, grabbing attention for a moment—then fade into obscurity or deserved anonymity. Teachers need to work towards replacing this skewed perception of value with a more accurate, albeit less thrilling, one.
170. The regard for the value of things in their relation to the ordinary necessities of life develops somewhat more slowly than the natural sense of honor. This is true especially of money, which at first boys rarely know how to use. Instead of saying, either this or that, which a fixed sum will buy, the boy falls a victim to the deception that lurks in saying, this and that. In this respect also the pupil needs to gain experience on a small scale; he must, moreover, come to know the value of objects last, not merely in terms of money, but also in terms of the inconvenience of doing without them. Warnings against petty closeness are seldom necessary; not infrequently, however, a boy follows common talk, and it may happen that he practises parsimony by imitation, and squanders in obedience to his own impulses. Where faults of this sort are not conquered by the pupil’s own sense of honor, they fall within the province of moral education.
170. The appreciation for the value of things in relation to everyday needs grows a bit more slowly than the natural sense of honor. This is especially true for money, which boys typically don’t understand how to use at first. Instead of thinking about what they can buy for a fixed amount, boys often get tricked by the idea of wanting more things. In this area, they also need to learn through small experiences; they should ultimately understand the value of items not just in terms of money, but also the trouble caused by not having them. Warnings about being overly stingy are rarely needed; however, a boy might follow what others say, and it’s possible he could be frugal just to imitate them while also spending impulsively. When issues like this aren’t addressed by a boy’s own sense of honor, they fall under the scope of moral education.
A modern device for teaching children the value of money, and especially the usefulness of saving it, is the institution of school savings banks. Here the pupil develops his instincts for accumulation. At the same time he learns to inhibit his often inordinate fondness for spending. If indulgence to self, accompanied by penuriousness toward others, is permitted to grow into a habit in childhood and youth, it becomes a source of much unhappiness in later family life. Wife and children are often victims of this kind of selfishness. Now that women are in the main the teachers of children, they should have the interest of their sex sufficiently at heart to[175] inculcate suitable ideals and habits respecting the gathering and spending of money. No form of selfishness is so obnoxious as self-indulgence at the expense of those who have a natural right to an equitable share of what is produced. The ‘meanness’ of such conduct if constantly unveiled will effect its own cure.
A modern approach to teaching kids the value of money, especially how important it is to save, is through school savings banks. Here, students build their skills for saving. At the same time, they learn to control their often excessive desire to spend. If kids develop a habit of self-indulgence while being selfish towards others, it can lead to significant unhappiness in their family life later on. Wives and children often suffer because of this kind of selfishness. Since women are primarily the ones teaching children now, they should care enough to[175]instill appropriate values and habits around saving and spending money. There’s no form of selfishness worse than self-indulgence that comes at the expense of those who deserve a fair share of what’s produced. If the ‘meanness’ of such behavior is continuously revealed, it will ultimately correct itself.
171. When experience has taught the pupil to what extent he must endure or need not endure the pressure of human society, and what honors, objects, enjoyments, he can have or must do without, the question arises: How does he connect all this with the pursuits which attract or repel him? The thoughtful pupil soon realizes, without being told, that one thing often makes another possible, that one thing involves or conditions another. But upon the thoughtless boy this truth does not impress itself with sufficient force; consequently, the teacher has to help him to deepen that impression, because a man without a settled mind regarding these matters remains devoid of character.
171. When experience has taught the student how much he must put up with or can avoid in the pressures of society, and what rewards, possessions, or pleasures he can enjoy or must go without, the question arises: How does he relate all this to the interests that attract or repel him? The reflective student quickly realizes, without needing to be told, that one thing often makes another possible, that one thing depends on or influences another. However, this truth doesn’t resonate strongly enough with the careless boy; therefore, the teacher must help him grasp this deeper understanding, because a person without a clear stance on these issues lacks character.
Yet a lack of fixedness is often desirable rather than otherwise—a statement applying to those pupils whose intellectual interests it is the business of instruction to awaken, or whose moral and religious culture are as yet in a backward state. The objective part of character (142) should not become fixed too soon; and very often a large part of the value of training consists in retarding this process. Such an end is subserved by the restraint under which the pupil is[176] kept by the subordinate position assigned to him in conformity with his age, and particularly by the refusal of freedom to act without permission, and according to his own inclination (152). The theoretical judgment of will relations (149) is frequently late in maturing, or remains weak in comparison with the impression produced by the experiences mentioned. In that case moral ardor is also wanting, and if the pupil were given liberty to do as he chose, his character would be formed, to be sure, but in the wrong way. Rather would it be better to encourage juvenile amusements, and even boyish games, beyond the usual age limit.
Yet a lack of fixedness is often more desirable than otherwise—a point that applies to those students whose intellectual interests need to be stimulated by instruction, or whose moral and religious development is still underdeveloped. The objective part of character (142) should not become fixed too early; and often, a significant part of the value of training lies in delaying this process. This aim is supported by the restrictions placed on the student due to the subordinate role assigned to him based on his age, particularly by not allowing him the freedom to act without permission and according to his own wishes (152). The theoretical understanding of will relations (149) frequently takes time to mature or remains weak compared to the impact of the experiences mentioned. In such cases, moral enthusiasm is also lacking, and if the student were allowed to do whatever he wanted, his character would undoubtedly be shaped, but in the wrong direction. It would be better to promote youthful interests and even childish games beyond the usual age limits.
172. Third. Regulative training begins its work with the first appearance of the subjective part of character (143). For an earlier period the rule not to argue with children holds good (164); that is, it holds good as long as we can get along with it. That stage, however, is passed when the pupil begins to reason for himself; in other words, when his thinking has acquired such consecutiveness that his thoughts no longer come and go as momentary fancies, but attain to permanency and coherence. Reasoning processes of this sort ought not to be left to themselves, nor can they be repressed by dictatorial decrees. The educator must now enter into his pupil’s trains of reflection, must argue with him and prevent further development in the wrong direction.
172. Third. Regulative training starts its process with the first emergence of the subjective aspect of character (143). In earlier times, the guideline of not arguing with children is effective (164); that is, it works as long as we can manage it. However, that phase ends when the student begins to think for himself; in other words, when his thought process becomes so coherent that his ideas no longer flash in and out like passing whims, but gain stability and clarity. These kinds of reasoning processes shouldn’t be left unchecked, nor can they be suppressed by authoritarian commands. The educator now needs to engage with the student’s lines of thought, debate with him, and steer further growth in the right direction.
The tendency to set up rules reveals itself early; for example, in the games of children. Commands as to what to do are given every moment, only these imperatives are imperfectly obeyed and often changed. Neither is there lack of original, childish resolutions; but they can mean little so long as they do not remain the same. It is very different when they acquire stability, when means and ends combine into plans, when execution is attempted under difficulties, and finally when these resolves are thought in the forms of general concepts, thereby laying claim to validity in possible future instances, and becoming thus transformed into maxims.
The tendency to establish rules shows up early, like in children's games. Commands about what to do are given all the time, but these orders are only partially followed and often changed. There’s no shortage of original, childish intentions, but they don’t mean much as long as they keep changing. It’s a whole different story when they become stable, when goals and methods come together in plans, when efforts are made despite challenges, and ultimately when these intentions are formulated as general concepts, claiming their validity for future situations and transforming into maxims.
173. The wise forethought essential to regulative training requires in the first place that the teacher shall rather tolerate an inconvenient discussion than check a frank expression of opinion, provided the objections of the pupil are indubitably sincere, and his vanity, we will say, is not flattered too much by the unexpected consideration accorded to his remarks. The same foresight is to be exercised in cases where it proves impossible to convince the pupil at once. Here the final judgment, instead of being insisted upon, should rather be postponed; it will always be easy to point out to the pupil his lack of adequate knowledge and to refer him to future studies. The positiveness that usually characterizes the assertions of boys and young men, generally has its roots in their great ignorance.[178] They have not the least inkling of how many opinions have been held and disputed. Instruction will gradually cure them of their excessive self-confidence.
173. Effective and thoughtful guidance in education means that a teacher should prioritize allowing open discussion over quickly shutting down honest opinions, as long as the student’s objections are genuinely felt and their pride isn’t overly boosted by the attention given to their comments. The same consideration applies when it’s clear that the student can’t be convinced right away. In such cases, rather than insisting on a conclusion, it’s better to leave the judgment for later; it's easy to point out the student’s lack of knowledge and direct them towards future learning. The certainty that often comes from boys and young men typically stems from their considerable ignorance. They have no idea how many views have existed and been challenged over time. Gradual education will help reduce their excessive self-assurance.[178]
Only in a pure despotism would the enforcement of unquestioning obedience to authority be admissible. No country aspiring to political liberty could tolerate such a system. Even if all political considerations were dismissed, the development of subjective character alone would demand a condemnation of such a method. But in a country like ours, where men are both personally and politically self-governing, education to leadership is not second to education to obedience. There comes a time, therefore, when argument is in place, provided its purpose is to clarify the pupil’s insight into prudence or duty. It will not be too much to insist upon obedience without argument with all pupils so far as the ordinary school virtues—regularity, punctuality, silence, and industry—are concerned. Old and young can see their necessity. When it comes to the more intricate phases of conduct, the grounds for authority, if it is still exercised, may be revealed through dialogue. It is the constant effort of training to establish regulative principles in the minds of the older pupils, so that within the range of their capacity they may become self-governing. In other words, the moral plateaus of Kant are to be attained, not at a bound, but by a gradual progress in moral autonomy. Herein we see the superiority of Herbart’s conception of moral training. What Kant gave up as an unsolvable problem, can be seen to be only a natural process. Says Kant, “How a law can of itself directly determine the will is for human reason an insoluble problem, for it is identical with the problem how a free will is possible.”[19] The difficulty with[179] Kant’s theory was that he admitted no psychological means for attaining the free directive power of the mind. He could only say to the child: “You are free; be free. You are morally autonomous; exercise your power; be a free, self-governing citizen.” Kant regarded natural impulses, emotions, desires, pleasures, interests, as impure, hence to be rejected. They are indeed to be rejected as the final ends of character, but what Kant did not recognize is that they are the psychological means for attaining character. Primarily these feelings, far from being radically bad, as he thought, are radically good, since they help to furnish the necessary conditions of survival, both for the individual and for the race. Hunger, fear, courage, combativeness, prudence, sexual instinct, inquisitiveness, love of adornment, frugality, and a hundred other elemental passions have preserved the race from destruction in the past. A new set of social and intellectual impulses will in the future provide the instruments of survival, now that the field of evolution is transported from the jungle to the city. It is through intellectual insights that new ideals are formulated; it is through these elemental feelings that the active powers of the mind are stirred up to motor efficiency for their realization. From being biological means for physical survival, the feelings of man have now become psychological means for civic survival. Psychologically, therefore, men are not born free; they become free. To become free they must have opportunity to exercise freedom; at first within definite but widening limits while they are under the tuition of the school; later within the limits set by civil society; at last absolutely, when they have recognized that what is rational law in society is the law of their own being.
Only in a pure dictatorship would demanding complete obedience to authority be acceptable. No country that values political freedom could put up with such a system. Even without considering politics, developing individual character alone would require condemning such a method. In a country like ours, where people govern themselves both personally and politically, educating for leadership is just as important as educating for obedience. There comes a point when debate is appropriate, as long as its aim is to enhance the student’s understanding of prudence or duty. It’s reasonable to insist on obedience without question from all students regarding basic school virtues—regularity, punctuality, silence, and hard work. Both young and old can see why these are necessary. When it comes to more complex aspects of behavior, the reasons for authority, as it's still applied, can be explored through discussion. The ongoing effort in training is to establish guiding principles in the minds of older students, enabling them to become self-governing within their capability. In other words, the moral standards of Kant should be achieved gradually, not all at once. This highlights the strength of Herbart’s approach to moral education. What Kant considered an unsolvable problem can be viewed as a normal developmental process. Kant remarked, “How a law can of itself directly determine the will is for human reason an insoluble problem, for it is identical with the problem how a free will is possible.”[19] The issue with Kant’s theory was that he acknowledged no psychological means for achieving the free directive power of the mind. He could only tell the child: “You are free; be free. You are morally autonomous; exercise your power; be a free, self-governing citizen.” Kant saw natural impulses, emotions, desires, pleasures, and interests as impure, thus to be rejected. While they should indeed be rejected as ultimate ends of character, what Kant failed to recognize is that they are the psychological means to develop character. Initially, these feelings, rather than being fundamentally bad as he believed, are fundamentally good, as they help create the necessary conditions for survival, both for the individual and the species. Hunger, fear, courage, aggression, caution, sexual instinct, curiosity, love of beauty, thriftiness, and countless other basic passions have kept the species alive throughout history. A new set of social and intellectual impulses will provide the tools for survival in the future, as evolution shifts from the jungle to the city. It is through intellectual understanding that new ideals are formed; it is these basic feelings that ignite the active powers of the mind to effectively pursue these ideals. Rather than merely biological means for physical survival, human emotions have now become psychological means for civic survival. Psychologically, men are not born free; they become free. To be free, they must have the chance to practice freedom; initially within defined but expanding boundaries while in school; later within the limits established by society; ultimately, completely, when they understand that what is rational law in society is also the law of their own existence.
[19] “Selections,” p. 284.
“Selections,” p. 284.
174. But the matter of greatest importance from the point of view of training is consistency or inconsistency[180] of action. One who lightly sets up maxims must be made to feel the difficulty of living up to them. In this way a mirror is held up to the pupils, partly in order to put to rout untenable maxims, and partly to reinforce valid principles.
174. But the most important aspect of training is whether actions are consistent or inconsistent[180]. Those who casually establish guidelines need to understand how challenging it is to actually follow them. This approach serves as a reflection for the students, helping to dismiss unreasonable guidelines while also strengthening valid principles.
Among the untenable maxims we include also those which, although in accord with prudence, would offend against morality. If the pupil does not see already that they cannot be maintained, the application, by exhibiting their objectionable consequences, must bring to light their true character.
Among the unacceptable principles, we also include those that, while reasonable, would violate moral standards. If the student does not already understand that they cannot be upheld, showing their problematic consequences should reveal their true nature.
175. Regulative training often calls for rousing words from the teacher. He has to remind the pupil of happenings in the past and predict future consequences in case his faults should continue; he has to induce him to look within himself for the purpose of tracing the causal connection of his actions to its source. If, however, this was done earlier, with a view to moral education, no long speeches are now needed. Moreover, the teacher’s remarks become calmer and briefer the more effective they have been, the more he is justified in expecting independent judgment on the part of the pupil, and finally the more fully the latter has entered upon that period during which he looks about him to observe the words and actions of strangers. For, at the time when he has begun to compare the new with the old, his receptivity for the old is very weak, and soon vanishes completely;[181] unless, indeed, the old had been deeply impressed beforehand.
175. Regulatory training often requires motivating words from the teacher. He needs to remind the student of past events and warn about future consequences if their mistakes continue; he should encourage them to reflect on themselves to understand the link between their actions and their origins. However, if this was addressed earlier for moral education, lengthy speeches are no longer necessary. Additionally, the teacher's comments become calmer and shorter the more effective they have been, the more he can expect the student to think independently, and, ultimately, the more the student has started to observe the words and actions of others. At the moment when they begin to compare the new with the old, their receptiveness to the old is very low and quickly fades away, unless the old has been deeply ingrained beforehand.[181]
The purpose of the “rousing word” is to stimulate the mind to exercise its dynamic force to moral ends. The pupil must not be permitted to assume the attitude of negation, or to be a mere passive observer, or an innocent, devoid alike of power and significance, but he must be roused into a responsible character, an efficient participant in life’s activities. Successful appeal may be made to insights already acquired, but theoretically held; to dispositions implanted, but not yet actively exercised; to the application of old habits to new uses. Even where appeal must be made against objectionable conduct, it is better to apply the “inhibition of substitution” to that of “negation.”[20] While protesting against the evil, point the way to the right road.
The purpose of the “rousing word” is to inspire the mind to use its energy for moral goals. The student should not be allowed to take a negative stance, be a mere passive observer, or remain innocent and powerless. Instead, they should be encouraged to develop a responsible character and actively participate in life’s activities. We can successfully appeal to insights that are already understood but not fully engaged; to tendencies that are present but not yet put into action; and to applying old habits in new ways. Even when addressing undesirable behavior, it's more effective to use the “inhibition of substitution” rather than just “negation.” While opposing the wrongdoing, guide towards the right path.
176. Fourth. The pupil is to be kept in a quiet frame of mind; his intellect in a state suitable for clear apprehension. To outbursts of passion this applies absolutely; not so generally to emotions. Above all, tranquillity is the condition for the formation of theoretical judgments and hence also, although not exclusively so, for laying the foundation of morality.
176. Fourth. The student should maintain a calm mindset, with their intellect in a state that allows for clear understanding. This is especially important for controlling outbursts of anger; it’s not as strictly necessary for managing emotions. Most importantly, calmness is essential for forming theoretical judgments and is also, though not solely, the basis for building morality.
Every desire may develop into passion, if the soul is so often and so long in a desiring state that thoughts become focussed in the object longed for, whereby plans shape themselves, hopes arise, and ill-will[182] toward others strikes root. Accordingly, watchful attention must be given to all persistent and recurrent desires.
Every desire can turn into passion if the soul spends enough time in a state of longing that thoughts start to concentrate on the desired object. This leads to the formation of plans, the rise of hopes, and the growth of resentment toward others. Therefore, we must pay close attention to all ongoing and repetitive desires.
177. The most usual desires are those which arise from the physical need of food and of bodily activity. Now the first step to take is, while guarding against excess, to satisfy these natural impulses in order to subdue the unruliness springing from unsatisfied cravings. We ought not to permit hunger to tempt a boy to steal, nor encourage truancy by making him sit still too long. This warning is not superfluous. Such things happen even in families where less irrational practices might be expected. Over-indulgence, to be sure, is of far more frequent occurrence.
177. The most common desires are those that come from our basic needs for food and physical activity. The first step is to satisfy these natural urges, while being careful not to go overboard, so we can control the unruliness that comes from unfulfilled cravings. We shouldn't let hunger push a boy to steal, nor should we promote skipping school by making him sit still for too long. This advice is crucial. Such situations can happen even in families where more reasonable behaviors are expected. However, overindulgence is definitely much more common.
When the natural wants have lost their sting, a positive and irrevocable refusal must be opposed to further desires. With it should be combined some occupation capable of diverting the attention.
When basic needs have lost their urgency, a firm and definite refusal must be made against any further desires. This should be paired with some activity that can distract attention.
If the object which continues to excite desire can be removed, all the better. In one’s own home this is more often practicable, and more necessary as well, than in that of strangers. If the object cannot be removed, gratification may be put off until some future time. The foregoing statement may be illustrated by reference to the eating of fruit from the tree. An unconditional prohibition carries with it a dangerous temptation to disobedience, while unconditional permission would be equally inadmissible on account of[183] the plucking of green fruit, let alone the possible injury to the orchards of others.
If the thing that keeps sparking desire can be taken away, that's even better. This is usually more doable and necessary at home than in someone else's spaces. If it can't be removed, you might need to hold off on satisfying that desire until a later time. This can be explained with the example of eating fruit from a tree. A total ban creates a tempting urge to break the rules, while giving complete freedom is also not acceptable because of the risk of picking unripe fruit, not to mention the potential harm to other people's orchards.
Analogy will suggest many similar applications of the rule given.
Analogy will indicate many similar applications of the provided rule.
178. Again, children must be watched at their games. The more free play of the imagination we discover, and the more change there is, the less cause for concern. But when the same game is frequently repeated according to the same fixed rules, when a species of study is devoted to it in order to attain special proficiency, passions may be generated, such, for instance, as an excessive fondness for playing at cards, even where no stakes are involved. Gambling must be forbidden entirely, and in case compliance with this prohibition is doubtful, obedience must be secured by watchful supervision.
178. Once again, kids need to be monitored during their games. The more we see free play of their imagination and the more variety there is, the less we need to worry. However, when the same game is played over and over with the same strict rules, and a sort of study is focused on it to gain special skills, strong emotions can develop, like an excessive love for playing cards, even if there’s no money on the line. Gambling must be completely banned, and if there's any doubt about following this ban, compliance must be ensured through careful supervision.
To what end shall a teacher watch the games of children? To prevent the bullying of the weak by the strong, to see that unfairness does not creep in, to ward off vulgarity and profanity—these and similar purposes will be in the mind of the teacher. One of the chief functions of play, however, is to cultivate social efficiency. This has two aspects, willingness to coöperate with a group and ability to lead a group. It is necessary that there should be alternation of leadership and coöperation. If one child is allowed to lead all the time, he becomes overbearing; if another is always compelled to follow, he becomes subservient. Each has a one-sided development. Without discouraging unduly natural capacity for leadership, it is well for the teacher quietly to see to it that each child has his chance, both[184] to lead and to follow. Just as the kindergarten utilizes play to simulate the occupations of men, arousing sympathy with them and respect for them, so the school may by proper modification make the numerous group games, in which children delight, a potent means for securing coöperative habits and a general aptitude for social activities. Not a little attention is now paid to the various forms of children’s play. This is especially true of such publications as the Pedagogical Seminary, published at Clark University, Worcester, Massachusetts.
To what end should a teacher observe children's games? To prevent bullying of the vulnerable by the strong, to ensure fairness, to avoid crude behavior and bad language—these and similar goals will be in the teacher's mind. One of the main functions of play, however, is to develop social skills. This has two aspects: the willingness to cooperate with a group and the ability to lead a group. It's important to alternate between leadership and cooperation. If one child is allowed to lead all the time, they become overbearing; if another is always made to follow, they become submissive. Each has a limited development. Without discouraging a natural ability for leadership, it's important for the teacher to quietly ensure that each child has their chance to both lead and follow. Just as kindergarten uses play to mimic adult jobs, fostering empathy and respect for them, schools can, through appropriate modifications, harness the many group games children enjoy as a powerful way to develop cooperative habits and a general ability for social activities. There is now considerable attention being paid to the various forms of children's play. This is especially true in publications like the Pedagogical Seminary, published at Clark University, Worcester, Massachusetts.
179. An excellent means to avert the dangers connected with passionate tendencies is to engage in the acquisition of one of the fine arts, say music or drawing, even though there should be no more than a modicum of talent. The student must be given to understand, however, that he is not to take up the study of several musical instruments at once, nor give himself up to distracting attempts in sundry branches of pictorial representation. On the contrary, he is to strive consistently for proficiency in one definite direction.
179. A great way to avoid the risks associated with strong emotions is to take up one of the fine arts, like music or drawing, even if you have only a little talent. However, the student should understand that they shouldn't try to learn multiple musical instruments at the same time or get sidetracked by various forms of visual art. Instead, they should focus on becoming really good at one specific area.
In the total absence of aptitude we may avail ourselves of preferences of one kind or other, such as fondness for collecting plants or shells, for work in papier-maché, for joinery, for gardening even, etc.
In the complete lack of talent, we can rely on our preferences, like enjoying collecting plants or shells, working with papier-mâché, doing carpentry, or even gardening, etc.
Poetical talent, highly desirable in itself, nevertheless demands a solid counterweight in the shape of serious scholarly effort; for the young poet sets up claims that are likely to prove dangerous if he becomes absorbed in them.
Poetic talent, which is definitely valuable on its own, still requires a strong balance of serious academic work; because the young poet makes claims that could become risky if he gets too caught up in them.
The importance of this suggestion can hardly be overestimated. It is a case of the permanent inhibition of a host of possible evil tendencies by substitution. The youth who can turn with pleasure to his violin at every spare moment, never seriously misses the companionship of his mates. He has, moreover, a never failing source of enjoyment when there is nothing to interfere with his happiness, and an equally inexhaustible source of consolation when the waves of life are rough.
The significance of this suggestion can't be overstated. It's about permanently blocking a lot of potential bad habits by replacing them with something better. A young person who happily picks up his violin in his free time hardly feels the absence of his friends. Plus, he has a constant source of joy when nothing is bothering him, and an endless source of comfort when life gets tough.
180. Projects springing from passionate impulses, and betraying their existence by their interference with order, diligence, and the distribution of time, must be resolutely thwarted. This step is rendered all the more urgent when several share in the same plan, above all when ostentation, party spirit, and rivalry enter as impelling factors. Such things must not be allowed to gain ground; they very quickly vitiate the soil which education has been at such pains to prepare for tillage.
180. Projects that arise from strong emotions and disrupt order, hard work, and the management of time must be firmly resisted. This becomes even more critical when multiple people are involved in the same plan, especially when showiness, partisanship, and competition are driving factors. These influences should not be permitted to take hold; they quickly ruin the groundwork that education has worked so hard to cultivate.
181. The passions being kept at a distance, the successful grounding of the pupil in morality depends in general on the manner in which instruction coöperates with his occupations. The branch of instruction primarily most important in this respect is religious instruction. The most immediate source, however, of the development of disposition is found in the pupil’s social environment, and it becomes the business of training to cultivate a right spirit or disposition.[186] Let us, therefore, take up the practical ideas one by one.
181. When passions are kept at bay, the effective grounding of a student in morality largely relies on how instruction aligns with their activities. The most crucial type of instruction in this regard is religious education. However, the primary source of shaping a student's character comes from their social environment, and it's the responsibility of training to foster a positive spirit or attitude.[186] Let’s, therefore, discuss the practical ideas individually.
England and Germany are a unit in insisting upon the necessity of religious instruction in the schools. Half the elementary schools of the former country are in charge of the Church of England, five per cent are controlled by Roman Catholics, three per cent by Wesleyans, and some forty-two per cent by public boards of education. All of these schools are subsidized by the state, yet all, with few exceptions, give religious instruction. In Germany there are but two strong religious organizations—the Roman Catholic Church, mostly at the south, and the Lutheran, mostly at the north. The state establishes all schools, furnishing most of the funds for sustaining them and controlling their administration in large measure; yet the morning hour of the day is devoted to instruction in religion. Not so in the United States. Here, religious teaching is, to all appearances, permanently excluded from the public schools. In this condition of affairs there is but one resource: we must the more diligently insist upon those things that reflect the content of religion. That is, we must teach children to live in close coöperative union with their fellows. The subjective side of this training is portrayed in the sections that follow, where the transformation of ethical insights into ethical habits is discussed.
England and Germany agree on the importance of religious education in schools. In England, about half of elementary schools are run by the Church of England, five percent by Roman Catholics, three percent by Wesleyans, and around forty-two percent by public education boards. All these schools receive state funding, yet most, with a few exceptions, provide religious instruction. In Germany, there are two major religious groups—the Roman Catholic Church, primarily in the south, and the Lutheran Church, mainly in the north. The state establishes all schools, provides most of the funding for their operation, and largely controls their management; however, the morning part of the school day is dedicated to religious education. This is not the case in the United States, where religious teaching seems to be permanently excluded from public schools. Given this situation, we must focus more on promoting values that reflect the essence of religion. This means we need to teach children to work collaboratively with others. The personal aspect of this training is detailed in the following sections, which discuss how ethical insights can be transformed into ethical habits.
182. To speak of strife first, which cannot easily be wholly prevented among children, and which is present to their minds, at least as a possibility, self-help against unexpected bodily assaults cannot be forbidden. A determined self-defence is rather to be recommended, but self-defence paired with a merciful[187] treatment of one’s assailant. On the other hand, it is necessary to prohibit absolutely any arbitrary appropriation of objects, even though these objects should consist of ownerless or discarded trifles. No one must imagine that his mere pleasure is a law unto others. On the contrary, children ought to get used to limitations on ownership. That which has been given them for a certain purpose is to be used for that purpose alone, and must be taken care of with that purpose in view. Promises among children should not lightly be declared void, however foolish and impossible of fulfilment. The boy who, by a hasty promise, puts himself in an embarrassing position must be made conscious of the fact. Let his perplexity serve as a warning for the future. But over-hasty promises are to be accepted as little as they are to be made; and here is where we have to begin in untying the knots in which children occasionally entangle themselves.
182. First, let's talk about conflicts, which can’t be completely avoided among kids and are always a possibility for them. While they can't be discouraged from self-defense against unexpected physical attacks, it's better to promote self-defense that also shows mercy towards the attacker. On the other hand, any random taking of things must be strictly forbidden, even if those things are discarded or unclaimed. No one should think that their enjoyment is a law for others. Instead, children should learn to accept limits on ownership. Things given to them for a specific purpose should only be used for that purpose and should be cared for with that aim in mind. Promises made by children shouldn’t be easily dismissed, no matter how silly or impossible they seem. A boy who puts himself in a difficult situation with a hasty promise should be made aware of it. His confusion can serve as a lesson for the future. Yet, we should discourage making overly hasty promises just as much as we discourage accepting them. This is where we begin to help children untangle the issues they sometimes create for themselves.
It is not undesirable that pupils by their own acts furnish themselves with a few keenly-felt instances of complicated questions of rights. But pleasure in wrangling must be discountenanced; the pupils should learn to prevent and to avoid contention. They may gain enough familiarity with it to realize that it gives displeasure.
It’s not a bad thing for students to have some firsthand experiences with complex questions of rights through their own actions. However, they should not take pleasure in arguing; instead, students should learn to prevent and avoid conflicts. They can become familiar enough with it to understand that it leads to unhappiness.
183. At this point two paths open to our reflection. In the first place, contention pleases children because[188] it implies strength; in seeking it they are, as a rule, merely giving vent to excess of animal spirits. The outlet in this direction we must block, but we must furnish another elsewhere. Gymnastic exercises, too, are exhibitions of strength; emulation, which is not contention, is a welcome feature of sport and play. Mental activity likewise affords suitable opportunities for excelling; it also provides proper occasions for making comparisons; but relative excellence, children must understand distinctly, is not to be advanced by them as a basis for claims. Where the question is one of degree of attainment,—therefore one of perfice te,—the pupil is supplied with a practically useful standard by his own progress and retrogression. To hold up one pupil as a model for another to follow awakens envy; it will be much better, instead, to make allowances where a weak pupil cannot do more than he is actually doing.
183. At this point, two paths open up for us to consider. First, children enjoy competition because[188] it indicates strength; when they seek it, they are usually just expressing an overflow of energy. We need to block this outlet, but we must provide another one instead. Gymnastic exercises are also shows of strength; competition, which isn’t the same as contention, is a positive aspect of sports and play. Mental activities also provide suitable opportunities for excelling; they offer good chances for making comparisons as well. However, children must clearly understand that their relative excellence shouldn’t be used as a basis for making claims. When it comes to the level of achievement—thus a matter of perfice te—the student has a practically useful standard based on their own progress and setbacks. Holding up one student as an example for another to emulate can create envy; it’s much better to make allowances for a weaker student who can’t do more than they’re currently doing.
In all the ages of the past men have been the teachers of boys. Being men, they have naturally taken the man’s attitude toward youthful conduct. When one boy is gratuitously assaulted by another, they have upheld a sturdy self-defence as belonging to self-respect. In their eyes an unsuccessful defence is better than a cowardly retreat. With the advent of women as the teachers of boys it is natural that the doctrine of passive non-resistance should be emphasized. When women were only the physical mothers of the race, there was no danger of the decay of virility, but now that they have become the intellectual mothers as well, there may be such a danger. It is generally[189] conceded that the English boys’ schools, like Eton, Harrow, and Rugby, have been the best English conservers of independent manhood, for there every boy stood on his own merits, having to fight his own battles, being responsible for his own conduct, and at the same time living under a high code of boyish honor. In our own public schools, where no such esprit de corps is possible, and where the doctrine of peace at any price is likely to be insisted upon, it is possible that there may be a distinct decline of virility in the boys. Such a result would be deplorable; it would work to the detriment of public education, and would decrease in public estimation the value of woman’s services in the schoolroom. While discouraging strife, a teacher may, by a word of approval or excuse, justify an exercise of primitive defence of the person against unwarranted assault. Manly social games, like foot-ball, basket-ball, base-ball, are our best resources in developing those phases of character that are closely associated with motor efficiency. Here under proper guidance, self-control, sense of power and efficiency, courage, and almost every characteristic of virility may be happily developed. That forethought and supervision are needed is most true, else unlovely traits of character may easily get the upper hand.
Throughout history, men have been the ones teaching boys. As men, they naturally adopted a man's perspective on youthful behavior. When one boy is unjustly attacked by another, they have encouraged strong self-defense as a sign of self-respect. In their view, failing to defend oneself is better than cowardly backing down. With the rise of women as teachers for boys, it makes sense that the idea of passive non-resistance has become more prominent. When women were just the physical mothers of society, there was little risk of losing masculinity, but now that they have also become intellectual guides, that risk might exist. It is generally[189] agreed that English boys’ schools, like Eton, Harrow, and Rugby, have effectively maintained independent manhood; there, every boy had to rely on his own abilities, fight his own battles, and be accountable for his behavior, all while following a strong code of boyish honor. In our own public schools, where such a spirit of unity is unlikely to thrive and the idea of avoiding conflict at any cost is commonly emphasized, there might be a noticeable decline in boys' masculinity. Such an outcome would be unfortunate; it would harm public education and diminish the perceived value of women's roles in the classroom. While discouraging conflict, a teacher can, through a word of approval or understanding, support a necessary act of self-defense against unjust attacks. Competitive team sports like football, basketball, and baseball are our best means of developing the traits associated with physical skill. In this environment, with proper guidance, self-control, a sense of strength and effectiveness, bravery, and nearly all attributes of masculinity can be positively nurtured. It is true that careful planning and oversight are essential; otherwise, undesirable traits may easily take over.
184. The second of the two ways alluded to takes us from the idea of rights to that of equity. Strife is displeasing, but revenge still more, notwithstanding the truth of the saying: what is fair for one is fair for another. Children may indeed exercise their ethical acumen by trying to determine how much one deserves to suffer or to receive at the hands of others for the liberties he has taken or the self-restraint he has practised,[190] but they are not to arrogate to themselves the function of inflicting punishments or of bestowing rewards. Without surrendering their own insight, they must in this respect submit willingly to the authority of their superiors.
184. The second of the two ways mentioned takes us from the concept of rights to that of fairness. Conflict is unpleasant, but revenge is even worse, despite the saying: what's fair for one is fair for all. Children can indeed exercise their moral judgment by trying to figure out how much someone deserves to suffer or be rewarded for their actions or restraint, [190] but they shouldn't take on the role of administering punishments or giving rewards. While they can hold onto their own understanding, they must willingly defer to the authority of those in charge.
A similar course is to be pursued with reference to the distribution of presents, enjoyments, and marks of approval. To avoid giving the appearance of favoritism, the teacher should not, except for very good reasons, depart from the principle of equal division; but, on the other hand, he should refuse to accord to the pupils a right to these free gifts. While permitting them to have an opinion on the appropriateness of a greater or smaller share, he will properly deny them any right to demand by virtue of this opinion.
A similar approach should be taken regarding the distribution of gifts, rewards, and signs of approval. To avoid creating the impression of favoritism, the teacher should generally stick to the principle of equal distribution unless there are very good reasons otherwise. At the same time, the teacher should not grant students a right to these free gifts. While allowing them to express their opinions on whether a larger or smaller share is appropriate, the teacher should firmly deny any right for them to make demands based on those opinions.
185. In cases deeply engaging the children’s own sense of justice and equity, complaisance and readiness to yield should not be exacted on the spot. Children must have time to get to the end of their thoughts, and to weary of what is often very fruitless brooding, before they realize that to yield is after all a necessity, and hence in no sense a matter of magnanimous choice. At some future time they may be reminded that their path would have been smoother if the sentiment of good-will had been in control from the beginning and had arbitrated the dispute, or rather had prevented it entirely.
185. In situations that strongly involve children's own sense of justice and fairness, they shouldn't be forced to comply or give in right away. Kids need time to fully process their thoughts and to get tired of what is often unproductive worrying before they understand that giving in is ultimately necessary and not a grand act of generosity. Later on, they might realize that their situation would have been easier if goodwill had taken charge from the start to resolve the conflict, or even better, to avoid it altogether.
Good-will is to be revered everywhere as higher than[191] right; still the latter must be represented as something that cannot be set aside with impunity, unless it be by common agreement; that is, in consequence of the consent of the holders of rights.
Goodwill should be respected everywhere as more important than [191] rights; however, these rights must be seen as something that cannot be ignored without repercussions, unless there is mutual agreement, which means the consent of those who hold the rights.
There are two distinct aspects to good-will,—the benevolent, and the coöperative or social. The well-known story of the Jericho Road illustrates the first. He is the good neighbor who rescues the life of the man who has been assaulted by the way. But social good-will is more than benevolence; it is coöperation for the accomplishment of common purposes. Among farmers it means mutual care to prevent aggression, because of unruly stock or bad fences; it involves combined efforts for good schools, good roads, public libraries, educational agencies for promoting successful farming, associations for promoting successful pleasures. In cities social good-will means coöperation for paving and lighting streets, for the suppression of crime, for furnishing good water and efficient sewerage, for defence against fire, for rapid transit, besides the myriad agencies for promoting the mental, moral, and spiritual welfare of the people. A man in a city needs to be a good neighbor to everybody, even though he may know personally but one in a million. In other words, the civic man must be a brother, not only to him who falls among thieves, but to him who lives among them; not only to his brother in adversity, but also to his brother in prosperity.
There are two main aspects of goodwill—benevolence and cooperation or social engagement. The well-known story of the Jericho Road illustrates the first. He is the good neighbor who saves the life of the man who was attacked on the way. However, social goodwill goes beyond just kindness; it involves working together to achieve common goals. Among farmers, it means looking out for each other to prevent issues caused by loose livestock or damaged fences; it includes joint efforts for good schools, nice roads, public libraries, educational resources for successful farming, and organizations that enhance enjoyment. In cities, social goodwill translates to cooperation for paving and lighting streets, reducing crime, providing clean water and effective sewage systems, fire safety, fast public transport, and countless initiatives to support the mental, moral, and spiritual well-being of the community. A person in a city should strive to be a good neighbor to everyone, even if they only know one person among a million. In other words, a civic-minded individual must be a brother not only to those who fall into trouble but also to those who live in it; not just to those facing hardship, but also to those enjoying prosperity.
186. Finally, the degrees of difference among older boys, and especially among young men, with respect to the nearness with which they approach the still distant realization of the idea of inner freedom, are, as a rule, sufficiently marked to be patent to all.[192] The superior excellence of those distinguished for steady and rational conduct is usually dwelt on by the teacher rather too much than too little; children are themselves too keen in observing each other’s shortcomings not to see how far behind the best some are. We ought, therefore, rather to avoid stimulating in children the tendency to belittle others, than to turn their attention to that which does not escape them anyway.
186. Finally, the differences among older boys, especially young men, regarding how close they are to achieving the still distant concept of inner freedom, are generally noticeable to everyone.[192] Teachers often focus too much on the exceptional qualities of those who display steady and rational behavior; children are very observant of each other's flaws and can easily see who is lagging behind. Therefore, we should focus on preventing children from diminishing others rather than drawing their attention to things they already notice.
187. The bad conduct of adults near to the pupils will not, of course, be exposed by the teacher; and if publicly known, the example set will repel more than allure, so long as self-interest does not prompt imitation or a search for excuses. But we need not entertain much hope either that a worthy example will be followed; youth is too prone to regard rectitude as a matter of course. Hence it will not be superfluous to call special attention to right conduct, and to give expression to the esteem which is its due. This applies particularly to the time when a growing boy’s outlook over society widens, and he begins to compare many things whose false glitter might deceive him.
187. Teachers won't expose the bad behavior of adults around their students. If it's known publicly, that kind of example will push students away rather than attract them, unless self-interest leads them to imitate or find excuses. However, we shouldn't expect worthy examples to be followed easily; young people often see doing the right thing as just expected behavior. Therefore, it’s important to pay special attention to right conduct and to express the respect it deserves. This is especially crucial when a growing boy starts to broaden his view of society and begins to compare things that might mislead him with their false allure.
There are many aspects of inner freedom. It is possible for a narrow-minded man to live in perfect tranquillity, so far as his conscience is concerned. Even if one lived true to Kant’s categorical imperative, which says, “So act that the maxims, or rules, of your conduct might, through your own will, become[193] universal laws,” it would still be possible for one to have a mind at peace with itself while doing things that a higher code of morality would forbid. For example, suppose I am an American Indian, and the question arises, Shall I torture my enemies? Of course: do not the traditions of my tribe prescribe it? This simply means that our ideals of conduct grow out of our environment; they are social in their genesis. This truth shows the infinite importance of making instruction reveal clearly the best ideals of religion and civilization, for there may be as much inward freedom, or good conscience, in the slums as in the wealthy districts of the city. Subjective peace of mind may mean much or little. A murderer may sleep as soundly as a missionary, but a man of high ideals is whipped as with scorpions, if his conduct be base. He feels that his higher self is outraged; he has no peace except through repentance, restitution, and reform.
There are many aspects of inner freedom. A narrow-minded person can live in complete peace, at least in terms of their conscience. Even if someone strictly follows Kant’s categorical imperative, which states, “Act so that the maxims, or rules, of your conduct might, through your own will, become[193] universal laws,” they could still maintain a peaceful mind while engaging in actions that a higher moral code would condemn. For instance, let’s say I’m a Native American, and I face the question: Should I torture my enemies? Of course: doesn’t the tradition of my tribe dictate it? This just shows that our ideals of conduct arise from our environment; they have a social origin. This reality highlights the crucial importance of education in clearly presenting the best ideals of religion and civilization since there can be just as much inner freedom, or good conscience, in the slums as in affluent neighborhoods. Subjective peace of mind can mean a lot or very little. A murderer might sleep just as soundly as a missionary, but a person with high ideals suffers tremendously if their actions are base. They feel that their higher self is being violated; they find no peace except through repentance, restitution, and reform.
188. Fifth. The pupil’s mind, we will suppose, has been properly directed, partly through the social relations obtaining among children, partly through examples and instruction, to the requirements of the various moral ideas, and he has learned accordingly to discriminate with some keenness between will relations. Now the time has arrived for moral education in the strict sense. For we cannot leave it to chance whether our young charges will, of their own initiative, synthesize for themselves noble actions on the one hand and base actions on the other, whether they will take time to reflect, and will, each for himself, apply the lessons taught. On the contrary, they[194] all have to be told, each one individually has to be told, truths that no one is wont to hear with pleasure. The more thoroughly the teacher knows his pupils, the better. By showing them that he divines their thoughts, he supplies them with the most effectual incentive to self-observation. Now the basis of what is commonly known as moralizing is furnished by a retrospective view of the pupil’s conduct for some time past, by references to influences formerly at work within him, and by an analysis of his good and bad qualities. Such teaching is by no means to be condemned, nor even to be regarded as superfluous. In its proper place it is absolutely essential. Many, it is true, grow up without ever having heard a serious word of deserved censure, but no one ought to grow up in that way.
188. Fifth. Let's assume that the student’s mind has been properly guided, partly through the social interactions among peers and partly through examples and lessons, to the principles of different moral ideas, and he has learned to distinguish fairly sharply between different kinds of relationships. Now, the moment has come for moral education in its true sense. We can't just leave it up to chance whether our young ones will, on their own, figure out noble actions versus wrongful actions, whether they will take the time to reflect, and whether each will apply what has been taught to them. On the contrary, they[194] all need to be told—each one personally needs to hear—truths that most people don’t like to hear. The more deeply the teacher understands his students, the better. By showing them that he understands their thoughts, he provides them with a powerful motivation for self-reflection. The foundation of what people typically call moralizing is built on reviewing the student’s past behavior, referencing influences that have previously affected them, and analyzing their good and bad traits. Such teaching should not be dismissed or seen as unnecessary. When appropriately applied, it is absolutely crucial. Many grow up without ever hearing a serious and deserved critique, but no one should grow up that way.
189. Only praise and censure are thought of here, not harsh words, much less harsh treatment. Reprimands and punishments following upon single acts are something different; they, too, may lead to moral reflections, but must first have become things of the past. Moral improvement is not brought about by the constraint of government, nor is it the result of those pedagogical punishments which warn the pupil and sharpen his wits by means of the natural consequences of actions (157). But it is brought about through the imitation of the language of conscience and of genuine honor, as seen in impartial spectators.[195] Moreover, this does not exclude consideration of the excuses which every one readily finds in his heart. But while due allowance is made for mitigating circumstances, the pupil is cautioned against relying on them in future.
189. Here, we only think about praise and criticism, not about harsh words or, even less, harsh treatment. Reprimands and punishments that follow individual actions are a different matter; they can lead to moral reflections, but only once they've become part of the past. Moral improvement doesn't come from government restrictions, nor from those teaching punishments that warn students and sharpen their awareness through the natural consequences of their actions (157). Instead, it happens through mimicking the language of conscience and genuine honor, as seen by impartial observers.[195] Furthermore, this approach doesn't ignore the excuses everyone tends to find in their hearts. However, while we consider mitigating circumstances, students are warned not to depend on them in the future.
190. Ordinarily youth deserves neither strong commendation nor severe criticism, and it is well to guard carefully against exaggeration in either direction, if for no other reason than merely this, that exaggeration either detracts from effectiveness, or else causes, if not timidity, at least an unfortunate embarrassment. There is one species of magnifying, however, which subserves a good purpose, because it enables pupils to see more clearly the importance of trifles and the great significance of their own actions, and in this way helps to counteract thoughtlessness. We refer to viewing the present in the light of the future. The pettiest faults are liable to grow through habit; the faintest desire, unless kept under control, may turn into passion. Then, too, the future circumstances of one’s life are uncertain; allurements and temptations may come into it, or unlooked-for misfortunes. This prevision of the possibilities of the future is, of course, not prophecy, and no such claim should be made for it; nevertheless, it does good service as a warning.
190. Typically, young people don't deserve either strong praise or harsh criticism, and it's important to be careful not to exaggerate in either direction. Doing so can either reduce effectiveness or lead to awkwardness, if not fear. However, there's one type of exaggeration that serves a good purpose because it helps students understand the importance of small things and the significance of their actions, which can help combat thoughtlessness. This involves looking at the present in light of the future. Even minor faults can grow into habits, and a small desire, if not kept in check, might turn into a strong passion. Plus, the future is unpredictable; temptations and challenges can arise unexpectedly. While this foresight is not the same as prophecy and shouldn't be treated as such, it serves as a valuable warning.
191. When the pupil has been brought to the point where he regards his moral education as a matter of serious import, instruction in conjunction with a growing[196] knowledge of the world may bring it about that a glow of moral sentiment permeates his whole thought, and that the idea of a moral order unites on the one hand with his religious concepts, and with his self-observation on the other. Henceforth the direct, emphatic expression of praise or censure will have to be less frequent. It will no longer be as easy as formerly to give a clearer account to the pupil of what goes on within him than he has already rendered to himself. We may still, however, come to his assistance from another direction, namely, that of general concepts,—a field in which advancing youthful reflection is little by little finding its bearings.
191. When the student realizes that his moral education is important, teaching combined with a growing[196] knowledge of the world can lead to a deep sense of morality influencing his thoughts. The concept of a moral order will merge with his religious beliefs and self-awareness. From this point on, direct and clear expressions of praise or criticism will become less common. It won’t be as easy to clarify for the student what he feels inside compared to what he has already figured out for himself. However, we can still help him from another angle—through general concepts—a area where young minds are gradually finding their way.
192. Sixth. It is the business of training to remind at the right moment and to correct faults. We may safely assume that, even after a young man has reached the plane of moral decisions, he will still stand in need of frequent reminders, although in this respect individuals exhibit great differences, which observation alone is able to reveal. But that which he is reminded of consists of resolves which lay claim to something like universal validity, but which are not likely to make good that claim when incorrectly formulated or conceived in the wrong connection. General considerations become predominant with only a very few at best; but youth especially sees and experiences so much that is new that the old is easily slighted for the new, and, accordingly, the general for the particular[197] still more. Nevertheless, it is far easier for training to remind and to correct with success where a good, firm foundation has been laid, than it is to support (161–166) when in adolescence nothing is found by which the pupil might try to steady himself.
192. Sixth. The role of training is to provide timely reminders and correct mistakes. We can assume that even after a young man has reached a level of moral decision-making, he will still need frequent reminders, although individuals vary significantly in this regard, which can only be revealed through observation. The reminders consist of resolutions that claim universal relevance, but they may not hold up if they're not properly articulated or understood in the right context. General ideas are mainly grasped by only a very few; young people, in particular, encounter so much that is new, leading them to easily overlook the old in favor of the new, and even more so, the general in favor of the specific[197]. However, it's much easier for training to effectively remind and correct when a solid foundation has already been established than to provide support (161–166) when, during adolescence, there is nothing for the student to hold onto to steady himself.
193. It is evident from the wide divergence among the principles which schools old and new have accepted as the basis of ethics and of systems of justice, that many conflicting, or at any rate, one-sided views may arise when the attempt is made to introduce order, definiteness, and consistency into existing ethical concepts. This whole conflict and one-sidedness of opinion, together with the innumerable fluctuations that may find a place here besides,—all this is likely to be reproduced in youthful minds, particularly where they make it a point of going their own way. Very frequently acquired principles adjust themselves to inclinations; the subjective side of character adapts itself to the objective. Now, while it is the business of instruction to correct error, training must avail itself of those opportunities that reveal a directing of thoughts by inclination.
193. It's clear from the significant differences in principles that both old and new schools have accepted as the foundation of ethics and justice systems that many conflicting or at least one-sided views can emerge when trying to bring order, clarity, and consistency to existing ethical concepts. This entire conflict and one-sidedness of opinion, along with the countless fluctuations that might come into play here, are likely to be reflected in young minds, especially when they are determined to chart their own course. Often, learned principles align with personal inclinations; the subjective side of character adjusts to the objective. While it's the role of education to correct mistakes, training should take advantage of opportunities that show how thoughts are guided by personal tendencies.
194. When, however, the pupil has once established confidence in his disposition as well as in his principles, training must withdraw. Unnecessary judging and over-anxious observation would only impair naturalness, and give rise to extraneous motives. When once self-culture has been assumed, it should be left alone.
194. Once the student has built confidence in both their character and principles, training should be scaled back. Excessive judgment and constant scrutiny would only disrupt their natural behavior and introduce outside influences. When self-improvement has begun, it should be allowed to develop on its own.
SECTION IV
SYNOPSIS OF GENERAL PEDAGOGICS FROM
THE PERSPECTIVE OF AGE
CHAPTER I
The First 3 Years
195. Owing to the delicate character of the thread of life during the earliest years, care for the body, a subject falling outside the limits of the present discussion, has precedence of everything else. The state of health, accordingly, implies great variations in the time available for profitable culture of the mind. But short as this time may be, it is extremely important, because of the great receptivity and susceptibility of the first period of life.
195. Because of the fragile nature of life in the early years, taking care of the body, a topic beyond the scope of this discussion, comes before everything else. Health, therefore, can greatly affect the time available for effectively nurturing the mind. Though this time may be limited, it is crucial due to the high receptiveness and vulnerability during the early stages of life.
The lines of study suggested by these few remarks upon infancy have been arduously pursued in recent years by Perez,[21] Preyer,[22] Baldwin,[23] and others. The attempt has been made in[199] these works to show how the psychical and physical powers of the young child actually unfold. In this way it has been possible to correct many erroneous deductions from adult psychology, thus making elementary training more successful.
The areas of research highlighted by these brief comments on infancy have been diligently explored in recent years by Perez,[21] Preyer,[22] Baldwin,[23] and others. These studies aim to demonstrate how the mental and physical abilities of young children actually develop. As a result, many incorrect assumptions based on adult psychology have been corrected, leading to more effective early education.
196. Those moments when the child is fully awake and free from suffering should always be utilized by presenting, but not obtruding, something for sense-perception. Powerful impressions are to be avoided. The same caution applies to violent changes; very slight variations often suffice to revive waning attention. It is desirable to secure a certain completeness of eye- and ear-impressions, so that the senses may be equally at home everywhere within the fields of sight and sound.
196. Those times when the child is fully awake and free from discomfort should always be used to present, but not force, something for them to see or hear. Intense impressions should be avoided. The same care should be taken with sudden changes; very small adjustments often are enough to regain fading attention. It’s important to ensure a certain completeness of visual and auditory impressions so that the senses feel comfortable everywhere in the realms of sight and sound.
197. As far as safety permits, the spontaneous activity of the child should have free play, primarily that he may get practice in the use of every limb, but also in order that by his own attempts his observations of objects and their changeableness may be enlarged.
197. As much as safety allows, a child’s natural activities should include free play, mainly so they can practice using their limbs, but also to expand their observations of objects and how they change through their own efforts.
198. Unpleasant, repellent impressions of persons, whoever they are, must be most carefully guarded against. No one can be allowed to treat a child as a plaything.
198. Unpleasant, off-putting impressions of people, no matter who they are, must be carefully avoided. No one should be allowed to treat a child like a toy.
199. On the other hand, no one must allow himself to be ruled by a child, least of all when the child becomes importunate. Otherwise, wilfulness will be the inevitable consequence, a result almost unavoidable with sickly children, by reason of the attention demanded by their sufferings.
199. On the flip side, no one should let themselves be controlled by a child, especially when that child becomes demanding. Otherwise, stubbornness will be the inevitable result, which is almost unavoidable with fragile children due to the attention their struggles require.
200. A child must always feel the superiority of adults, and often his own helplessness. The necessary obedience is founded on this feeling. With consistent treatment, persons constantly about the child will secure obedience more readily than others who are rarely present. Outbursts of passion must be given time to subside unless circumstances urgently require a different course.
200. A child should always sense the authority of adults and frequently their own vulnerability. This sense of dependence is what underpins the necessary obedience. When treated consistently, the people who are regularly around the child will encourage obedience more effectively than those who only show up occasionally. Emotional outbursts should be allowed to calm down unless the situation demands a different response.
201. On rare occasions there may be an exhibition of force inspiring enough fear to make a threat effective and to check an excess of animal spirits. For if government is to escape the extremely harmful necessity of severe disciplinary measures later on, it must become firmly established during the earliest years of childhood.
201. Sometimes, there might be a show of strength that creates enough fear to make a threat serious and to control extreme enthusiasm. Because if the government wants to avoid the serious downside of needing harsh punishments later on, it needs to be firmly established in the early years of childhood.
202. The language of children demands scrupulous attention from the beginning, in order to prevent the formation of incorrect and careless habits of speech, which at a later period it usually requires much trouble and loss of time to eradicate. But literary forms of expression that are beyond the comprehension of children are to be strictly avoided.
202. Kids' language needs careful attention right from the start to prevent the development of incorrect and careless speaking habits, which later take a lot of effort and time to fix. However, literary expressions that children don't understand should be completely avoided.
CHAPTER II
Ages Four to Eight
203. The real boundary line is fixed not by age, but by that stage of development when the helplessness of the first stage is superseded by control of the limbs and a connected use of language. And the mere fact that children are now able to free themselves from much momentary discomfort carries with it greater calmness and cheerfulness.
203. The real boundary line is determined not by age, but by the stage of development when the initial helplessness is replaced by control over the body and a coherent use of language. Just the fact that kids can now alleviate a lot of temporary discomfort brings with it more calmness and happiness.
204. In proportion as the child learns to help himself, assistance from without must be withdrawn. At the same time government must increase in firmness, and with many children in severity, until the last traces of that wilfulness vanish, which the former period does not as a rule wholly escape. But this presupposes that no one provoke the child unnecessarily to any kind of resistance. The firmer the established order of things about the child, the readier his compliance.
204. As the child becomes more independent, outside help should gradually be reduced. At the same time, authority must become stricter, and for many children, harsher, until any remaining signs of stubbornness disappear, which usually isn't fully avoided in earlier stages. However, this assumes that no one unnecessarily provokes the child to resist. The more stable the environment around the child, the more willing he is to comply.
205. The child must be given as much freedom as circumstances will permit, one purpose being to induce frank self-expression, and to obtain data for a study of his individuality. Still, the main thing at this age[202] is to guard against bad habits, especially such as are connected with objectionable tendencies of disposition.
205. The child should be given as much freedom as possible, with the goal of encouraging open self-expression and gathering information about their individuality. However, the most important thing at this age[202] is to protect them from developing bad habits, particularly those linked to undesirable personality traits.
206. Two of the ethical ideas concern us here directly, each, however, in its own way. They are the ideas of good-will and perfection. Some particular aspects of the latter a child will almost always hit upon himself. The former less often springs up spontaneously; it has to be implanted, and this cannot always be done directly.
206. Two ethical concepts are relevant to us here, each in its own way. They are the ideas of goodwill and perfection. A child will often discover certain aspects of the latter on their own. The former, however, rarely comes up naturally; it needs to be instilled, and that isn't always possible directly.
207. The ill-will, which many children exhibit frequently, is always a bad sign,—one that needs to be treated very seriously. A character once perverted in this respect can no longer be radically changed for the better. And this perversion sometimes begins very early. The steps to be taken in this connection are determined by the following considerations:—
207. The negative feelings many kids often show are always a bad sign—one that should be taken very seriously. A character that's been twisted in this way can rarely be completely changed for the better. This negativity can sometimes start at a very young age. The actions needed to address this situation are based on the following considerations:—
208. In the first place, younger children are not to be left alone very much. Their life should be a social life, and their social circle one subject to strict order. This requirement fulfilled, all manifestations of ill-will are at variance with the rule; and as soon as they appear, the child finds himself opposed by the existing state of things. Now, the more he has grown accustomed to participation in the common will, to occupying his time, and being happy within its pale, the less will he be able to bear the feeling of isolation. To punish a child for an exhibition of ill-will, leave him alone.
208. First of all, younger kids shouldn't be left alone too much. Their lives should be social, and their social circles should have clear structure. When this is in place, any signs of resentment go against the rules, and as soon as they show up, the child finds himself at odds with how things are. The more used he becomes to being part of the group, filling his time, and being happy within that environment, the less he will be able to handle feelings of loneliness. To discipline a child for showing resentment, just leave him alone.
209. But such punishment presupposes the undiminished sensitiveness of the younger child, who, on being left alone, begins to cry, and feels utterly helpless and weak, but who, on the other hand, becomes cheerful again the moment he is readmitted into the social circle. If this period has been neglected, if the ill-disposed child has already caused aversion in the circle in which he could have been happy, one feeling of ill-will begets another in return, and nothing remains but to insist on strict justice.
209. But this kind of punishment assumes that the younger child is still very sensitive. When left alone, the child starts to cry and feels completely helpless and weak. However, as soon as they are welcomed back into the group, they become cheerful again. If this crucial time has been overlooked and the troublesome child has already caused resentment among others, one negative feeling leads to another, leaving only the need to enforce strict fairness.
210. The mere social spirit which keeps ill-will at a distance, is, of course, very far from being good-will; children are even prone to look upon descriptive illustrations of the latter, in the ordinary run of books for children, as fables easily invented. Hence the first thing to make sure of is faith in good-will. We have in mind here especially the child who through force of habit has lost his appreciation of the kindnesses constantly showered upon him in the course of his education. Deprive him of some of the care to which he is accustomed; its renewal will then make him recognize and prize it as a voluntary act. When, on the contrary, children regard what is being done for them as their right, or as the effect of some sort of mechanism, this blunder of theirs becomes a fruitful source of the most manifold moral evils.
210. The simple social behavior that keeps hostility away is, of course, far from true kindness; children often see examples of kindness in typical children's books as mere made-up stories. Therefore, the first thing to ensure is a belief in kindness. Here, we especially think of the child who, due to habit, has lost the ability to appreciate the kindness constantly shown to him during his education. If you take away some of the care he’s used to, he will then recognize and value its return as a genuine act of goodwill. Conversely, when children see what’s being done for them as a right or as something that just happens automatically, this misunderstanding can lead to many different moral problems.
211. To the union of kindness with the necessary degree of severity, we must add friendliness, lest the[204] heart of the child become chilled, and the germs of good-will perish. During the period under consideration, the child’s frame of mind is still determined directly by the treatment he receives. Continued unfriendliness of manner produces dull indifference. The twofold problem of lifting the idea of good-will into adequate prominence and of actually awakening sentiments of good-will can, it is true, not be solved as early as childhood. But much has been gained if sympathy, supported by sociable cheerfulness, unites with a belief in the good-will of those on whom the child feels dependent, as if they were higher beings. The soil is ready now for religious culture and its furthering influences.
211. To combine kindness with the right amount of firmness, we should also include friendliness, so that the [204] child's heart doesn’t become cold, and the seeds of goodwill don’t die. During this period, a child's mindset is still directly influenced by how they are treated. Ongoing unfriendly behavior leads to a sense of indifference. The challenge of highlighting the importance of goodwill and actually fostering feelings of goodwill can’t be fully resolved in childhood. However, it’s a significant step if sympathy, paired with cheerful social interactions, connects with a belief in the goodwill of those the child relies on, almost as if they were superior beings. This creates a fertile ground for religious growth and its positive influences.
212. The idea of perfection in its universal aspect is indeed as foreign to the child’s mind as that of good-will; nevertheless, the rudiments of what this idea implies can be imparted with far greater assurance of success. As the child grows and thrives, his strength and accomplishments increase likewise, and he takes pleasure in his own progress. But here innumerable differences in kind and in degree demand our observation, particularly in view of the purpose of linking instruction to the stage of growth. For it is during this period that synthetic as well as analytic instruction begins, although it does not as yet normally constitute the chief occupation of the child.
212. The concept of perfection, in its broad sense, is just as unfamiliar to a child's mind as the idea of goodwill; however, the basics of what this concept means can be taught with much greater confidence in their success. As the child develops and prospers, their strength and achievements also increase, and they find joy in their own progress. But here, countless differences in type and extent require our attention, especially regarding the goal of connecting teaching to the child's stage of growth. This is the time when both synthetic and analytic instruction starts, even though it doesn't yet typically become the child's main focus.
213. As the child’s sphere of free activity widens[205] and his own attempts create a growing store of experiences, which the teacher will often find it very necessary to augment by purposely showing him about, the earlier fancies are gradually being overbalanced by experiential knowledge, although different individuals may exhibit great variations of ratio. From this impulse to appropriate the new, spring the numerous questions children put to the teacher, on the tacit assumption that he is omniscient. They are the outcome of the mood of the moment, they are purposeless, and most of them do not recur if not answered then and there. Many of them concern words alone, and cease on mention of some suitable designation of the object in question. Others relate to the connection of events, especially to motives underlying the actions of human beings, fictitious and real alike. Now, although many questions cannot, while others must not, be answered, the tendency to ask questions should, generally speaking, receive constant encouragement as a sign of native interest, of the absence of which the teacher often becomes painfully aware later on without being able by any skill on his part to revive it. Here an opportunity is presented for preparing the ground in many directions for future instruction. Only, the teacher has to refrain, in answering questions, from the prolixity of untimely thoroughness; what he ought to do is to sail on the waves of childish fancy. And this does not usually lend itself to experiments;[206] its movements are, on the contrary, often inconveniently capricious.
213. As the child's area of free exploration expands[205], and their own attempts lead to a growing collection of experiences, the teacher often finds it essential to enhance this by actively showing them around. The earlier imaginations are gradually outweighed by practical knowledge, although individuals may vary significantly in this balance. From this urge to grasp the new, numerous questions arise from children directed at the teacher, who they assume knows everything. These questions reflect the mood of the moment, are often random, and many don’t come back if not addressed immediately. Many focus solely on words and stop once an appropriate name for the object is provided. Others relate to the connections between events, particularly the motives behind human actions, both fictional and real. While many questions can’t be answered, and others shouldn’t be, the inclination to ask questions should be consistently encouraged as a sign of natural curiosity. Later, the teacher often painfully realizes the absence of this interest, and no amount of skill can reignite it. This presents an opportunity to lay the groundwork for future learning in various areas. However, the teacher must avoid excessive detail when answering questions and should instead ride the waves of a child's imagination. This approach doesn't typically lend itself to experiments[206]; its motions are often unpredictably whimsical.
214. So long as there can be no fixed time for the analytic lessons woven into answers to the questions of children, analytic instruction is coincident with the guidance of the child’s attention, with his social intercourse, with his occupations and the consequent cultivation of habits, with hardening exercises, ethical judgments, and the earliest religious impressions; in some measure also with reading exercises.
214. As long as there’s no set time for the analytical lessons included in the answers to children's questions, analytical instruction is tied to directing the child's attention, their social interactions, their activities, and the resulting development of habits, along with challenging exercises, moral decisions, and early religious experiences; it’s also somewhat linked to reading activities.
215. To the latter portion of this period belong the first steps in synthetic instruction, reading, writing, ciphering, the simplest modes of arrangement, and the first observation exercises. If the child is as yet incapable of uniform attention during a whole hour, the teacher will be satisfied with smaller divisions of time; the degree of attention is more important than its duration.
215. The latter part of this period includes the initial steps in synthetic instruction, such as reading, writing, basic math, simple organization methods, and the first observation exercises. If the child is still unable to focus consistently for a full hour, the teacher will be content with shorter time intervals; the quality of attention matters more than its length.
Note that the subjects enumerated fall into different groups. Counting, arranging, observing, are different phases of the natural development of the mind. Instruction does not create these activities; its business is merely to accelerate them. At the beginning, therefore, our mode of procedure must be as much as possible analytic. On the other hand, reading and writing can be taught only synthetically, although on the basis of an antecedent analysis of speech sounds.
Note that the subjects listed fall into different categories. Counting, organizing, and observing are different steps in the natural growth of the mind. Teaching doesn’t create these activities; its role is simply to speed them up. At the start, therefore, our approach must be as analytical as possible. On the other hand, reading and writing can only be taught in a synthetic way, although they should be based on a previous analysis of speech sounds.
(1) Arranging—commonly neglected, though[207] wrongly so—is an exceedingly easy exercise in itself, and facilitates the performance of many other tasks. It is therefore appropriate for children. That three objects may change places from right to left (from front to rear, from above to below) and vice versa—this is the beginning. The next step is to show that three objects admit of six permutations in a straight line. To find how many pairs can be formed out of a given number of objects, is one of the easiest problems. How far to go, is a matter to be determined by circumstances. Not letters, however, but objects,—the children themselves,—should be changed about, permuted, and varied in position. The teaching of a subject like this must in a measure have the semblance of play.
(1) Arranging—often overlooked, but mistakenly so—is a really simple activity on its own, and it helps with many other tasks. It’s therefore suitable for kids. The idea that three objects can switch places from right to left (from front to back, from top to bottom) and vice versa—this is the starting point. The next step is to show that three objects can be arranged in six different ways in a straight line. Figuring out how many pairs can be made from a certain number of objects is one of the simplest problems. How far to take it depends on the situation. It’s not letters, but objects—the kids themselves—that should be moved around, arranged, and changed in position. Teaching a subject like this should feel a bit like playing.
(2) The first observation exercises begin with straight lines drawn vertically or cross-wise. Use may be made also of knitting needles variously placed, side by side or across each other, of domino checks, and of similar objects. Next comes the circle, subdivided and presented in manifold ways.
(2) The initial observation exercises start with straight lines drawn vertically or horizontally. You can also use knitting needles arranged in different ways, either next to each other or crossing, domino patterns, and similar items. Following that, there are circles, divided and shown in various forms.
(3) For arithmetic, likewise, concrete objects are needed,—coins, for example, which are counted and arranged in different groups to illustrate sums, differences, and products. At first the highest number employed should not exceed, say, twelve or twenty.
(3) For arithmetic, you also need physical items—like coins, for instance, which can be counted and grouped in different ways to show sums, differences, and products. Initially, the highest number used shouldn’t go beyond, let’s say, twelve or twenty.
(4) For work in reading we may avail ourselves of letters and numbers printed on cards, which lend[208] themselves to a variety of arrangements. If children are slow about learning to read, the blunder must not be made of neglecting their mental culture in other directions, as though reading were its necessary prerequisite. Reading often demands a large amount of patience, and should never be allowed to produce a feeling of aversion to teachers and books.
(4) For reading activities, we can use letters and numbers printed on cards, which lend[208] themselves to different arrangements. If children are slow to learn to read, we shouldn't make the mistake of ignoring their mental development in other areas, as if reading were a prerequisite. Learning to read often requires a lot of patience and should never lead to a dislike for teachers and books.
(5) Writing is ushered in by the elementary drawing that must accompany observation exercises. Writing itself, when once well started, furthers reading.
(5) Writing begins with basic drawing that should go along with observation exercises. Once writing is properly initiated, it promotes reading.
216. But already at this point many fall behind. Puzzled at first by the demand upon them for the dull labor of learning, they surrender themselves later on to the feeling of incapacity. In large schools, where there are always some outstripping the rest, and where the majority are trying to keep up with the pace set, performance can be had more readily, although it is performance by imitation rather than by an inner sequence of thought. And even here we find thoroughly disheartened laggards.
216. But at this point, many begin to fall behind. Initially confused by the requirement for the tedious work of learning, they later give in to feelings of inadequacy. In large schools, where some students are always surpassing others and the majority are struggling to keep up, it's easier to achieve performance, although this performance is often just imitation rather than genuine understanding. Even in this environment, there are still students who feel completely discouraged.
CHAPTER III
Childhood
217. The boundary line between boyhood and early childhood is fixed, so far as this is possible at all, by the fact that the boy, if allowed to do so, will leave the company of adults. Formerly he felt insecure when left alone: now he considers himself fairly well acquainted with his immediate environment, beyond which vistas of all sorts are opening. Accordingly, at this stage it becomes incumbent on the adult to attach himself to the boy, to restrain him, to divide the time for him, and to circumscribe the fancies born of his self-confidence,—a course of action rendered all the more necessary by the circumstance that the boy is a stranger as yet to the timidity with which the youth joins the ranks of men. For boyhood is marked off from adolescence by this, that the boy’s aims are still unsettled; he plays and takes no thought of to-morrow. Moreover, his dream of manhood is one of arbitrary power. The play-impulse remains active for a long time, unless checked by conventionality.
217. The line between childhood and early adolescence is defined, as much as possible, by the fact that a boy, if given the chance, will step away from adult company. In the past, he felt anxious when left alone; now he feels pretty familiar with his immediate surroundings, beyond which all kinds of new possibilities are emerging. At this point, it's crucial for adults to connect with the boy, to guide him, to structure his time, and to rein in the ideas born from his newfound confidence—this is even more important because the boy is still unfamiliar with the hesitation that comes when transitioning into adulthood. Boyhood is distinct from adolescence because the boy's goals are still unclear; he plays without worrying about tomorrow. Additionally, his vision of being an adult is one of unchecked power. The urge to play stays strong for a long time unless it's stifled by societal expectations.
During this period, the work of linking instruction to sense-impression is by no means to be omitted[210] entirely, not even where fair progress has already been made in scholarship. We must make sure of a solid foundation.
During this time, the task of connecting teaching to sensory experience definitely shouldn’t be overlooked, not even if substantial progress has already been achieved in academics. We need to ensure we have a strong foundation.[210]
218. Our chief concern during the age of boyhood must be to prevent the premature fixation of the circle of ideas. It is for instruction to undertake the task of doing so. True, by far the greatest part of the process of learning, however manifold, is performed through the interpretation of words, the pupil supplying the meaning out of the mental store collected previously. But this very fact obviously implies that quantitively the pupil’s stock of ideas is for the most part complete; instruction merely works it up into new forms. Accordingly, such shaping must take place while the material is still in a plastic state; for with increasing years it gradually assumes a more solid character.
218. Our main focus during childhood should be to avoid locking in a fixed set of ideas too early. It's up to education to handle this task. Indeed, most of the learning process, no matter how varied, happens through the interpretation of words, with the student providing meaning based on their prior knowledge. However, this clearly suggests that the student's collection of ideas is mostly complete; education simply reshapes it into new forms. Therefore, this reshaping needs to happen while the material is still flexible because, as the years go by, it gradually becomes more rigid.
219. Boys differ from girls, individuals differ from one another; and the subjects taught, together with the methods of teaching them, should be differentiated accordingly. But here the family interposes the interests of rank or station, and claims the right to determine by these how much or how little instruction a boy needs.
219. Boys are different from girls, and individuals are different from each other; the subjects taught, along with the methods used to teach them, should be adjusted accordingly. However, the family often interferes, focusing on social status or rank, and decides how much education a boy actually needs based on that.
Looked at pedagogically, each study calls for a corresponding mental activity to be suited to the general condition of the individual. Its success must not involve exhaustion of the pupil’s powers, nor make demands upon them at the wrong time.
Looked at from an educational perspective, each study requires a specific mental activity that fits the individual's overall state. Its success shouldn't drain the pupil's energy or push them at the wrong time.
But it would be an error to argue that one who is being initiated into one subject ought to combine with that subject a second, third, or fourth, on the ground that subjects one, two, three, and four are essentially interrelated. This conclusion holds for scholars, who, so far as they are personally concerned, have long passed beyond preliminary pedagogical considerations, and even in their case it applies only to those branches which are intimately connected with their specialties; it has nothing to do with the psychological conditions by which the course of education must be governed. Only too frequently do masses of ideas remain isolated despite the fact that the objects corresponding to them are most intimately and necessarily interconnected; and such isolation could not have been prevented by merely starting work in a large web of erudition in a number of places.
But it would be a mistake to argue that someone being introduced to one subject should also take on a second, third, or fourth subject just because subjects one, two, three, and four are fundamentally related. This reasoning may apply to scholars who have moved past basic educational considerations, and even then it only pertains to areas closely linked to their expertise; it doesn’t address the psychological factors that must guide the education process. Too often, a bunch of ideas remain isolated, even when the objects they relate to are deeply and necessarily connected; and this isolation can't be fixed simply by trying to work within a broad network of knowledge in multiple areas.
The case is different where certain studies constitute the necessary preparation for thorough knowledge of one kind or another. Here we are right in concluding that one who cannot master the former is equally unable to get hold of the latter.[24]
The situation is different when specific studies are essential for a deep understanding of another subject. In this case, we can rightly conclude that someone who can't grasp the first is also unable to understand the second.[24]
[24] These remarks upon correlation are instructive in view of later developments of the Herbartian school in Germany. The reader is referred to discussions in the First and Second Year-Books of the National Herbart Society.
[24] These comments about correlation are helpful considering the later developments of the Herbartian school in Germany. The reader should check out the discussions in the First and Second Year-Books of the National Herbart Society.
220. It is difficult to deal with the rare instances of tardy development unless we find that they are due to[212] neglected health, or to lack of assistance in enlarging the range of experience, and to failure to change the mode of instruction. Here an attempt may be made to supply what is wanting. But even where the rate of progress becomes more rapid at once, the teacher’s efforts will have turned out favorably only when the boy gives also clear proof of a vigorous striving for advancement.
220. It’s tough to handle the rare cases of slow development unless we discover they’re caused by [212] poor health, a lack of support in broadening experiences, or not changing the teaching method. Here, we can try to provide what’s missing. But even if progress speeds up immediately, the teacher will only know their efforts were successful if the student shows clear signs of a strong desire to improve.
221. To revert to fundamental ethical principles, particular mention of the ideas of justice and equity needs to be made in this connection. These ideas issue from reflection on human relations; they are consequently less accessible to early childhood, which finds itself subordinated everywhere to the family. The boy, on the other hand, lives more among his peers, and the necessary corrections are not always administered so promptly as to leave no time for independent judgment. Not infrequently voluntary association takes place among boys, personal authority plays a part, and even usurpation of power is not rare. Now, education has to provide for clear ethical concepts and for government and training besides. But not only that; it must also furnish the kind of instruction that will exhibit similar but remote relations, for purposes of unbiassed contemplation. Such instruction must borrow its material from poetry and history.
221. To return to basic ethical principles, it's important to highlight the concepts of justice and fairness here. These ideas come from thinking about human relationships; they're generally less accessible to young children, who are mostly under the influence of their families. In contrast, boys tend to spend more time with their peers, and the necessary guidance isn't always provided quickly enough to allow for independent thought. It's common for boys to form voluntary groups, where personal authority can come into play, and power struggles aren't unusual. Education must offer clear ethical concepts along with governance and training. Furthermore, it should also provide instruction that reveals similar but distant connections for unbiased exploration. This teaching should draw on poetry and history.
222. To history we are referred by still another consideration. As has already been shown (206–211), [213]the idea of good-will points to the necessity of religious culture; and this relies for support on stories, old stories at that. The expansion of the pupil’s power of thought which is here demanded must be generally attained, even though very incompletely, in every course of instruction, that of the village school included.
222. Another reason we look to history is that, as we've previously discussed (206–211), [213] the concept of goodwill highlights the need for religious education, which is based on old stories. This growth in a student’s ability to think critically should be achieved, even if not perfectly, in every educational setting, including that of a village school.
223. Another fixed goal, the importance of which exceeds even that of reading and writing, is furnished by arithmetic, which gives clearness to the common concepts of experience, and is indispensable in the practical affairs of life.
223. Another important goal, which is even more essential than reading and writing, is math. Math helps clarify everyday concepts and is necessary for practical life.
224. Decimal arithmetic no pupil would be likely to think out by himself; he would very certainly not invent Bible history. Both must accordingly be regarded as belonging preëminently to the province of synthetic instruction, which always involves the difficult problem of how to assure its entrance, as a potent factor, into existing masses of ideas. As to this, it would be a blunder to conclude that, since Bible history and history as a whole, arithmetic and mathematics as a whole, hang together, there is also a corresponding pedagogical connection (219). But so much is certain, that the efficiency of a group of ideas increases with expansion and with multiplied association. It will be an advantage, therefore, to Bible history and to arithmetic, if as wide a range is given to historical and mathematical teaching as circumstances[214] and ability permit, even if the conditions should be such that a many-sided culture is not to be expected.
224. No student would likely figure out decimal math on their own; they definitely wouldn’t create Bible history. Therefore, both subjects should be seen as part of synthetic instruction, which always comes with the challenge of integrating them effectively into existing knowledge. It would be a mistake to assume that because Bible history and overall history, as well as arithmetic and mathematics, are interconnected, there is a direct teaching relationship between them (219). But one thing is clear: the effectiveness of a group of ideas grows with its breadth and increased connections. Thus, it will benefit both Bible history and arithmetic if a wide range of historical and mathematical teaching is provided, as much as circumstances and abilities allow, even if it’s unlikely that a well-rounded education will emerge.
225. The subjects next to be considered in the choice of material for instruction are poetry and natural history, great care being taken not to disregard the necessary sequence. The time for fables and stories should not be curtailed; it is important to make sure that boys do not lose the taste for them too early. The easiest and safest facts of zoölogy will have been presented already in connection with the picture-books of childhood. The right moment for introducing the elements of botany has arrived when the boy is collecting plants. Foreign languages would be assigned the lowest place, if particular circumstances did not in many cases lend them a special importance. The ancient classical languages, at any rate, form to such an extent the basis of the study of theology, of jurisprudence, and of medicine, they are so necessary to all higher scholarship, that they will always constitute the fundamental branches of instruction in academic preparatory schools.
225. Next, we need to think about what materials to use for instruction in poetry and natural history, while being careful not to skip any important steps. We shouldn't reduce the time for fables and stories; it's crucial that boys don't lose their interest in them too soon. The simplest and safest facts about animals will have already been introduced through childhood picture books. The right time to start teaching the basics of botany is when the boy is out collecting plants. Foreign languages would generally be at the bottom of the list, if specific circumstances didn’t make them particularly important in many cases. The ancient classical languages are essential because they form the foundation for studying theology, law, and medicine, and they are necessary for all advanced scholarship, meaning they will always be key subjects in academic preparatory schools.
It is obvious, however, that the extent of instruction depends too much on external conditions of rank and means to permit a definite prescription of instruction-material for all cases. Far less dependent is the development of many-sided interest in its relation to branches of study. If the limits set to the latter are narrow, it is still the business of instruction to secure[215] an approximation to many-sided culture; while under highly favorable circumstances the very abundance of educational help must put the teacher on his guard against losing sight of the real aim of instruction.
It's clear that the level of instruction relies heavily on external factors like social status and resources, making it impossible to standardize teaching materials for every situation. In contrast, developing a diverse interest in relation to different subjects is much less affected by these external factors. Even if the scope of subjects is limited, it's still the responsibility of education to strive for a well-rounded cultural understanding; however, when educational resources are abundant, teachers must be cautious not to lose sight of the true purpose of teaching.
226. Frequently the burden of necessary and useful studies is made excessively heavy, a fact which the members of the teaching profession try to conceal from themselves, but which attracts the attention of outsiders. A few hours of gymnastics do not sufficiently counteract such evil effects. As an offset we have at best the prevention of the vices of idleness. From every point of view, for the mere reason that this matter calls for special attention and that the method of procedure has to be determined in accordance with the results of observation, the home must do its part toward relieving that natural strain which even good instruction exerts—and the school must not encroach on the time necessary for that purpose. In extreme cases, to be sure, it may be expressly demanded that the school engage the whole of a boy’s time. But, as a rule, outside school-work should take up, not the largest, but, on the contrary, the smallest amount of time possible. How the remaining hours are to be employed is for parents and guardians to decide according to individual needs, ascertained by observation; and it is on them that the responsibility for the consequences rests.
226. Often, the weight of necessary and useful studies becomes extremely heavy, something that those in the teaching profession try to ignore, but it stands out to outsiders. A few hours of physical activity are not enough to counteract these negative effects. At best, we can prevent the problems that come from being idle. From every perspective, simply because this issue deserves special attention and the approach must be based on observed results, the home needs to help ease the natural pressure that even good teaching creates—and schools shouldn’t take up the time needed for that. In extreme cases, it might be necessary for the school to require all of a boy’s time. But generally, outside school activities should take up not the most, but the least amount of time possible. How the remaining hours are spent is up to parents and guardians to determine based on individual needs, as observed; and they are the ones responsible for the outcomes.
CHAPTER IV
Young people
227. Whether instruction comes to an end or is continued during this period, all it can accomplish depends now on the fulfilment of the condition that the young man himself regard the retention and increase of his attainments as something valuable. Accordingly, the interrelations of knowledge, as well as its connection with action, must be brought before his mind with the greatest possible distinctness. He must be furnished, also, with the strongest incentives to reach the goal determined upon, provided the question is merely how to overcome indolence and thoughtlessness. For it is just at this stage that the teacher needs to fear and to prevent those wrong motives which would issue merely in an artificial semblance of talent.
227. Whether instruction stops or continues during this time, its success relies on whether the young man values the knowledge he has and wants to grow it further. Therefore, it’s crucial to clearly present the connections between different areas of knowledge and how they relate to actions. He should also be provided with strong motivations to achieve the goals he has set, especially when it’s a matter of overcoming laziness and lack of focus. At this point, the teacher needs to be cautious and avoid encouraging the wrong motivations that might lead to a superficial appearance of talent.
228. Moreover, the allowance made for the child and the boy can no longer be made for the youth. His whole ability is to be put to the test, and his position in human society determined according to the outcome. He must experience something of the difficulty of obtaining a foothold among men. Positions for which he does not seem quite prepared are contested;[217] he is surrounded by rivals, and is spurred on by expectations, which it is often difficult to moderate when most necessary.
228. Moreover, the support given to the child and the boy can no longer be extended to the young man. He must prove his abilities, and his role in society will be determined based on the results. He needs to face the challenges of establishing himself among others. Positions that he doesn’t seem entirely ready for are contested;[217] he finds himself surrounded by competition and driven by expectations, which can often be hard to manage when it matters most.
229. If now the young man puts his trust in favorable circumstances, and, in spite of all appeals, gives himself up to the pursuit of ease and pleasure, education is at an end. It only remains to conclude with precepts and representations which future experiences may possibly recall.
229. If the young man relies on good luck and, despite all warnings, chooses to seek comfort and pleasure over learning, then his education is finished. All that’s left is to wrap up with lessons and ideas that future experiences may bring back to him.
230. If, on the other hand, the youth has his eyes fixed on a definite goal, the form of life which he is striving to attain, and the motives that impel him, will determine what else may be done for him. According as the ideals of honor that he makes his own are directed more outwardly or inwardly, they stand more or less midway between plans for actions and maxims.
230. If, on the other hand, the young person has their sights set on a specific goal, the lifestyle they’re trying to achieve and the reasons driving them will influence what else can be done to support them. Depending on whether the ideals of honor they adopt are more focused outwardly or inwardly, they fall somewhere between plans for action and guiding principles.
231. The youth is no longer pliant, except when his failures have made him feel ashamed of himself. Such cases must be made use of for the purpose of making good deficiencies. But on the whole, duty requires that the stern demands of morality be held up to him without disguise. Perfect frankness can hardly be looked for any longer, and to insist on it is out of the question entirely. The reserve of the age of adolescence marks the natural beginning of self-control.
231. Young people are no longer easily molded, except when their failures have left them feeling ashamed. These moments should be used to address their shortcomings. However, generally speaking, it's important to present the strict demands of morality to them honestly. We can hardly expect perfect honesty anymore, and insisting on it is completely unreasonable. The hesitation typical of adolescence marks the natural start of self-control.
These brief paragraphs on the development of the individual through infancy, childhood, boyhood, and youth, mark an early[218] interest in what is now known as child-study, the literature of which has become voluminous. For a dissertation on the experimental study of children, and a bibliography of the subject, the reader is referred to the monograph by Arthur McDonald, of the United States Bureau of Education, entitled “Experimental Study of Children.” A smaller but more useful bibliography has been compiled by L. N. Wilson. It is found in Pedagogical Seminary for September, 1899.
These short paragraphs about the development of a person from infancy to childhood, boyhood, and youth reflect an early[218] interest in what we now call child-study, which has generated a vast amount of literature. For a thesis on the experimental study of children and a bibliography on the topic, readers should check out the monograph by Arthur McDonald from the United States Bureau of Education titled “Experimental Study of Children.” A smaller but more practical bibliography has been put together by L. N. Wilson, which can be found in Pedagogical Seminary from September 1899.
PART III
Special Uses of Education

SECTION I
COMMENTS ON THE TEACHINGS OF SPECIFIC FIELDS OF STUDY
CHAPTER I
Faith
232. The content of religious instruction is for theologians to determine, while philosophy bears witness that no knowledge is able to surpass the trust of religious faith. But both the beginning and the end of religious instruction call for remarks from the point of view of pedagogy.
232. The content of religious education is up to theologians to decide, while philosophy shows that no understanding can exceed the confidence of religious faith. However, both the start and finish of religious education need comments from an educational perspective.
Religious instruction culminates, if it does not end, in the rite of confirmation, and the subsequent admission to the Holy Communion. The former is characteristic of a particular Christian denomination; the latter, on the contrary, of the whole brotherhood of[220] Christians. Now the profound emotion which marks the first Communion service should imply a conquest over the feeling of separation from other denominations, especially since the mere admission to Communion is conditioned on the general requirement of earnest ethical aspiration. It is thus assumed that members of other confessions, provided they are communicants at all, have fulfilled the same condition. Preparatory instruction must work toward this end all the more, since with many persons Christian love for those who differ from them in important articles of faith belongs to the more difficult duties. Moreover, the fact that this same instruction necessarily had to set forth clearly fundamental denominational differences, lends additional weight to the necessity of inculcating the virtue of Christian charity.
Religious education peaks, if it doesn't end, with the rite of confirmation and the following admission to Communion. The former is specific to a certain Christian denomination, while the latter is representative of the entire brotherhood of [220] Christians. The deep emotion that accompanies the first Communion service should reflect a victory over feelings of separation from other denominations, especially since being admitted to Communion is based on the shared requirement of sincere ethical commitment. It is therefore understood that members of other faiths, as long as they participate in Communion, have met the same standard. Preparatory education must strive toward this goal even more, since for many, showing Christian love to those who differ in significant areas of belief is one of the more challenging responsibilities. Furthermore, the necessity of this education to clearly explain fundamental denominational differences adds to the importance of teaching the virtue of Christian charity.
233. In academic schools, if Greek is begun early enough, it is possible to deepen the impressions of Christian teaching by the dialogues of Plato that bear on the death of Socrates, particularly the “Crito” and the “Apology.” Being the weaker, however, impressions of this sort should precede the time when the solemn initiation into Christian fellowship produces its whole powerful effect.
233. In academic institutions, if Greek is started early enough, it is possible to enhance the understanding of Christian teachings through Plato's dialogues that relate to Socrates' death, especially the “Crito” and the “Apology.” However, since these impressions are less impactful, they should come before the significant initiation into Christian fellowship, which has a strong effect.
234. Going back in thought, we find that the portion of religious instruction which deals with characteristic denominational distinctions, presupposes that which deals with tenets common to all Christians, and[221] we find that this in turn has been preceded by Bible stories, including those of the Old Testament. But the question arises, “Must we not go back to something more fundamental still?”
234. Going back in thought, we see that the part of religious teaching focused on specific denominational differences assumes an understanding of the beliefs shared by all Christians, and [221] this, in turn, is based on Bible stories, including those from the Old Testament. But the question comes up, “Shouldn't we go back to something even more basic?”
235. Religion cannot possibly be adequately presented by treating of it merely as a perpetuation of something historical and past. The teacher must needs make use also of the present testimony furnished by the adjustment of means to end, in nature. But even this, for which some knowledge of nature is prerequisite, and which leads up to the ideas of wisdom and power, is not the first step.
235. Religion can't be fully understood by just looking at it as a continuation of something historical and outdated. The teacher also needs to consider the current evidence provided by the alignment of means to ends in nature. However, even this, which requires some understanding of nature and leads to concepts of wisdom and power, is not the initial step.
236. True family feeling is elevated easily and directly to the idea of the Father, of the father and mother. Only where such feeling is wanting does it become necessary to make churches and Sunday observance the starting-point as indications of humility and gratitude. An all-pervading love, providence, and watchful care constitute the first concept of the Highest Being,—a concept limited by the mental horizon of the child, and expanding and becoming more elevated only by degrees.
236. A true sense of family easily connects to the idea of the Father, the parents. It's only where this feeling is lacking that we need to establish churches and Sunday observance as symbols of humility and gratitude. A universal love, guidance, and attentive care form the initial understanding of the Supreme Being—an understanding shaped by a child's perspective, gradually broadening and deepening over time.
237. The process of elevating religious concepts and purifying them of unworthy admixtures must, however, have taken place, and the true concepts must have been deeply impressed, before the mythological conceptions of antiquity become known; in which case the latter will produce the right effect by the contrast[222] between the manifestly fabulous and crude, and the worthy and sublime. If managed properly, this subject presents no difficulties.
237. The process of elevating religious ideas and clearing them of unworthy elements definitely had to happen, and the true ideas had to be deeply ingrained, before the mythological ideas of ancient times became known; in that case, the latter will create the right effect through the contrast[222] between what is clearly fantastic and crude, and what is worthy and elevated. If handled correctly, this topic poses no challenges.
238. But there are other difficulties,—difficulties growing out of individual peculiarities. While some would be harmed by much talk about sin, because they would thus either become acquainted with it, or else be filled with fantastic terror, there are others whom only the strongest language can move, and still others who themselves preach against the sins of the world, and, at the same time, front the world in proud security. Then there are those who brood over ethical problems, and who, without having heard of Spinoza, argue that what the Highest Judge has permitted to happen he has approved of, whence might is the practical proof of right. There are contemners of mere morality, who think that prayers will consecrate their evil actions. Isolated traces of such perversions may indeed be met with even in children, especially if their glib reproduction of the sermon, or worse yet, their praying aloud, has happened to receive praise.
238. But there are other challenges—challenges that arise from individual quirks. While some people would be upset by too much discussion about sin because it would either make them aware of it or fill them with irrational fear, others can only be moved by the strongest language. There are also those who preach against the sins of the world while confidently facing that same world. Then, there are those who get lost in ethical dilemmas, arguing that whatever the Highest Judge allows is approved, suggesting that power is a practical proof of what’s right. Some disregard mere morality, believing that prayers will somehow bless their wrongful actions. You can even find isolated signs of such distortions in children, particularly if their smooth recitation of the sermon, or worse, their public praying, has been praised.
Hence it is necessary to observe the effect of religious instruction on each individual. Another task for home training.
Hence, it's important to see how religious instruction affects each individual. This is another aspect of home training.
CHAPTER II
History
239. The most common blunder that younger teachers of history are apt to make is that, without intending it, they become increasingly prolix in presentation. It is not that interest deepens, but that the network of events lures them, now one way, now another. This of itself evinces preparation; but mental preparation alone does not suffice; preliminary practice, too, is necessary.
239. The most common mistake younger history teachers tend to make is that, unintentionally, they become more and more wordy in their presentations. It's not that their interest increases, but rather that the web of events pulls them in different directions. This shows that they have prepared; however, just mental preparation isn't enough; they also need some practice beforehand.
Young teachers of history, like young teachers in other subjects, are prone to error. What the prevailing error in a given study will be, is likely to depend upon conventional methods of presenting it. In Germany it is customary for the teacher himself to be the historian through whose mind all historical knowledge passes on its way to the children. But just as good writers of history are rare, so good teachers of history are likely to be few, since in an important sense they are at once teachers and oral historians. Where the text-book is depended upon for the narrative, as in the United States, a different difficulty presents itself to the teacher. What shall he do with the text, all the pupils having read it? Perhaps the commonest method is to call upon them one by one to reproduce it in class. But this is a deadening process, since it compels nineteen pupils to sit passive while the twentieth recites the words[224] that the nineteen could repeat equally well. If, therefore, the besetting fault of the teacher of history in German is prolixity, that of the American teacher is tediousness. The German method is that of primitive man, where the legends of the tribe are handed down from father to son by word of mouth; the American presentation of history is modern, where all the resources of scholarship and the advantages of the printing press are utilized. Each method has peculiar advantages, the former having the possible charm of first-hand narrative, the latter that of accuracy and comprehensiveness. The narrative method is greatly superior to that of the text-book with children whose powers of reading are not well developed; the text-book, together with its available accessories, is greatly to be preferred with older pupils capable of large amounts of reading. The following sections give a vivid description of the narrative method at its best; the commentary will attempt to show how the printed page may be made equally attractive, and, at the same time, much more useful.
Young history teachers, like those in other subjects, often make mistakes. The common errors in a particular study typically result from traditional ways of teaching it. In Germany, it's standard for the teacher to act as the historian, through whom all historical knowledge flows to the students. However, just as it's rare to find skilled history writers, good history teachers are also uncommon since, in a significant way, they serve as both educators and oral historians. In the United States, where the narrative relies heavily on textbooks, teachers face a different challenge. What should they do with the text now that all the students have read it? The most common approach is to have them take turns summarizing it in class. However, this is a dull process, as it forces nineteen students to remain passive while one student recites the content that the others could easily repeat. Therefore, while German history teachers tend to be overly wordy, American teachers often come across as tedious. The German approach resembles that of early humans, where tribe legends are passed down orally from generation to generation; the American way of teaching history is more modern, leveraging the resources of scholarship and the benefits of the printing press. Each method has its unique strengths: the former offers the charm of firsthand storytelling, while the latter provides accuracy and depth. The narrative approach is much better for younger students who aren't great readers; however, textbooks, along with their accompanying resources, are more suitable for older students who can handle extensive reading. The following sections will vividly illustrate the narrative method at its finest; the commentary will explore how to make the printed version just as engaging and, at the same time, significantly more practical.
240. If, to begin with, a purely chronological, but accurate, outline-view of history is to be imparted, the teacher must be able to traverse mentally the whole historical field, going with equal readiness back, forward, or across (synchronistically). The notable names must form definite groups and series; and the teacher must possess facility in making the most notable names stand out clearly from the groups, and in condensing the most salient points of a long series into a short series.
240. If we want to present a clear, chronological, and accurate overview of history, the teacher needs to mentally navigate the entire historical landscape, effortlessly moving backward, forward, or across time (synchronistically). The significant names should be organized into specific groups and sequences; the teacher must be skilled at highlighting the most important names from those groups and summarizing the key points of a lengthy sequence into a concise one.
If this mastery of subject-matter is important for the narrator, it is equally important for the teacher who depends upon[225] print for the narration. Observation of current history teaching betrays the fact that the teacher rarely becomes master of his material to such an extent that he can throw it into new forms. As it stands in the book, he probably knows it; but to take liberties with the facts, to expand parts, or throw masses into brief outline, to make new groupings, or to change a long series into a short one, usually lies beyond his ability. This lesson the American teacher must learn through a better mastery of his materials.
If mastering the subject matter is crucial for the narrator, it's just as important for the teacher, who relies on[225] print for the narration. Observing how history is taught today reveals that teachers rarely gain such a thorough understanding of their material that they can creatively present it in new ways. While they probably know the content as it is in the book, taking creative liberties with the facts, expanding certain sections, condensing large amounts of information, creating new groupings, or summarizing lengthy sequences usually exceeds their capabilities. This is a lesson American teachers need to learn by gaining a better grasp of their materials.
241. Again, the teacher must make himself perfectly familiar with general notions that relate to classes of society—constitutions, institutions, religious customs, stages of culture—and that serve to explain events. But not only this; he must study likewise the conditions under which he can develop them and keep them present in the minds of his pupils. This consideration alone shuts out most generalizations from the first lessons in history. And, accordingly, ancient history, whose moving causes are simpler than the more modern political factors, maintains its place in presentations of historical material to younger pupils.
241. Once again, the teacher needs to be completely familiar with the basic concepts related to different social classes—constitutions, institutions, religious customs, and cultural stages—because these help explain events. But that's not all; he also has to study how he can teach these concepts and keep them in the minds of his students. This alone rules out most generalizations from the initial history lessons. So, ancient history, which has simpler causes than modern political factors, continues to be included in the historical material presented to younger students.
American history is better than ancient history in respect to its richness of picturesque variety. It is, moreover, easier for children to comprehend, since our present conditions have emerged directly from our pioneer state. Not only are constitutions, institutions, and religious customs to be studied, but the economic conditions of those early times are particularly worthy of study, since they are both important and interesting. Methods of farming, of conducting household affairs, such as[226] cooking, making fires, producing clothing, securing shelter, means of transportation on land and water, methods of communication, and many other similar topics are of interest to the young.
American history is richer in variety than ancient history. It's also easier for kids to understand, since our current situation has developed directly from our early days. We should study not only constitutions, institutions, and religious customs but also the economic conditions of that time, as they’re both significant and intriguing. Topics like farming methods, managing a household, cooking, making fires, producing clothing, finding shelter, transportation on land and water, communication methods, and many other related subjects are interesting to young people.
242. Furthermore, due attention must be given to the difficulty of narrating well a complex event. The very first condition is continuity of the thought-current, in order that the thread of the story may remain unbroken, except where there are intentional rests. This, in turn, presupposes fluency of speech, careful cultivation of which is indispensable to a good presentation of historical events. But mere fluency does not suffice. There must also be resting-places, because otherwise alternate absorption and reflection cannot be secured; and because, without such pauses, even the formation of the series fails, since what has preceded arrests what follows. It is therefore not immaterial where a historical lesson begins and ends, and where the reviews are inserted.
242. Additionally, it's important to acknowledge how challenging it is to effectively narrate a complex event. The first requirement is maintaining a continuous flow of thought so that the storyline remains intact, except where intentional breaks are made. This, in turn, requires smooth communication, which is essential for presenting historical events well. However, just being fluent isn't enough. There also need to be pauses because without them, it's impossible to alternate between immersion and reflection. Additionally, without such breaks, the sequence gets disrupted since what came before interrupts what comes next. Therefore, it's significant to consider where a historical lesson starts and ends, and where reviews should be included.
While the narrator can utter words in succession only, the event has, in his mind, a very different form, which it is his business to convey to his hearers. Nor does the form of the event resemble a level plane; on the contrary, a manifold interest lifts some things into prominence and lets others sink. It is essential, accordingly, to distinguish how far, in a given instance, the narration should follow in a straight line the succession of events, and where, on the other hand,[227] it should deviate to include accessory circumstances. The very language used must possess the power to induce side-glances and retrospective views, even without leaving the main road. The narrator must have skill to introduce descriptions here and to linger over pictures there, but must be able also, while moving his hearers, to retain his own self-control and to keep his bearings.
While the narrator can only speak words one after the other, the event takes on a much different shape in his mind, which he needs to communicate to his audience. The way the event unfolds isn't flat; instead, various interests highlight some aspects while allowing others to fade away. Therefore, it's important to figure out how closely the narration should stick to the chronological order of events and when it should branch off to include additional details. The language used should be able to evoke side thoughts and reflections, even while staying on the main path. The narrator needs to be skilled at weaving in descriptions at certain points and pausing to explore certain images, but he must also move his audience while maintaining his own composure and keeping his direction clear.
243. There remains one other requisite of prime importance, namely, the utmost simplicity of expression. The condensed and abstract language of more recent historians is hardly suited even to the highest class of a secondary school; a sentimental or witty treatment, such as that found in modern novelists, must be avoided entirely. The only safe models are the ancient classics.
243. There’s one more essential requirement, which is the utmost simplicity of expression. The concise and abstract language used by more recent historians is not really appropriate for even the most advanced high school classes; any sentimental or clever approach, like that seen in modern novelists, should be completely avoided. The only reliable examples are the ancient classics.
The most serious fault with the text-book method is the barrenness arising from condensation. To teach history solely from a single book, even if this be among the best, is to produce an atrophy of the historical interest. It is on this account that successful teachers introduce large amounts of collateral reading, not of similarly condensed books, which would be like remedying the drouth with more dry weather, but of sections from fuller works on the same subject. In American history the pupil is directed to read selected portions of standard works like those of Fiske, Parkman, McMaster, Turner, Tyler, or earlier historians. In English history he is sent directly to such men as Gardiner, Green, Freeman, Traill, Ransome, Cunningham and McArthur, Harrison and Macaulay. The method[228] of copious readings has, in turn, its disadvantages, the most conspicuous of which is diffusiveness. It is easy for the student to become so absorbed in a mass of details that he lose the proper sense of proportion, or overlook the relative importance of events, or fail to fix firmly in mind the causal series that binds all together. In the case of either of the methods described, it is the teacher who is responsible for order and for clearness of detail. In the one case his narrative must have the artistic unity of the finished historian; in the other he must so manage a wealth of given material that the golden chain of cause and effect shall be seen binding diversity into unity. The ability to do the first is of a much rarer order than that of the second, for the art of teaching is not so difficult as the art of historical composition. The remedy for the specific difficulty which modern text-book teaching of history encounters will be discussed under paragraph 247.
The biggest issue with teaching history through textbooks is the lack of depth that comes from condensation. Relying solely on one book, even a good one, stifles interest in the subject. That's why effective teachers include plenty of additional reading—not more condensed texts, which would only make the problem worse—but excerpts from more comprehensive works on the same topic. In American history, students are encouraged to read selected sections from respected authors like Fiske, Parkman, McMaster, Turner, Tyler, or earlier historians. For English history, they're directed to read works by historians such as Gardiner, Green, Freeman, Traill, Ransome, Cunningham, McArthur, Harrison, and Macaulay. However, this method of extensive reading also has its downsides, the most obvious being that it can become overwhelming. Students can get so caught up in a lot of details that they lose perspective, miss the significance of certain events, or struggle to remember the cause-and-effect relationships that connect everything. In either teaching approach, the teacher must ensure clarity and organization. In one method, the teacher's narrative should have the coherence of a skilled historian; in the other, they need to manage a wealth of information to reveal how everything ties together. Mastering the first approach is much rarer than mastering the second because teaching is simpler than historical writing. The solution to the challenges faced by modern textbook history teaching will be discussed in paragraph 247.
The stories of Herodotus should serve the teacher as the basis for practice. In fact, they should actually be memorized in an accurate but fluent translation. The effect on children is surprising. At a later stage use may be made of Arrian and Livy. The method of the ancients of letting the principal characters utter their views and set forth their motives with their own lips, the narrator abstaining from reflections of his own, should be scrupulously imitated, and should be departed from only in the case of manifestly artificial rhetorical devices.
The stories of Herodotus should be the foundation for teaching practice. In fact, they should be memorized in a precise yet smooth translation. The impact on kids is amazing. Later on, you can use Arrian and Livy. The ancient method of having the main characters express their thoughts and motivations in their own words, while the narrator refrains from adding personal reflections, should be closely followed, and only deviated from in the case of clearly artificial rhetorical devices.
244. The course of preparation outlined above (240–243) having gone hand-in-hand with a thorough, pragmatic[229] study of history, it is further necessary, in the exercise of the art acquired, to learn to expand or contract, according to circumstances and the specific aims of each occasion. Concerning this point no generally applicable rules can be given, on account of the great variety of possible cases; but the following suggestions should be noted:—
244. The preparation process described above (240–243) has gone hand-in-hand with a thorough, practical[229] study of history. It is also essential, while using the skills developed, to learn to adjust the approach based on the circumstances and the specific goals of each situation. There are no universally applicable rules for this aspect due to the wide variety of possible scenarios, but the following suggestions should be noted:—
In general, all helps whereby historical objects may be represented to sense—portraits, pictures of buildings, of ruins, etc.—are desirable; maps for the more ancient times must be regarded as particularly indispensable. They should always be at hand, and their study should not be neglected. Among these helps must be included charts, substantially like that by Strass entitled “The Stream of Time,” which places before the eye not only synchronistic events, but at the same time shows also the alternate union and division of countries. The lack of such aids causes the loss of much time and temper over mere memory work.
In general, all resources that help us experience historical objects—like portraits, pictures of buildings, ruins, etc.—are valuable; maps from ancient times should be considered essential. They should always be available, and studying them should not be overlooked. Among these resources, we should include charts, similar to the one by Strass titled “The Stream of Time,” which visually presents not only events occurring at the same time but also illustrates the changing unity and division of countries. Without these tools, we waste a lot of time and energy on simple memorization.
Again, attention is due to the following four aspects of the teaching of history:—
Again, we need to focus on the following four aspects of teaching history:—
245. (1) In the first place, even the earliest lessons in geography give rise to the question, whenever the description of a country is finished, “How did things look in this country formerly?” For it is a part of correct apprehension that cities and other works of man should not be regarded as of equal age with mountains, rivers, and oceans. Now, although the teacher[230] cannot stop, during the time set apart for geography dealing with the present, to show and explain maps illustrative of the past, it will be useful, nevertheless, to add a few remarks about the early history of the country under discussion. The art of narration, however, is out of place here, inasmuch as the question, although reaching back in time, is suggested by the country. Mention of former activity, such as migrations and wars, is made simply for the purpose of adding life to the conception of a stationary surface. At the beginning, the notes on by-gone periods in connection with the geography of Germany will accordingly be as brief as possible; gradually, however, as France, England, Spain, Italy, are being studied in succession, these historical notes become knit together, and history is thus, so to speak, made to loom up in the distance. How far to go in this direction can be determined more definitely by distinguishing between the requirements of the first, and of the second course in geography. In the first course the most general statements may suffice, e.g., that not so very long ago Germany was split up more than now; that there were older times, when cities and neighboring princes often made war upon each other; that the barons used to live on more or less inaccessible heights; but that, in the interest of better order and stricter surveillance, Germany was divided into ten districts, etc.
245. (1) First of all, even the earliest lessons in geography raise the question, whenever we finish describing a country, “What did this country look like in the past?” It’s important to understand that cities and other human creations shouldn’t be seen as being as old as mountains, rivers, and oceans. Although the teacher[230] can’t take time during the geography lesson focused on the present to show and explain maps that illustrate the past, it’s still useful to make a few comments about the early history of the country being discussed. However, storytelling is not appropriate here, since the question, while looking back in time, is prompted by the country itself. References to past activities, like migrations and wars, are made simply to add depth to the view of a static surface. At the beginning, notes on past periods related to the geography of Germany will be as brief as possible; however, as we study France, England, Spain, and Italy in turn, these historical notes will start to connect, and history will begin to emerge in the background. How far to proceed in this direction can be more clearly defined by distinguishing between the needs of the first and second geography courses. In the first course, the most general statements will suffice, e.g., that not so long ago Germany was more fragmented than it is now; that there were times when cities and neighboring princes often went to war with each other; that the barons lived on more or less inaccessible heights; but that, for the sake of better order and stricter oversight, Germany was divided into ten districts, etc.
The second course will admit of more historical facts[231] than the first, although still only very few pertaining to an older epoch. Only the more recent events can be conveniently connected with geography, except in the case of still extant historical monuments,—such, for instance, as the ruins in Italy, the composite language of England, the peculiar political organization of Switzerland with its many subdivisions, visible on the map, and its diversities of language.
The second course will include more historical facts[231] than the first, although still only a limited number related to an earlier period. Only more recent events can be easily linked to geography, except for the historical monuments that still exist—such as the ruins in Italy, the mixed language of England, and the unique political structure of Switzerland with its numerous subdivisions, which are visible on the map, along with its various languages.
If, as is sometimes recommended, the plan is adopted of preparing the way for the study of mediæval and modern history by a separate introductory course in short biographies, such a plan, though at best only fragmentary in its results, becomes at least more feasible where historical notes of the kind just mentioned are incorporated with the lessons in geography. But in this case it is all the more essential to have a chronological chart upon the wall, to some dates of which the teacher must take every opportunity to refer, in order that the pupils may obtain at least some fixed points. Otherwise scattered biographies are liable to occasion great confusion.
If, as is sometimes suggested, we choose to prepare for studying medieval and modern history by offering a separate introductory course in short biographies, this approach, while still limited in its effectiveness, becomes more practical when historical notes like those mentioned are included in geography lessons. However, in this scenario, it's even more important to have a chronological chart displayed on the wall, with specific dates that the teacher should frequently reference, so that students can have some stable reference points. Otherwise, random biographies can lead to significant confusion.
246. (2) The chief basis for the earlier stages of historical teaching will always be Greek and Roman history. It will not be inappropriate to commence with a few charming stories from Homeric mythology, since there is a close connection between the history of a people and their religion. Two wrong ways, however, are to be avoided: one, that of giving a[232] detailed theogony or of including objectionable myths, for the sake of completeness, which would here be devoid of a rational purpose; the other, that of having the mythological elements memorized. Only true history should be memorized by children. Mythology is a study for youths or men.
246. (2) The main foundation for the earlier stages of teaching history will always be Greek and Roman history. It makes sense to start with a few interesting stories from Homeric mythology because there’s a strong link between a people's history and their religion. However, there are two wrong approaches to avoid: one is providing a[232] detailed account of theogony or including inappropriate myths just to be thorough, which wouldn’t have a rational purpose here; the other is having the mythological elements memorized. Only true history should be memorized by children. Mythology is a study for young adults or men.
Persian history must be told approximately in the sequence and setting given by Herodotus; to it the history of Assyria and of Egypt may be joined in the form of episodes, Greece being kept well in the foreground. The stories from the Old Testament, on the other hand, form a chain of lessons by themselves. The history of Rome must at first retain its mythical beginnings.
Persian history should be presented roughly in the order and context described by Herodotus; the histories of Assyria and Egypt can be interwoven as episodes, with Greece prominently featured. In contrast, the stories from the Old Testament create a distinct series of lessons. The history of Rome should initially preserve its mythical origins.
Whatever German opinion may be regarding the beginnings of historical instruction for their own children, American history possesses strong claims for precedence when we come to children of the United States. If we regard the chief intellectual purpose of history for the student to be the understanding of the present status through a knowledge of the historical progress that has led to it, then the primitive and pioneer history of this country is infinitely more valuable than any other to an American child, for in it lie enfolded the forces that have developed our people; whereas Greece and Rome are as distant in influence as they are in time. It is the mythology of Greece and Rome that most attracts children; but this belongs to literature rather than to history. Accounts of battles are about the same the world over, but it takes more maturity of mind to understand the Greek rage for individuality[233] after the rise of philosophy, than it does to understand a corresponding feeling among the American pioneers, to say nothing of the desirability of teaching the latter as a phase of our own development. For reasons of simplicity, therefore, as well as for psychological nearness and national importance, American history must take precedence over that of Greece and Rome for American children.
Whatever German views may be about the start of historical education for their own kids, American history has strong reasons to come first for children in the United States. If we think of the main goal of history for students as understanding the present through knowledge of the historical progress that led to it, then the early and pioneering history of this country is far more valuable than any other for an American child, as it contains the forces that shaped our people; meanwhile, Greece and Rome are as distant in influence as they are in time. It's the mythology of Greece and Rome that typically captures children's interest; however, that fits more with literature than with history. Stories of battles are pretty much the same everywhere, but it requires greater maturity to grasp the Greek obsession with individuality after the rise of philosophy than it does to understand a similar sentiment among American pioneers, not to mention the value of teaching the latter as part of our own development. For reasons of simplicity, as well as psychological closeness and national significance, American history should take priority over that of Greece and Rome for American children.
247. Suppose, now, that detailed stories after the models furnished by the ancients have won the attention of the pupils; the mere pleasure of listening to stories can nevertheless not be allowed to determine continuously the impression to be produced. Condensed surveys must follow, and a few of the main facts be memorized in chronological order.
247. Now, let’s say that detailed stories based on ancient examples have captured the students' attention; however, just enjoying the stories shouldn’t be the only thing that shapes their understanding. We need to provide brief overviews and ensure that some key facts are remembered in chronological order.
The following suggestions will be in place here. The chief events are to attach themselves in the memory to the memorized dates in such a way that no confusion can arise. Now, a single date may suffice for the group of connected incidents constituting one main event; if it seems necessary to add another, or a third, well and good, but to keep on multiplying dates defeats the very end aimed at. The more dates the weaker their effect, on account of the growing difficulty of remembering them all. In the history of one country dates should rather remain apart as far as possible, in order that the intervening numbers may be all the more available for purposes of synchronistic tabulation, by which the histories of[234] different countries are to be brought together and connected. The same sparing use should be made of the facts of ancient geography, but those that are introduced must be learned accurately.
The following suggestions will apply here. The main events should be linked in memory to the dates learned so that no confusion arises. Often, one date can be enough for a group of related incidents making up one main event. If it's necessary to add another date or a third, that's fine, but adding too many dates defeats the purpose. The more dates there are, the weaker their impact, because it becomes increasingly difficult to remember them all. In the history of one country, dates should be kept separate as much as possible so that the gaps can be used for synchronizing information, which connects the histories of different countries. The same cautious approach should apply to facts about ancient geography, but any that are included must be learned accurately.
Granted that the primitive method of historical narration by the teacher is the most effective in its appeal to the beginner, it must be maintained that the combined knowledge and literary skill of modern historians infinitely surpass the powers of the ordinary teacher. The modern problem is, not how to compose history, but how to utilize that which has been composed. It is, in short, to guard against the confusion that comes from diffuseness. Wide historical reading may be as bad for the student as wide reading of novels. The mind may surrender itself to the passing panorama as completely in the one field as in the other, until the impressions made are like those of a ship upon a sea. The remedy is the thorough organization in the mind of the student of the knowledge gained in diverse fields. This is secured by teacher or author, or both. Some authors secure clearness of outline by topics, references, and research questions. Larned’s “History of England” concludes every chapter in this way. As an illustration we may quote from Chapter XVI, which narrates the quarrel between King Charles and his people:—
Given that the basic method of teaching history through storytelling is the most effective for beginners, it should be noted that the combined knowledge and writing ability of modern historians far exceed those of the typical teacher. The current challenge isn’t how to write history, but how to use what has already been written. In essence, it’s about preventing confusion that arises from being too broad. Extensive reading of history might be as detrimental for students as excessive reading of novels. The mind can easily get lost in the overwhelming flow in both cases, leaving impressions similar to those of a ship adrift on the ocean. The solution is to help the student organize the knowledge acquired from various subjects in a clear and structured way. This can be achieved by the teacher, the author, or both. Some authors achieve clarity by using outlines, references, and research questions. Larned’s “History of England” concludes every chapter in this manner. As an example, we can refer to Chapter XVI, which discusses the conflict between King Charles and his subjects:—
202. Charles I.
202. King Charles I.
Topic.
Topic.
- Charles’s character and views.
References.—Bright, II, 608, 609; Green, 495; Montague, 118; Ransome, 138, 139.
References.—Bright, II, 608, 609; Green, 495; Montague, 118; Ransome, 138, 139.
203. Bad Faith in the Beginning of the Reign.
203. Bad Faith at the Start of the Reign.
Topic.
Topic.
- Charles’s marriage and broken pledges.
204. The First Parliament of King Charles.
204. The First Parliament of King Charles.
Topics.
Topics.
- Charles’s designs and his treatment of Parliament.
- Attitude of Commons and their dissolution.
- The King’s levies.
Reference.—Gardiner, II, 502, 503.
Reference.—Gardiner, II, 502, 503.
Research Questions.—(1) What were the legal and illegal sources of the King’s revenues? (Ransome, 151, 155). (2) What might be said to constitute the private property of the crown? (3) What contributed to make Charles’s court expensive? (Traill, IV, 76). (4) How would this need for money make for parliamentary greatness?[25]
Research Questions.—(1) What were the legal and illegal sources of the King’s income? (Ransome, 151, 155). (2) What can be considered the crown's private property? (3) What factors made Charles’s court costly? (Traill, IV, 76). (4) How did this need for money contribute to the power of Parliament?[25]
In a similar way the remaining topics of this section of English history are recorded, guiding the pupil in his outlines and his readings. With suitable care on the part of the teacher to see that the student fixes the outline firmly in mind, there is no danger of becoming lost in a wilderness of words. At the same time the pupil’s mind is enriched from many noble sources, instead of being limited by the presumably meagre resources of a single teacher. By this method the child may enjoy the benefits of modern erudition, without at the same time being harmed by dissipation of mental energy.
In a similar way, the rest of the topics in this section of English history are presented, helping the student with their outlines and readings. If the teacher ensures that the student clearly understands the outline, there’s little risk of getting lost in a sea of words. At the same time, the student’s knowledge grows from many valuable sources, instead of being restricted to the limited resources of just one teacher. This approach allows the child to benefit from modern scholarship while avoiding the distraction of spreading their mental energy too thin.
Other authors reach the same ends by different means. Fiske’s “History of the United States,” for example, concludes each chapter with a topical outline in which cause and effect are emphasized. At the close of Chapter X, on the “Causes and Beginning of the Revolution,” we find the following:—
Other authors achieve the same results in different ways. Fiske’s “History of the United States,” for instance, wraps up each chapter with a topical outline that highlights cause and effect. At the end of Chapter X, titled “Causes and Beginning of the Revolution,” we see the following:—
Topics and Questions
Topics and Questions
76. Causes of Ill Feeling between England and her Colonies.
76. Reasons for Bad Relations between England and its Colonies.
- What was the European idea of a colony, and of its object?[236]
- What erroneous notions about trade existed?
- What was the main object of the laws regulating trade, etc.?
77. The Need of a Federal Union.
77. The Need for a Federal Union.
- One difficulty in carrying on the French wars.
- An account of Franklin.
- Franklin’s plan of union, etc.
78. The Stamp Act Passed and Repealed.
78. The Stamp Act Was Passed and Repealed.
- The kind of government needed by the colonies.
- How Parliament sought to establish such a government.
- The nature of a stamp act, etc.
79. Taxation in England.
79. Taxes in England.
- How Pitt’s friendship for America offended George III.
- The representation of the English people in Parliament.
- How the representation of the people is kept fair in the United States.
- How it became unfair in England.
- Corrupt practices favored by this unfairness.
- The party of Old Whigs.
- The Tories, or the party of George III.
- The party of New Whigs and its aims.
- Why George III was so bitter against Pitt.
- The attitude of the King toward taxation in America.
- The people of England not our enemies, etc.
At the close of these topics there follows a list of fifteen “Suggestive Questions and Directions,” with page references to Fiske’s “The American Revolution,” Vol. I, the whole being concluded by eighteen topics for collateral reading from “The American Revolution,” and from Cooke’s “Virginia.”[26]
At the end of these topics, you'll find a list of fifteen "Suggestive Questions and Directions," along with page references to Fiske's "The American Revolution," Vol. I. This is followed by eighteen topics for additional reading from "The American Revolution" and Cooke's "Virginia."[26]
It is a significant fact that modern text-books for children are being prepared by masters in the various departments of knowledge, not a little thought being bestowed upon the highest utilization of all modern instruments for arousing the intelligent interest of the pupils. This being the case, it is idle to rely upon primitive methods, however potent they may have been in the past, with pupils who have learned to read fluently.
It’s important to note that modern textbooks for kids are being created by experts in different fields, with a lot of thought given to the best use of all the latest tools to spark students' interest. Given this, it's pointless to stick to old-fashioned methods, no matter how effective they used to be, for students who can read fluently.
248. The general surveys that follow the detailed narratives have this advantage for the pupil: he infers of his own accord, that in periods of which not much is told, a great deal took place, nevertheless, which the history or the teacher passes over in silence. In this way the false impressions are prevented that would be produced by purely compendious instruction, which indeed, at a later stage, becomes in a measure unavoidable.
248. The overall summaries that come after the detailed stories have this benefit for the student: they realize on their own that during times that aren’t extensively covered, a lot still happened that the history or the teacher doesn't mention. This way, they avoid the misleading ideas that would arise from just brief instruction, which, at a later stage, becomes somewhat unavoidable.
249. (3) Mediæval history derives no assistance from the study of the ancient languages, nor is it closely related to present conditions; there is difficulty in imparting to the presentation of it more than the clearness obtainable through geography and chronology. But more than this is requisite: the burden of mere memory work without interest would become too great. The fundamental factors, Islamism, Papacy, the Holy Roman Empire, Feudalism, must be explained and given due prominence. Most of the facts down to Charlemagne may be made to contribute additional touches to the panorama of the Great Migration. With[238] Charlemagne the chain of German history begins, and it will usually be considered advisable to extend this chain to the end of the Middle Ages, in order to have something to which synchronous events may be linked later on. Yet some doubt arises as to the value of such a plan. To be sure, the reigns of the Ottos, the Henrys, the Hohenstaufen, together with intervening occurrences, form a tolerably well-connected whole; but as early as the interregnum there is a sad break, and although the historical narrative recovers, as it were, with the stories of Rudolph Albrecht and Ludwig the Bavarian, there is nothing in the names of succeeding leaders, from Carl IV to Frederick III, that would make them proper starting-points and connecting centres for the synchronism of the whole period in question. It might be better, therefore, to stop with the excommunication of Ludwig the Bavarian, with the assembly of the electors at Rhense, and with the account of how the popes came to reside in Avignon. Then—going back to Charlemagne—France, Italy, even England, may be taken up, and greater completeness given to the history of the crusades. Farther on, special attention might be called, in a synchronistic way, to Burgundy and Switzerland, and to the changing fortunes of the wars between England and France. French history may then leave off with the reign of Charles VIII, and English history with that of Henry VII, while German history, from Maximilian on, is[239] placed again in the foreground. The Hussite wars will be treated as forerunners of the Reformation. Other events must be skilfully inserted. Many modifications of grouping will have to be reserved for subsequent repetitions.
249. (3) Medieval history doesn't get much help from studying ancient languages, nor is it closely linked to our current situation; it's challenging to present it with more clarity than geography and chronology can offer. But more than that is needed: the burden of just memorizing facts without any interest would be too heavy. The key elements—Islam, the Papacy, the Holy Roman Empire, Feudalism—need to be explained and emphasized properly. Most of the information leading up to Charlemagne can add more depth to the story of the Great Migration. With[238] Charlemagne, the history of Germany begins, and it’s usually considered wise to extend this history to the end of the Middle Ages to have something to which later events can be linked. However, there’s some doubt about how useful this approach is. Certainly, the reigns of the Ottos, the Henrys, the Hohenstaufen, along with events in between, form a fairly coherent narrative; but as early as the interregnum, there’s a significant break, and while the historical account picks up again with the stories of Rudolph, Albrecht, and Ludwig the Bavarian, the names of later leaders, from Charles IV to Frederick III, don’t really serve as appropriate starting points or central connections for tying together the entire period. It might be better to conclude with Ludwig the Bavarian's excommunication, the electors' assembly at Rhense, and the account of how the popes ended up in Avignon. After that—going back to Charlemagne—France, Italy, and even England can be explored, providing a more complete history of the crusades. Later on, special attention can be given in a synchronistic manner to Burgundy and Switzerland, along with the shifting outcomes of the wars between England and France. French history can then wrap up with the reign of Charles VIII, and English history with Henry VII, while German history, from Maximilian on, is[239] brought back into focus. The Hussite wars will be seen as precursors to the Reformation. Other events will need to be carefully incorporated. Many adjustments in grouping will have to be saved for later reviews.
250. (4) In presenting modern history, the teacher will do well to avail himself of the fact that modern history does not cover so long reaches of time as mediæval history does, and that it falls into three sharply defined periods, the first of which ends with the treaty of Westphalia, the second extends from this date to the French Revolution, and the third, to the present. These periods should be carefully distinguished, the leading events of each should be narrated synchronistically, and a recital of the most essential historical facts about each country should follow. Only after each has been handled in this way, and the subject-matter presented has been thoroughly impressed upon the memory by reviews, will it be well to pass on to a somewhat fuller ethnographical account reaching back into the mediæval history of each country and extending forward to our own times. No harm is done by going over the same ground again for the purpose of amplifying that which before appeared in outline only.
250. (4) When teaching modern history, the instructor should take advantage of the fact that modern history doesn't span as long a time as medieval history and can be divided into three distinct periods. The first period ends with the Treaty of Westphalia, the second runs from that date until the French Revolution, and the third goes up to the present. These periods should be clearly distinguished, with the main events of each period narratively organized in chronological order, followed by a summary of the most important historical facts for each country. Only after thoroughly covering each of these should the teacher move on to a more detailed ethnographical account that looks back into the medieval history of each country and continues forward to the present day. It’s helpful to revisit the same topics to expand on what was previously only briefly mentioned.
The chief point is, that no course of instruction which claims at all to give completeness of culture can be regarded as concluded before it has introduced[240] the pupil to the pragmatic study of history, and has taught him to look for causes and effects. This applies preëminently to modern history, on account of its direct connection with the present; but mediæval and ancient history, too, have to be worked over once more from this point of view. History should be the teacher of mankind; if it does not become so, the blame rests largely with those who teach history in schools.
The main point is that no educational program that claims to provide a complete cultural experience can be considered finished until it has introduced[240] the student to the practical study of history and has taught them to examine causes and effects. This is especially true for modern history due to its direct link to the present, but both medieval and ancient history also need to be re-evaluated from this perspective. History should be a teacher for humanity; if it fails to do so, the responsibility largely falls on those who teach history in schools.
251. A well-compiled and well-proportioned brief history of inventions, arts, and sciences should conclude the teaching of history, not only in gymnasia, but also and especially in higher burgher schools, because their courses of study are not supplemented by the university.
251. A well-organized and balanced overview of inventions, arts, and sciences should wrap up the study of history, not just in secondary schools, but also, and especially, in higher vocational schools, since their curricula aren’t continued at the university level.
Moreover, the whole course in history is properly accompanied by illustrative poetical selections, which, although perhaps not produced during the different epochs, yet stand in some relation to them; and which in some measure, even if only by illustrating ages very far apart, exhibit the vast differences in the freest activities of the human mind.
Moreover, the entire history course is appropriately paired with illustrative poetry selections, which, even if they weren't created during the specific periods, still relate to them in some way; and which, to some extent, even if only by illustrating ages that are very distant from each other, show the significant differences in the most liberated activities of the human mind.
CHAPTER III
Math and Nature Study
252. Aptitude for mathematics is not rarer than aptitude for other studies. That the contrary seems true, is owing to a belated and slighted beginning. But that mathematicians are seldom inclined to give as much time to children as they ought is only natural. The elementary lessons in combination and geometry are neglected in favor of arithmetic, and demonstration is attempted where no mathematical imagination has been awakened.
252. Skill for math isn’t any rarer than aptitude for other subjects. The belief that it is stems from a delayed and overlooked start. However, it’s only natural that mathematicians often don’t spend as much time with children as they should. Basic lessons in combinations and geometry are overlooked in favor of arithmetic, and efforts at demonstration happen where there hasn’t been any spark of mathematical imagination.
The first essential is attention to magnitudes, and their changes, where they occur. Hence, counting, measuring, weighing, where possible; where impossible, at least the estimating of magnitudes to determine, however vaguely at first, the more and the less, the larger and the smaller, the nearer and the farther.
The first important thing is to pay attention to sizes and how they change, and where those changes happen. So, counting, measuring, and weighing whenever possible; and if it's not possible, at least estimating sizes to figure out, even if it's a bit unclear at the start, what is more and less, what is bigger and smaller, what is closer and farther.
Special consideration should be given, on the one hand, to the number of permutations, variations, and combinations; and, on the other hand, to the quadratic and cubic relations, where similar planes and bodies are determined by analogous lines.
Special attention should be paid, on one hand, to the number of permutations, variations, and combinations; and, on the other hand, to the quadratic and cubic relations, where similar planes and shapes are defined by similar lines.
253. The measuring of lines, angles, and arcs (for which many children’s games, constructive in tendency, may present the first occasion) leads over to observation exercises dealing with both planes and spheres. Skill in this direction having been attained, frequent application must be made of it, or else, like every other acquirement, it will be lost again. Every plan of a building, every map every astronomical chart, may afford opportunities for practice.
253. Measuring lines, angles, and arcs (which many children's games, aimed at building skills, often introduce) leads to activities that focus on observing both flat surfaces and three-dimensional shapes. Once this skill is developed, it needs to be practiced regularly, or like any other skill, it will fade away. Every building plan, every map, and every star chart can provide chances to practice.
These observation exercises are to be organized in such a manner that upon the completion of mensuration the way is fully prepared for trigonometry, provided that besides the work in plain geometry, algebra has been carried as far as equations of the second degree.
These observation exercises should be organized so that when mensuration is finished, everything is set for trigonometry, as long as the work in plain geometry is done and algebra has been advanced to include second-degree equations.
Extended discussions as to the place and value of the ratio idea in elementary arithmetic are found in “The Psychology of Number,” by McLellan & Dewey,[27] and in “The New Arithmetic,” by W. W. Speer.[28] The former work advocates early practice in measuring with changeable units, claiming that the child should early acquire the idea of number as the expression of the relation that a measured somewhat bears to a chosen measurer, and making counting a special case of[244] measuring. Mr. Speer makes the ratio idea still more prominent by furnishing the school with numerous sets of blocks of various sizes and shapes with which to drill the pupils into instantaneous recognition of number as the ratio between two quantities. For an extended examination of these principles the reader may well consult Dr. David Eugene Smith’s able treatise on the teaching of elementary mathematics.[29]
Extended discussions about the role and importance of the ratio concept in basic arithmetic can be found in “The Psychology of Number” by McLellan & Dewey,[27] and in “The New Arithmetic” by W. W. Speer.[28] The former book emphasizes early practice with variable units, arguing that children should grasp the idea of numbers as a way to express the relationship between what is being measured and the chosen measuring tool, positioning counting as a specific instance of[244] measuring. Mr. Speer highlights the ratio concept even more by providing schools with a variety of block sets of different sizes and shapes to help students instantly recognize numbers as the ratio between two quantities. For a deeper exploration of these concepts, readers may want to check out Dr. David Eugene Smith’s insightful work on teaching basic mathematics.[29]
“Herbart’s A, B, C, of Sense Perception,” together with a number of minor educational works, has been translated into English.[30] It abounds in shrewd observations and ingenious devices, yet as a whole it represents one of those side excursions, which, though delightful to genius, is not especially useful to the world. To drill children into the habit of resolving a landscape into a series of triangles, may indeed be possible, but like any other schematization of the universe, is too artificial to be desirable. Nevertheless, a limited use of the devices mentioned in this section might tend to quicken an otherwise torpid mind.
“Herbart’s A, B, C, of Sense Perception,” along with several other smaller educational works, has been translated into English.[30] It is full of insightful observations and clever techniques, but overall it represents one of those side trips that, while enjoyable for creative minds, isn't particularly beneficial to society. Training kids to break down a landscape into a series of triangles might be doable, but like any other attempt to simplify the universe, it’s too artificial to be truly effective. Still, using some of the techniques mentioned in this section could help stimulate an otherwise dull mind.
[27] McLellan & Dewey, “The Psychology of Number,” International Education Series, D. Appleton & Co., New York, 1895.
[27] McLellan & Dewey, “The Psychology of Number,” International Education Series, D. Appleton & Co., New York, 1895.
[28] Speer, W. W., “The New Arithmetic,” Ginn & Co., Boston, 1896.
[28] Speer, W. W., “The New Arithmetic,” Ginn & Co., Boston, 1896.
254. But now a subject comes up that, on account of the difficulties it causes, calls for special consideration, namely, that of logarithms. It is easy enough to explain their use, and to render the underlying concept intelligible as far as necessary in practice—arithmetical corresponding to geometrical series, the natural numbers being conceived of as a geometrical series. But scientifically considered, logarithms involve fractional[246] and negative exponents, as also the application of the Binomial Theorem. The latter, to be sure, is merely an easy combinatory formula so far as integral positive exponents are concerned, but, limited to these, is here of comparatively little use.
254. But now a topic arises that, due to its challenges, requires special attention, namely, logarithms. It’s pretty straightforward to explain how they work and to clarify the basic concept for practical purposes—arithmetic corresponds to geometric series, with natural numbers viewed as a geometric series. However, from a scientific perspective, logarithms involve fractional[246] and negative exponents, as well as the application of the Binomial Theorem. The latter is just a simple combinatorial formula for integral positive exponents, but when limited to these, it’s of relatively little use here.
Now, since trigonometry in its main theorems is independent of logarithms, but is little applied without their aid, the question arises whether beginners should necessarily be given a complete and vigorously scientific course in logarithms, the highly beneficial instruction in trigonometry being postponed until after the successful completion of such a course, or whether the practical use of logarithms is to be permitted before accurate insight into underlying principles has been gained.
Now, since trigonometry in its main theorems doesn't depend on logarithms but is rarely used effectively without them, the question arises whether beginners should be required to go through a complete and rigorous course in logarithms first, delaying the valuable instruction in trigonometry until they finish that course, or if they should be allowed to use logarithms practically before they fully understand the underlying principles.
255. In schools where practical aims predominate, logarithms should be explained by a comparison of the arithmetical with the geometrical series, and the practical application will immediately follow. But even where recourse is had to Taylor’s Theorem and the Binomial Theorem, the gain to the beginner will not usually be very much greater. Not as though these theorems, together with the elements of differential calculus, could not be made clear; the real trouble lies in the fact that much of what is comprehended is not likely to be retained in the memory. The beginner, when he comes to the application, still has the recollection of the proof and of his having understood it. Indeed, with some assistance he would be able, perhaps, to again retrace step by step the course of the[248] demonstration. But he lacks perspective; and in his application of logarithms it is of no consequence to him by what method they have been calculated.
255. In schools where practical goals are the focus, logarithms should be explained by comparing arithmetic and geometric series, followed immediately by practical applications. Even when Taylor’s Theorem and the Binomial Theorem are used, beginners typically won't gain much more understanding. It's not that these theorems, along with basic differential calculus, can't be made clear; the real issue is that much of what is learned is unlikely to stick in memory. When beginners try to apply what they've learned, they still remember the proof and that they understood it. In fact, with some help, they might even be able to retrace the steps of the the[248] demonstration step by step. However, they lack perspective; and when using logarithms, it doesn't matter to them how they were calculated.
What has been said here of logarithms may be applied more generally. The value of rigid demonstrations is fully seen only when one has made himself at home in the field of concepts to which they belong.
What’s been discussed here about logarithms can be applied more broadly. The importance of solid proofs becomes truly clear only when one is familiar with the range of ideas they relate to.
It is customary in American schools to take up elementary algebra and elementary geometry upon the completion of arithmetic, both algebra and geometry being anticipated to some extent in the later stages of arithmetic. The following paragraphs from the pen of David Eugene Smith[31] indicate some of the advance in algebra since Herbart’s time:—
It’s common in American schools to study basic algebra and basic geometry after finishing arithmetic, with both algebra and geometry somewhat introduced during the later stages of arithmetic. The following paragraphs from David Eugene Smith[31] highlight some of the progress in algebra since Herbart’s time:—
“The great revival of learning known as the Renaissance, in the sixteenth century, saw algebra take a fresh start after several centuries of complete stagnation. Tartaglia solved the cubic equation, and a little later Ferrari solved the biquadratic. By the close of the sixteenth century Vieta had put the keystone in the arch of elementary algebra, the only material improvements for some time to come being in the way of symbolism. For the next two hundred years the struggle of algebraists was for a solution of the quintic equation, or, more generally, for a general solution of an equation of any degree.
“The great revival of learning known as the Renaissance in the sixteenth century marked a new beginning for algebra after several centuries of complete stagnation. Tartaglia solved the cubic equation, and shortly after, Ferrari solved the biquadratic. By the end of the sixteenth century, Vieta had put the finishing touch on elementary algebra, with the only significant advancements for some time following being in symbolism. For the next two hundred years, algebraists worked to find a solution to the quintic equation, or more broadly, to find a general solution for equations of any degree.”
“The opening of the nineteenth century saw a few great additions to the theory of algebra. The first was the positive proof that the general equation of the fifth degree is insoluble by elementary algebra, a proof due to Abel. The second was[249] the mastery of the number systems of algebra,—the complete understanding of the negative, the imaginary, the incommensurable, the transcendent. Other additions were in the line of the convergency of series, the approximation of the real roots of numerical equations, the study of determinants—all finding their way into the elements, together with the theories of forms and groups, which must soon begin to influence the earlier chapters of the subject.
“The beginning of the nineteenth century brought some significant advancements in algebra. The first was the clear proof, provided by Abel, that the general equation of the fifth degree cannot be solved using elementary algebra. The second was[249] the mastery of algebraic number systems—fully understanding negatives, imaginary numbers, irrational numbers, and transcendental numbers. Other advancements included the convergence of series, approximating the real roots of numerical equations, and studying determinants—all of which made their way into the foundational concepts, along with the theories of forms and groups, which would soon start to influence the earlier chapters of the subject.”
“This hasty glance at the development of the subject is sufficient to show how it has been revolutionized in modern times. To-day it is progressing as never before. The higher culture is beginning to affect the lower; determinants have found place in the beginner’s course; graphic methods, objected to as innovations by some who are ignorant of their prominence in the childhood of science, are reasserting their rights; the ‘imaginary’ has become very real; the inheritances of the algebra-teachers’ guild are being examined with critical eyes, and many an old problem and rule must soon go by the board. It is valuable to a teacher to see what changes have been wrought so that he may join in the movement to weed out the bad, to cling to the good, and to reach up into the realm of modern mathematics to see if, perchance, he cannot find that which is good and usable and light-shedding for the elementary work.”
“This quick look at the development of the subject is enough to show how it has changed dramatically in modern times. Today, it’s advancing like never before. Higher education is starting to influence lower levels; key concepts have been incorporated into beginner courses; graphic methods, which some have criticized as newfangled by those unaware of their significance in the early days of science, are reclaiming their place; what was once ‘imaginary’ has become quite real; the traditions of algebra teachers are being scrutinized critically, and many old problems and rules will soon be discarded. It’s important for a teacher to see what changes have taken place so they can participate in the effort to eliminate the bad, hold on to the good, and explore modern mathematics to see if they can discover useful and enlightening insights for elementary education.”
The true order of elementary mathematics, according to Dr. Smith, is substantially as follows:—
The correct sequence of basic math, according to Dr. Smith, is pretty much like this:—
- Elementary operations of arithmetic.
- Simple mensuration, correlation with drawing, the models in hand:— Inductive geometry—the basic form of the science.
- Arithmetic of business and of science, using the simple equation with one unknown quantity wherever it throws light upon the subject.[250]
- Simple theory of numbers, the roots, series, logarithms.
- Elementary algebra, including quadratic and radical equations.
- Demonstrative plane geometry begun before the algebra is completed and correlated with it.
- Plane trigonometry and its elementary applications.
- Solid geometry. Trigonometry. Advanced algebra, with the elements of differentiation and integration.
“The student should then take a rapid review of his elementary mathematics, including a course in elementary analytic geometry and the calculus. He would then be prepared to enter upon the study of higher mathematics.”
“The student should then quickly review basic mathematics, including a course in elementary analytic geometry and calculus. He would then be ready to begin studying higher mathematics.”
256. Demonstrations taking a roundabout way through remote auxiliary concepts are a grave evil in instruction, be they ever so elegant.
256. Teaching that meanders through unrelated concepts is a serious problem in education, no matter how sophisticated it may seem.
Such modes of presentation are rather to be selected as start from simple elementary notions. For with these conviction does not depend on the unfortunate condition requiring a comprehensive view of a long series of preliminary propositions. Thus Taylor’s Theorem can be deduced from an interpolation formula, and this, in turn, from the consideration of differences, for which nothing is needed beyond addition, subtraction, and knowledge of the permutation of numbers.
Such ways of presenting information should start with basic concepts. This is because understanding doesn’t rely on the difficult situation that requires a broad overview of many earlier statements. For example, Taylor’s Theorem can be derived from an interpolation formula, which itself comes from looking at differences, something that only requires addition, subtraction, and basic knowledge of number order.
The following account of imaginary and complex numbers by Dr. David Eugene Smith is so lucid that it is given at length:—
The following explanation of imaginary and complex numbers by Dr. David Eugene Smith is so clear that it's presented in full:—
“The illustrations of the negative number are so numerous,[251] so simple, and so generally known from the common text-books that it is unnecessary to dwell upon them.[32] Debt and credit, the scale on the thermometer, longitude, latitude, the upward pull of a balloon compared with the force of gravity, and the graphic illustration of these upon horizontal and vertical lines—all these are familiar.
“The examples of negative numbers are so many,[251] so straightforward, and so widely recognized from standard textbooks that there's no need to elaborate on them.[32] Examples like debt and credit, the thermometer scale, longitude, latitude, the lifting force of a balloon against gravity, and the graphical representation of these on horizontal and vertical lines—all of these are well-known.”
“But the imaginary and complex numbers have been left enshrouded in mystery in most text-books. The books say, inter lineas, ‘Here is √−1; it means nothing; you can’t imagine it; the writer knows nothing about it; let us have done with it, and go on.’ Such is the way in which the negative was treated in the early days of printed algebras, but now such treatment would be condemned as inexcusable. But there is really no more reason to-day for treating the imaginary so unintelligently than for presenting the negative as was the custom four hundred years ago. The graphic treatment of the complex number is not to-day so difficult for the student about to take up quadratics as is the presentation of the negative to one just beginning algebra.
“But imaginary and complex numbers have mostly been left shrouded in mystery in most textbooks. The books say, inter lineas, ‘Here is √−1; it means nothing; you can’t imagine it; the author knows nothing about it; let’s just move on.’ This was how negatives were handled in the early days of printed algebras, but nowadays, such treatment would be considered unacceptable. There's really no more reason today to treat the imaginary so poorly than there was to present negatives in the way that was common four hundred years ago. The graphical representation of complex numbers isn't any harder for a student about to tackle quadratics than presenting negatives is for someone just starting with algebra.”
“Briefly, the following outline will suffice to illustrate the procedure for the complex number:—
“Briefly, the following outline will be enough to explain the procedure for the complex number:—

“1. Negative numbers may be represented in a direction opposite to that of positive numbers, starting from an arbitrary point called zero. Hence, when we leave the domain of positive numbers, direction enters. But there are infinitely many directions in a plane besides those of the positive and negative numbers, and hence there may be other numbers than these.
“1. Negative numbers can be shown in a direction opposite to positive numbers, starting from a random point called zero. So, when we move beyond positive numbers, direction comes into play. However, there are infinitely many directions in a plane besides just positive and negative numbers, which means there could be other numbers as well.”
“2. When we add positive and negative numbers we find some results which seem strange to a beginner. For example, if we add +4 and −3 we say the sum is 1, although the length 1 is less than the length 4 or the length −3; yet this does not trouble us because we have considered something besides length, namely, direction; it is true, however, that the sum of 4 and −3 is less than the absolute value of either. This is seen to be so reasonable, however, from numerous illustrations (as the combined weight of a balloon pulling up 3 lbs., tied to a 4-lb. weight), that we come not to notice the strangeness of it; graphically, we think of the sum as obtained by starting from 0, going 4 in a positive direction, then 3 in a negative direction, the sum being the distance from 0 to the stopping-place.
“2. When we add positive and negative numbers, we end up with results that might seem strange to someone just starting out. For instance, if we add +4 and −3, we say the sum is 1, even though the length 1 is less than the length of 4 or the length of −3; however, this doesn’t bother us because we’re considering more than just length, specifically direction. It’s true that the sum of 4 and −3 is smaller than the absolute value of either. But this seems reasonable from many examples (like the combined weight of a balloon pulling up 3 lbs., tied to a 4-lb. weight), so we stop noticing how odd it is. Graphically, we think of the sum as the result of starting from 0, moving 4 units in a positive direction, then 3 units in a negative direction, with the sum being the distance from 0 to the stopping point.

“3. If we multiply 1 by −1, or by √−1 · √−1, or by √−1 twice, we swing it counter-clockwise through 180°, and obtain −1; hence, if we multiply it by √−1 once, we should swing it through 90°. Hence we may graphically represent √−1 as the unit on the perpendicular axis YY′, and this gives illustration to √−1, 2√−1, 3√−1, ··· −√−1, −2√−1, −3√−1, or, more briefly, ±i, ±2i, ±3i, ··· where i stands for √−1. We therefore see that i is a symbol of quality (graphically of direction), just as is + or −, and that −3 · 5i, i√5, etc., are[253] just as real as −3 · 5, √5, etc. It is impossible to look out of a window −3 · 5 times as it is to look out −3 · 5i times; strictly, one number is as ‘imaginary’ as the other, although the term has come by custom to apply to one and not to the other.
“3. If we multiply 1 by −1, or by √−1 · √−1, or by √−1 twice, we rotate it counter-clockwise through 180°, and get −1; so, if we multiply it by √−1 once, we should rotate it through 90°. Therefore, we can graphically represent √−1 as the unit on the perpendicular axis YY′, and this illustrates √−1, 2√−1, 3√−1, ··· −√−1, −2√−1, −3√−1, or, more simply, ±i, ±2i, ±3i, ··· where i stands for √−1. We can see that i represents a specific quality (graphically a direction), just like + or −, and that −3 · 5i, i√5, etc., are[253] just as real as −3 × 5, √5, etc. It is impossible to look out of a window −3 times 5 times as it is to look out −3 · 5i times; technically, one number is as ‘imaginary’ as the other, even though the term has come to refer to one and not the other.”

“4. The complex number 3 + 2i is now readily understood. Just as 3 + (−2) is graphically represented by starting from an arbitrary zero, passing 3 units in a positive direction (say to the right), then 2 units in the opposite direction, calling the sum the distance from 0 to the stopping-point, so 3 + 2i may be represented graphically. Starting from 0, pass in the positive direction (to the right in the figure) 3 units, then in the i direction 2 units, calling the sum the distance from 0 to the stopping-place.
“4. The complex number 3 + 2i is now easy to understand. Just like 3 + (-2) is shown on a graph by starting from an arbitrary zero, moving 3 units to the right, and then 2 units in the opposite direction, so the sum is the distance from 0 to the endpoint; 3 + 2i can also be represented graphically. Starting from 0, move 3 units to the right, then 2 units in the i direction, with the sum being the distance from 0 to the endpoint.”
“Of course the question will arise as to the hypotenuse being the sum of the two sides of the right-angled triangle. But the case is parallel to that mentioned in paragraph 2; it is not the sum of the absolute values, any more than is 1 the sum of the absolute values of 4 and −3; it is the sum when we define addition for numbers involving direction as well as length.
“Of course, the question will come up about the hypotenuse being the sum of the two sides of the right-angled triangle. But this case is similar to what was mentioned in paragraph 2; it’s not the sum of the absolute values, just like 1 isn’t the sum of the absolute values of 4 and −3; it’s the sum when we define addition for numbers that involve both direction and length.”
“A simple illustration from the parallelogram of forces is often used to advantage.
“A straightforward example from the parallelogram of forces is often used effectively.”

“Suppose a force pulling 3 lbs. to the right (+3 lbs.) and another pulling 2 lbs. upwards (+2i lbs.); required the resultant of the two. It is evident that this is OP, i.e., OP = 3 + 2i.
“Imagine a force pulling 3 lbs. to the right (+3 lbs.) and another pulling 2 lbs. upwards (+2i lbs.); we need to find the resultant of the two. It's clear that this is OP, i.e. OP = 3 + 2i.
“This elementary introduction to the subject of complex numbers shows that the ‘imaginary’ element is easily removed,[254] and that students about to begin quadratics are able to get at least an intimation of the subject. This is not the place for any adequate treatment of these numbers: such treatment is easily accessible. It is hoped that enough has been presented to render it impossible for any reader to be content with the absolutely meaningless and unjustifiable treatment found in many text-books.”[33]
“This basic introduction to complex numbers illustrates that the ‘imaginary’ part can be easily removed,[254] and that students preparing to learn about quadratics can at least get a glimpse of the topic. This isn’t the right place for a comprehensive discussion of these numbers: such discussions are readily available. The hope is that enough information has been provided to make it impossible for any reader to be satisfied with the totally meaningless and unjustifiable explanations found in many textbooks.”[33]
[32] See Beman & Smith’s “Elements of Algebra,” p. 17.
[32] See Beman & Smith’s “Elements of Algebra,” p. 17.
[33] For an elementary presentation of the subject, see Beman and Smith’s “Elements of Algebra,” Boston, 1900. For a history of the subject, see Beman and Smith’s translation of Fink’s “History of Mathematics,” Chicago, 1900, or Professor Beman’s Vice-Presidential Address before the American Association for the Advancement of Science, 1898, or the author’s “History of Modern Mathematics,” already mentioned.
[33] For a basic introduction to the topic, check out Beman and Smith’s “Elements of Algebra,” Boston, 1900. For a history of the subject, refer to Beman and Smith’s translation of Fink’s “History of Mathematics,” Chicago, 1900, or Professor Beman’s Vice-Presidential Address to the American Association for the Advancement of Science, 1898, or the author’s “History of Modern Mathematics,” mentioned earlier.
257. The pedagogical value of mathematical instruction, as a whole, depends chiefly on the extent to which it enters into and acts on the pupil’s whole field of thought and knowledge. From this truth it follows, to begin with, that mere presentation does not suffice; the aim must be rather to enlist the self-activity of the pupil. Mathematical exercises are essential. Pupils must realize how much they can do by means of mathematics. From time to time written work in mathematics should be assigned; only the tasks set must be sufficiently easy. More should not be demanded and insisted on than pupils can comfortably accomplish. Some are attracted early by pure mathematics, especially where geometry and arithmetic are properly combined. But a surer road to good results is applied mathematics, provided only the application is made to[255] an object in which interest has already been aroused in other ways.
257. The educational value of math instruction, overall, mainly depends on how well it engages and influences the student’s entire thought process and understanding. Based on this principle, it's clear that just presenting information isn't enough; the goal should be to encourage students to actively participate. Math exercises are crucial. Students need to see how much they can achieve using math. Occasionally, they should be assigned written math tasks, but those tasks must be simple enough for them to handle comfortably. More should not be expected than what students can easily complete. Some students are drawn to pure math early on, especially when geometry and arithmetic are effectively integrated. However, a more reliable path to positive outcomes is through applied mathematics, as long as the application connects to an interest that has already been sparked in other ways. to[255]
But the pupils ought not to be detained too long over a narrow round of mathematical problems; there must also be progress in the presentation of the theory. Were the only requisite to stimulate self-activity, the elementary principles might very easily suffice for countless examples affording the pupil the pleasure of increasing facility, and even the delight arising from inventions of his own, without giving him any conception of the greatness of the science. Many problems may be compared to witty conceits, which may be welcome enough in the right place, but which should not encroach on the time for work. There ought to be no lingering over things that with advancing study solve themselves, merely for the sake of performing feats of ingenuity. Incomparably more important than mere practice examples is familiarity with the facts of nature, and such familiarity renders all the better service to mathematics if combined with technical knowledge.
But students shouldn't be held up too long on a limited set of math problems; there also needs to be progress in understanding the theory. If the only goal was to encourage self-activity, then basic principles could easily provide endless examples that give students the joy of improving their skills and even the satisfaction of coming up with their own ideas, without giving them any real understanding of the depth of the subject. Many problems are like clever jokes; they can be enjoyable in the right context, but they shouldn’t take up time meant for serious work. There shouldn’t be any wasting time on things that will become clear with more advanced study, just for the sake of showing off cleverness. What matters far more than just practice problems is getting to know the facts of nature, and this familiarity serves mathematics much better when paired with technical knowledge.
258. Even young children may very well busy themselves with picture books illustrating zoölogy, and later with analyses of plants which they have gathered. If early accustomed to this, they will, with some guidance, readily go on by themselves. At a later time they are taught to observe the external characteristics of minerals. The continuation of the study of zoölogy is beset with some difficulties on account of the element of sex.
258. Even young kids can keep themselves engaged with picture books about animals, and later with studies of plants they've collected. If they start early, they'll easily move on to exploring things on their own with a bit of guidance. Later, they're taught to observe the physical features of minerals. Continuing the study of animals can be challenging because of the aspect of sex.
Though industriously debated, there is no field of education more undecided both as to matter and method than nature work in the grades. Some scientists would teach large amounts of well-classified knowledge; others are content when they have secured a hospitable frame of mind toward nature. If a love for flowers and birds can be cultivated in children, the latter class are satisfied that the best result has been attained. Thus a discussion arises as to which is the more valuable, attitude or knowledge.
Though it's been heavily debated, no area of education is more uncertain regarding content and approach than nature study in elementary grades. Some scientists advocate for teaching extensive, well-organized information, while others are happy if students develop a positive attitude toward nature. If a love for flowers and birds can be nurtured in children, those in the latter group believe the best outcome has been achieved. This leads to a discussion about which is more valuable, attitude or knowledge.
It is feared by some that any attempt to teach real science, even of an elementary kind, will result in a paralysis of permanent scientific interest. To this it is replied that a sentimental regard for æsthetic aspects of nature insures little or no true scientific interest.
It is feared by some that any attempt to teach real science, even at a basic level, will lead to a lasting lack of scientific interest. In response, it is argued that a sentimental appreciation for the aesthetic aspects of nature guarantees little to no genuine scientific interest.
Both sides are, in large measure, wrong; for, though apparently antagonistic in their aims, they make merely a different application of a common principle, which, if not wholly erroneous, is at least inadequate. Both parties assume that the end to be attained in nature study is something only remotely related to the pupil’s practical life. One would present nature for its own sake as scientific knowledge; the other would offer it for its own sake as a source of æsthetic or other feeling. The scientist often assumes that to a pupil a scientific fact or law is its own excuse for being. He thinks there must be a natural, spontaneous response to such a fact or law in the breast of every properly constituted child, so that, to imbue the mind with the scientific spirit, it is only necessary to expose it to scientific fact.
Both sides are mostly wrong; while they seem to have opposing goals, they actually apply the same basic principle in different ways, which, if not completely wrong, is at least insufficient. Both groups believe that the main purpose of studying nature is only loosely connected to the student's everyday life. One side wants to teach nature purely for scientific knowledge, while the other aims to present it for its aesthetic value or other feelings. The scientist often thinks that a scientific fact or law justifies itself. They believe that every well-adjusted child will naturally respond to such a fact or law, so to inspire a scientific mindset, all that’s needed is to expose them to scientific information.
Perhaps, unfortunately for the normal child, this view is somewhat encouraged by the biographies of scientific geniuses. On the other hand, those who hold the poetic view of nature assume that there must be a native response to natural beauties[257] in every child; so that the true method is to expose him to nature’s beauty, when rapture is sure to follow. Unfortunately again for the pupil, this view is also encouraged by the influence of the nature poets. The result is that natural science is presented as an end in itself—in the one case as scientific knowledge, in the other as the lovable in nature.
Perhaps, unfortunately for the typical child, this idea is somewhat reinforced by the biographies of scientific geniuses. On the flip side, those who take a poetic view of nature believe that every child must have an innate appreciation for natural beauty; thus, the best approach is to expose them to nature's beauty, which is sure to inspire awe. Unfortunately for the student again, this perspective is also promoted by nature poets. The outcome is that natural science is presented as an end in itself—on one side as scientific knowledge, and on the other as what is lovable in nature.[257]
While it may be admitted that a few children will respond now to the one stimulus, now to the other, the great mass are not thrilled with rapture at nature’s beauty, nor are they fettered by scientific interest in her laws. To become an object of growing interest to children, nature must have a better basis than natural childish delight in the novel, or reverence for scientific law. The first of these is evanescent, the second feeble.
While it's true that some kids might react to one thing or another, most of them aren't captivated by nature's beauty, nor are they restricted by a scientific curiosity about its laws. For nature to truly engage children, it needs to offer more than just a fleeting childlike wonder or respect for scientific principles. The former is short-lived, and the latter is weak.
We may agree with the scientist as with the poet, that both science and poetic appreciation are desirable ends, but they cannot be imparted to the childish mind by didactic fiat.
We might agree with both the scientist and the poet that both science and an appreciation for poetry are valuable goals, but they can't be forced upon a young mind through straightforward teaching.
If there is one service greater than another that Herbart has rendered to education, it is in bringing clearly to our consciousness the supreme importance of the principle of apperception, or mental assimilation, as a working basis for educative processes. So long as a fact or a principle or system of knowledge stands as an end in itself, just so long is it a thing apart from the real mental life of the child. Even a formally correct method of presentation, should it even appeal at once to all ‘six’ classes of interest, will fail to create more than a factitious mental enthusiasm. It is like conversation that is ‘made’ interesting; it may suffice to lighten a tedious hour, but it awakens no vital response. When, however, the natural love of novelty or inborn response to the true is reinforced by a sense of warm personal relationship, when the facts of forest,[258] or plain, or mine, or animal life flood the mind with unexpected and significant revelations concerning either the present or the past in close personal touch with the learner, then instruction rests upon an apperceptive basis. Abstractions that before were pale, beauties that were cold, now receive color and warmth because they get a new subjective valuation that before was impossible.
If there’s one thing that Herbart has done for education, it’s making us clearly understand how crucial the principle of apperception, or mental assimilation, is as a foundation for teaching methods. As long as a fact, principle, or system of knowledge exists as an end in itself, it is separate from the child’s real mental life. Even a technically correct way of presenting information, even if it appeals to all ‘six’ classes of interest at once, will only create a superficial mental excitement. It’s like a conversation that’s artificially made interesting; it might help pass a boring hour, but it doesn’t spark any real engagement. When the natural love of novelty or innate response to truth is supported by a warm personal connection, and when facts about the forest,[258] land, mines, or animal life fill the mind with unexpected and meaningful insights related to either the present or the past in close personal touch with the learner, then learning is built on an apperceptive foundation. Concepts that once felt dull, and beauties that seemed lifeless, now become vivid and warm, because they gain a new personal significance that wasn’t possible before.
A sedate sheep nibbling grass or resting in the shade, a skipping lamb gambolling on the green, are suitable objects of nature study. Their pelts, their hoofs, their horns, their wool, are worthy of note as scientific facts. A diluted interest may even be added by recitation of the nursery rhymes about “Little Bo-Peep” and “Mary had a Little Lamb.” But these are devices for the feeble-minded.
A calm sheep munching on grass or relaxing in the shade, a playful lamb frolicking on the green, are perfect subjects for nature study. Their fur, their hooves, their horns, and their wool are all important scientific details. You might even spark some interest by sharing nursery rhymes like “Little Bo-Peep” and “Mary had a Little Lamb.” But these are just tricks for those who can’t think for themselves.
If the teacher can reveal to the pupil the function of wool in making garments for the race, and can lead him to repeat the processes by which, from time immemorial, the wool has been spun into yarn and woven into cloth; if, at the same time, the influence of this industry upon the home life, both of men and women, can be shown, the study of the sheep becomes worthy the attention even of a boy who can play foot-ball or of a girl who can cook. The literature of the sheep is no longer infantile or fatuous. We have a gamut reaching from Penelope to Priscilla. In the words of Professor Dewey: “The child who is interested in the way in which men lived, the tools they had to do with, the transformation of life that arose from the power and leisure thus gained, is eager to repeat like processes in his own action; to make utensils, to reproduce processes, to rehandle materials. Since he understands their problems and their successes only by seeing what obstacles and what resources they had from nature, the child is interested in field and forest, ocean and mountain, plant and animal....[259] The interest in history gives a more human coloring, a wider significance, to his own study of nature.”[34]
If the teacher can show the student how wool is used to make clothing for people, and guide them through the process of spinning wool into yarn and weaving it into fabric, while also explaining how this industry affects the daily lives of both men and women, then studying sheep becomes interesting even for a boy who plays football or a girl who cooks. The literature surrounding sheep is no longer childish or silly. We have a wide range of topics, from Penelope to Priscilla. As Professor Dewey said, “The child who is curious about how people lived, the tools they used, and how their lives changed with the power and free time they gained is eager to try similar activities themselves; to make tools, to replicate processes, to work with different materials. Since they understand these people's challenges and achievements only by seeing what resources and obstacles they had from nature, the child becomes interested in the fields and forests, oceans and mountains, plants and animals....[259] An interest in history adds a more human element and broader significance to their own exploration of nature.”[34]
The conclusion arising from this argument is that nature study as an end in itself, or a thing apart from the real or imagined experiences of the pupil, is but a faint reflection of what it may become under a more rational treatment. In order of time, nature study in the earliest grades may indeed rest upon the mere delight of the childish mind in the new, the strange, the beautiful, and especially in the motion of live creatures, and may be reinforced by childish literature. When boyhood and girlhood begin, however, then the industrial motive, first in the home environment, then of primitive times, becomes the chief reliance for an abiding interest. In the reproduction of primitive processes, there is of necessity a historical element. When nature has attained a firm apperceptive basis through imitation of primitive industrial processes, and has obtained a historical background, then it may properly be further reinforced by literary reference. The poetic value of nature will now appeal to the mind with a potency that springs from inner life and experience; scientific law will now have some chance of appealing to the mind with something of the same reverence that Kant besought for the moral law. The true order of appeal in nature study is therefore as follows: For infancy, natural curiosity and delight in the movements of living creatures; for the age of boyhood and girlhood, imitation, real or imaginary, of processes depending upon natural objects and forces, together with historical and literary reference; secondarily, nature work may also appeal to youthful interest in natural law or beauty.
The conclusion from this argument is that studying nature for its own sake, or as something separate from the real or imagined experiences of students, is just a pale shadow of what it could become with a more thoughtful approach. In the earlier grades, nature study might be based on the simple enjoyment that children find in new, strange, and beautiful things, especially the movement of living creatures, and could be supported by children's literature. However, when kids enter adolescence, the practical aspects of their surroundings and the basic necessities of life become the main source of their lasting interest. Reproducing these basic processes naturally includes a historical element. Once nature has a solid understanding built through imitating these primitive industrial processes and has gained a historical context, it can be effectively enhanced with literary references. The poetic value of nature will now connect with the mind in a meaningful way that comes from personal life and experiences; scientific principles will have a better chance of resonating with the same respect that Kant sought for moral laws. Thus, the true order of engagement in nature study is as follows: for young children, a natural curiosity and joy in the movements of living things; for adolescents, the imitation, whether real or imagined, of processes that involve natural objects and forces, along with historical and literary references; additionally, nature study may also attract young people's interest in natural laws or beauty.
259. With the foregoing should be conjoined much attention to external nature, to the changes corresponding to the seasons, and to means of intercommunication.
259. Along with this, there should be a lot of focus on the natural world, the changes that happen with the seasons, and the ways we communicate with each other.
Under this head belongs, on the one hand, observation of the heavenly bodies,—where sun and moon rise, how the latter waxes and wanes, where the north star is found, and what arcs are described by the brighter stars and the most conspicuous constellations.
Under this topic, we look at the heavenly bodies—where the sun and moon rise, how the moon grows and shrinks, where to find the North Star, and the paths taken by the brighter stars and the most prominent constellations.
Here belongs, on the other hand, technological knowledge, acquired partly through direct observation, partly through lessons in descriptive physical science. Technology ought not to be considered merely from the side of the so-called material interests. It furnishes very important connecting links between the apprehension of the facts of nature and human purposes. Every growing boy and youth should learn to handle the ordinary tools of the carpenter as well as rule and compasses. Mechanical skill would often prove far more useful than gymnastic exercises. The former benefits the mind, the latter benefit the body. With burgher schools should go manual training-schools, which does not mean that the latter must necessarily be trade schools. Finally, every human being ought to learn how to use his hands. The hand has a place of honor beside language in elevating mankind above the brute.
Here belongs, on the other hand, technological knowledge, gained partly through direct observation and partly through lessons in physical science. Technology shouldn't be viewed only from the perspective of material interests. It provides important connections between understanding the facts of nature and human goals. Every growing boy and young man should learn to use basic carpentry tools, as well as rulers and compasses. Mechanical skills can often be much more useful than physical exercises. The former benefits the mind, while the latter benefits the body. Manual training schools should be included alongside regular schools, which doesn’t mean that these have to be trade schools. Finally, every person should learn to use their hands. The hand holds a vital place alongside language in raising humanity above animals.
The foregoing store of information also enters into[261] the study of geography; how, will appear in the next chapter.
The information mentioned above is also part of[261] the study of geography; the details will be revealed in the next chapter.
The soundness of the foregoing remarks is witnessed by the rapid development of manual training-schools in the last decade, and the almost universal desire, if not practice, of providing considerable amounts of manual training for the pupils of the grammar grades. The girls usually have some form of sewing and cooking, while the boys have sloyd or other similar tool work in wood. The rationale of requiring girls to do carpenter work instead of the forms of manual exercise that especially pertain to their sex is not yet satisfactorily established.
The validity of these comments is supported by the quick growth of vocational schools over the past ten years, and the nearly universal interest, if not actual practice, of offering significant manual training for students in elementary grades. Girls typically engage in some form of sewing and cooking, while boys participate in woodworking or similar hands-on activities. The reasoning behind requiring girls to take on carpentry instead of the types of manual tasks that typically relate to their gender has not yet been clearly defined.
260. On the observation of the heavenly bodies is based popular astronomy, which provides a test as to whether the mathematical imagination has been properly cultivated.
260. Popular astronomy is based on observing celestial bodies, which serves as a measure of how well our mathematical thinking has been developed.
261. Elementary statics and mechanics will serve as an early introduction to physics, which combines with the easiest portions of chemistry. Long before physics is formally presented, it must be foreshadowed by many things stimulating the attention. Notice is directed to clocks, mills, the most familiar phenomena of atmospheric pressure, to electrical and magnetic toys, etc. In burgher schools, at least, so much must be said about buildings and machines as is necessary to incite to further study in the future. The same holds for the fundamental facts of physiology.
261. Basic statics and mechanics will provide an early introduction to physics, along with the simpler aspects of chemistry. Long before physics is officially taught, it should be hinted at through various engaging topics. Attention should be drawn to clocks, mills, common examples of atmospheric pressure, electrical and magnetic toys, and more. In public schools, at the very least, it's important to cover enough about buildings and machines to encourage further study down the line. The same applies to the essential facts of physiology.
262. As often as a new topic for study is introduced, it is important to give prominence to some of[262] the salient facts, and these must be accurately memorized. Moreover, pupils need to have practice in exact description. Where practicable, these descriptions are corrected by actually looking at the objects themselves.
Hasty and superficial observation of objects presented for inspection always calls for severe criticism; else collections and experiments become valueless. Nor should objects be shown too lavishly; pupils must often be told beforehand what they will have to look for. Frequently it may serve the purpose to employ successively good descriptions, pictures, and direct observation.
Hasty and superficial observation of objects presented for inspection always invites harsh criticism; otherwise, collections and experiments become worthless. Objects shouldn’t be displayed too extravagantly; students often need to be informed in advance about what they should look for. It can often be helpful to use good descriptions, pictures, and direct observation in succession.
CHAPTER IV
Geography
263. As to geography, at least two courses may be distinguished. One of these is analytic and begins with the pupil’s immediate neighborhood, the topography of the place, while the other starts with the globe. Here only the former will be discussed, as the latter can be had directly from good text-books.
263. About geography, at least two types of courses can be identified. One is analytic and starts with the student's immediate surroundings and the local landscape, while the other takes a global perspective. Only the first will be covered here, as the second can be found directly in good textbooks.
Had the note to this section been properly heeded, we should not have had to wait for fifty years after Herbart’s death before witnessing the present rational methods of applying geographical science to elementary education. It is the proud boast of the modern elementary geography that it begins[264] with a study of the pupil’s actual environment. The term home geography has now become a familiar one. It signifies that the pupil is taught to observe the geographical elements as they exist in his own neighborhood. He studies hills, watercourses, soil, woods, lakes, together with the industrial phenomena that come within the reach of his investigation. Upon this primary sense-basis he rears the structure of his geographical knowledge.
Had the note to this section been taken seriously, we wouldn’t have had to wait fifty years after Herbart’s death to see the current logical approaches to using geographical science in elementary education. Modern elementary geography proudly states that it begins[264] with a focus on the student’s actual surroundings. The term home geography is now widely recognized. It means that students learn to observe the geographical features as they are found in their own neighborhoods. They explore hills, rivers, soil, forests, lakes, and the industrial activities within their reach. Using this fundamental understanding, they build their knowledge of geography.
264. Geography is an associating science, and use must be made of the opportunities it offers for binding together a variety of facts, none of which should be allowed to remain isolated in the mind of the learner. It is not the mathematical portion, supplemented and made interesting by popular astronomy, that serves as the first connecting link between mathematics and history (second course); even the rudiments of geography may, on the basis of observation exercises, furnish practice in the determination of triangles which occur on the first maps used, although this step is not always necessary when once some skill has been acquired in singling out features worthy of note. (The determination of position by latitude and longitude is, for the first course, as irrational as the action of a traveller in Germany or France would be if he set about to put together the picture of the places where he expects to remain, with the aid of their relation to the equator and the first meridian.)
264. Geography is a connecting science, and we should take advantage of the opportunities it provides to link different facts together, ensuring that none remain isolated in the learner's mind. It’s not just the mathematical part, enhanced and made interesting by popular astronomy, that serves as the initial connection between mathematics and history (second course); even the basics of geography can offer practice in determining triangles found on the first maps used, though this step isn’t always necessary once some skill has been developed in identifying notable features. (Determining position by latitude and longitude is, for the first course, as pointless as a traveler in Germany or France trying to piece together a picture of the places he plans to visit based solely on their relation to the equator and the prime meridian.)
Physical geography presupposes some knowledge[265] of nature, and furnishes the occasion for enriching that knowledge. Political geography designates the manner in which man inhabits and uses the earth’s surface. It is the pedagogical aim of instruction in geography to associate all this.
Physical geography assumes some knowledge[265] of nature and provides the opportunity to deepen that knowledge. Political geography refers to how humans live on and utilize the earth’s surface. The educational goal of geography instruction is to connect all of this.
265. The teacher must cultivate the art of narration; his accounts must resemble those of a traveller. But the narrative should conflict with the determination of the relative position of places (by grouping them about one principal place, and in the case of more than one by the use of triangles) as little as, in teaching history, the story of events should conflict with the scheme of chronology. The two go together. The narrative is to present a clear picture, and to this end requires the support of a few fixed points in space. On the other hand, these points should not remain isolated; they are to be connected by the lines of the picture.
265. The teacher should master the art of storytelling; their accounts should be like those of a traveler. However, the narrative shouldn’t clash with how we understand the placement of places (by organizing them around one main location, and when there are multiple, using triangles) any more than in teaching history should the story of events conflict with the timeline. The two need to work together. The narrative should create a clear image, and for this, it needs a few fixed points in space for support. At the same time, these points shouldn’t stand alone; they should be connected by the lines of the image.
266. It is not a matter of indifference how many unfamiliar names are mentioned in one minute or hour. Nor is it immaterial whether they are uttered before or after perception of the picture which the map presents. The first requisite is that every map placed before the pupils be conceived of as a country; three, at most four, names of rivers, and the names of a few mountains are sufficient; completeness is out of place here. The few names given provide ample opportunity for fixing the position of notable[266] points, both with reference to one another and to the boundary lines of the country.
266. It's not trivial how many unfamiliar names are brought up in a minute or an hour. It's also important whether they are mentioned before or after observing the picture that the map shows. The first requirement is that every map presented to the students is considered as a country; three, at most four, names of rivers, and the names of a few mountains are enough; thoroughness isn't necessary here. The few names provided offer plenty of chances to identify the locations of notable[266] points, both in relation to each other and to the country's boundaries.
Due prominence having been given to these geographical features, they should then be connected, say with the aid of a blackboard, on which they are roughly sketched one by one, and properly joined together afterward. In the case of the sources and outlets of rivers, this may be done by a line to indicate the course. If now the pupils have made good previous use of their eyes, especially if they have noticed the fall of brooks and rivers, and have observed the slope of the ground in a particular region,—if they have not, the deficiency must be made good first of all,—it will not be too early to pass on to a general description of the appearance which the country under consideration would present to a traveller. And now the time has come for a somewhat fuller mention of the names of rivers and mountains, but these names must at once be gone over several times by the pupils. Doing so will reveal whether the list of new names has been made too long; it is often largely due to carelessness in this respect, if the study of geography proves barren or onerous. Next in order follow detailed descriptions of particular wonders of nature, where there are such. Attention is then given to some of the principal cities, mention being made of the number of inhabitants. Here the determination of relative location comes in again, and for this the self-activity of the pupils is[267] indispensable. Finally, human industry and art, so far as they relate to the products of the country, together with the little of political organization that pupils can grasp. The names of the provinces should ordinarily be omitted from the first course.
Once these geographical features have been highlighted, they should be connected—perhaps using a blackboard where they can be roughly sketched one by one and then properly linked together afterward. For the sources and mouths of rivers, you can draw a line to indicate their path. If the students have done a good job observing, especially noticing how brooks and rivers flow and the slope of the land in certain areas—if they haven’t, that gap needs to be addressed first—it’s time to move on to a general description of what the landscape would look like to a traveler. Now is the right moment to mention the names of rivers and mountains in more detail, but students need to go over these names multiple times. This practice will show if the list of new names is too long; a common issue leading to a lack of engagement with geography is carelessness in this area. Next, we focus on detailed descriptions of notable natural wonders, if they exist. Attention then shifts to some of the major cities, including their population numbers. This is where relative location becomes important again, and for this, students’ active participation is essential. Lastly, we look at human industry and art as they relate to the country’s products, along with a brief overview of the political organization that students can understand. Typically, the names of provinces should not be included in the first course.
This section is suggestive of the old geography of the last half century,—location, names, maps, the barren details of the science. Geography is something richer than all this. The old geography was political in the foregoing sense. The first break was in making it physiographical, the last in making it social. Names as such are nothing, and physical facts little more, but both become of value as soon as they are brought into relation to man,—his life, his work, his recreation. Geography is not essentially the location of places, nor is it physiography, but it is a study of the essential facts concerning the surface of the earth as they are related to man himself; it is, in short, human in the fullest sense. It gives a concrete explanation of civilization; it explains the production, the exchange, and, to some extent, the consumption of goods. It contrasts countries, not so much by square miles, as by the number of miles of railroads they possess. (The most momentous fact of modern civilization is the railroad. Twelve billions of dollars are invested in it in the United States alone. In view of these facts, what shall be said of those recent geographies that keep the children poring over primitive maps for years—maps without a suggestion of a railroad in them? This is an illustration of how prone education is to lag behind the progress of society.)
This section reflects the outdated geography of the last fifty years—locations, names, maps, and the dry details of the science. Geography is much more than all of that. The old geography was political in that sense. The first shift was towards making it physiographical, and the last one was making it social. Names alone don’t mean much, and physical facts are hardly more informative, but both gain significance when they are connected to people—his life, his work, his leisure. Geography isn’t just about where places are, nor is it merely physiography; it's the study of the essential facts about the Earth's surface as they relate to humanity; in short, it is human in the truest sense. It offers a tangible explanation of civilization; it clarifies production, exchange, and somewhat the consumption of goods. It compares countries not so much by their land area, but by how many miles of railroads they have. (The most important fact of modern civilization is the railroad. Twelve billion dollars are invested in it in the United States alone. Considering these facts, what can be said about those recent geography textbooks that keep kids studying outdated maps for years—maps that don't even show a single railroad? This highlights how education often fails to keep pace with societal progress.)
267. The reviews, which should be frequent, must steadily work toward a growing firmness of association[268] between names and places. Each name is to be referred to the place it designates; hence the sequence of names must often be reversed, and the map looked over in all directions and from all points of view. How far to go is determined in accordance with individual capacity. From some, only what is absolutely essential can be demanded; from others, much more, in order that they may exert themselves properly.
267. The reviews should happen regularly and should consistently aim for a stronger connection between names and places.[268] Each name should be linked to the specific place it refers to; therefore, the order of names might need to be flipped, and the map should be examined from all angles and perspectives. How far to go depends on each person's ability. For some, only the essentials can be required; for others, more effort is needed to ensure they are fully engaged.
268. In the midst of other studies on which greater stress is laid, geography is as a rule slighted by pupils and sometimes even by teachers. This attitude merits severe criticism. Instruction in geography may be reduced to a minimum, the first course even requires this, but it should not be disparaged. With many pupils, geography is the first study which gives them the consciousness that they can learn as they are expected to learn. With all pupils, geography must connect the remaining studies and must keep them connected. Without it everything remains unstable. Historical events lack places and distances; products of nature are without the regions where they are found; popular astronomy, which is called upon so often to prevent and dispel erroneous notions, is deprived of its very basis, and the geometrical imagination of one of its most important incentives. If the facts of knowledge are allowed to fall asunder in this way, instruction endangers the whole of education.
268. In the midst of other studies that are given more emphasis, geography is often overlooked by students and sometimes even by teachers. This attitude deserves serious criticism. While geography instruction can be minimal—especially in the first course—it should not be undervalued. For many students, geography is the first subject that makes them realize they can learn as expected. For all students, geography serves to connect all other subjects and keep them linked. Without it, everything becomes unstable. Historical events lack context and distance; natural products lack the regions they come from; popular astronomy, often referenced to correct misconceptions, loses its foundation and hinders the geometrical imagination that is so crucial. If knowledge is allowed to fragment like this, education as a whole is put at risk.
CHAPTER V
The Native Language
269. There would be less controversy about language teaching if existing differences in conditions were given proper attention.
269. There would be less argument about language teaching if the different conditions that exist were acknowledged properly.
The most general distinction to make is that between understanding and speaking. The distance between the two is a given factor at the time when regular instruction begins. It is very great in some cases, and, again, slight in others, according to individual aptitude and early surroundings.
The main difference to note is between understanding and speaking. The gap between the two is a certain factor when formal instruction starts. In some cases, it's very wide, while in others, it's narrow, depending on personal ability and early environment.
270. First of all, one’s language was acquired by hearing it spoken, by receiving it from others, by imitation; it was refined or vulgar; it was perceived accurately or indistinctly; it was imitated by organs, good, bad, or indifferent. Little by little the imperfections of the earliest stage are outgrown, where cultured persons set a daily example and insist on correctness of speech. Sometimes, however, it takes years to bring about such a result.
270. First of all, people learn language by hearing it spoken, by getting it from others, and by imitation; it can be refined or rough; it can be understood clearly or unclearly; it’s imitated by organs that are good, bad, or average. Gradually, the flaws of the initial stage are outgrown, where educated people set a daily example and emphasize the importance of speaking correctly. Sometimes, though, it can take years to achieve that kind of improvement.
271. Another factor, and one deeply rooted in individual temperament, is the stronger or weaker impulse toward expression through language. This fact elevates[270] the language of each one above mere imitation; its improvement must start from the thoughts which it seeks to express. Striking progress of this kind often occurs during adolescence.
271. Another factor, which is closely tied to individual temperament, is the varying desire to express oneself through language. This aspect elevates[270] the language of each person beyond simple imitation; its improvement has to begin with the thoughts it aims to convey. Notable advancement of this sort often happens during adolescence.
The differences noted in this and the two preceding sections are psychological, hence common to German and American children. The problem of teaching American children their mother-tongue, assumed to be English, is both harder and easier than to teach German to German children. It is easier in that English is mostly uninflected, hence unencumbered by nice distinctions in grammatical form. This same fact, on the other hand, causes didactic difficulties, since most teachers are at a loss as to what definite body of knowledge they should or can impart that will train the child into a mastery of good English speech. The last twenty years have seen a large number of experiments on the part of authors in the effort to present a body of information and exercises calculated to secure a good training in the mother-tongue. These efforts have met with but partial success, owing to the inherent difficulties of the subject. Many who can teach a foreign language, where there is a movable fulcrum of difficulties to be overcome, such as those found in inflection, or in the meaning of foreign words, fail when confronted by a language that is practically uninflected, and in which the words are easily understood.
The differences mentioned in this and the two previous sections are psychological, making them common to both German and American children. Teaching American children their native language, which is typically English, is both more challenging and simpler than teaching German to German kids. It's simpler because English has mostly no inflections, so it doesn't have complicated grammatical forms. However, this same fact creates teaching challenges since many teachers struggle to identify what core knowledge they should or can teach to help the child master good English speaking skills. Over the last twenty years, many authors have tried to create a set of information and exercises aimed at providing effective training in the mother tongue. These efforts have had only partial success due to the inherent challenges of the subject. Many who can teach a foreign language, which has various challenges to address, like inflections or the meanings of foreign words, often fail when faced with a language that is essentially uninflected and where the words are easily understood.
The old recourse was technical grammar. But this is an analytical study, calculated to lead to apprehension of subtle meanings, rather than to an instinct for correct form. Furthermore, the grammar cannot be successfully studied until after the habits of speech are fairly fixed. For these reasons, it bears much the same relation to living speech that formal logic does to real thinking. Grammar makes the mind keen[271] to detect formal errors of speech, just as logic trains one to detect fallacies in reasoning.
The traditional approach was technical grammar. But this is an analytical study designed to help understand subtle meanings rather than develop an instinct for correct form. Additionally, grammar can't be effectively studied until speech habits are fairly established. For these reasons, it relates to living speech much like formal logic relates to actual thinking. Grammar sharpens the mind to spot formal speech errors, just as logic trains someone to identify fallacies in reasoning.[271]
The first important instrument for securing good English in the early primary grades is narration by the teacher and repetition by the children. This means, potent enough to form the speech of any child whether from the slums or from the homes of those who know no English, is rarely utilized up to the full measure of its efficiency. Teachers are filled with the prepossession that they must enable their pupils to write good English, forgetting that if the mind is habituated to think in good English first, the problem of writing it is well-nigh solved. The requisites for successful oral training in the mother-tongue are first, the selection of a body of interesting and appropriate literature, and second, skill in narration by the teacher. Given these two things, and we have the first in great abundance, and every child will be able in a year to give extended and correct speech within the range of his sphere of thought to an almost unlimited extent. His tenacious memory for forms frequently heard, together with his delight in repeating almost word for word stories told in his presence, will produce astonishing facility in correct speech. As much of this may be written as seems best, but it is probable that there would not be great loss if a child were not called upon to write a ‘composition’ before he is ten or twelve years old. Could we be sure he would go through the high school, formal writing might be postponed until he enters it. Not much is ever gained by attempts to produce fruit before its natural period for appearing.
The first key tool for ensuring good English in early primary grades is storytelling by the teacher and repetition by the students. This approach, effective enough to shape the speech of any child, whether from underprivileged backgrounds or homes with no English exposure, is often not fully utilized. Teachers tend to believe they must help their students write good English, forgetting that if the mind is trained to think in good English first, the writing challenge is mostly resolved. The essential elements for successful oral training in the mother tongue are, first, choosing a collection of engaging and suitable literature, and second, the teacher's skill in storytelling. With these two factors in place—and we have plenty of interesting material—each child will be able to express themselves clearly and extensively within their understanding after just a year. Their strong memory for phrases they've frequently heard, along with their enjoyment of repeating stories almost word for word, will lead to impressive fluency in correct speech. Some of this can be written down, but it’s likely that there wouldn't be much loss if a child isn't asked to write a "composition" before they're ten or twelve years old. If we were certain they would complete high school, formal writing could wait until they enter that stage. Trying to produce results before their natural time rarely yields much benefit.
Upon the basis of this training in correct oral speech, the children may begin, when nine or ten years of age, to have systematic language lessons, which should be calculated to produce two results: first, a facile use of the pen in recording[272] thought, special caution being given not to weary the mind and body too much by unduly extending the length of the written exercises; second, an inductive approach, through brief written exercises, toward the classifications and distinctions of technical grammar. To be of use, this latter requirement should be clearly understood. The method of approach is purely synthetic. It consists in devices to enable the pupil repeatedly to use a given construction, say a relative pronoun, until the name and construction seem natural from use alone.[35]
Based on this training in proper spoken language, children may start systematic language lessons at around nine or ten years old. These lessons should aim for two main outcomes: first, to develop a skilled ability to write down thoughts, with careful attention paid to avoid overworking the mind and body by keeping writing exercises within reasonable lengths; second, to take an inductive approach through short writing tasks towards understanding the classifications and distinctions of technical grammar. For this latter goal to be effective, it must be clearly understood. The approach is completely synthetic, utilizing methods that allow students to repeatedly use a specific construction, like a relative pronoun, until its name and use feel natural from practice alone.[272][35]
At the age of thirteen or fourteen the analytical study of grammar should be begun. The essential thing here is that the pupil should connect words with the ideas they express, and sentences with the thoughts that give rise to them.[36] Seeing mental distinctions clearly, he has small difficulty in their written or oral expression.
At around thirteen or fourteen, students should start studying grammar analytically. The key is for them to link words to the ideas they represent, and sentences to the thoughts that generate them.[36] Understanding these mental distinctions clearly makes it easier for them to express themselves in writing or speaking.
[35] For extended illustration of this point, see the “Annotator’s Language Lessons,” the Werner School Book Co., New York, Boston, and Chicago.
[35] For a more detailed example of this point, check out the “Annotator’s Language Lessons,” published by the Werner School Book Co., New York, Boston, and Chicago.
[36] This position is best exemplified by Mr. George P. Brown in his “Essentials of English Grammar,” the Werner School Book Co., New York, Boston, and Chicago.
[36] This idea is best illustrated by Mr. George P. Brown in his “Essentials of English Grammar,” published by the Werner School Book Co., New York, Boston, and Chicago.
272. Now such facts might seem to point to the conclusion that no special periods of instruction are needed for the mother-tongue, or at least not for language lessons alone. On the one hand, it might be urged that cultured teachers will improve the language of their pupils by their mere example, and by the occasional corrections which will of course be necessary; while, on the other hand, the gradual progress of mental development will shape the means of expression from within, to the natural limits of individual[273] capacity. But before accepting the view here given, we need to remind ourselves, in the first place, that for a long time the educated teacher is only imperfectly understood by the uneducated listener, and that instruction is very much impeded if each unusual turn of expression necessitates an inquiry as to whether its meaning is clear.
272. Now, these facts might suggest that special teaching periods for the mother tongue aren't necessary, especially not just for language lessons. On one hand, it could be argued that knowledgeable teachers will naturally enhance their students' language skills through their example and the occasional needed corrections. On the other hand, the gradual growth of mental development will influence the way students express themselves, within their personal limits of individual[273] capacity. However, before we accept this perspective, we must remember that educated teachers are often only partially understood by uneducated listeners, and that learning can be significantly hindered if every unusual expression requires clarification about its meaning.
273. But this is not all. Language is also to be read and written. Hence, it becomes a standing object for consideration, and, to one whose knowledge of it is deficient, a source of embarrassment. Accordingly, the first thing for the teacher to do is to show analytically, on the basis of what has been read or written, how the meaning would be lost or altered if either single words were interchanged, or the inflectional endings (especially in German) were incorrectly chosen. That the synthesis of sentences should follow next, advancing step by step toward greater complexity, especially by means of various conjunctions, may be assumed to be well understood.
273. But that's not all. Language also involves reading and writing. So, it becomes a constant topic for discussion and, for someone with limited knowledge, a cause for embarrassment. Therefore, the first thing the teacher should do is to explain, based on what has been read or written, how the meaning would change or be lost if single words were swapped or if the inflectional endings (especially in German) were chosen incorrectly. It can be assumed that the next step should be the synthesis of sentences, gradually moving toward more complexity, especially using various conjunctions.
274. Now if all experienced equal difficulty in their reading and writing, the language lessons designed as a remedy would commend themselves in all cases, and might fittingly be carried to the same extent everywhere.
274. If everyone faced the same challenges in reading and writing, the language lessons created to address these issues would be beneficial for everyone and could be widely implemented in the same way everywhere.
But here the widest divergence appears. Accordingly, where many are being taught together, the teacher will seek to connect language work with other[274] subjects. Thus, in the course of the same recitation, analytic instruction may be directed to the language side for some pupils, while for others it may be given a far wider scope. Moreover, the accompanying written exercises may have a corresponding diversity.
But this is where the biggest difference comes in. When many students are being taught together, the teacher will try to link language work with other[274] subjects. So, during the same lesson, some students might receive focused instruction on the language aspect, while others might get a much broader approach. Additionally, the written exercises may vary accordingly.
275. The work of a recitation period will be further diversified by the introduction of exercises in reading aloud, and in oral reproduction. But never will it be possible to raise all pupils to the same plane of proficiency. Here, above all, the determining power of individuality must be acknowledged.
275. The recitation period will become even more varied with the addition of exercises in reading aloud and speaking skills. However, it will never be possible to bring all students to the same level of proficiency. Above all, we must recognize the influence of individuality in this.
276. For older boys and young men, the work in the mother-tongue will consist partly in the study of excellent examples of the various kinds of poetry and oratory, partly in the writing of essays. Such study will prove the more profitable, the more perfect the models, the more suitably they are adapted to the stage of culture already attained by the student, and the more scrupulously the teacher refrains from forcing upon him a literary taste not congenial to his nature. The least promising of all written exercises are those in letter-writing. Confidential letters every one can write, each in his own way. Best of all are written exercises with a definite and rich store of thought to draw from and admitting of various forms of treatment. Several may then emulate each other in handling the same theme, and the process of correcting will awaken greater interest in consequence.
276. For older boys and young men, the work in their native language will involve studying great examples of different types of poetry and speeches, as well as writing essays. This study will be more beneficial the better the models are, the more appropriate they are for the student’s current level of understanding, and the more careful the teacher is in not imposing a literary taste that doesn’t suit the student’s nature. The least effective of all written tasks are those focused on letter-writing. Everyone can write their own kind of personal letters. The best written assignments are those with a clear and rich range of ideas to work from and that can be approached in various ways. Several students may then compete with each other in exploring the same topic, and the process of reviewing each other's work will spark greater interest as a result.
CHAPTER VI
Greek and Latin
277. As is well known, the exposition of grammatical distinctions and of the many turns of expression whereby language may become an adequate symbolization of thought, gains very materially in clearness by a comparison of the mother-tongue with Latin and Greek. Even with boys not more than eight years old the attempt may be made to utilize this advantage in the teaching of English, whether it has been finally decided, or not, that they are to take the regular classical course. Some boys learn, without much trouble, enough of Latin inflections to enable them soon to translate short sentences from the mother-tongue into Latin, and vice versa.
277. As is well known, explaining grammatical distinctions and the various ways language can effectively represent thought becomes much clearer when comparing the native language with Latin and Greek. Even with boys as young as eight years old, we can try to use this advantage in teaching English, regardless of whether it has been finally determined that they will follow the regular classical course. Some boys pick up enough Latin inflections without much trouble, allowing them to quickly translate short sentences from their native language into Latin, and vice versa.
The present plan in Germany is to have boys in the gymnasia begin the study of Latin at the age of ten. The study is continued for a period of nine years. Greek is begun three years later and continued for six years. In the United States the prevailing plan is to postpone the study of Latin until the pupil enters the high school at the age of fourteen or fifteen. Good private schools and many city grammar schools permit children to begin when some two years younger than[276] this. The Report on College Entrance Requirements made before the National Educational Association in 1899 suggested the propriety of extending the influence of the high school over the two highest grades of the grammar school, making in effect a six-year high school course. For students who expect to enter college or technical schools this plan offers great advantages, since it permits the desirable preparation to be distributed over six years instead of being concentrated into four.
The current plan in Germany has boys in gymnasiums starting Latin studies at age ten, continuing for nine years. Greek starts three years later and lasts six years. In the United States, the common approach is to delay Latin until students enter high school at around fourteen or fifteen. Some good private schools and many city grammar schools allow children to start about two years earlier than that. The Report on College Entrance Requirements presented to the National Educational Association in 1899 proposed the idea of extending high school influence to the top two grades of grammar school, effectively creating a six-year high school program. This plan offers significant advantages for students planning to attend college or technical schools, as it spreads necessary preparation over six years instead of concentrating it into four.
278. This experiment will not, however, be long continued; since, with the large majority of pupils, the difficulties accumulate so rapidly as to lead unavoidably to the admission that the burden cannot be assumed merely for the sake of incidental advantages. Moreover, the customary view, handed down from the time of the Reformation, of the relation of the classical languages to the sciences, and to the needs of the age, is undergoing a change more and more apparent from decade to decade. The labor implied in the study of the ancient languages now pays only where talent combines with the earnest purpose to achieve the most complete scholarship.
278. This experiment won’t go on for long, though, because for most students, the challenges build up so quickly that it's clear the effort can't just be justified by minor benefits. Additionally, the traditional perspective, which has persisted since the Reformation, regarding the connection between classical languages and the sciences, as well as societal needs, is clearly shifting more noticeably with each passing decade. The effort required to study ancient languages now only pays off when talent is paired with a genuine intention to attain thorough scholarship.
This remark is prophetic of the enormous increase of instruction in the sciences since Herbart’s day, yet Latin has also enjoyed a phenomenal increase in popularity in American schools. According to the Report of the National Commissioner of Education the increase of enrollment in high schools for the years between 1890 and 1898 was 84 per cent, while the increase in the number of students pursuing Latin was 174[277] per cent.[37] This surprising growth in the number pursuing an ancient language can hardly be accounted for by increased stringency in college entrance requirements in Latin, but must rather be ascribed to a growing conviction among the people that the study is indispensable in secondary education. That this must be the case is seen by the attendant circumstances. In the first place, Latin has become an elective in nearly all high schools; in the next place, many rich equivalents are offered, both in science and in modern languages; and finally our system of universal elementary education has sent large classes of persons into the secondary schools that have never previously been there. Yet the number of students electing this study grows by leaps and bounds.
This comment predicts the significant rise in science education since Herbart’s time, but Latin has also seen a remarkable surge in popularity in American schools. According to the Report of the National Commissioner of Education, high school enrollment increased by 84 percent from 1890 to 1898, while the number of students studying Latin jumped by 174[277] percent.[37] This unexpected growth in students learning an ancient language can't just be explained by tougher college entrance requirements for Latin; it must be due to a growing belief among people that studying Latin is essential in secondary education. This is evident from several factors. Firstly, Latin has become an elective in nearly all high schools; secondly, there are many appealing alternatives available in both science and modern languages; and finally, our system of universal elementary education has brought large groups of students into secondary schools who had never attended before. Still, the number of students choosing to study Latin keeps increasing rapidly.
279. The manner of teaching the ancient languages, where they are regarded as a matter of necessity or conventionality, no account being taken of pedagogical considerations, need not be discussed here. It must rather be admitted at once that no pedagogical means whatever exist, whereby those who live with their interests strictly confined to the present could be brought to acquire, with genuine sympathy, the content of the works of antiquity.
279. The way ancient languages are taught today, often seen as necessary or traditional without considering teaching methods, doesn’t need to be addressed here. We must acknowledge right away that there are no teaching techniques that can genuinely engage those focused solely on the present in understanding the true essence of ancient works.
American teachers in estimating the value of Latin for the high school student lay more stress upon training in the mastery of the mother-tongue than upon the literary contents of the classical writings. Professor Bennett in his treatment of “The Teaching of Latin in the Secondary School,”[38] places in strong light the splendid linguistic training a youth undergoes when taught by a good teacher of this subject. In Germany, since Herbart’s time, Professor Russell tells us that the teaching of Latin has fluctuated between two aims—“between that view which makes the classics a purely formal discipline, and that other view which bases the worth of such a[279] study on the acquisition of humanistic culture, in contact with ‘the best thoughts of the best men of antiquity.’ In the one case it is considered of equal value as a means of preparation for all trades and professions dependent on intellectual acumen; in the other case it is of worth only for those who can practically apply the technical knowledge thereby acquired, or may have sufficient leisure to enjoy its æsthetic qualities. It is a question of making the ancient literature a means to an end or an end in itself.”[39]
American teachers, when assessing the value of Latin for high school students, emphasize the importance of mastering their own language more than the literary content of classic texts. Professor Bennett, in his work “The Teaching of Latin in the Secondary School,”[38] highlights the exceptional linguistic training a student receives from a skilled teacher in this subject. In Germany, since the time of Herbart, Professor Russell explains that Latin teaching has shifted between two perspectives—one that views the classics as purely a formal discipline and another that finds value in these studies through the acquisition of humanistic culture, engaging with “the best thoughts of the best men of antiquity.” In the first case, it's seen as equally valuable preparation for all trades and professions that require intellectual skills; in the second, it’s valuable only for those who can practically use the technical knowledge gained or who have enough free time to appreciate its aesthetic qualities. It's a matter of whether ancient literature serves as a means to an end or as an end in itself.”[39]
The dogma of formal discipline as a leading aim in education has nowhere been more discredited than among Herbartian writers. A judicious estimate of its truth and error is made by Professor Hinsdale.[40] His main conclusions are as follows:—
The belief in formal discipline as a primary goal in education has been more thoroughly discredited among Herbartian writers than anywhere else. Professor Hinsdale provides a thoughtful assessment of its merits and flaws.[40] His key findings are as follows:—
- The degree to which power generated by education is general depends upon the extent to which it energizes the mind, and particularly the extent to which it overflows into congruent channels.
- Such power is far more special than general; it is only in a limited sense that we can be said to have a store of mobilized mental power.
- No one kind of mental exercise—no few kinds—can develop the whole mind.
- No study, no single group of studies, contains within itself the possibilities of a whole education.
On the other hand, American students rarely study classics long enough to acquire much facility in mastering the literary contents of the ancient writers. If, to considerable extent, the idea of formal discipline is a delusive one, and the idea of a[280] broad, humanistic culture is an illusion of the American schoolmaster, we must justify the study of Latin upon other grounds. The linguistic advantages arising from it are obvious and decided. Among these stands first the mastery of the mother-tongue, first through the comparative study rendered necessary by translation, then by study of the roots of a large part of the English vocabulary, and more remotely by the light thrown by Latin upon history and institutional life.
On the other hand, American students rarely study the classics long enough to really understand the literary works of ancient writers. If the idea of formal discipline is largely misleading, and the notion of a broad, humanistic education is just a fantasy created by American educators, we need to justify the study of Latin on different grounds. The linguistic benefits are clear and significant. Foremost among these is the improvement of proficiency in the native language, first through comparative analysis required by translation, then through studying the roots of a large part of the English vocabulary, and more indirectly through the insights Latin provides into history and societal structures.
There is an advantage in Latin of great, though usually unmentioned, importance, and that is its peculiar usefulness as an educational instrument, in that it presents to the pupil a graduated scale of surmountable difficulties. In this respect it is surpassed only by mathematics. The difference between a good and a poor educational instrument lies in this: a study offering few surmountable obstacles is a poor educational instrument, for the pupil can find no fulcrum upon which to use his mental powers. Thus he may stare at a natural object when directed to observe its characteristics, but he finds it hard to think when no thought problem is presented to him. But a study that involves thought problems of a definite and solvable kind is a good educational instrument, for the pupil finds something to move and a fulcrum upon which he may exert his power. Translation from an ancient language exercises the working powers of a student up to their highest efficiency, for the translation of ten sentences may easily provide the hardest kind of work for an hour; if ten lines do not, then more lines will. When a foreign language ceases to offer such surmountable difficulties, we leave it for something else that does offer them.
There’s a significant benefit of Latin that’s crucial but often overlooked: its effectiveness as a teaching tool, as it provides students with a clear progression of manageable challenges. In this way, it’s only rivaled by math. The key difference between a good and a poor educational tool is this: a subject with too few challenges is a poor educational tool because students won't have a solid base to apply their mental skills. They might look at a natural object when asked to observe its features, but they struggle to think critically without a relevant problem to tackle. However, a subject that introduces clear and solvable challenges is an effective educational tool, as it gives students something to engage with and a base to apply their skills. Translating an ancient language really pushes a student's abilities to the max, as translating ten sentences can easily provide a tough hour of work; and if ten lines don’t suffice, then more lines will. When a foreign language stops presenting these manageable challenges, we move on to something else that does.
[38] Bennett and Bristol, “The Teaching of Latin and Greek,” pp. 11–32, Longmans, Green & Co., New York, 1900.
[38] Bennett and Bristol, “The Teaching of Latin and Greek,” pp. 11–32, Longmans, Green & Co., New York, 1900.
280. Pedagogically considered, every difference in the degree of vivid realization of antiquity, in the[281] degree of its correlation with other main departments of knowledge, and in the extent to which a disagreeable aftertaste of school-day drudgery is prevented, determines the greater or smaller value to be ascribed to the knowledge acquired. If the same realization could be secured without the ancient languages and without the potency of early impressions, then the studies mentioned in preceding chapters, which outline the work of burgher schools, would leave nothing further to be desired; and the study of the ancient languages in gymnasia would be a necessary evil, highly as their incidental advantages are usually extolled.
280. From an educational perspective, every difference in how vividly we understand the past, in how it connects to other key fields of knowledge, and in how much we can avoid the unpleasant feeling of school-day monotony influences the value we assign to the knowledge gained. If we could achieve the same understanding without studying ancient languages and without the impact of early experiences, then the subjects discussed in previous chapters, which lay out the work of civic schools, would cover all we need; thus, studying ancient languages in secondary schools would be seen as a necessary burden, no matter how much their additional benefits are often praised.
281. But languages alone give to a boy a picture neither of bygone ages nor of men of the past; to him they are solely troublesome tasks imposed by the teacher. Nor can golden maxims, fables, and short narratives change his attitude. For even if these are well suited to the youthful mind, they do not materially offset the aversion to the work on stems, which have to be memorized; inflections, which must be practised; and conjunctions, which are required for guidance in the study of periods.
281. But languages alone provide a boy with no sense of past ages or historical figures; to him, they’re just annoying assignments given by the teacher. Even wise sayings, fables, and short stories can't change how he feels. Because even if these are appropriate for a young mind, they don’t significantly lessen the dislike for memorizing roots, practicing inflections, and learning conjunctions that are necessary for understanding sentence structure.
282. Now it is true that if Latin is begun first, Eutropius and Cornelius Nepos suggest themselves as suitable authors for study, as soon as the merest rudiments[282] of Latin have been learned in connection with instruction in the mother-tongue (277). And their use is not to be entirely condemned, provided the teacher takes it upon himself to make the past present through narration. But, as is well known, these authors are after all very meagre, and, besides, where to look for a path beyond them still remains an open question.
282. It’s true that if you start with Latin, Eutropius and Cornelius Nepos are recommended as good authors to study once you've learned the basics of Latin alongside your native language instruction. Their work isn't entirely objectionable, as long as the teacher can bring the past to life through storytelling. However, as many know, these authors are quite limited, and it’s still uncertain where to go for more advanced material beyond them.
283. The reasons which accord to Homer’s “Odyssey” the preference for early use are familiar.[41] They are patent to every one who attentively reads the “Odyssey” with constant reference to the various main classes of interest which teaching is to awaken (83–94). But the question involved is not merely one of immediate effect, but also of finding points of departure for the later stages of instruction. There can be no better preparation for ancient history than to establish an interest in ancient Greece by means of the Homeric story. At the same time, the soil is being made ready for the cultivation of taste, and for language study.
283. The reasons why Homer’s “Odyssey” is preferred for early use are well-known.[41] They are obvious to anyone who reads the “Odyssey” carefully while constantly considering the various main classes of interest that teaching should stimulate (83–94). However, the question at hand isn't just about immediate impact, but also about identifying starting points for later educational stages. There’s no better way to prepare for ancient history than by sparking interest in ancient Greece through the Homeric tale. At the same time, this approach lays the groundwork for developing taste and for language studies.
To reasons of this kind, derived directly from the chief aim of all teaching and opposed only by tradition (the conventional doing of the classics), the philologists will have to listen some time, if they are not[283] willing that, with the growing importance of history and of the natural sciences, and with the increasing pressure of material interests, the study of Greek in schools should be pushed into a corner and suffer a reduction similar to that which has already taken place in the case of Hebrew. (A few decades ago Greek came very near being remitted for all but those intending to study theology.)
To reasons like these, which come directly from the main goal of teaching and are only challenged by tradition (the conventional doing of the classics), the philologists will eventually have to pay attention, unless they want[283] to see the study of Greek in schools pushed aside, much like Hebrew has already experienced, as history and the natural sciences gain more significance and material interests become more pressing. (A few decades ago, Greek was almost completely dropped for everyone except those planning to study theology.)
Of course, the “Odyssey” possesses no miraculous power to inspire those who have no talent whatever for language studies or do not take them seriously; nevertheless, as many years of experience have shown, it surpasses every other work of antiquity that might be selected in definite pedagogical effect. Moreover, its study does not preclude an early commencement of Latin (nor even of Greek, where that seems necessary); only Latin cannot be pushed with the customary rapidity at the same time; for the “Odyssey” requires an hour daily, and grammatical and lexicological work besides.
Of course, the “Odyssey” doesn’t have any magical ability to inspire those who have no talent for studying languages or don’t take it seriously; however, as years of experience have shown, it is more effective than any other ancient work when it comes to teaching. Furthermore, studying it doesn’t prevent starting Latin early (or even Greek, if needed); it just means that Latin can’t be studied at the usual fast pace at the same time, because the “Odyssey” requires an hour a day and additional work on grammar and vocabulary.
Experience has proved that the grammatical rudiments pertaining to declension and conjugation must be worked over very carefully first, although reduced to what is absolutely essential. Besides, the first lessons in the “Odyssey” ought not to exceed a few lines each time; and, during the first months, no accurate memorizing of words is to be demanded. But farther on the acquisition of a vocabulary must be vigorously[284] insisted on; in fact, it becomes the pupil’s most necessary collateral work. By continued effort in this direction a considerable portion of the whole stock of words is gradually acquired; the language forms are supplied with the content to which they refer, and through which they become significant. The teacher must know exactly, not only when to hasten on, but also when to delay; for every perceptible gain in facility is likely to betray pupils into some carelessness which needs to be corrected at once. With good pupils it is not infeasible to read the whole of the “Odyssey,” since facility increases very rapidly toward the end. Nevertheless, such work should not extend much beyond two years; otherwise weariness sets in, or time is taken from other things. In schools it will be well to assign the first four books to one class, perhaps the class composed of pupils nine or ten years old, the next class to begin with Book V. To determine exactly how many books each class can work up thoroughly is unnecessary, as good translations can be used to fill in the gaps that occur. The reason for the division just made will be manifest at once upon a closer inspection of the “Odyssey.” Some books more advanced pupils may later on read by themselves, but they should be expected to render an account of what they are doing. It is not necessary at this stage to explain in detail the rarer peculiarities of the Homeric dialect. Such things may well be[285] deferred until, later in the course, the study of Homer (of the “Iliad”) is resumed. The teacher who is afraid of the difficulties connected with the plan presented should remind himself of the fact that progress by any other path is equally beset with difficulties. While at work on Homer, care should be taken to keep pupils from being influenced simultaneously by such tales as those from the Arabian Nights, because they blunt the sense of the wonderful.
Experience has shown that the basics of declension and conjugation need to be practiced thoroughly first, although they should be limited to what's absolutely necessary. Also, the initial lessons in the “Odyssey” should not be longer than a few lines each time; during the first few months, there shouldn't be any strict requirement for memorizing words. However, later on, building a vocabulary must be strongly emphasized; it ultimately becomes the student's most essential extra work. With consistent effort, a significant portion of the vocabulary is gradually acquired; the language forms gain meaning through the content they refer to. The teacher must know when to speed up and when to slow down; any noticeable improvement in skills can lead students to careless mistakes that need immediate correction. For diligent students, it’s feasible to read the entire “Odyssey,” as their skills increase rapidly towards the end. However, this work shouldn’t extend much beyond two years; otherwise, fatigue can set in, or time may be taken from other subjects. In schools, it would be beneficial to assign the first four books to one class, possibly aimed at students around nine or ten years old, while the next class could start with Book V. It’s unnecessary to determine exactly how many books each class can thoroughly cover, as good translations can fill in any gaps. The rationale behind this division becomes clear with a closer look at the “Odyssey.” Some books might later be read independently by more advanced students, but they should be expected to explain what they’re doing. At this point, there’s no need to go into detail about the rarer features of the Homeric dialect; those can wait until the study of Homer (of the “Iliad”) is revisited later in the course. Teachers who are concerned about the challenges of this plan should remember that any other approach comes with its own difficulties. While studying Homer, care should be taken to prevent students from being influenced by stories like those from the Arabian Nights, as they dull the sense of wonder.
[41] These reasons apply in no way to the “Iliad,” but only to the “Odyssey.” Moreover, it is presupposed that religious feeling has been sufficiently awakened long beforehand. In that case the mythical elements can do no harm whatever, for, in so far as they are inconsistent with religious feeling, their effect is decidedly repellent, and renders an excess of illusion impossible.
[41] These reasons do not apply at all to the “Iliad,” only to the “Odyssey.” Additionally, it’s assumed that a sense of spirituality has already been stirred up well in advance. In that scenario, the mythical elements are completely harmless because, to the extent that they conflict with religious sentiments, their impact is definitely off-putting and makes excessive illusion impossible.
284. Only two poets, two historians, and two philosophers need to be mentioned to indicate the continuation of the course. Homer and Virgil; Herodotus and Cæsar; Plato and Cicero. What authors should precede these, or should intervene, or follow, may be left for circumstances to determine. Xenophon, Livy, Euripides, Sophocles, and Horace will probably always retain a place by the side of those mentioned; Horace especially offers brief maxims, the after-effect of which the educator should by no means underestimate. It is obvious that Virgil and Herodotus are rendered much easier by taking up Homer first; on the other hand, the return to Homer (to the “Iliad”) during adolescence, is as little to be omitted, if only on account of mythology, as the return to ancient history for purposes of pragmatic study (250). Again, the syntactical scheme of the ancient languages, which involves far greater difficulties than do even inflections and vocabulary, is more easily mastered by placing[286] the poets before the prose-writers, because then the pupils are not compelled to struggle with all the difficulties of sentence structure at once. At any rate, it is desirable that, just as the student’s Greek vocabulary is built up from the “Odyssey,” his hoard of Latin words should be drawn from the “Æneid.” The latter, however, will hardly be read entirely, because it cannot be gone over with nearly the same rapidity as the latter books of the “Odyssey,” when facility in reading has been attained. Cæsar’s “Bellum Gallicum” must be studied with exceptional carefulness, since its style comes nearer to being a desirable first model for the student of Latin than the style of the other authors in use. After this has been accomplished, the strictly systematic teaching and memorizing of Latin syntax, together with selected brief examples, is in order as one of the main lines of work. In Plato several books of the “Republic,” especially the first, second, fourth, and eighth, constitute a desirable goal. That Cicero should be revealed to young minds on his brilliant side first, namely, as orator, need scarcely be mentioned. Later on his philosophical writings become important; but many passages require a fuller development of the subject-matter than is given by him.
284. Only two poets, two historians, and two philosophers need to be mentioned to show the continuity of the subject. Homer and Virgil; Herodotus and Caesar; Plato and Cicero. Which authors should come before, intervene, or follow these can be left for the situation to decide. Xenophon, Livy, Euripides, Sophocles, and Horace will likely always have a place alongside those mentioned; Horace especially provides brief maxims that educators should definitely not underestimate. It’s clear that Virgil and Herodotus are much easier to understand if one first studies Homer; likewise, revisiting Homer (specifically the “Iliad”) during adolescence is just as important, especially for its mythology, as going back to ancient history for practical study (250). Furthermore, the structural grammar of ancient languages, which poses greater difficulties than even the inflections and vocabulary, is easier to grasp when students learn the poets before the prose writers, as this prevents them from having to tackle all the complexities of sentence structure at once. In any case, it is beneficial that, just as a student’s Greek vocabulary is built using the “Odyssey,” their Latin vocabulary should come from the “Aeneid.” However, the whole “Aeneid” will likely not be read, since it cannot be covered nearly as quickly as the later books of the “Odyssey” once reading proficiency has been achieved. Caesar's “Bellum Gallicum” must be studied with particular care, as its style is closer to an ideal first model for the Latin student than the style of other authors. Once this is done, systematic teaching and memorization of Latin syntax, alongside selected brief examples, should be established as a main focus. In Plato, several books from the “Republic,” especially the first, second, fourth, and eighth, are a desirable goal. It hardly needs mentioning that Cicero should first be introduced to young minds through his impressive oratory. Later on, his philosophical writings will become important; however, many sections require a deeper exploration of the subject matter than he provides.
Cicero should frequently be read aloud, or rather declaimed, by the teacher. An orator demands the living voice; the usual monotonous reading by the[287] pupils fails to do justice to him. As regards Tacitus for school use, there is a difference of opinion. Generally speaking, authors that say much in few words are particularly welcome, not merely to the explaining teacher, but also to the responsive pupil. The opposite is true of Cicero; he must be read rapidly in order to be appreciated.
Cicero should often be read out loud, or actually performed, by the teacher. An orator needs to be brought to life with the voice; the usual monotonous reading by the[287] students doesn't do him justice. When it comes to Tacitus for classroom use, opinions vary. Generally, authors who express a lot in few words are particularly appreciated, not just by the teacher explaining the content, but also by the engaged student. The opposite applies to Cicero; he needs to be read quickly to be fully appreciated.
For a full discussion of Latin texts to be read, the reader is referred to Professor Bennett’s chapters on “The Teaching of Latin in the Secondary Schools,”[42] pp. 111–130. For a discussion of the Greek texts, see Professor Bristol’s exposition in the same volume.
For a complete discussion of Latin texts to read, the reader can check out Professor Bennett’s chapters on “The Teaching of Latin in the Secondary Schools,”[42] pp. 111–130. For a discussion of the Greek texts, refer to Professor Bristol’s explanation in the same volume.
285. Experience has long since shown how much or how little can be done with students in Greek and Latin composition; and no method will ever be devised which would induce earlier than at present that degree of mental maturity which reveals itself in a good Latin style. So long as gymnasium pupils are no more select than they now are, the majority, so far as writing Latin is concerned, will begin something that will never lead to successful performance. It would be better, instead, to practise diligently that which can be achieved, namely, composition during the recitation hour, with the assistance of the teacher, and, afterward coöperative consideration of the appointed task, by the pupils. This plan secures the advantage of set essays[288] without the disadvantage of innumerable mistakes, the correction of which the pupil rarely remembers. Joint labor is interesting, and can be adapted to every age. As a substitute for essays, abstracts in Latin of texts previously interpreted are to be recommended, these abstracts to be made at first with the help and afterward without the help of the book in question. To abstract does not mean to imitate, and ought not to mean that. To imitate Cicero requires Cicero’s talent, and unless this exists, the attempt to imitate, it is to be feared, will result in cold artificiality. Even Cæsar is not so simple that his style could be taught and learned. But many passages of Cæsar may be memorized; at first short sentences, then longer periods, finally whole chapters. The usefulness of this practice is attested by experience.
285. Experience has shown how much can actually be done with students in Greek and Latin composition; no method will ever be created that can induce the level of mental maturity needed for a good Latin style any sooner than we currently see. As long as gymnasium students are no more selective than they are now, most of them will start projects that won't lead to any real success in writing Latin. It would be better to focus on what can realistically be achieved, which is practicing composition during recitation time with the teacher’s guidance, followed by collaborative review of the assigned task among the students. This approach provides the benefits of structured essays[288] while avoiding the countless mistakes that students often forget to correct. Working together is engaging and can be adapted for every age group. Instead of essays, creating summaries in Latin of previously studied texts is recommended, starting with support and then gradually moving to doing it independently. Summarizing doesn’t mean copying, and it shouldn’t be viewed that way. Imitating Cicero requires Cicero’s talent, and without that, attempts at imitation might come off as awkward and forced. Even Caesar's style is complex enough that it can't be simply taught or learned. However, many excerpts from Caesar can be memorized—starting with short sentences, then progressing to longer phrases, and eventually entire chapters. This practice has proven useful over time.
CHAPTER VII
Further Specification of Teaching Methods
286. The more precise determination of the theory of instruction depends on the nature of particular subjects of instruction, on the individuality of the pupil, and on the external conditions of ethical life.
286. The more accurate understanding of the teaching theory relies on the specific subjects being taught, the uniqueness of each student, and the outside factors related to ethical living.
287. Where the goal to be reached is technical knowledge and multiformity of scholarship, each branch of study asserts its claims to thoroughness without regard to the rest. Such is the attitude of the state, which requires many men with special training, together constituting an efficient whole. Hence it disseminates knowledge and establishes institutions of learning, without inquiring, save with reference to future official appointments, who the individuals are that avail themselves of the offered opportunities.
287. When the aim is to achieve technical knowledge and diverse scholarship, each field of study demands its own level of depth without considering others. This mirrors the government's approach, which needs many people with specific skills to form an effective team. As a result, it spreads knowledge and sets up educational institutions without asking, apart from future job placements, who the individuals are that take advantage of the available opportunities.
288. The family, on the other hand, interested as it is in the individual, must take the pedagogical point of view, according to which every human being is to realize the best he is capable of. It is essential that families should grasp this distinction, and accordingly concern themselves, not with greatness of particular[290] achievements, but with the totality of culture possible for the individual.
288. The family, while being interested in the individual, needs to adopt a teaching mindset, where every person should strive to reach their full potential. It's vital for families to understand this difference and focus not on the greatness of specific[290] accomplishments, but on the overall cultural development possible for the individual.
289. Closely connected with the foregoing is the difference between interest and skill. Skill of various sorts can be obtained by force; but it is of no value to general culture when the corresponding interest is lacking.
289. Related to the above is the difference between interest and skill. Different types of skills can be acquired through force; however, they hold no value for overall growth if the corresponding interest is missing.
Insistence on this distinction is a sufficient answer to much uncalled-for criticism and much unwarrantable assumption of superior knowledge concerning the results of early stages of instruction. These results, it is charged, are inadequate; if this or that had been converted earlier into ability to do, greater progress would have been made. But when interest has not been aroused, and cannot be aroused, compulsory acquisition of skill is not only worthless, leading as it does to soulless mechanical activity, but positively injurious, because it vitiates the pupil’s mental attitude and disposition.
Insisting on this distinction effectively addresses a lot of unnecessary criticism and unfounded assumptions of superior knowledge about the outcomes of early instruction stages. Critics claim these results are insufficient; they argue that if certain skills had been developed earlier, we would have seen greater progress. However, when interest isn't sparked and can't be sparked, forcing the acquisition of skills is not just pointless, leading to lifeless mechanical tasks, but actually harmful, as it corrupts the student’s mental attitude and outlook.
290. Whether the pupil’s individuality will endure without injury the pressure which drill in skilful performance would necessitate, is a question which at times cannot be decided except by trial. Reading, arithmetic, grammar, are familiar instances.
290. Whether a student's unique personality can withstand the pressure that comes from the demands of training for skilled performance is a question that can sometimes only be answered through experience. Reading, math, and grammar are common examples.
291. The more perfect the instruction, the greater the opportunity it affords for comparing the excellences and faults of the individuals receiving it simultaneously. This point is of importance both to the[291] continuation of instruction and to training; to the latter, because the teacher’s insight into the causes of the faults which training has to combat is deepened.
291. The better the instruction, the more opportunities it provides to compare the strengths and weaknesses of the individuals receiving it at the same time. This is important for both the[291] continuation of instruction and training; for the latter, because the teacher’s understanding of the reasons behind the issues that training needs to address becomes richer.
292. The ethical life may attach itself to views embracing the universe; it may, on the contrary, move within a very narrow range of thought. Now while it is true that external circumstances will usually set limits to instruction, its scope should nevertheless not be narrower, but in every way wider than the realm of necessary, everyday prudence. Otherwise the individual will always be in danger of exaggerating his own importance and that of persons closely related to him.
292. The ethical life can connect to perspectives that encompass the universe, or it can be confined to a very limited way of thinking. While it's true that outside circumstances often place limits on what can be taught, the scope of ethical understanding should always be broader, not narrower, than just basic, everyday common sense. Otherwise, a person risks overestimating their own importance and that of those around them.
293. It is more difficult, as a rule, to extend the mental horizon in the direction of the past, than within the present. In teaching girls, therefore, and children from the lower classes, greater prominence is given to geography and whatever can be grouped about it than to historical studies. Again, in cases where a shortening of the course of study becomes necessary, it becomes well-nigh necessary to take account of the difference in question. But, conversely, where the scope of instruction is to be wide, the historical side, because more difficult, must receive increased attention.
293. It's generally harder to expand our understanding of the past than to focus on the present. Because of this, when teaching girls and children from lower-income backgrounds, more emphasis is placed on geography and related subjects than on history. Similarly, if the curriculum needs to be shortened, this difference must be considered. However, when the goal is to provide a broad education, more focus should be given to history since it's more challenging.
SECTION II
THE FAULTS OF STUDENTS AND THEIR TREATMENT
CHAPTER I
General Differentiation
294. Some faults are inherent; they are a part of the pupil’s individuality. Others have sprung up in the course of time; and of these, again, some have been influenced by the factor of individuality more than others. Faults that the pupil commits are left out of account for the present. With increasing years some of the inherent faults grow, others diminish. For there is a continual change of relation between that which man derives from experience,—between those ideas which rise spontaneously, and those masses of ideas which approach stability. There is, besides, an ever varying succession of diverse reproductions. All this change is pervaded throughout by the consciousness of one’s own body (the original base of support for self-consciousness) with respect not merely to its needs, but also to its powers of motion and fitness for use.[293] Again, the apprehension of the similar is being multiplied; the ideas of things approximate to general concepts. In addition, the process of judging is shaping more and more the material presented; accordingly the manner in which the individual analyzes and puts in order his knowledge becomes gradually determined. On the one hand there is a growing confidence of affirmation; on the other, questions remain, the answer to which is given over to the future. In part they become transformed into longing expectation.
294. Some flaws are part of who a student is; they are tied to their individuality. Others develop over time, and among these, some are influenced more by individual traits than others. The mistakes the student makes won't be considered for now. As the student gets older, some inherent flaws may increase while others may decrease. This is due to the ongoing changes in how people relate to their experiences—between ideas that come to mind naturally and those that stabilize over time. Additionally, there is a constant variety of different interpretations. All this change is rooted in the awareness of one’s own body (the original foundation for self-awareness), taking into account not just its needs but also its abilities to move and function effectively. [293] Furthermore, the understanding of similarities is expanding; ideas about things are getting closer to broader concepts. Additionally, the process of judgment increasingly shapes the material presented, which in turn influences how individuals analyze and organize their knowledge over time. On one hand, there’s growing confidence in affirmations; on the other hand, questions persist, with answers left for the future. Some of these questions transform into a sense of eager anticipation.
Upon all that has been enumerated, the physical organization of the individual exerts retarding and furthering influences. The effect of the body is seen in a certain physiological resistance to psychical processes, and in strong physical impulses far more complex, no doubt, than ordinary experience shows.
Upon all that has been listed, a person’s physical makeup has both slowing and boosting effects. The body’s influence is evident in a specific physiological resistance to mental processes, and in powerful physical drives that are likely much more complex than everyday experience reveals.
295. Very frequently the fact forces itself upon us, that persons who have passed through many vicissitudes of fortune can nevertheless be recognized by individual traits that were already noticeable in youth. Here a certain uniformity reveals itself in the characteristic way and manner in which such persons involuntarily seize upon and work up various impressions. In order to arrive at a just estimate of his pupils, the teacher should observe this permanent element as early as possible.
295. It often strikes us that people who have been through many ups and downs in life can still be recognized by distinct traits they showed in their youth. There’s a consistency in how these individuals instinctively interpret and process different experiences. To accurately assess his students, the teacher should take note of this lasting element as early as possible.
Some always know the right moment and whither it calls them; they always perform the nearest duty,[294] and have their stock of knowledge uniformly well in hand. Others bury themselves in thought, and give themselves up to hopes and fears, to plans and projects: they live in the past or in the future, resent being disturbed by the present, and require time and effort to bring themselves back to it. Between the former and the latter are found others, who do indeed note the given and the present, not, however, to take it as it appears, but rather to look beyond, for the purpose of spying what lies concealed behind, or in order to move, displace, interfere, perhaps to distort, ridicule, and caricature. With many the tendency described is merely superficial. They play and tease—a common manifestation of youthful animal spirits. Now the question arises: how much seriousness lies back of the playfulness. How much depth beneath the animated surface? Here temperament enters as a factor. The play of one with a sanguine temperament comes to an end; but where sourness of temper is habitual, there danger threatens, if, as commonly happens, sport turns to earnest. Self-assertion plays a part also, manifesting itself in various ways. It assumes one form in him who has confidence in his strength, physical or mental, and another form in those who know their weakness—with or without the mental reservation as to the future employment of artifice or cunning, and so also with more or less acknowledgment of the superior power[295] or authority. Passionate playing, on the whole, implies little seriousness; but may well indicate sensitiveness and a propensity to freedom from restraint. Prudence in sport is a sign of ability to take the opponent’s point of view, and to foresee his plans. Love of play is far more welcome to the teacher than indolence, or languid curiosity, or gloomy seriousness; it is one of the minor faults, if now and then work is forgotten over a game and time wasted; the situation is more grave, sometimes very grave indeed, where extravagance, or greed of gain, or secretiveness, or bad company is involved. In such cases decided interference on the part of the teacher is necessary.
Some people always know the right moment and where it leads them; they consistently handle the immediate responsibilities, [294] and have their knowledge well organized. Others get lost in their thoughts, consumed by hopes and fears, planning and scheming: they dwell in the past or the future, resenting interruptions from the present, and need time and effort to pull themselves back to it. In between the two groups are those who do notice the immediate and existing circumstances, but not to accept them as they are; instead, they look deeper, trying to uncover what lies hidden, or to manipulate, disrupt, distort, mock, or caricature. For many, this tendency is only superficial. They play and tease—a typical sign of youthful energy. Now the question comes up: how much seriousness lies behind the playfulness? How much depth is there beneath the lively exterior? This is where temperament becomes a factor. The play of someone with a cheerful disposition eventually concludes; however, if someone tends to be sour, there’s a risk of trouble, especially if lightheartedness turns serious, as often happens. Self-assertion also plays a role, showing itself in different ways. It takes one form for those self-assured in their physical or mental strength, and another form for those aware of their weaknesses—whether they think about using cunning or finesse in the future or acknowledge a stronger power[295] or authority. Passionate play, overall, shows little seriousness; yet it may indicate sensitivity and a desire for freedom. Thoughtfulness in play suggests an ability to understand the opponent’s perspective and to anticipate their strategies. A love for play is far more appreciated by a teacher than laziness, lukewarm curiosity, or oppressive seriousness; it is one of the minor faults if occasionally work is neglected for a game and time gets wasted; the situation becomes more serious, sometimes quite severe, when it involves extravagance, greed, secrecy, or bad company. In such cases, strong intervention from the teacher becomes necessary.
296. Since courage and rationality grow with increasing years, the faults of mere weakness leave room for hope of improvement, although there is need of an invigorating mode of life, invigorating physically and mentally, and of counsel and reproof in particular instances. Under continued watchful care weak natures improve much more than at first thought would seem to be likely.
296. As people get older, their courage and reasoning tend to grow, making the flaws of simple weakness feel hopeful for improvement. However, it requires an energizing lifestyle that boosts both physical and mental well-being, along with advice and constructive criticism when needed. With consistent attention, weaker individuals often improve much more than we would initially expect.
297. Unsteadiness, continual restlessness, where they accompany good health without being the result of external stimulation, are doubtful indications. Here it will be well to look to the sequence of thoughts. Where, in spite of variableness in general, thoughts are sound and well connected, this restlessness is not a serious matter. The case is worse when the opposite[296] is true, especially when the vascular system appears very irritable, and dreamlike reveries occur. Here the danger of insanity is seen lurking in the distance.
297. Unsteadiness and constant restlessness, when they come with good health and aren’t caused by outside factors, are questionable signs. It's important to pay attention to the flow of thoughts. If, despite overall variability, thoughts are clear and well-connected, this restlessness isn't a major concern. However, it's a bigger problem when the opposite is true, especially when the vascular system seems very sensitive, and daydream-like states happen. This is where the risk of insanity starts to become evident. [296]
The appropriate treatment for such pupils consists in holding them strictly to definite tasks, especially to those occupations that compel a close observation of the external world, and in exacting the performance of the work assigned, without failing to encourage whatever is undertaken from choice.
The right approach for these students is to keep them focused on specific tasks, particularly those activities that require careful observation of the outside world, and to ensure that they complete the assigned work, while also encouraging any projects they choose to pursue on their own.
298. Sensual impulses and violence of temper are apt to go from bad to worse as pupils grow older. Against these, careful supervision, earnest censure, and the whole rigor of moral principles must be brought to bear. Momentary ebullitions of passion, however, unless persistently obstinate attempts are made to justify them, need to be handled gently, that is, as evils calling for precaution and vigilance.
298. Sensual impulses and temper issues often get worse as students get older. To combat these, we need to apply careful supervision, serious criticism, and strict moral standards. However, brief outbursts of emotion, unless someone consistently tries to justify them, should be managed with care, treated as problems that require caution and attention.
299. The faults hitherto noted lie for the most part on the surface. Others have to be studied as occasion offers in instruction.
299. The mistakes mentioned so far are mostly obvious. Others need to be examined as opportunities arise in teaching.
There are minds so dull that even the attempt merely to secure connection with definite portions of such thoughts as they have does not succeed. Easy questions intended to raise their ideas into consciousness only increase the resistance to be overcome. They are seized with embarrassment from which they seek to escape, sometimes by a simple,[297] “I don’t know,” sometimes by the first wrong answer that comes to hand. Mental activity has to be enforced, yet remains feeble at best, and it is only in after years, under pressure of necessity, that they acquire some facility for a limited sphere. Others, whom one would be inclined to call contracted rather than generally limited, because by them reproduction is performed successfully but within a narrow compass, exhibit a lively endeavor to learn, but they learn mechanically, and what cannot be learned in that way they apprehend incorrectly. These undertake, nevertheless, to form and express judgments, but their judgments turn out to be erroneous; hence they become first discouraged and then obstinate. Again, there are those whose ideas cannot be dislodged, and still others whose ideas cannot be brought to a halt. These two classes call for a more detailed consideration.
There are some minds so dull that even trying to connect with specific parts of their thoughts fails. Simple questions meant to bring their ideas to the surface only make them more resistant. They become embarrassed and try to escape, sometimes with a straightforward, [297] “I don’t know,” or by offering the first wrong answer that pops into their heads. Mental engagement has to be forced but remains weak at best, and it’s only later in life, when pushed by necessity, that they gain some skill in a limited area. Others, who might be seen as narrow-minded rather than generally limited, can reproduce knowledge successfully but only within a small range. They show a strong desire to learn but do so mechanically, and anything they can’t learn that way they misunderstand. Despite this, they attempt to form and express opinions, but their judgments often end up being incorrect; consequently, they become discouraged and then stubborn. Additionally, there are those whose ideas cannot be shaken off, while others can’t stop their thoughts from racing. These two groups require a closer look.
300. Among the various masses of ideas (29) some necessarily acquire permanent predominance, others come and go. But if this relation reaches full development and becomes fixed too early, the controlling ideas no longer admit of being arrested to the extent necessary for the reception of the new material offered by instruction. This fact explains the experience that clever boys, notwithstanding the best intentions to receive instruction, yet frequently appear very unreceptive, and that a certain rigidity of mind, which in later manhood would not occasion surprise, seems[298] to have strayed, as it were, into boyhood. No one should allow himself to be betrayed into encouraging such narrowness by commendatory terms such as pertain to strength and energy; just as little, however, should clumsy teaching and its sequel, listless learning, be left out of account, as having no bearing on this state of affairs.
300. Among the various groups of ideas (29), some naturally become dominant while others fade in and out. However, if this relationship develops fully and becomes established too soon, the dominant ideas will no longer be able to adapt enough to accommodate the new information being presented through learning. This explains why bright boys, despite their best intentions to learn, often seem very unresponsive, and why a certain rigidity of thought, which would not surprise us in adulthood, seems to have somehow surfaced during childhood. No one should fall into the trap of encouraging such narrow thinking by using praise associated with strength and energy; equally, we shouldn't ignore clumsy teaching and the resulting disengagement from learning, as they have a significant impact on the situation.
For, rather may it be assumed that the fault mentioned might have been largely forestalled by very early instruction of all kinds, provided such instruction had been combined with a variety of attractive rather than of too difficult tasks. Where, on the other hand, mental nervousness has once taken root, it cannot be eradicated by all the art and painstaking effort of a multitude of teachers. When the questions of a child, six years old let us say, give rise to the apprehension that they proceed from a too contracted mental horizon, there should be no delay about resorting to manifold forms of stimulation, especially in the way of widening the pupil’s experience to the greatest practicable extent.
For it can be assumed that the issue mentioned could have been mostly prevented by early instruction of all kinds, especially if that instruction included a variety of engaging rather than overly challenging tasks. However, once mental nervousness has taken root, it cannot be eliminated by the skill and dedicated efforts of many teachers. When a six-year-old child's questions indicate that they might have a limited understanding, there should be no hesitation in using various forms of stimulation, particularly to broaden the student’s experiences as much as possible.
301. On the other hand, it is not rare to find boys, and even young men, in whose minds no one thought-mass attains to any very prominent activity. Such boys are always open to every impression and ready for any change of thought. They are wont to chat pleasantly, and to form hasty attachments. Here belong those who learn easily and forget as quickly.
301. On the other hand, it’s not uncommon to find boys and even young men who don’t have much mental engagement with popular opinions. These boys are always open to new ideas and ready for any change in thinking. They tend to chat easily and form quick attachments. This group includes those who learn quickly but forget just as fast.
This defect, too, when once confirmed, resists all skill and good intentions; strength of purpose, from the very nature of the case, is out of the question. The situation varies in gravity, however, according to the influences of the earliest environment. If these proved distracting, the fault mentioned assumes alarming proportions even in minds otherwise well endowed. But where some form or other of necessary respect has been steadily at work, the youth will raise himself to a higher plane than the boy gave promise of doing. Least of all, however, can the teacher allow himself to be betrayed into hoping for a future development of talent by superficial alertness, combined, it may be, with droll fancies, bold pranks, and the like. Talent reveals itself through persistent endeavor, sustained even under circumstances little favorable to it, and not until such endeavor clearly manifests itself is the thought of giving it support to be entertained.
This flaw, once recognized, resists all skill and good intentions; determination, by the very nature of the issue, is not possible. However, the seriousness of the situation varies depending on the influences of the initial environment. If these influences were distracting, the mentioned flaw takes on alarming proportions, even in individuals who are otherwise quite capable. But where some form of necessary respect has been consistently applied, the individual will elevate themselves to a higher level than what the child seemed capable of achieving. Above all, the teacher must not be misled into hoping for future talent development based on superficial attentiveness, which might be accompanied by amusing antics or bold pranks. True talent emerges through continuous effort, even when conditions are less than ideal, and only when such effort is clearly evident should one consider providing support.
The two faults under discussion may indeed come to light only in the course of time; nevertheless, they are inherent faults, and can be mitigated, to be sure, but not completely cured.
The two faults being discussed might only become apparent over time; however, they are intrinsic faults and can certainly be eased, but not completely fixed.
302. Far easier to deal with are the erratic movements of energetic characters capable of ardent enthusiasm. The mere thoroughness and many-sidedness of good instruction, which emphasizes and aims to effect rational connection and balance of mind, obviously supply the corrective.
302. It's much easier to handle the unpredictable actions of lively characters who are full of enthusiasm. The thoroughness and variety of solid teaching, which focuses on creating rational connections and a balanced mindset, clearly provide the needed guidance.
303. Originally it would have been easier to have prevented those faults which are due to the mismanagement or to the omission of early government, instruction, or training. But with time, the difficulties of a cure grow in a very rapid ratio. In general, it is well to note that the teacher has every reason to congratulate himself, if, after early neglect, there appear under improved treatment some belated traces of those questions which belong to the sixth or seventh year of childhood (213).
303. Initially, it would have been easier to fix those issues caused by poor management or the lack of early government, instruction, or training. However, over time, the challenges of finding a solution increase significantly. Overall, it's important for teachers to be proud if, after early neglect, they notice signs of progress under better care for topics that typically arise in the sixth or seventh year of childhood (213).
CHAPTER II
The Causes of Moral Weakness
304. Under this head five main points come up for consideration:—
304. Under this section, five main points need to be discussed:—
- (1) Tendencies of the child’s will impulses.
- (2) Ethical judgments and their absence.
- (3) Formation of maxims.
- (4) Organization of maxims.
- (5) Application of organized maxims.
305. (1) Where training has not provided for occupation and for the distribution of time, we must always expect to encounter an activity which has no aim, and which forgets its own purposes. From such a state of affairs arise a craving for liberty averse to all control, and, where several pupils are grouped together, contention, either for the possession of something or for the sake of showing off. Each wants to be first; recognition of the just equality of all is deliberately refused. Mutual ill-will intrenches itself and stealthily waits for an opportunity to break forth. Here is the fountain head of many passions; even those which spring from excessive sensuousness must be classed under this first head, in so far as they are promoted[302] by lack of regulated activity. The havoc caused by passions is a pervading element in the discussion of all of the remaining topics.
305. (1) When training doesn’t prepare for work and time management, we can always expect to see activities that lack a purpose and forget their own goals. This leads to a desire for freedom that resists any form of control and, when several students are together, competition for ownership of something or to show off. Everyone wants to be the best; the acknowledgment of equal standing for all is intentionally ignored. Resentment builds and quietly waits for a chance to erupt. This is the source of many strong feelings; even those driven by excessive sensuality must fit under this first category, as they are promoted[302] by a lack of structured activity. The chaos caused by these strong feelings is a common theme in the discussion of all other topics.
306. (2) It is true that education usually counteracts the tendency to indolence and to unruliness, not only by the use of the spur and the bridle, but also through guidance in the direction of the proprieties; giving rise to the thought “what will others say,” it shows existing conditions as mirrored in the minds of others. But when these others are compelled to remain silent, or when the pupil is sure of their partiality, or is exposed to their errors of judgment, the effect is to vitiate rather than to arouse the ethical judgment.
306. (2) It's true that education usually helps counteract laziness and unruliness, not just through discipline but also by guiding people toward what’s appropriate. It encourages the thought "What will others think?" by reflecting existing conditions as seen from others' perspectives. However, when these others are forced to stay quiet, or when the student knows they are biased, or is faced with their poor judgments, it tends to weaken rather than strengthen moral judgment.
Nevertheless, calling attention to the judgment of others, and not merely of particular individuals, is very much better than waiting for the spontaneous awakening of ethical judgment. In most cases the waiting would be in vain. Matters of ethical import are either too close to the ordinary human being, and so, of course, to the boy left entirely to himself, or they are too remote, i.e., either they have not as yet passed outside the pale of affection or aversion, or else they are already fading from the field of vision. In neither case can an ethical judgment be formed with success. At any rate, it will vanish before it can produce an effect.
However, drawing attention to the judgment of others, rather than just specific individuals, is much better than simply waiting for a natural development of moral judgment. In most cases, that waiting would be pointless. Ethical issues are either too close to everyday life for people, including a boy left entirely on his own, or they're too far removed; that is, either they haven't yet gone beyond the realm of feelings like love or hate, or they're already disappearing from view. In both scenarios, forming a solid moral judgment is unlikely to succeed. Ultimately, it will fade away before it can make any impact.
In order to reach those ethical judgments on which morality rests, the child must see will images, see them without the stirring of his own will impulse.
To make those ethical judgments that morality depends on, the child needs to perceive images of will, and do so without the influence of his own willful desires.
These will images, moreover, must embrace relations, the single members of which are themselves wills, and the beholder is to keep such members equally in sight, until the estimate of value rises spontaneously within him. But such contemplation implies a keenness and calmness of apprehension not to be looked for in unruly children. Hence it may be inferred how necessary training is—serious, not to say severe, training. Unruliness must have been tamed and regular attention secured. The preliminary condition fulfilled, it is further essential that there shall be no lack of sufficiently distinct presentations of the foregoing will images. And even then the ethical judgment often matures so tardily that it has to be pronounced in the name of other persons—persons higher in authority.
These images must convey relationships, where each part represents a will, and the observer should pay attention to these parts until their sense of value naturally develops. However, such reflection requires a level of focus and calm that is often absent in unruly children. This highlights the importance of training—serious, if not strict, training. Unruliness must be managed, and consistent attention should be established. Once this initial condition is met, it’s also crucial to have clearly defined presentations of these will images. Even then, ethical judgment can develop so slowly that it often needs to be made on behalf of others—those with higher authority.
307. In this connection the instances of one-sidedness of ethical judgment must not be overlooked, such as occur when one of the practical ideas stands out more prominently than another, or when that which is outwardly proper rises above them all.
307. In this regard, we must not ignore the cases of bias in ethical judgment, like when one practical idea is more noticeable than others, or when something that appears outwardly correct is prioritized over everything else.
308. (3) All desires persistently operative and productive of fluctuating states of emotional excitement, therefore rightly called passions, lead to experiential knowledge of the beneficial and the injurious. The beneficial suggests frequent repetition in the future, the injurious continued avoidance. Accordingly rules of life take shape, and the resolution always to observe them is made. In other words, maxims result.
308. (3) All desires that constantly drive us and create varying emotions, which we rightly refer to as passions, lead to learning about what is good and what is harmful. The good encourages us to pursue it more often, while the harmful teaches us to stay away. As a result, we develop guiding principles for our lives and commit to following them. In other words, we create maxims.
From simple resolution to actual observance is still, to be sure, a far cry. But the claim for the universal validity of the rule, so that the individual may regard it as applicable to others as well as to himself, enters the mind far more directly by way of desires which point forward to similar cases in the future, than it does under the guidance of ethical judgments whose universal element is abstracted from given single instances with difficulty. In fact, this difficulty is often so great that the ethical judgment itself may be missed in the search for the universal.
From just deciding to actually following through is still a long way off. However, the idea of the rule being universally valid—so that a person sees it as relevant to others as much as to themselves—hits home much more easily through desires that look ahead to similar situations in the future than it does through ethical judgments that struggle to extract the universal from specific instances. In reality, this struggle is often so challenging that the ethical judgment itself can be overlooked in the pursuit of the universal.
309. Now, the promptness and loyalty of obedience to the sum total of duties, once recognized as such and fixed through the maxims adopted, are passed upon by the moral judgment. Correct moral judgment, therefore, presupposes true insight into the value of will, which insight again can be obtained only through the ethical estimate as a whole. But in view of the circumstances pointed out a moment ago, we must expect to come upon maxims that are false or at least inaccurate. Under the latter head fall points of honor, social obligations, fear of ridicule.
309. Now, the speed and loyalty in following all duties, once acknowledged and established through accepted principles, are evaluated by moral judgment. Accurate moral judgment, therefore, requires a genuine understanding of the value of intention, which can only be gained through a comprehensive ethical assessment. However, considering the circumstances mentioned earlier, we should anticipate encountering principles that are misleading or at least not entirely correct. This includes matters of honor, social responsibilities, and the fear of being mocked.
310. (4) Maxims ought to form a unit, but in youth they are not fully determined even singly, much less are they closely united into a definite whole. The proviso of exceptions still clings to them, so also that of future tests through experience.
310. (4) Maxims should come together as a cohesive unit, but in youth, they aren't completely established even individually, let alone closely connected into a clear whole. The idea of exceptions still applies to them, as does the need for future validation through experience.
The maxims arising out of the desires and pleasures[305] can never be brought into perfect union with those springing from ethical judgments. Accordingly the wrong subordination takes place, or, at all events, a contamination of the latter by the former.
The principles that come from our desires and pleasures[305] can never fully align with those that come from ethical judgments. As a result, there is often a mismatch in priority, or at the very least, ethical judgments get influenced by desires.
311. (5) In the application of maxims more or less unified, the volition of the moment is apt to prove stronger than the previous resolves. Hence, man becomes only too prone to condone and fall in with discriminations between theory and practice. The consequence is a certain moral empiricism, which, if nothing else will do to justify its disregard of moral law, falls back upon pious feelings. Plans of action are formed without regard to maxims, but with the apparent compensation of another kind of morally regular life.
311. (5) When applying consistent principles, the desire of the moment often ends up being stronger than prior decisions. As a result, people tend to easily accept and align with the differences between theory and practice. This leads to a kind of moral reasoning based more on experience, which, if nothing else can justify ignoring moral laws, relies on good intentions. Action plans are created without considering those principles, but seemingly balanced by another type of morally structured life.
Such contempt of moral judgment gains ground and spreads ruin all the more, the farther the ethical judgments on which morality must rest fall short of the clearness that ought to mark them, and the cruder the pupil’s knowledge is of the antithesis between them and maxims of utility or pleasure.
Such disregard for moral judgment grows stronger and causes more damage, especially when the ethical judgments that morality relies on lack the clarity they should have, and when the student's understanding of the difference between them and principles of utility or pleasure is more basic.
312. The natural aid to the formation and union of maxims is the system of practical philosophy itself. But the teaching of it involves difficulties. One of them is that such marked differences occur among young men in the relation of systematic exposition to the grade of culture which they have attained. For observations of this nature, religious instruction prior[306] to confirmation provides an early opportunity. How such instruction is to be given, is, of course, by no means immaterial, but, after all, the moral sentiments, which it gathers together and strengthens, must, in substance, already exist.
312. The natural support for creating and connecting principles is the practical philosophy system itself. However, teaching it comes with challenges. One issue is the significant differences among young men regarding how systematic explanations relate to the level of education they have achieved. Observations of this kind suggest that religious instruction before confirmation offers an early opportunity. The method of delivering this instruction is definitely important, but ultimately, the moral values it consolidates and reinforces must already be present in essence.
Again, if the end sought were more strictly scientific form for the moral sentiments, there would have to be ground for presuming that the student is able to appreciate that form and has acquired skill in the use of logical methods. The study of logic, together with appropriate exercises, would obviously be a necessary preliminary step. Prerequisites like these need to be borne in mind, especially in the case of lower schools and all other institutions that do not, as a rule, lead to the university.
Again, if the goal is to present moral sentiments in a more scientific way, we would need to assume that the student can understand that format and has developed skills in using logical methods. Learning logic, along with suitable exercises, would clearly be an essential first step. These requirements should be considered, particularly in lower schools and other institutions that typically do not prepare students for university.
313. Erroneous systems of ethics, moreover, might occasion the adoption of very absurd measures, concerning which, on account of the importance of the subject, at least something has to be said. Everything would be turned upside down, if, instead of bringing together and uniting maxims under the concept virtue, the attempt were made to deduce from some one formula of the categorical imperative a multiplicity of maxims and from these, rather than from the original ethical judgments, the estimates of will values, the final undertaking being, perhaps, to divert the will itself by such operations.
313. Flawed ethical systems can lead to the adoption of very ridiculous measures, which, given how important the topic is, deserve at least some discussion. Everything would be thrown into chaos if, instead of gathering and connecting principles under the idea of virtue, we tried to derive multiple principles from a single formula of the categorical imperative. This would prioritize those derived principles over the original moral judgments, potentially aiming to manipulate the will itself through such processes.
On the contrary, the will must early have been[307] given such direction by government and training, that its lines of tendency will of themselves coincide as nearly as possible with the paths disclosed later, when the pupil is being shown the way through ethical judgments. Those beginnings of evil noted above (305) must not be permitted to appear at all, for their consequences usually prove ineradicable. But even so, it is not certain that a way can be hewn through the errors of others to truer judgments. When, however, both ends have been gained, experience and history and literature must next be called in, in order to show clearly the confusion into which the maxims based upon pleasure and passion plunge human beings. Not until now has the time come for more or less systematic lectures, or for the study of suitable classical writers. Lastly, there will still be need of frequent appeals to moral obedience, and it will be found necessary to reinforce these appeals by reflections of a religious character.
On the contrary, the will must have been directed early on by the government and training so that its natural inclinations align as closely as possible with the paths revealed later when the student is being guided through ethical decisions. The early signs of evil mentioned above must not be allowed to surface at all, as their consequences often become impossible to erase. However, it is still uncertain whether a path can be carved through the mistakes of others to reach more accurate judgments. When both goals have been achieved, experience, history, and literature must then be brought in to clearly illustrate the confusion caused by principles based on pleasure and passion. Only now is the time right for more or less systematic lectures or for studying appropriate classical authors. Finally, there will still be a need for frequent calls to moral obedience, and it may be necessary to strengthen these calls with reflections of a religious nature.
CHAPTER III
Training Effects
- Training prevents passions in that it:—
- (1) satisfies needs,
- (2) avoids opportunities for violent desires,
- (3) provides employment,
- (4) accustoms to order,
- (5) demands reflection and responsibility.
- Training influences the emotions in that it:—
- (1) checks violent outbreaks,
- (2) creates other emotions,
- (3) and supplements self-control.
- Training impresses the courtesies of life (counteracts bad
manners), consequently:—
- (1) the deportment of individuals is made approximately uniform;
- (2) the number of possible points of social contact becomes much greater than where strife and contention rule;
- (3) while the development of one or the other individual is checked, the more important energies are not stifled, provided excess of severity be avoided.[309]
- Training makes cautions, for:—
- (1) It restricts foolhardiness,
- (2) It warns against dangers,
- (3) It punishes in order to make wiser,
- (4) It observes and accustoms the human being to the thought of being observed.
315. Looked at as a whole, these obvious and familiar effects of training show at once that, generally speaking, its power to lessen evil is very great, and that it is capable of effectively acting upon the interrelations of various masses of ideas. But they suggest also the presence of danger. Training, by driving evil from the surface, may give rise to clandestine deeds.
315. When looking at the bigger picture, these clear and well-known effects of training demonstrate that, overall, its ability to reduce negative outcomes is significant, and it can effectively influence the connections between different groups of ideas. However, they also hint at potential risks. Training, by pushing negativity out of sight, might lead to hidden misdeeds.
316. When this happens, the relations between teacher and pupils grow increasingly abnormal, since secret practices become general and concerted, and the pupils assume a studied behavior in the presence of the teacher.
316. When this happens, the relationships between teachers and students become increasingly awkward, as secret practices become widespread and coordinated, and the students adopt a calculated behavior when interacting with the teacher.
The consequences are well known:—Inexorable severity in dealing with concealed offences when discovered; great leniency in the case of open transgressions; recourse to the machinery of supervision, often even to secret watching, in order that the system of concealment may not get the better of education.
The consequences are well known:—Unyielding strictness when dealing with hidden offenses once they come to light; significant leniency for open violations; reliance on monitoring systems, often even secret observation, to ensure that the system of concealment doesn't overshadow education.
Such difficulties, however, only make it more intensely necessary that the foundation of education be laid during the earliest years, when supervision is still easy, and the heart is reached by formative influences with greater certainty than ever afterward, and that, if possible, families should not for any length of time lose sight of their own members.
Such challenges, however, make it even more crucial that the groundwork for education is established in the early years, when oversight is simpler, and emotional influences can shape a person's character more effectively than at any later stage. Additionally, families should ideally keep close contact with their own members and not lose sight of them for long periods.
Ethical and moral judgments can be simulated; the finest maxims and principles may be learned by rote; piety may be put on as a cloak. Unmask the hypocrite, however, and turn him out, and, forthwith, he plays his game over again elsewhere. Nothing remains but recourse to severity which deters, and constant occupation under close supervision in another quarter, in order that he may get away from the hiding places of his misdeeds. Sometimes banishment is capable of bringing about improvement.
Ethical and moral judgments can be faked; the best maxims and principles can be memorized; piety can be worn like a mask. Expose the hypocrite, though, and kick him out, and immediately he’ll just play his game somewhere else. All that’s left is to resort to strict measures that deter, and to keep him busy under close supervision in another place, so he can't slip back into his old ways. Sometimes banishment can lead to improvement.
318. The will is most directly tractable in social relations, where it appears as common will. In infancy, the child, wholly devoted to his mother, is manageable through her; at a later period training is surest of success when it promotes attachments among the young and carefully fosters the seeds of goodness. The social ideas, purified by teaching, must gradually be added.
318. The will is most easily influenced in social relationships, where it shows up as a shared will. In early childhood, a child, completely devoted to their mother, can be guided through her; as time goes on, education is most effective when it encourages connections among young people and carefully nurtures the seeds of kindness. The social concepts, refined through teaching, must be gradually introduced.
When a kind of authority is granted to some older and tried pupils over those younger and less mature in judgment, the former become responsible; but the latter are not on that account relieved of all reflection on their own part, nor are they obliged to submit to every, though plainly unreasonable, demand of the former.
When some older and more experienced students are given authority over younger and less experienced ones, the older students become responsible. However, the younger ones aren't off the hook for thinking for themselves, nor are they required to comply with every unreasonable demand from the older students.
CHAPTER IV
Special Issues
320. First of all it is necessary to distinguish between those faults which the pupil commits and those which he has. Not all faults one commits are direct manifestations of those he possesses; but those which are committed repeatedly may grow permanent. This truth must be made clear, and must be impressed upon the mind of the pupil to the full extent of his powers of comprehension.
320. First of all, it’s important to differentiate between the mistakes a student makes and those that are part of their character. Not every mistake someone makes directly shows their true nature; however, mistakes that happen repeatedly can become a permanent part of them. This truth needs to be made clear and should be instilled in the student’s mind as much as they are able to understand.
321. In the case of false steps caused from without by unnoticed pitfalls, or made in spite of a firm resolve to the contrary, the pupil is himself usually frightened by what he has done. If so, all depends on the gravity of his offence as compared with the degree of his horror.
321. When someone makes mistakes because of hidden traps outside their control, or despite a strong determination not to, they often feel scared about their actions. In that case, everything hinges on how serious their mistake is compared to how bad they feel about it.
There is a host of minor faults, blunders, and even acts resulting in damage, which tax the patience of the teacher severely; but it would imply a mistaken conception of the difficulty of moral education, if he should repel the frankness of his pupils by harsh treatment of such offence. Frankness is too essential a factor to be sacrificed; once gone it will hardly ever wholly return.
There are numerous small mistakes, errors, and even actions that lead to problems, which really test a teacher’s patience; however, it would be a misunderstanding of the challenges of moral education if the teacher were to discourage the honesty of his students with harsh reactions to these offenses. Honesty is too important to give up; once it's lost, it’s unlikely to come back completely.
322. But the first lie uttered with evil intent, the first act of theft, and similar actions positively detrimental to morality or health, have to be dealt with severely, and always in such a way that the pupil who thought he was permitting himself a slight fault, is made to experience most thoroughly both fear and censure.
322. But the first lie told with bad intentions, the first act of stealing, and similar actions that are clearly harmful to morality or health must be dealt with seriously, and always in a way that makes the student who thought they could get away with a minor mistake feel both fear and reprimand very strongly.
323. Serious treatment of a first offence is demanded also where pupils try to see how far they may safely disregard authority and command. It is important, however, not to overestimate the intention of these attempts; important also to exhibit strength, but not anger. Yet there are cases where the teacher must seem to act with some warmth, because the necessary treatment, if combined with coldness, would only intensify bitterness and cause pain an inordinate length of time. But very likely as much feeling as is expedient will show itself upon simply laying aside the assumed coldness.
323. Taking a serious approach to a first offense is essential when students test how far they can safely push back against authority and rules. It's crucial, though, not to overestimate the intentions behind these actions; it's also important to show strength without displaying anger. However, there are situations where a teacher needs to respond with a bit of warmth, as a cold response could just increase resentment and prolong the discomfort. But likely, just enough feeling will come through by dropping the pretense of coldness.
324. On the restoration of perfect order after a period during which government and training were lacking, a large number of faults will disappear of themselves, and accordingly do not require to be combated one by one. Respect for order, and incentives sufficiently strong to regular activity, are the main things.
324. When perfect order is restored after a time without proper government and training, many issues will resolve themselves and won't need to be addressed individually. Maintaining respect for order and providing strong incentives for consistent activity are the key factors.
325. Faults which the pupil seems to possess are often only the borrowed maxims of the society which he hopes to enter. Here it becomes the business of education[314] to set him right, if possible, and to elevate his view of human relations, in order that he may disdain the false appearances he before held in esteem.
325. The flaws that a student appears to have are often just the borrowed beliefs of the society they want to join. It's the role of education[314] to correct these views, if possible, and to elevate their understanding of human relationships, so they can reject the misleading ideals they once valued.
326. Faults which an older pupil actually possesses rarely occur singly. Moreover, they are seldom fully disclosed; their appearance is determined by a prudent regard for circumstances. During the period of education such faults can, indeed, be largely prevented from growing worse, but the radical improvement of those who are secretive from prudence is rarely to be thought of before they have become more prudent still, too proud for concealment, and more susceptible to the true estimate of moral values.
326. Flaws that a more advanced student actually has rarely show up on their own. Plus, they’re usually not completely revealed; their visibility depends on the surrounding circumstances. While those flaws can often be kept from worsening during the education process, true improvement for those who hide their faults out of caution is rarely possible until they become even more careful, too proud to hide, and more open to understanding moral values accurately.
Where older boys and young men are found to possess unused talents, and where instruction can be so arranged as to develop them, there is some prospect of supplying a counterbalance to those habits which have been contracted. But, in general, efforts looking toward a lasting reform are successful only when made at an early age. At all events, where there is much to amend, the feeling of dependence on strict training must be kept alive for a long time.
Where older boys and young men have untapped talents, and where teaching can be organized to help them grow, there's a chance to balance out their existing habits. However, in most cases, efforts aimed at lasting change are only effective when started at a young age. In any case, when there's a lot to correct, the need for strict training must be maintained for a long period.
327. More success is likely to attend the endeavor to correct those faults which are not tolerated within the social class of which the pupil regards himself a member. Two factors determine the proper mode of procedure: the importance of making the pupil acquainted with the worthiest side of his social group,[315] and, on the other hand, the unavoidable necessity of causing him to see its less noble features in case he discovers in it free scope for his inherent faults.
327. More success is likely to come from trying to fix those faults that aren't accepted in the social class the student sees himself as part of. Two things guide the right approach: the need to help the student understand the best aspects of his social group,[315] and, on the other hand, the essential task of helping him recognize its less admirable qualities if he finds it a place to act on his natural flaws.
328. Here the pupil’s capacity for education, as well as the limits of that capacity, are brought home to the teacher. As boys approach manhood, they let birth and external circumstances designate for them that class of society to which they will belong. The class defined, they seek to acquire its form of life, and to get into its main current. On the way thither they accept and take along so much of higher motives, of knowledge and insight, as, on the one hand, instruction offers and training favors, and as, on the other hand, the individuality of each one, which the earliest impressions have further determined, is ready to assimilate. Those are rare exceptions who, through the development of an absorbing interest of some kind, in religion, or science, or art, have become less susceptible to the attractive force of their social class. Their course has been marked out by the instruction which induced the absorption; henceforth they are self-actively engaged in the pursuit of whatever accords with the end in view, and accept only a small part of what is presented to them.
328. Here, the student's ability to learn, along with the limits of that ability, is made clear to the teacher. As young men approach adulthood, they allow their background and external factors to decide which social class they will belong to. Once they identify the class, they try to adopt its way of life and fit into its main stream. Along the way, they take in whatever higher motives, knowledge, and understanding are offered by education and training, as well as what each individual's early experiences have shaped them to accept. There are only a few exceptions—those who, through a strong interest in religion, science, or art, become less influenced by the allure of their social class. Their path is guided by the education that sparked their interest; from that point on, they actively pursue what aligns with their goals and only take in a small portion of what is presented to them.
329. Specific forms of a pupil’s attitude toward society, especially the relative prominence in his mind of state or family relations, will have to receive due[316] consideration in marshalling motives to counteract particular faults. Indeed, the same is true of the appeal to those motives through which it is sought to establish a preponderance of worthier endeavor over moral imperfection in general.
329. Different ways a student feels about society, especially how much importance they place on their relationship with the state or their family, need to be taken into account when addressing specific issues. In fact, the same applies to the efforts made to encourage more positive actions over general moral shortcomings. [316]
SECTION III
COMMENTS ON EDUCATIONAL ORGANIZATION
CHAPTER I
Homeschooling
330. On discovering that his own efforts encounter impediments, the individual teacher might easily come to think that society could do everything, if it only would, and if it possessed the necessary insight. Further reflection, however, reveals the existence of difficulties peculiar both to state and family.
330. When realizing that his own efforts face obstacles, the individual teacher might easily believe that society could accomplish anything, if it only tried and had the right understanding. However, further thinking uncovers challenges that are unique to both the state and the family.
331. The state needs soldiers, farmers, mechanics, officials, etc., and is concerned with their efficiency. Its attitude toward a large number of persons, whose existence as individuals has significance only in a narrow sphere, is, in general, far more that of supervision designed to prevent the harm they might do, than one of direct helpfulness. He who is able to render competent service receives preferment; the weaker has to give way to the stronger; the shortcomings of one are made good by another.
331. The state needs soldiers, farmers, mechanics, officials, and so on, and cares about how effective they are. Its view of a lot of people, whose value as individuals matters only in a limited area, is generally more about supervision aimed at stopping any damage they might cause rather than providing direct support. Those who can provide valuable service get promoted; the less capable have to step aside for the more capable; and one person's weaknesses are compensated for by another's strengths.
332. The state applies its tests to what can be tested, to the outward side of conduct and of knowledge. It does not penetrate to the inner life. Teachers in public schools cannot penetrate much farther; they, too, are more concerned with the sum total of knowledge imparted by them, than with the individual and the way in which he relates his knowledge to himself.
332. The government evaluates what can be measured, focusing on external behavior and knowledge. It doesn't delve into the inner experiences of individuals. Public school teachers also go only so far; they are primarily focused on the total amount of knowledge they provide, rather than on the unique ways each student connects that knowledge to their own lives.
333. To the family, however, no stranger can make up for what one of its members lacks; to the family the inner condition becomes so manifest, and is often felt so keenly, that the merely external does not satisfy. It is obvious, therefore, that moral education will always remain essentially a home task, and that the institutions of the state are to be resorted to for educative purposes only with a view to supplementing the home.
333. To the family, no outsider can replace what one of its members is missing; to the family, the internal state becomes so apparent and is often felt so deeply that the merely external cannot fill the gap. It’s clear, then, that moral education will always fundamentally be a task for the home, and that state institutions should only be used for educational purposes to support the home.
But on closer inspection it is found that family life is very often too busy, too full of care, or too noisy, for that rigor which is undeniably required both for instruction and for morality. Luxury and want alike harbor dangers for youth. Consequently families lean on the state for support more than they ought.
But on closer inspection, it's clear that family life is often too hectic, too filled with worry, or too loud for the discipline that's definitely needed for both education and ethics. Both luxury and poverty pose risks for young people. As a result, families rely on the government for support more than they should.
334. Private institutions as such do not possess the same motive power as either state or family, and are seldom able to make themselves independent of the comparisons to which they are exposed, because of the fact that they are expected in one case to take the place of the state schools, and in another that of the family.
334. Private institutions don't have the same driving force as the state or family, and they often can’t avoid comparisons to these entities. This happens because they are expected, in one scenario, to replace state schools and, in another, to take the place of the family.
Nevertheless, sturdy minds which do not require the emulation obtaining in schools can be advanced more rapidly, and instruction adapted more easily to individual needs, than in public institutions. As for training, moreover, the evils that may spring from environment can be prevented more successfully than is possible in many families.
Nevertheless, strong minds that don't need the imitation found in schools can progress more quickly, and instruction can be tailored more easily to individual needs than in public institutions. Additionally, when it comes to training, the negative effects that may arise from the environment can be prevented more effectively than is often possible in many families.
If the institutions in question could choose from among many teachers and many pupils, they might, under otherwise favorable circumstances, be able to achieve great results. But the fact of a picked set of pupils alone shows how little the whole need of education would be met. Besides, even those that were chosen would bring with them their earliest impressions; they would incline toward the social conditions for which they believe themselves to be destined; the faults of individuality (294 et seq.) would cling to them, unless such faults were recognized before the selection, and were avoided by exclusion.
If the institutions involved could choose from many teachers and students, they might, under the right conditions, achieve great results. However, the fact that there is a selected group of students shows how little the overall need for education would actually be addressed. Additionally, even those chosen would come with their initial experiences; they would be inclined towards the social conditions they think they are meant for; the flaws of individuality (294 et seq.) would stick with them unless those flaws were identified before the selection and eliminated through exclusion.
335. As much as possible, then, education must return to the family. In many cases private tutors will be found to be indispensable. And of instructors excellently equipped as to scholarship, there will be the less lack, the better the work done by the gymnasia.
335. To the greatest extent possible, education should come back to the family. In many situations, private tutors will be essential. And as for skilled instructors with strong academic backgrounds, there will be less of a shortage, especially if the work done by the gymnasiums is improved.
It must be noted, also, that instead of being the most difficult, the most advanced instruction is the easiest of all, because imparted with the least departure from the way in which it was received. People are therefore[320] mistaken when they assume that private tutors are capable of furnishing an equivalent only for the lowest classes in gymnasia. A far greater difficulty lies in the fact that even the most skilful and active tutor cannot give as many lessons as a school provides, and that accordingly more has to be left to the pupil’s own efforts. To be sure, this is exactly the mode of instruction which suits the bright student better than one that must accommodate itself to the many, and which on that account must progress but slowly.
It should also be noted that instead of being the most challenging, the most advanced instruction is actually the easiest of all because it’s taught with the least deviation from how it was originally learned. People are therefore[320] mistaken when they think that private tutors can only provide equivalent instruction for the lower levels in schools. A much greater challenge is that even the most skilled and energetic tutor can’t give as many lessons as a school offers, so more has to be left to the student’s own efforts. Indeed, this is the kind of instruction that suits bright students better than one that has to cater to the many, which must therefore progress more slowly.
336. But home education presupposes that sound pedagogical views have been arrived at in the home, and that their place is not occupied by absurd whims or half knowledge. (Niemeyer’s famous work, “The Principles of Education and of Instruction,” is intelligible to every educated person, and has been widely known for many years.)
336. But home education assumes that solid teaching methods have been established at home, and that they aren't replaced by silly fancies or superficial understanding. (Niemeyer’s well-known work, “The Principles of Education and of Instruction,” is clear to any educated person and has been widely recognized for many years.)
337. The necessity of sound pedagogical knowledge in the home becomes all the more urgent where teachers, private or public, change frequently—whereby inequalities of instruction and treatment are introduced which need to be corrected.
337. The need for solid teaching knowledge at home becomes even more important when teachers, whether private or public, change often. This leads to inequalities in instruction and treatment that need to be addressed.
CHAPTER II
About Schools
338. The school system and its relations to local authorities, on the one hand, and to the general government, on the other, form a vast and difficult subject involving not merely pedagogical principles, but also such aims as the maintenance of higher learning, the dissemination of useful information, and the practice of indispensable arts. In university lectures a few words on such topics suffice, since young men who accept a school position assume, at the same time, obligations which for a long time to come prescribe for them the path they must follow.
338. The school system and its relationships with local authorities, on one side, and the federal government, on the other, is a broad and complex topic that involves not just educational principles, but also goals like maintaining advanced learning, spreading valuable knowledge, and practicing essential skills. In university lectures, a few remarks on these subjects suffice, since young men who take on teaching roles also take on responsibilities that will dictate the direction they must pursue for a long time.
339. They must, in the first place, consider the character of the school in which they are to instruct. The school programme provides them with information concerning the scope of the curriculum, the established relations of the branches of instruction to one another, and the various stages in each subject. The teachers’ conference affords them an insight into multiplex relations to authorities, parents, and guardians, and to the pupils, also relations leading to coöperation, more or less perfect, on the part of the teachers. The whole of the[322] educational effort directed upon younger, intermediate, and older pupils is presented in one view; it is known also where the pupils come from, with what kind of preparation, and where as a rule they go upon leaving the school.
339. They need to start by considering the type of school where they will be teaching. The school program gives them information about the curriculum's scope, how the different subjects relate to each other, and the various levels within each subject. The teachers' conference provides them with insight into their complex relationships with authorities, parents, guardians, and students, as well as fostering cooperation among the teachers, to varying degrees. The entire educational effort aimed at younger, middle, and older students is laid out clearly; it’s also understood where the students come from, their level of preparation, and where they typically go after leaving the school. [322]
340. It must obviously make a vast difference whether pupils look forward to the university, or whether the gymnasium is filled with boys who do not intend to pursue higher studies; whether a burgher school sets a final examination to mark the stage of general culture to which the school is expected to advance the pupils, or whether the pupils enter and leave without well-defined reasons according to what seems best to their respective families; whether an elementary school is conducted merely as an institution preparing for gymnasia or burgher schools, or whether its course provides for the suitable education, during his whole boyhood, of the future artisan, etc.
340. It clearly makes a huge difference whether students are excited about going to university or if the gymnasium is filled with boys who have no plans for higher education; whether a burgher school has a final exam to assess the level of general knowledge they expect their students to reach, or whether the students come and go without clear purposes based on what seems best for their families; whether an elementary school is simply run as a preparatory institution for gymnasia or burgher schools, or whether its curriculum is designed to provide appropriate education throughout a boy's childhood for his future career as an artisan, etc.
The American school system possesses this great advantage over that of Germany,—it has an educational ladder planted in every elementary school upon which any child from any social class may mount as high as his ambition incites, or his means and ability permit. It is the only suitable system in a democracy, where opportunity should be open to all. Even to obtain greater perfection than the German school system has ever attained, a democratic nation cannot afford to impair its present organization, in so far[323] as it makes advancement possible to every aspiring soul.
The American school system has a significant advantage over Germany's—it features an educational ladder in every elementary school that allows any child from any background to rise as high as their ambition drives them or their resources and abilities allow. It’s the only appropriate system in a democracy, where opportunities should be available to everyone. Even to achieve a level of excellence that surpasses what the German school system has ever reached, a democratic nation cannot afford to compromise its current structure, as it ensures that every ambitious person can progress.
341. In each case the official activity entered upon must adjust itself properly to the whole, the outlines of which are given. These determine the proportion and the subdivision of the store of learning to be kept ready for use, the degree of confidence to be shown to pupils as to knowledge already acquired, and the manner in which they are to be addressed. It is important that the teacher should appear before his class adequately prepared and with confident self-possession, that he should look about attentively at every one and make each pupil feel at once that it would not be easy for him to undertake anything without being noticed.
341. In every case, the official activity must fit into the bigger picture, which is already outlined. These outlines dictate how much knowledge should be available, how to gauge the level of confidence shown to students regarding what they've learned, and how to communicate with them. It's crucial for the teacher to come to class well-prepared and self-assured, to observe all students carefully, and to make sure each one feels that they can't do anything without it being noticed.
342. The questions to be put to the pupils need to be formulated clearly and concisely, and they must follow each other in easy sequence. The answers must be corrected and, when necessary, repeated, in order that all may hear them. No pause should be unduly prolonged; no explanation to the weaker pupil should be allowed to become oppressively tedious to the more advanced. Those who are at work at the moment must be assisted, but ought not to be disturbed by much interrupting talk. The current of thought is to be invited and accelerated in all, but not hurried, etc.
342. The questions for the students should be presented clearly and concisely, and they should follow a logical order. The answers need to be checked and repeated as necessary so that everyone can hear them. No pause should be too long; explanations for struggling students shouldn’t become boring for the more advanced ones. Those who are currently engaged in work should receive help but not be interrupted by excessive talking. We want to encourage and speed up the flow of ideas for everyone but not rush them, etc.
Such requirements instruction will meet with greater or less difficulty, according as classes are small or large and the inequality of pupils great or slight.
Such instructional requirements will encounter more or less difficulty, depending on whether the classes are small or large and the differences among the students are significant or minor.
343. In the assigning of work the capacity of each pupil must be taken into account as much as possible, in order that no one may surrender to ill-humor and discouragement on account of excessive demands, nor any one permit himself carelessly to abuse a task too easy for him.
343. When assigning work, it's important to consider each student's abilities as much as possible, so that no one feels frustrated or discouraged by overly demanding tasks, and so that no one takes advantage of an assignment that's too easy for them.
344. Inequalities of division resulting from rearrangements of classes, or other changes, must be pointed out to the authorities as clearly as possible, for the purpose of urging a more even distribution and a reduction of excessive numbers.
344. We need to clearly highlight any inequalities caused by changes to class structures or other adjustments to the authorities. This is to encourage a fairer distribution and to help reduce overcrowding.
345. In the course of the gradual extension of such efforts many a defect will come to light. It may be found, for instance, that the school is not a whole, because of the lack of a competent teacher for an important subject, or because of marked inequalities of knowledge and culture due to the preparatory schools, or because the school (such as those in small towns) follows the curriculum of a gymnasium while its real aim is supposed to be that of a burgher school, etc.
345. As these efforts gradually expand, various issues will become apparent. For example, it might be discovered that the school isn’t fully complete due to the absence of a qualified teacher for a key subject, or because of significant disparities in knowledge and culture stemming from the preparatory schools, or because a school (like those in small towns) is following a curriculum designed for a gymnasium when its actual purpose is meant to reflect that of a community school, etc.
346. Reports of such single defects will as a rule lead only to correspondingly partial improvements in the system and to relief from the most onerous perplexities, since it is seldom found possible to organize the system of a whole province at once in such a way as to make one harmonious whole.
346. Reports of these individual issues usually result in only limited improvements to the system and relief from the most pressing problems, as it's rare to organize an entire province's system all at once to create a cohesive whole.
347. But in case comprehensive reforms of the school system were undertaken, it would be necessary[325] not merely to tolerate great multiformity, but even to create it purposely. For division of labor is in all human performance the right path to better things; and the preceding discussion must have shown with sufficient clearness how much depends on a more discriminating segregation of pupils.
347. But if comprehensive reforms of the school system were to be implemented, it would be necessary[325] not just to accept significant diversity but even to intentionally create it. After all, the division of labor is essential for improvement in all human activities; and the previous discussion should have clearly shown how much relies on a more thoughtful separation of students.
INDEX
- A, B, C, of Perception, 253.
- Absorption and Reflection, 66.
- Action, clandestine, 315.
- Action and Rest, 156.
- Administrative System, 15.
- Adolescence, and obedience, 161;
- bibliography for, 231.
- Æsthetics, 93.
- Affection, 24.
- Algebra, history of, 255.
- Alertness of mind, superficial, 301.
- American History vs. that of Greece and Rome, 241.
- Analytic instruction, definition, 106;
- Ancient Languages, their use as employment, 98;
- labor of mastering, 103.
- Apperceiving attention, capacity for, 129.
- Application, 67;
- a stage of method, 70.
- Approbation, 151.
- Arguing with children, evils of, 164.
- Arithmetic, with boys, 223–224.
- Arranging of objects, 215.
- Arrested development, 171.
- Art of narration, 76.
- Arts, 251.
- Assistance, gradual withdrawal, 204.
- Association, 67;
- promoted by conversation, 69.
- Athletics, over-valuation of, 169.
- Attention, divided, 63;
- Authority,
53–163;
- delegated, 319.
- Aversion, 24.
- Bad conduct of adults, 187.
- Baldwin, quoted, 168, 195.
- Barrenness of text-book method, 243.
- Barriers to education, 5.
- Bennett and Bristol, “The teaching of Latin and Greek,” 279.
- Bible stories, 234.
- Biblical stories vs. Mythology, 237.
- Boundary between boyhood and adolescence, 217.
- Boyhood, boundary between, and adolescence, 217.
- Brown, George P., 271.
- Capacity for education in children, 33.
- Caprice of will, 1, 3.
- Categorical imperative, not the true source of maxims, 313.
- Censure, 151.
- Character, development of, 64;
- Cheerfulness, social, 211.
- Children, government of, 45–55.
- Childhood, 203–216.
- Child study, 33, 34.
- Choice, content of, 167;
- Choosing, 167.
- Chronology in history, 240.
- Clandestine action, 315.
- Classical vs. scientific education, 85.
- Classification of interests, 83;
- how to provide for, 135.
- Clearness, 67.
- Combats between teacher and pupils, 163.
- Commands, sweeping, 48.
- Committing to memory, 81.
- Communion, 232.
- Comparative study, 89.
- Complication of ideas, 30.
- Composition, true nature of, 123;
- in Latin and Greek, 285.
- Concealed offences, severity for, 316.
- Concert work, 69.
- Conduct, becoming, 137.
- Conferences, teachers’, 339.
- Confirmation, 232.
- Conjunctions, children’s use of, 31.
- Consequences, discipline of, 157.
- Consistency of action, 174.
- Contempt of moral judgment, 312.
- Contention, why it pleases children, 183.
- Continuity of education, 7.
- Contrasts in pupils, 28.
- Control, restlessness under, 305.
- Conversation, 67.
- Corporal punishment, 51.
- Correlation of studies, 65;
- limits of, 219.
- Courage, 296.
- Culture, Dogma of Formal, Hinsdale, 279.
- Cynics, 83.
- Cyrenaics, 83.
- Dates, 247.
- Delegated authority, 319.
- Demonstrations, 256.
- Depression and elevation, 156.
- Desire and passion, 176;
- Determining influence of training, 167.
- Dewey, Dr. John, 38,
63, 73, 150;
- and McLellan, 253.
- Differences, individual and sex, 219.
- Discipline, social basis of, 55;
- of consequence, 157.
- Diffusion of thought, 35.
- Disorder as index of failure, 55.
- Disposition, cheerful, 137.
- Divided attention, 63.
- “Dogma of Formal Culture,” Hinsdale, 279.
- Dörpfeld, 70.
- Drudgery vs. work, 63.
- Duel, 13.
- Dulness, 299.
- Ease of government, 54.
- Easy before the difficult, 127.
- Eckoff, Wm. J., 254.
- Educability of pupils, 1.
- Education according to age, 195–231;
- Education as home task, 333.
- Educational bookkeeping, 50.
- Educative instruction, 59, 100;
- value in fixing curriculum, 100.
- Election, basis of, 65.
- Electives, 89.
- Elevation and depression, 156.
- Employment, the foundation of government, 46;
- for children, 56.
- Endurance, 154.
- English schools, effect on character of boys, 183.[329]
- Environment, influence of, 5, 55;
- of pupils, 94.
- Equilibrium of ideas, 75.
- Equity, definition, 13.
- Erratic mental movements, 302.
- Estrangement and its removal, 66.
- Ethical Basis of Pedagogics, 8–19.
- Ethical judgment, 25.
- Ethical life, range of, 292.
- Ethics, the goal of education, 2.
- Examination vs. review, 117.
- Experience, limits of, 110.
- Explication, 67.
- Expulsion, 52.
- Evil, exclusion of, 149.
- Faculties, 20, 21,
22, 23;
- names for, 27.
- Family, its interest in the individual, 288;
- its lack of vigor, 333.
- Fatalism, 1, 3.
- Fatigue, produced by instruction, 70.
- Favoritism, 184.
- Faults of children and their treatment, 294–329;
- Faust, 83.
- First offences, treatment of, 323.
- Fiske, method of using text-books of history, 247.
- “Five windows of the Soul,” 37.
- Fixation of ideas, premature, 218.
- Formal Culture, Dogma of, Hinsdale, 279.
- Formal steps, 67.
- Frankness, lack of, 26;
- need of, 322.
- Freedom and restraint, 156.
- Friendliness, with children, 211.
- Games, the supervision of, 178;
- coöperative, 178.
- General notions, definition, 30.
- Generalizations, 92.
- Gentle measures, 43.
- Geography, 263–268;
- Geographical aspects of history, 245.
- Geographical vs. historical studies, 293.
- Geometry, advantages of association, 102.
- Good will, definition, 11;
- Golden rule, 148.
- Goldsmith on the moody teacher, 166.
- Government of children, 45–55.
- Grading, 344–345.
- Grammar, amount to be given, 130.
- Greek and Latin, 277–285;
- Greek and Roman history, priority of, 246;
- vs. American history, 246.
- Greek, authors to be used, 283;
- relation of, to religious impressions, 233.
- Groups of ideas, 29.
- Gumplowicz, 5.
- Gymnastic exercises, excessive, 132.
- Harris, Dr. Wm. T., 37, 143.
- Harmony of insight and volition, 9.[330]
- Heavenly bodies, observation of, 259.
- Herbert Spencer, 85, 157.
- Herodotus, stories of, 243.
- Higher education, the comparative study of branches, 89.
- Higher vs. lower schools, 340.
- High school, six-year course in, 103.
- Hinsdale, “Dogma of Formal Culture,” 279.
- History, 239–251;
- Historical instruction, a branch of education, 37.
- Home education, 330–337.
- Home work, not a saving of labor, 123.
- Homogeneity of pupils, 112.
- Honor, standards of, 169;
- a feeling of, 223.
- Humaniora vs. realia, 99.
- Ideas, groups of, 29;
- “Iliad” and “Odyssey,” 283.
- Imaginary and complex numbers, 256.
- Imagination, 22.
- Incapacity, feeling of, in children, 216.
- Inclinations vs. principles, 193.
- Individuality, modification of, 41;
- differences of, 54.
- Individual traits, permanency of, 295.
- Indolence of youth, 227.
- Inequalities, correction of, 60.
- Infancy, 195–202.
- Inherent faults, 294.
- Inner freedom, aspects of, 187.
- Instability of ideas, 301.
- Instruction, 56–135;
- Insertion vs. continuation, 129.
- Insight, definition, 8;
- harmony of with volition, 9.
- Intercourse, social, 78.
- Interest, conditions of, 71–82;
- Inventions, 251.
- Irritability, 297.
- Lange’s “Apperception,” 74.
- Language lessons vs. grammar, 271.
- Languages, difficulties of, 129.[331]
- Larned, method of using text-books, 247.
- Latin and Greek, 277–285;
- Latin, increase in study of, 278;
- Letter writing, 276.
- Listlessness, 158.
- Literary masterpieces, study of, 76.
- Logarithms, 254.
- Love, 53.
- Magnitudes in mathematics, 252.
- Main kinds of interest, 83–94;
- Manly games, effects of on boys, 183.
- Manual training, 259;
- effect of on discipline, 56.
- Many-sidedness,
66–70;
- of interest, 62.
- Materials of instruction, 95–104.
- Mathematics, 252–257;
- Mathematical teaching, order of, 255.
- Maxims, origin of, 310.
- McLellan and Dewey, 253.
- McMurray, 74.
- Measuring, 253.
- Mediæval history, 249.
- Memorizing, 81, 108.
- Memory of will, 161.
- Mental faculties, names for, 27.
- Mental instability, 301.
- Mephistopheles, 83.
- Method, 67.
- Mob spirit, the, 168.
- Mobility of ideas, 35.
- Modern history, 250.
- Modern languages, arguments for their study, 98.
- Modern methods of using text-books in history, 247.
- Money, teaching the use of, 170.
- Moodiness in the teacher, 166.
- Moods and whims, 147.
- Moral eccentricity, 307.
- Moral freedom, possibility of, 173.
- Moral education in strict sense, 188.
- Moral judgment, contempt of, 312.
- Moral revelation of the world, 167.
- Morality, demand of upon youth, 231.
- Mother-tongue, the, 269.
- Motives of youth, 229.
- Musical instruments, study of, 179.
- Narration, art of, 76;
- Natorp, 143.
- Natural science, 258–262.
- Nature study, 258–262;
- Niemeyer, 112, 113.
- Obedience, 48;
- Object lessons, how to teach, 114–116.
- Observation, of children, 33, 34;
- Occupations, 47, 98;
- self-chosen, 134.
- “Odyssey,” 283.
- Offences, concealed, 316.
- One-sidedness, 86.
- Order, restoration of, 324.
- Organization of pupil’s ideas, 31, 32;
- Outlines of general pedagogics, 45–231.[332]
- Outside occupations, 134.
- Overburdening of pupils, 97, 226.
- Pampering, 45.
- Passions, 180, 181;
- Paulsen, 3, 73.
- “Pedagogical Seminary,” 178.
- Pedagogics, ethical basis of, 8–19;
- Perez, 195.
- Perfection, idea of, definition, 10;
- Perfice te, 17.
- Pestalozzi, 112, 114.
- Physical activity, need of, 46.
- Physical weakness, consideration for, 159.
- Physics, elementary, 261.
- Plan of instruction, 131–135.
- Play, love of, 295.
- Playground, need for, 132.
- Plasticity, limited, 4.
- Pleasure and pain, sources of, 168.
- Praise and censure, 189–190.
- Premature fixation of ideas, 218.
- Preparation, 70.
- Presentation, 70, 119.
- Presentative instruction, its present function, 109.
- Presentative method, meaning of, 106.
- Preyer, 195.
- Primacy of ideas, 73, 143;
- Principles vs. inclinations, 193.
- Private vs. public schools, 334.
- Process of instruction, 105–130.
- Proficiency in knowledge a late acquirement, 127.
- Prudence, 145.
- Psychological basis of pedagogics, 8–19.
- Psychology as instrument, 2.
- “Psychology of Number,” 253.
- Public opinion, respect for, 306.
- Public vs. private schools, 334.
- Punishment, 51–53.
- Pupil’s interest, how to measure and secure it, 101.
- Quality vs. quantity, in securing interest, 101.
- Questions, childish, 213;
- character of, 342.
- Quietude of mind, 176.
- Rationality, growth of, 296.
- Reading, 273–275.
- Realia, advantage of, 101.
- Recitations, number per week, 133.
- Records, of conduct, 50.
- Recreations, 132.
- Reflection and absorption, 66.
- Reform, school, 103.
- Regulative principles, establishment of, 173.
- Regulative training, 172.
- Religion, 232–238.
- Religious culture with boys, 222.
- Religious feeling, beginnings of, 236.
- Religious instruction, 94;
- in England, Germany, and the United States, 181.
- Religious training, need of, 19.
- Reminders, 192.
- Repetition, what it accomplishes, 118.
- Reproduction, 109.
- Rest and action, 156.
- Restlessness, 297;
- under control, 305.
- Restraint, 55;
- and freedom, 186.
- Revelation of the world, moral, 167.
- Reviews, conduct of, 117.[333]
- Rigidity of mind, 300.
- Rosenkranz, 66.
- “Rousing word,” the, 175.
- Rudeness vs. instruction, 35.
- Russell, “German Higher Schools,” 279.
- Savings banks, 170.
- “School and Society,” Dr. John Dewey, 38.
- School hygiene, literature of, 132.
- Schoolrooms, need for spacious, 132.
- Schools, organization of, 338–347.
- School system, 338.
- Scientific instruction, a branch of education, 37.
- Scientific vs. classical education, 85.
- Seclusion vs. society, 168.
- Secondary education in United States, its brevity, 103.
- Self-activity, 71.
- Self-defence, 183.
- Self-determination, 26.
- Sensibility, kindness of, 152.
- Sensual impulses, 298.
- Sequence, common view, 96;
- of studies, 128.
- Series of ideas, 121.
- Severity for concealed offences, 316.
- Simulation of ethical judgments, 317.
- Sin, 338.
- Six-year high school course, 103.
- Skill vs. interest, 289.
- Sluggishness of pupils, 165.
- Smith, David Eugene, 255, 256.
- Social cheerfulness, 211.
- Social circle, relation of child to, 208.
- Social ends of training, 160.
- Social environment of pupils, 94.
- Social faults, correction for, 327.
- Social intercourse, 78.
- Social pressure in government, 161.
- Social relations the source of will, 318.
- Social, the, in conduct, 62.
- Society vs. seclusion, 168.
- Source of ideas, 36.
- Special applications of pedagogics, 232–293;
- Speer, 253.
- Spencer, Herbert, 85, 157.
- Spinoza, 3.
- Spy, the teacher as, 317.
- Standards of honor, 169.
- State, its attitude toward the individual, 331.
- Strife, 182.
- Structure of groups of ideas, 31.
- Studies, social function of, 62;
- Study of literary masterpieces, 76.
- Style of speaking, 108.
- Subjects to be taught, 100.
- Supervision, 48;
- Sweetmeats, educational, 99.
- Syntax, Latin, 284.
- Synthetic instruction, definition, 106;
- System, 67;
- Tardiness, 161.
- Teacher as spy, 317.
- Teachers’ conferences, 339.
- Temperaments, 295.
- Temper, violent, 298.
- Tests by the state, 332.[334]
- Text-book methods, barrenness of, 243.
- Text-book vs. oral presentation of history, 239.
- Themes for composition, 124.
- The mob spirit, 168.
- The mother-tongue, 269–276.
- Thoughtlessness of pupils, 164.
- Time, amount to be given to instruction, 132.
- Training, 136–194;
- Transfer of pupils, 52.
- Translation, difficulty of, for German children, 103.
- Trigonometry, 254.
- Tutors, place of, 335.
LECTURES ON TEACHING
Teaching Workshops
DELIVERED IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE
DELIVERED AT THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE
By J. G. FITCH, M.A.
By J.G. Fitch, M.A.
WITH AN INTRODUCTORY PREFACE BY
WITH A FOREWORD BY
THOMAS HUNTER, Ph.D., President of the Normal College, New York
THOMAS HUNTER, Ph.D., President of Normal College, New York
16mo. Cloth. $1.00
16mo. Cloth. $1.00
“This is eminently the work of a man of wisdom and experience. He takes a broad and comprehensive view of the work of the teacher, and his suggestions on all topics are worthy of the most careful consideration.”—New England Journal of Education.
“This is undoubtedly the work of a wise and experienced individual. He offers a wide-ranging and thorough perspective on the role of the teacher, and his suggestions on all subjects deserve the most thoughtful attention.”—New England Journal of Education.
“The lectures will be found most interesting, and deserve to be carefully studied, not only by persons directly concerned with instruction, but by parents who wish to be able to exercise an intelligent judgment in the choice of schools and teachers for their children. For ourselves, we could almost wish to be of school age again, to learn history and geography from some one who could teach them after the pattern set by Mr. Fitch to his audience. But perhaps Mr. Fitch’s observations on the general conditions of school work are even more important than what he says on this or that branch of study.”—Saturday Review.
“The lectures are really engaging and should be thoroughly studied, not just by those involved in teaching, but also by parents who want to make informed decisions about choosing schools and teachers for their kids. Honestly, we almost wish we could go back to school to learn history and geography from someone who teaches like Mr. Fitch does. But maybe Mr. Fitch’s insights on the overall conditions of school work are even more significant than his discussions on specific subjects.” —Saturday Review.
NOTES ON AMERICAN SCHOOLS AND TRAINING COLLEGES
NOTES ON AMERICAN SCHOOLS AND TRAINING COLLEGES
BY THE SAME AUTHOR
BY THE SAME AUTHOR
16mo. Cloth. 60 cents
16mo. Cloth. 60¢
“Mr. Fitch is a wise and enthusiastic student of pedagogy, the author of some specially excellent Lectures on Teaching delivered in the University of Cambridge, and a rarely good observer of new facts.... The book is a treasure of clever description, shrewd comment, and instructive comparison of the English system and our own.”—The Churchman.
“Mr. Fitch is a knowledgeable and passionate student of teaching methods, the author of some outstanding Lectures on Teaching given at the University of Cambridge, and a remarkably good observer of new facts.... The book is a gem of insightful description, astute commentary, and informative comparison between the English system and our own.”—The Churchman.
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
66 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
66 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK
RECENT BOOKS ON EDUCATION
NEW BOOKS ON EDUCATION
The Meaning of Education
The Purpose of Education
And Other Essays and Addresses. By Nicholas Murray Butler, Columbia University. Cloth. 12mo. $1.00.
And Other Essays and Speeches. By Nicholas Murray Butler, Columbia University. Cloth. 12mo. $1.00.
Social Phases of Education in the School and the Home
Social Phases of Education in the School and the Home
By Samuel T. Dutton, Superintendent of Schools, Brookline, Mass. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
By Samuel T. Dutton, Superintendent of Schools, Brookline, Mass. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
Education of the Central Nervous System
Education of the Central Nervous System
A Study of Foundations, especially of Sensory and Motor Training. By Reuben Post Halleck, Author of “Psychology and Psychic Culture.” 12mo. Cloth. $1.00.
A Study of Foundations, particularly of Sensory and Motor Training. By Reuben Post Halleck, Author of “Psychology and Psychic Culture.” 12 months. Cloth. $1.00.
“He has succeeded admirably in presenting the subject in a simple, clear, logical way. It is just the book, it seems to me, for the reading of all persons interested in ‘Child Study.’”—Francis W. Parker, Chicago Normal School.
“He has done an excellent job of presenting the topic in a straightforward, clear, and logical manner. This seems to be the perfect book for anyone interested in 'Child Study.'”—Francis W. Parker, Chicago Normal School.
Educational Aims and Educational Values
Learning Goals and Educational Values
By Paul H. Hanus, of Harvard University. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
By Paul H. Hanus, from Harvard University. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
“A very readable book.... His insight into educational problems is good, his experience wide, and his power of expression admirable.”—Myron T. S. Scudder in The Educational Review.
“A very readable book.... His insight into educational issues is strong, his experience extensive, and his ability to express ideas is impressive.”—Myron T.S. Scudder in The Educational Review.
The Development of the Child
Child Development
By Nathan Oppenheim, M.D., Attending Physician to the Children’s Department, Mt. Sinai Hospital Dispensary. Cloth. $1.25.
By Nathan Oppenheim, M.D., Physician in Charge of the Children's Department, Mt. Sinai Hospital Dispensary. Fabric. $1.25.
“Interesting and suggestive.”—The Tribune, New York.
“Interesting and thought-provoking.”—The Tribune, New York.
The Physical Nature of the Child and How to Study It
The Physical Nature of the Child and How to Study It
By Stuart H. Rowe, Ph.D., New Haven, formerly Professor of Pedagogy and Director of Practice in the State Normal School, Mankato, Minn. Cloth. 12mo. $1.00.
By Stuart H. Rowe, Ph.D., New Haven, previously a Professor of Education and Director of Practice at the State Normal School, Mankato, Minn. Hardcover. 12mo. $1.00.
“The average school-teacher could read no better work on school hygiene.”—C. H. Thurber in The School Review.
“The average school teacher couldn't find a better resource on school hygiene.” —C.H. Thurber in The School Review.
The Teaching and Study of Elementary Mathematics
The Teaching and Study of Elementary Mathematics
By David Eugene Smith, Ph.D., Principal of the State Normal School at Brockport, New York. Cloth. 12mo. $1.00.
By David Eugene Smith, Ph.D., Principal of the State Normal School at Brockport, New York. Cloth. 12mo. $1.00.
The first issue in a series to be known as The Teacher’s Professional Library, edited by Nicholas Murray Butler, Professor of Philosophy and Education in Columbia University.
The first issue in a series called The Teacher’s Professional Library, edited by Nicholas Murray Butler, Professor of Philosophy and Education at Columbia University.
The Study of Children and Their School Training
The Study of Children and Their School Training
By Dr. Francis Warner, Author of “The Growth and Means for Training of the Mental Faculty.” Cloth. 16mo. $1.00.
By Dr. Fran Warner, Author of “The Growth and Means for Training of the Mental Faculty.” Cloth. 16mo. $1.00.
The Nervous System of the Child
The Nervous System of the Child
Its Growth and Health in Education. A handbook for teachers. By the same author.
Its Growth and Well-Being in Education. A guide for teachers. By the same author.
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
66 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
66 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK
Recent Books on Philosophy, Etc.
Recent Philosophy Books, etc.
The Making of Character
Character Development
Some Educational Aspects of Ethics. By John MacCunn, of University College, Liverpool. Cambridge Series. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
Some Educational Aspects of Ethics. By John MacCunn, from University College, Liverpool. Cambridge Series. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
The subject is divided into four general parts: Congenital Endowment, Educative Influences, Sound Judgment, and Self-development and Self-control. Each of these parts contains several chapters dealing with the various phases of character-building and its influence upon education. Teachers will find much that is new and stimulating in these pages.
The subject is divided into four main parts: Genetic Factors, Educational Influences, Good Judgment, and Personal Growth and Self-Discipline. Each of these parts includes several chapters that explore different aspects of character development and how it affects education. Teachers will discover plenty of new and exciting insights in these pages.
The World and the Individual
The World and the Person
Gifford Lectures delivered before the University of Aberdeen. First Series. The Four Historical Conceptions of Being. By Josiah Royce, Ph.D., of Harvard University. Cloth. 8vo. $3.00.
Gifford Lectures given at the University of Aberdeen. First Series. The Four Historical Concepts of Being. By Josiah Royce, Ph.D., from Harvard University. Cloth. 8vo. $3.00.
A Brief Introduction to Modern Philosophy
A Short Introduction to Modern Philosophy
By Arthur Kenyon Rogers, Ph.D. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
By Arthur Kenyon Rogers, Ph.D. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
Methods of Knowledge
Ways of Knowing
An Essay in Epistemology. By Walter Smith, of Lake Forest University. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
An Essay in Epistemology. By Walter Smith, of Lake Forest University. Cloth. 12mo. $1.25.
A definition of knowledge and theory of the method by which knowledge may be attained.
A definition of knowledge and a theory of the method for acquiring knowledge.
An Outline of Philosophy
A Philosophy Overview
With Notes Historical and Critical. By John Watson, of Queen’s University, Kingston, Canada. Second Edition. Cloth. 8vo. $2.25.
With Historical and Critical Notes. By John Watson, of Queen’s University, Kingston, Canada. Second Edition. Cloth. 8vo. $2.25.
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
66 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
66 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK
Transcriber’s Notes
Transcription Notes
Some page numbers do not appear due to removed blank pages.
Some page numbers are missing because blank pages have been removed.
All punctuation errors were corrected.
All punctuation errors were fixed.
Inconsistent hyphenation was retained.
Inconsistent hyphenation was retained.
In Contents, the following changes were done to match chapter titles in the text:
In the Contents, the following updates were made to align chapter titles with the text:
- “of” after “Conditions” was deleted.
- “Material” was changed from “Materials”.
- “The” was inserted before “Relation”.
In paragraph 36, “one-sidedness” was changed from “one-sideness”.
In paragraph 36, “one-sidedness” was updated from “one-sideness”.
In paragraph 38, “counteracting” was changed from “counter: acting”.
In paragraph 38, “counteracting” was updated from “counter: acting”.
In paragraph 70, alternate spelling of annotator’s surname as “DeGarmo” was retained.
In paragraph 70, the alternate spelling of the annotator's surname as "DeGarmo" was kept.
In the Index,
In the index,
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!